SY31 0502 0_3742_Dual_Display_Station_Theory Maintenance_May77 0 3742 Dual Display Station Theory Maintenance May77
SY31-0502-0_3742_Dual_Display_Station_Theory-Maintenance_May77 SY31-0502-0_3742_Dual_Display_Station_Theory-Maintenance_May77
User Manual: SY31-0502-0_3742_Dual_Display_Station_Theory-Maintenance_May77
Open the PDF directly: View PDF 
.
Page Count: 461
| Download | |
| Open PDF In Browser | View PDF |
---
---
---------_.
====-~ ---
Maintenance Library
---- - ------.--- - -____
.-.
.--..a
....-..
-~-----.-.
~-
-..
¥
-~-
.-
= - Dual Data Station
Theory-Maintenance
SY31·0502-0
0-2
PREFACE
This is the only manual you need to maintain the
IBM 3742 Dual Data Station. The manual contains
theory, operation proced u res, MAPs, and removereplace-and-adjust procedures. It also contains
part numbers for the field replaceable units (FRUs).
All the information is in an easy-to-use graphic
format.
Disk Drive 2
Display
Power Switch
Keyboard 1
Disk Drive 1
\
The starting point for each cal I is on page 1-1. Page
1-1 directs you to the Symptom Index. The
Symtom Index in turn, based on the symptom,
directs you to a MAP section. If the MAP does not
lead you to the cause of the trouble, go back to
the Symptom Index to look for another MAP. If
if symptom changes during machine warmup, use
the last symptom to start the call. If there are no
specific symptoms to guide you, use the Machine
Checkout procedure.
Each MAP section contains step-by-step procedures
to locate the failing part, and the remove-replaceand-adjust procedures to correct machine malfunction.
IBM 3742 Dual Data Station
Look through the manual to see how it is organized and the information it contains.
MAP Rules Summary
First Edition (May 1977)
This publication replaces and obsoletes the part-numbered manual previously used with
the 3742. A checkout procedure of the phototransistor in the diskette drive has been
added to MAP 2-8. Changes concerning the file control card and several minor changes
were also made throughout the manual.
Changes are periodically made to the information herein; any such change will be
reported in subsequent revisions or technical newsletters.
Start of Call (page 1-') insures that the highest
priority symptom index group is used.
Use the most consistent symptom after power
on. Use the last error code to be displayed.
MAPs are designed to locate an F R U that has
a single mechnical or electrical failure. If the
symptom changes after an adjustment or
F R U replacement, use Start of Call with the
new symptom.
If you cannot decide which MAP to use, see
Machine Checkout (page 7-1 .1) to gu ide you
to the right MAP.
When asked to probe or measure multiple
points in a table, probe or measure only until
a failure is indicated.
The probe UP and DOWN lights will
momentarily flash on during power on if the
probe is connected to its machine power source
please ignore.
A Reader's Comment Form is at the back of this publication. If the form is gone.
address your comments to IBM Corporation. Publications. Department 245. Rochester.
Minnesota 55901_
Definitions:
1.
Load a diskette-Close the disk drive
cover (with a diskette in the drive).
Usually at the faulty station.
(QCopvright International Business Machines Corporation 1973.1974,1975,1977
2.
Measure-Use IBM CE multi meter, PIN
452796.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
B.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
Original keyboard or disk drive-The
keyboard or disk drive located at the
station with reported fault.
Other keyboard or disk drive-Opposite
of the original keyboard or disk drive.
Power down-Turn power switch 0 F F.
Power up-Turn power switch ON. Always
wait at least 5 seconds after a power down
before powering up to allow for proper
power on reset (POR).
Probe-Use IBM Universal Logic Probe,
PIN 453212.
Remove a diskette-Take the disktte out
of the disk drive.
Unload a diskette-Open the disk drive
cover (does not mean remove).
Disconnect-Physically/electrically take
apart.
Reconnect-Physically/electrically put back
together.
Reinstall-Put the original part back in place
of the new part.
Replace-Put the new part back in place of
of the original part.
See How to Use This Manual (page 10-5) for other
information.
Safety
CRT SAFETY
To ensure personal safety and the safety of coworkers, each CE should make it a practice to
observe safety precautions at all times. The CE
Safety Practice card is reproduced below for
your reference.
You must be especially aware of the dangerous
voltage present in a 3742 and the potential
hazard presented by an unprotected cathode ray
tube (CRT). Thus, the following DANGER notice
appears here.
DANGER
Voltages of 12,000,400, +12 and -12 in the
3742. Be careful when working in the area of
the high voltage power supply and CRTs. Do
not remove the high voltage lead from the CRT
following power off until the high voltage lead
and anode have been grounded.
CE SAFETY PRACTICES
All Customer Engineers are expected to take every safety pre·
caution possible and observe the following safety practices
while maintaining IBM equipment:
1. You should not work alone under hazardous conditions or
around equipment with dangerous voltage. Always advise
your manager if you MUST work alone.
2. Remove all power AC and DC when removing or assem·
bling maior components, working in immediate area of
power supplies, performing mechanical inspection of power
supplies and installing changes in machine circuitry.
3. Wall box power switch when turned off should be locked
or tagged in off position. "Do not Operate" tags, form
229·1266, affixed when applicable. Pull power supply cord
whenever possible.
4. When it is absolutely necessary to work on equipment hav·
ing exposed operating mechanical parts or exposed live
electrical circuitry anywhere in the machine, the following
precautions must be followed:
a. Another person familiar with power off controls must
be in immediate vicinity.
b. Rings, wrist watches, chains, bracelets, metal cuff links,
sholl not be worn.
c. Only insulated pliers and screwdrivers shall be used.
d. Keep one hand in pocket.
e. When using test instruments be certain controls are set
correctly and proper capacity, insulated probes are used.
f. Avoid contacting ground potential (metal floor strips,
machine frames, etc. - use suitable rubber mots pur·
chased locally if necessary).
5. Safety Glosses must be worn when:
a. Using a hammer to drive pins, riveting, staking, etc.
b. Power hand drilling, reaming, grinding, etc.
c. Using spring hooks, attaching springs.
d. Soldering, wire cutting, removing steel bands,
e. Parts cleaning, using solvents, sprays, cleaners, chemicals,
etc.
f. All other conditions that may be hazardous to your
eyes. REMEMBER, THEY ARE YOUR EYES.
6. Special safety instructions such as handling Cathode Ray
Tubes and extreme high voltages, must be followed as
outlined in CEM's and Safety Section of the Maintenance
Manuals.
7. Do not use solvents, chemicals, greases or oils that have
not been approved by IBM.
8. Avoid using tools or test equipment thot have not been
approved by IBM.
9. Replace worn or broken tools and test equipment.
10. The maximum load to be lifted is that which in. the opinion
of yOu and management does not jeopaldize your own health
or well-being or that of other employees.
1 I. All safety devices such as guards, shields, signs, ground
wires, etc. shall be restored after maintenance.
KNOWING SAFETY RULES IS NOT ENOUGH
AN UNSAFE ACT WILL INEVITABLY LEAD TO AN ACCIDENT
USE GOOD JUDGMENT - ELIMINATE UNSAFE ACTS
11171 S229·1264-2
12. Each Customer Engineer is responsible to be certain that
no action on his part renders product unsafe or exposes
hazards to customer personnel.
13. Place removed machine covers in a safe out-of-the-way
place where no one can trip over them.
14. All machine covers must be in place before machine is returned to customer.
1S. Always place CE tool kit away from walk areas where n,
one can trip over it (i.e., under desk or table).
16. Avoid touching mechanical moving parts (i.e., when lubricating, checking for play, etc.).
17. When using stroboscope - do not touch ANYTHING - it
may be moving.
18. Avoid wearing loose clothing that may be caught in machir
ery. Shirt sleeves must be left buttoned or rolled above the
elbow.
19. Ties must be tucked in sh irt or have a tie clasp (preferably
nonconductive) approximately 3 inches from end. Tie chains
are not recommended.
20. Before starting equipment, make certain fellow CE's ond
customer personnel ore not in a hazardous position.
21. Maintain good housekeeping in orea of machines while per·
forming and after completing maintenance.
All CEs should become familiar with the general
safety practices and procedures for performing
artificial respiration that are outlined in CE
Safety Practices (form 229-1264). In addition,
each CE should review general safety CEM #45
on CRT safety.
Cathode ray tubes contain a high vacuum and are
subject to implosion. Such an implosion can
propel flying glass, thus presenting a source of
personal injury. Therefore, when handling CRTs,
be careful.
Transportation Handling
S1!.
m ...
1.
Q
=
::!'.
0~
>
o
Z
11\
<
n'"::ID
::". CD
3
o
~
C
:I 41
:::t:~
··41
.. 0
CI'''
on :I:.
~IO
30'
3 ..
ID >
11. a..
a~
ID ..
-<
Tubes must be kept in the carton or unit
except when exposure is required for
inspection or test.
2.
Adequate storage area must be provided for
all CRTs. Tubes should be stacked in such
a manner that they cannot easily be tipped
over and will not be a problem to handle
when removed from the stack. It is recommended that the storage area be away from
the normal flow of internal trucking and
pedestrian traffic.
Testing
Personnel who test CRTs must be instructed in the
dangers and precautions to be observed.
Protective Equipment
lit
;II:J
1.
Cathode Ray Tubes - Safe Handling
n
o~
Z
Storage
2.
Persons handling or working with or near unprotected CRTs must wear safety glasses.
Defective CRT Disposition
No attempt should be made to repair defective
CRTs in the field. A defective CRT should be
properly packed and disposed of in accordance
with CRT disposition procedures.
Cathode ray tubes must be enclosed when
received, transported, or otherwise moved
from area to area. If they are shipped in a
carton, they must be in the original carton
or one of equivalent strength and securely
sealed to prevent accidental opening. Also,
original or equivalent packing materials
and/or forms must be placed inside the
carton to properly support and protect the
tube. If tubes are transported in a unit or
piece of equipment, the equipment must be
able to contai~ the glass fragments if an
implosion occurs.
Each CRT carton must be identified with
a DANGER Cathode Ray Tube Implosion
HAZARD label.
3.
All persons handling tubes or in the vicinity
of exposed CRTs under vacuum must wear
safety glasses.
3742 ML
0-3
0-4
NORMAL SERVICE FLOW IN USE OF THE MLM
r----- Customer Reported Problem
r
Branch Office Specialist
~--~----~----
1. Start of Ca II
Symptom Index
Error Codes
Display
Keyboard
Miscellaneous
:L __________
No Symptom J"'--r--t~
•
MAP Section
2. Disk
3. Display
4. Keyboard
5. MPU-Features
6. Power
B~i~ Ch;k;ut-
Service Sections
200 Disk
300 Display
400 Keyboard
500 MPU-Features
600 Power
700 Basic Checkout
--r
8. Diagnostic Aids
9. Operating Procedures
I
I
Part Numbers
I R Codes
Test Points
Remove/Replace
Adjustments
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
....--OR
•
,
Theory Sections
10. Introduction
11. Disk
12. Display
13. Keyboard
14. MPU-Feature
15. Power
CE - when MAPs fail
Branch Office Specialist
!----OR
Region-designated Special ist
16.
17.
18.
31.
....
I
Installation Procedures
Glossary
Index
RPQ's
Parts Catalog
~--------~------~
-
OR
For 128 Feature:
Either cursor may be in a different
position than shown or may be missing
from the display.
START OF CALL
Is there an RPQ Special Feature installed? - - - - - Y
N
o
0
Is there an error code displayed or reported?
Y
N
Power down.
Remove all diskettes.
Power up and wait for the machine
to warm up. (See Note 1.)
Can you see the failure on the display before
a diskette is loaded or a key is pressed?
Note 1: - 128 Featured Machine Only
Ignore displayed information until
30 seconds after power up. (The
internal diagnostics take longer
than warmup of the CRT.)
A check mark in the Y or N box
indicates the MAP path to follow.
If neither box is check marked,
determine if an RPO is installed by
looking at the machine history card
and for an RPO Section 31 in this M L.
Check mark the appropriate Y, N box
and continue down that MAP path.
a
a
Y
N
- Load a diskette at the failing station.
Can you see the failure on the display of the
failing station before pressing a key?
Y
N
Is the reported failure a result of a keying operation?
Error Code?
Y
N
(use last one)
Do you have any other symptom?
Y
N
Error Code?
Y N
(use last one)
- Use Machine Checkout MAP 7-1.
Y
N
After Power Up
No Diskette Loaded
Display:
Normal
Viewer:
Removed
Brightness
Control:
Normal
eeeee
HX
e
iii
e
I
eeeee
I
31-1
II
Two Diskettes Loaded
Display:
Normal
Viewer:
Removed
Brightness
Control:
Normat
Sl X
d~ot~
o
AA
80000
r00tO 080
to
ATAQ tstQ}i
/
~oete
. Either data set labels
may have different
/orma~ePt cursorl
GlGG2
RD~l D~l~
01
e
~
~
9Q9 Gleel
eeeeg
~2GSP
X~
MACHINE CHECKOUT
•
OPERATING PROCEDURES
KEYBOARD THEORY
MPU-FEATURE THEORY
POWER THEORY
•
INSTALLATION PROCEDURES
RPOs
Parts Catalog
5131-0585
3742 ML
1-1
1-2
SYMPTOM INDEX
ERROR CODE DESCRIPTION
Code
Display Position
7
8
9
10
A
Diagnostic
MAP
Description
Cause
Operating Procedure
2-1
Data set non-accessible
- The data set accessibility code field in the data set label or in the
-
Remove the disk.
1. The last record read and currently displayed is from track 00,
records 01 through 07.
-
Press RESET and RECADV.
2. Position 4 of the header field in the data set label doesn't
contain a 1.
-
Press RESET and enter a 1 in position 04, press FUNCT SEL
lower, M, and REC ADV.
3. The data set label is flagged with a control address mark
(such as is required for a deleted record).
-
Enter H in position 1, press F UNCT SE L, M, and R EC ADV.
BOE is less than track 01, record 01.
-
Press RESET and enter the correct BOE, press FUNCT SEL
lower, M, and REC ADV.
- EOE is greater than track 74, record 26.
-
Press RESET and enter the correct EOE, press FUNCT SEL
lower, M, and REC ADV.
- EOE is less than BOE. EOE and/or BOE are im,orrect.
- Press RESET and enter the correct entry(s), press FUNCT SEL
volume label has a non-blank character.
B
2-1
Bad data set label
- One of the following conditions existed when you tried to select
a mode from track 00:
-
lower, M, and REC ADV.
-
BOE, EOE, or EOD is zero.
-
Press RESET and enter the correct entry(s), press FUNCT SEL
lower, M, and REC ADV.
-
EOD is less than BOE. EOD and/or BOE are incorrect.
-
Press RESET and enter the correct entry(s), press FUNCT SEL
lower, M, and REC ADV.
- BOE, EOE, or EOD record is greater than 26.
-
Press RESET and enter the correct entry(s), press FUNCT SEL
lower, M, and REC ADV.
-
EOO is greater than EOE + 1.
-
Press RESET and enter the correct EOD, press FUNCT SEL
lower, M, and REC ADV.
-
EOD is greater than track 75, record 01.
-
Press RESET and enter the correct EOD, press FUNCT SEL
lower, M, and REC ADV.
-
Record length (positions 23 through 27) is not 80
for basic machine: or, record length is 00 or greater
than 128 for 128 record length featured machine.
- Press RESET and enter Ii L6 080 in positions 23 through 27,
-
Non-numeric characters are in positions where numeric
characters are required in the data set.
(or L6 kS 001 thru ~ ~ 128 for 128 record length featured
machine) press FUNCT SEL lower, M, and REC ADV.
- Press RESET- and rekey, press FUNCT SEL lower, M, and
REC ADV.
-
Head specification is not zero.
- Press RESET and rekey head 0, press FUNCT SEL lower,
M, and REC ADV.
C
0
4-2
2-6
Self-check
Disk 2 not ready
- The self-check digit doesn't compare properly.
-
Press RESET, field backspace, and rekey the field.
-
-
Press RESET and insert the self-check digit.
-
Press RESET. Wait until disk 2 is ready, then continue
processing. If the copy feature is not installed, use a
machine which has disk copy feature.
The self-check field is blank in verify (V) mode.
- A disk 2 'record advance was attempted with one of the
following conditions existing:
-
Copy feature is not installed.
-
Disk 2 is not ready.
0
0
2-6
Disk removed
- Load a diskette. Hold down NUM SHIFT and
- Disk was removed when waiting for a disk error to be cleared
press RESET.
on record insertion mode. The EOD in the data set label is not
updated. Duplicate records may exist in the data set. The hold
buffer is not blanked. On the 3742 with the 128 feature and
using station lockout, program levels 7, 8, 9, 10 are fi lied with N' s.
0
5
2-4
Write error
- The record at the currently displayed disk address was written
-
Press RESET.
-
Press RESET and continue the job on another data set or disk.
-
Press RESET and change EOE in the disk 1 data set label.
Press RESET and continue.
in error. The record was one of the deleted records being
inserted.
E
2-2
End of extent
- Attempting to read from disk 2 beyond the last record in the
data set when using the copy feature.
- Attempting to write to disk 1 beyond end of extent (EOE).
F
4-2
Function not available
-
The last non-deleted record is verified. (Th is is not an error.)
-
-
The key pressed after FUNCT SEL is not valid.
- Press RESET and press the valid key.
- The selected function is not installed.
- Move the job to another machine where the function is
installed.
G
H
4-2
4-2
Write protect
Copy setup
-
The key pressed following FUNCT SEL lower and M key is not
REC ADV or DELETE.
-
Press RESET and R EC ADV to write the label on the disk
or press DE LETE to delete the label.
-
Selected CE mode with a disk in other station.
- Press RESET. Remove disk from other station.
-
Enter (E) or verify (V) mode is selected and the data set is
protected.
-
Press RESET and select update mode.
-
Attempted to write to the disk with the data set protected.
-
Press RESET and either change the label or press R EC ADV
to advance to a proper label.
-
At EOD-1 of a data set in update (U) mode, and using REC
ADV when the data set is protected.
-
Press RESET and either change the data set label or use a
different data set.
- After pressing COPY:
- The disk 2 address is less than track 00, record 08.
- Press RESET and advance to the proper disk 2 address.
- When disk 2 is inserted, you must press DISK 2 REC ADV
- Press RESET and press DISK 2 REC ADV.
to display the first data set label (00008). This error occurs
then if you do not press DISK 2 REC ADV to display a
data set label prior to copy setup.
- COpy was not pressed in conjunction with any shift key.
- Press RESET and ALPHA SHIFT or NUM SHIFT in conjunc-
- Disk 1 is on track 00 but disk 2 isn't on track 00.
-
- SEARCH SEQ CONTENT was pressed in copy setup.
- Press RESET and press the correct key.
tion with COPY.
I
4-2
Search address
-
The search address contains a non-decimal character.
-
Press RESET and press DISK 2 RET TO INDEX.
Press RESET. Use a val id search address.
- The search address is not valid.
- The search address is not within the extents of the data set.
3742 ML
II
1-3
1-4
ERROR CODE DESCRIPTION
Code
Display Position
7
8
9
10
I
Diagnostic
MAP
Description
Cause
4-2
#of records
-
Number of records specified not 01-99 (00 or 1 digit
gives I error or above 99 reads first two columns only).
- Insufficient room in data set to insert the number of
Operating Procedure
-
Press RESET then press NUM SH I FT and key in number of
records to be inserted. FUNCT lower and RIGHT ADJUST.
- Press RESET. Check data set.
records specified. Number of records to be inserted
must be equal to or less than (EOE minus EOD) plus 1.
4-2
K
Keying
- Upper shift A or Z key was pressed.
-
Press RESET. Press only valid keys.
-
Press RESET. Press only valid keys.
-
Press RESET. Perform proper mode selection.
- The program numeric shift switch is set to the numbers only
position and the character keyed is not 0 through 9, -, space,
+, or any alpha shift characters, while in a program numeric
field.
- The data key pressed following HEX is not a valid hex digit.
- An invalid key code (a world trade key code was detected in
a domestic machine).
4-2
L
Invalid function key
The KANA SYMB key and a non-Katakana key were pressed
together on a Katakana machine.
- CHAR ADV was pressed in verify mode.
- DISPLAY PROD STAT was pressed when not in read index
or enter mode.
- FIELD ADV was pressed in verify mode.
-
-
SCR L FWD was pressed in verify mode.
- REC BKSP was pressed in field correct mode.
M
4-2
Incorrect mode
selection
-
R EC ADV was pressed in field correct mode.
-
Selected copy mode from update (Ul, verify (V) or field
correct (C) mode.
- Selected enter (E) mode from other than index (X) mode.
4-2
M continued
I ncorrect mode
selection
-
Selected field correct (C) mode while in an auto field with the
AUTO DUP/SKIP switch on or currently at the end of the record.
-
Attempted the modify index function (FUNCT SEl, M) while not
on track 00.
- Selected search (S) mode from verify (V) or field correct (C) mode.
-
Selected SEARCH CONTENT or SEARCH SEQ CONTENT
from verify (V) or field correct (C)' or selected search content
from enter (E) mode.
- Selected update (U) mode from enter (E) mode or from search (S)
mode when search was selected from enter (E) mode.
- Selected verify (V) mode from enter (E) or search (S) mode.
- Selected offline field totals from verify (V) mode or field correct
(C) mode.
-
Selected PROG lOAD in verify (V) or field correct (C) mode.
- FIELD COR pressed when not in verify mode.
- Disk initialization selected and the secondary station has a disk loaded,
or the primary station is not in index (X) mode.
- Pressed DISPLAY PROG in conjunction with either shift key while
in verify or field correct mode.
-
N
N
0
?
?
Pressed SEl PROG while in field correct mode.
4-2
Keyboard overrun
- Keying rate exceeded machine capacity.
2·4
Write test
-
4-2
Operation
- Pressed DISPLAY FIELD TOTALS when not at the first position
Write gate error.
- Press RESET. Continue.
- Remove and reinsert the diskette.
- Press RESET and move the cursor to the first position of the
of a field.
-
-
field.
While ina right-adjust field, pressed DUP when not at the first
position of the field.
- Press RESET and move the cursor to the first position of the
Pressed SEl PROG when the current program wasn't on a field
boundary.
- Press RESET and move the cursor to the first position of the
- While in enter (E) mode, right-adjust field. pressed REC ADV
field.
field.
- Press RESET and move the cursor to the first position of the
when not at the first position of the field.
- Pressed R EC ADV after pressing any search key with numeric
field.
-
Press RESET and DISK TWO REC ADV.
shift.
- Pressed RIGHT ADJ when not in a right-adjust field except when
- Press RESET and move the cursor to right-adjust field.
at end of the record.
- Pressed REC ADV or SKIP in right-adjust field and not at the first
- Press RESET and move the cursor to the first position of the
position of the right-adjust field.
-
1. While not in program level O.
- Press RESET and select program level O.
2. With the cursor not in position 1.
-
- Pressed SKIP, DUP, or REC ADV in a self-check field and not
at start of the self-check field.
- Pressed SCRl FWD or SCRl BKWD in a self-check field and
not at start of the self-check field.
-
right-adjust field.
Pressed DISPLAY PROD STAT in enter mode:
Pressed SCRl FWD or SCRl BKWD in a right-adjust field and
not at the first position of that field.
Press RESET and move the cursor to position 1.
- Press RESET and move the cursor to the start of the self-check
field.
-- Press RESET and move the cursor to the start of the self-check
field.
- Press RESET and move the cursor to the first position of the
right adjust field.
3742 ML
I
1-5
1-6
P
4-2
Program
- The key pressed following SEL PROG or PROG LOAD'
-
Press RESET and enter a valid program number.
-
Press RESET and move the cursor to a field boundary.
is not a valid program number.
- Selected a new program wh ile not at a field boundary.
-
Invalid begin field character.
- Press RESET and enter a valid begin field character in
the program.
- The first position of a program buffer is a continue field
-
character.
a
4-2
Field totals
-
No . (period) or digit following the format character.
Press RESET and enter a begin field character in the first
position.
- Press RESET. Rewrite the control statement.
- The position number is greater than 080.
(or 128 for the 128 record length feature).
- No N or W follows the position number.
- An invalid character following the mask.
- Format 1 to 6 (or 1 through 9 and A for the 128 record
length feature) not specified in the mask statement.
- No < sign found at beginning of the format statement.
4-2
R
Right adjust
-
Entered a data key after the right-adjust field was full except
in verify mode.
-
-
Entered a data key after all non-fill characters have been verified.
- Press RESET and RIGHT ADJUST.
Press RESET and RIGHT ADJUST.
- A mismatch occurred on a fill character for a right-adjust field.
-
Press RESET and correct the fill character.
- Pressed - (dash) or RIGHT ADJUST at the start of a field that
-
Press RESET and if the dash and right-adjust are correct,
press FIELD COR.
isn't all fill characters. The error occurs when the first non-fill
character is encountered.
- Pressed other than RIGHT ADJUST to exit the field.
- Press RESET and RIGHT ADJUST.
- Press RIGHT ADJUST or NUM SHIFT and - (dash) when not
- Press RESET and key correctl y.
at the start of an all fill character field or not at the end of the
right-adjust field.
R
0
2-6
Disk removed
- Disk was removed when waiting for a disk error to be cleared on
record insertion mode. The EOD in the data set label is not
updated. Duplicate records may exist in the data set. The hold
buffer is not blanked. With the 128 feature and station lockout
selected program levels 7, 8, 9 and 10 are not filled with N's.
-
Load a diskette, NUM SHIFT press RESET.
ERROR CODE DESCRIPTION
Code
Display Position
7
8
9
10
Diagnostic
MAP
Description
Cause
Operating Procedure
R
I
2-2
Length error
-
Length error in record read. The record will be written with
record length corresponding to the record length in the data set
label, the disk address of the record written is determined as
described in R2 error.
-
Press RESET.
R
2
2-2
No record found
-
The record at the displayed disk address could not be found. A
blank record will be written to disk at an address determined by
the displayed address plus the number of records to be inserted.
-
Press RESET.
R
4
2-2
Read error
- The record read is in error. The record will be written to disk at
-
Press RESET.
an address determined by the displayed address plus the number
of records to be inserted.
S
4-2
Search
-
The search mask did not match any record.
- Press RESET. If there is not a numeric error displayed, try
a different search mask. If a numeric error is displayed, use
that verification procedure.
- A disk error occurred that failed the disk ERP. The disk error
is displayed in position 8 on the status line.
T
4-2
Operational error
(truncation)
-
Attempting to enter data beyond the logical record length.
- Press RESET. Usually caused when AUTO REC ADV is off.
Press REC ADV.
- Pressed SCRL FWD when column indicator displayed 000.
-
- Pressed DISPLAY PROD STAT in enter (E) mode and the record
- Press RESET. Change record length to 21.
Press RESET. Press REC ADV.
length is less than 21.
V
4·2
Verify mismatch
- Pressed RIGHT ADJUST key at the end of the record.
- Press RESET. Press REC ADV.
-
A mismatch occurs between the current data keystroke and the
data character in the record.
- Press RESET. Key in the correct character.
-
A character in an auto skip field is not blank.
- A mismatch occurs between the characters of an auto dup field in
the record and corresponding characters of a previous record.
n
3742 ML
1-7
1-8
w
0
2-6
Disk removed
- Disk was removed when waiting for a disk error to be cleared on
-
Load diskette. NUM SHIFT, press RESET.
-
Press RESET.
-
Press RESET.
-
Press RESET. Use correct sign in right-adjust field.
record insertion mode. The EOD in the data set label is not
updated. Duplicate records may exist in the data set. The hold
buffer is not blanked. With the 128 feature and station lockout
selected program levels 7, 8, 9 and 10 are not filled with N's.
W
5
2-4
Write error
-
W
6
2-4
Write error
- The record at the currently displayed disk address was written
The record at the currently displayed disk address was written in
error. Either the sector at the currently displayed disk address
could not be found or the record was written in error.
with a special address mark and was not read with a special
address mark.
X
4-2
Right-adjust sign
- A sign mismatch occurred at the end of a right-adjust field in
verify mode.
ERROR CODE DESCRIPTION
Code
Display Position
7
8
9
10
Diagnostic
MAP
y
2-1
Description
Cause
Empty data set
-
Attempted verify mode selection and data set was empty.
Operating Procedure
-
Press RESET. Enter data into the data set or choose a
different data set.
-
Press RESET.
-
Hold NUMERIC SHIFT and press RESET.
-
Load a diskette. Hold NUM SHIFT and press RESET.
- Attempted update mode selection and data set was empty.
Z
2-4
Last record write error
-
Attempted search mode selection and data set was empty.
-
In entar or update mode, write error occurred at EOE.
- In verify mode, write error occurred on last non-deleted record.
Z
2
2-2
Z
3
2·9
Z
4
2-2
Z
5
2·4
Z
6
2·2
0
2-6
1
Early disk removal
-
in enter or update mode, write error occurred at EOE.
-
In verify mode, write error occurred on the last deleted record.
-
Removed disk while disk operations were in process.
-
Removed disk while not on the index cylinder.
2·2
Length
- Record length was incorrect for this disk operation.
-
Hold NUM SHIFT and press RESET. Use the correct
record length.
2·2
No record found
-
The disk read ERP failed because ID field could not be found.
-
Hold NUM SHIFT and press RESET.
2-4
Write test
-
Write gate error.
- Remove and reinsert the disk.
3
2·9
Seek
- Seek ERP failed because a track match did not occur.
3
2·9
Seek error
-
0
2
2
D
Last record write error
3
?
?
Seek error. An auto return to the index track is performed
with the EOD being updated. Duplicate records may exist
in the data set. The hold buffer is not blanked. With the
128 feature and station lockout selected program levels 7, 8, 9
and 10 are not filled with N's.
- Hold NUM SHIFT and press RESET.
-
Hold NUM SHIFT and press RESET.
3742 ML
II
1-9
1-10
2-4
Write test
- Write gate error.
- Remove and reinsert the disk.
2-2
Read
-
- Hold NUM SHIFT and press RESET.
4
2-4
Write test
- Write gate error.
5
2-4
Write
-
2-4
Write test
- Write gate error.
- Remove and reinsert the disk.
2-2
Deleted record
-
Last record read has a control address mark (such as is required
for a deleted record).
- Hold NUM SHIFT and press RESET. Press REC ADV. If the
Write gate error.
- Remove and reinsert the disk.
3
?
?
4
4
B
5
?
?
?
?
S
6
?
?
7
Disk ERP failed with a read error. The first record written on
the disk after the read error may be wrong.
Disk write and write check ERP failed_
2-4
Write test
-
2-2
Address
- A newly developed disk address is out of the current extent for
-
Remove and reinsert the disk.
- Hold NUM SHIFT and press RESET.
error occurred on the index track, change position one to an
H, press FUNCT SEL, M, REC ADV.
- Hold NUM SHIFT and press RESET. Use a correct address.
a data set or is off the disk.
I
2-2
Invalid input specifications
-
Character not valid or odd number of characters specified.
-
Remove the diskette. Press RESET. Insert a different diskette.
Remove the diskette. Press RESET. Insert a different diskette.
Track zero is in bad track list.
Tracks 78 through 99 are specified as bad.
- Sequence value is greater than 13.
=
2-1
Non-ascending bad
track specification
- Bad tracks are not specified in ascending sequence.
-
*
2-2
Bad track specification
exceeded
- More than two bad tracks specified on the disk.
- Remove the diskette. Press RESET. Insert a different diskette.
(
2-4
Write check error
- Error occurred while the disk was being initialized or disk check.
-
&
2-2
Delete record error
- Error encountered while trying to delete records 9 through 26
- Remove the diskette. Press RESET. Insert a different diskette.
Remove the diskette. Press RESET. Insert a different diskette.
on tracks zero.
?
?
2-4
Write test
-
Write gate error.
-
Remove and reinsert the disk.
This page intentionally left blank.
3742 Ml
II
1-11
1-12
HOW TO USE THE DISPLAY UNIT
SYMPTOMS
DISPLAY UNIT SYMPTOMS
-
If you are aware of the display unit symptom
terms and the directions on this page, continue
with the next command. Otherwise, review the
information contained in the adjacent columns
and then continue here.
The diskettes can be either unloaded or loaded.
(Loaded is preferred.)
- Remove the viewer.
- Turn up the brightness control (observe the
caution in the next column).
Look for a correct raster as shown. For this
decision, disregard any characters that might
also be evident within the raster.
The following 7 pages contain descriptions and
pictures of symptoms to direct you to the correct MAP to use for diagnosis.
Read the symptom description with each picture
to understand the illustration and any variations
that could be applicable.
1-
•
•••••
-I
x w,
Is the raster (relative size, position, and number
of lines) as shown; and does the brightness remain stable?
Y N
-
Review the symptoms, starting with 1 on the
next page, until the most similar symptom
is found. Use the MAP indicated.
Return the brightness control to normal.
Data may be entered, but is not required.
Are characters displayed and are they free of
distortion?
YN
- Review the symptoms, starting with 15,
until the most similar symptom is found.
Use the MAP ind icated.
Review the symptoms, starting with 24, until
. the most similar symptom is found. Use the
MAP indicated.
Cathode ray tube (display).
Blank CRT:
The display looks like power is off.
Blooms:
The entire display appears to glow
or the raster is excessively bright.
Brightness:
The amount of light emitted from
the raster.
Character:
All letters, numbers, special symbols, and the cursor, formed by a
series of small dots.
Deflection:
The vertical, horizontal, and wiggle
sweeps needed to form the 6 lines,
the line lengths and the li.ne height .
Raster:
The bright area of 6 Iines, each
about 0.2 inch (5.1 mm) high by
from 3.5 to 5.5 inches (88.9 to
139.7 mm) long, caused by the
deflection circuits. (On some CRTs,
a raster might not be displayed
except with the CE pins jumpered.
This is due to gain variations between
CRTs.)
Retrace:
The return trace for the deflection
sweeps.
Video:
Pulses, which are intensi~ied dots,
that result in characters.
For some symptoms, it could be necessary to turn
the brightness control up to observe the symptoms.
•
•••••
CRT:
The symptoms are numbered to indicate the
priority sequence and to allow referencing.
CAUTION:
1M X
DISPLAY UNIT GLOSSARY
Never make CRT tube face glow
or bloom. Return brightness
control to normal before proceeding into the MAPs.
Symptoms of display trouble are not readily
illustrated exactly; each display symptom is an
individual. Therefore, when using the following
index, attempt to locate a picture or descriptive
symptom that is similar to (not necessarily the
same as) what you saw displayed.
If any of more than 1 picture might be the right
one, see if they all use the same MAP . .If so, no
need to choose; just go to that MAP.
The correct MAP or procedure to use follows each
picture.
Regardless of the starting point, itis necessary to
compare all succeeding display symptoms up to the
one that is similar to one you have. If no similar
display can be found, use the Display General
MAP following the last picture.
80000
A-X
A A
a
88
tOO
All display symptoms are shown with the viewer
removed, and viewed from the key station 1
operator position.
Most of the symptoms are shown with the diskettes loaded. However, the symptom may be
used as you first found it (unloaded, loaded, or
with data), while being aware of the difference
this makes on the display .
Error
codes
Program
number
Begin
field
code
Program
shift
code
DIsk
address
Machine
mode
Alternate
record
advance
DISPLAY AND DISPLAY UNIT SYMPTOMS
1
Symptom: Blank CRT or brightness
fades to blank.
3
Symptom: Vertical bar-may be anywhere
on the display.
5
Symptom: Multiple vertical bars.
Brightness control: Turned up (caution)
Brightness control: Turned up (caution)
Brightness control: Turned up (caution)
MAP: 3-2
MAP: 3-5
MAP: 3-5
2
4
6
Symptom: Spot-may be anywhere on
the display.
Symptom: Multiple vertical spots.
Brightness control: Turned up (caution)
Symptom: All characters resemble cursors.
Brightness control: Normal
Brightness control: Turned up (caution)
--
•
MAP: 3-5
•
MAP: 3-5
MAP: 3-5
3742 ML
1-13
1-14
DISPLAY AND DISPLAY UNIT SYMPTOMS
7
Symptom: All characters resemble cursors.
9
Brightness control: Normal
Symptom: Lines too close together.
11
Symptom: lines on top of each other
(Some raster lines missing).
Brightness control: Normal
Brightness control: Normal
80000
A A
seele tOOtO
A A
,e
e
ATAQ U'OH
8~t
... -. - -. ......-.. ~
lIBI!
MAP: 3-5
8
Symptom: All characters resemble cursors.
MAP: 3-5
10
Symptom: Lines on top of each other (Incorrect line location),
D~l~
9
MAP: 3-5
12
Symptom: lines on top of each other
(Some raster lines missing).
Brightness control: Turned up (caution)
Brightness control: Normal
Brightness control: Normal
'~
S1cJlet~
8eeee A A
t.~~
.cI~et" teete 988
ATAOl.IGli
AlI,t'VlV
eoe ejeej ~2esp
........ V91
e~, ~ ·eeeso
S1 X
tee fie. .
A A
e
ATACl lieU
tgete
ele/~
eleallaa.
MAP: 3-5
MAP: 3-5
MAP: 3-5
~101PH
13
15
Symptom: Lines on top of each other
(Some raster lines missing).
Symptom: Character height compressed.
17
Brightness control: Normal
Symptom: Lines compressed to the left.
Brightness control: Normal
Brightness control: Normal
........
~SI~la fa
d~at,
aaaae
taata aaa
9
ta
ATAQ
ij
~
~Dt:tt
MAP: 3-5
14
16
80000
rooro rooro est
A
MAP: 3-5
n
0
OtOO~
x
oooow
"
I
t:t
1'41~
18
AA e
fe
ATAQ fstQH
•
8888t
MAP: 3-5
~
Symptom: Skewed
9jOU
Gie GjeO' 119SP
00009
9
9'991 l2GSP
geee~
x~
Brightness control: Normal
•
OJOOJ
9~9
MAP: 3-5
I
aeeee
.. fllre lSI
ATAQ
O~O
919'~
:"~O::3'"
Symptom: Lines compressed to the right.
o
~OOto
o
owo
D""J.""
Brightness control: Normal
A
18
ATM IWJH
OtO~"
MAP: 3-5
Brightness control: Normal
e
AA
lit leele aSI
lit
.. . . . . .0
/
Ot
Symptom: Excessive line length.
aeeee
I
.............
t~ali
·999 91gel ~'lGSp/
GlGI'l1S
9(;)(;)99
RDts~ Dijlij
G~
e
A A
"
•
....
XK
MAP: 3-5
3742 ML
1-15
I
1-16
DISPLAY AND DISPLAY UNIT SYMPTOMS
19
21
Symptom: Distorted
Brightness control: Normal
Symptom: Lower corner(s) cut off.
23
Brightness control: Normal
~oooo
tooro
sooro
Symptom: Display rotated and incomplete; characters small.
Brightness control: Normal
A A
o
tOOtO 6~t
to
ATAQ
f C
t~Q}j
fO
fOOfO
OSf
o~o~"
•
O~O
OtOOJ 1,r
OOOO~
MAP: 3-5
Adjustment procedure 305
Adjustment procedure 305
20
22
24
Symptom: Overall enlarged display.
Brightness control: Normal
Symptom: Display rotated and incomplete.
Symptom: CRT blooms bright (on-afton-off).
Brightness control: Normal
Brightness control: Normal
The raster and characters are expanded, or off the
display, in all directions.
00000
o
An excessively bright but correct display alternates with a blank display.
OlOSl
'HDbJ
01
MAP: 3-7
OQO OlOO!
D~l~
0
OOOO~
~]OSP
X~
Adjustment procedure 305
MAP: 3-6
25
27
Symptom: Jittery or jumping display.
29
Symptom: No video (raster only).
Symptom: Failure to blank on wiggle
sweep.
Brightness control: Turned up (caution)
Brightness control: Normal
Brightness control: Turned up (caution)
The data is correct, but difficult to read, due to
motion of the characters and/or the lines.
iiH• • 'i
,
I
MAP: 3-4
MAP: 3-3
MAP: 3-1
26
28
30
Symptom: Fuzzy characters. (Raster size
and brightness normal.)
Brightness control: Normal
tlX
.....
leolO IOGle lSI
Seol.
Symptom: Brightness increases slowly, ,or
is unadjustable, or is intermittent.
Symptom: Failure to blank horizontal
retrace.
Brightness control: Normal
•
A
.
Brightness control: Turned up (caution)
,.
x
~
ATM 'MIl
'
..
~...-.
.-. ..-.
.. ... ::-'
."
- .......
. ., .
otto.ee.
RbI, DW1W
O~
0
ooeot
-.
118W
X •
.-,
--
--
Horizontal retraces
,
8.8.f
-........
.... . ......8
.......
..........._ _ ~ISI.
...... . .•...J St..8J au .8J asa.
V..• I _....... - - Jt
L" ..
,
Vertical retrace
y
MAP: 3-3
MAP: 3-1
MAP: 3-1
3742 ML
II
1-17
1-18
DISPLAY AND DISPLAY UNIT SYMPTOMS
31
33
Symptom: Machine status missing or wrong.
Brightness control: Normal
Brightness control: Normal
Status conditions'
N = Not ready - diskette unloaded.
W = Wait - diskette loaded.
R = Ready - diskette loaded.
~(A correct status condition is shown.)
t1 X
35
Symptom: Disk address wrong.
00000
Symptom: Cursors missing, or in wrong
positions.
Brightness control: Normal
The correct address for disk 1 when first loaded
is shown.
o
00000
t1 X
The cursor is correctly in position 001, as shown,
prior to data entry. (At power up in XR model
status the 3742 with 128 feature may have one
or both cursors missing or in wrong positions on
the display. This is normal.)
1
o
t1 X
0
OIO~1
0.1 O~l
OtO~1
HDtsl
D~Hf
01
O~O
01001
01
~10SP
MAP: 2-6
MAP: 2-2
32
34
Symptom: Disk address missing.
Brightness control: Normal
OOOO~
Symptom: No characters; just cursors.
Brightness control: Normal
01
X is
o
OvO OWO'
00009
~10'SP
MAP: 5-1.
36
Symptom: Dots missing from characters.
Brightness control: Normal
o
010~1
liDts!
01
MAP: 2-6
D~l~
OvO 01001
0
X is
A missing row of dots will appear as missing
and/or broken lines in the characters. The
characters shown here contain the correct
number of dots.
o
00000
t1 X
The correct location for Disk 1 address
is shown.
t1 X
0
~10SP
X ts
OOOO~
0
090 OWOI
HDISI D'11'1
_.-4--
OOOO~
010~1
~10SP
OvO 01001
00009
X is
MAP: 5-1
MAP: 5-1
~10'SP
X is
37
Symptom: Added, missing, or wrong
characters.
39
Symptom: Hex characters.
Brightness control: Normal
Brightness control: Normal
ee
•
:......
XII
•
e
"
)(
Symptom: Lines and hex characters.
Brightness control: Turned up
(~ution)
....l1li11111111111111111111111111111111
..11111111111111111111111111111111111111
tllllllIIllllllIllllIIlllIllllllllIlllIl
eeetE
•
•••••
MAP: 5-1
41
.............11••111111111111111........
MAP: 5-1
MAP: 6-1
DISPLAY-GENE RAL
38
Symptom: Hex characters.
Brightness control: Normal
_ i l l. . . ._ .......... ·. . .....
·.).'·,..1111»).. )...... ·'1...
»)} . . ) . . .
. . . )IG· .......U). . . . .)·.'. . . .
, .(111.<~.M/. ./(VI. . . . .OM·.IN11~..
TDllllelr.t4 H.~I ....,trl"1I
.1Ut.1. . . . 1"111''-', Ii :,,, c.IUlil
40
Symptom: Hex characters
Brightness control: Normal
••••
1.111111••1111111111111111111.11
1.1.111
••••111111111.1••••111.111111
• •••••••••1111111111111.11•••••••••••••1 '
~I.I ••• IIIIIIII.I.IIII.IIIIII.IIIIIIIIII
1'111••111111111111111111111••1111111111.,
If none of the previous symptoms are similar to
what you see on the display:
- Power down.
- Disconnect the keyboard signal cables at
planar P and R.
- Power up (wait at least 30 seconds).
Does the machine still fail?
YN
- Power down.
- Reconnect the keyboard cables at planar
P and R.
- Use keyboard MAP 4-4.
- Power down.
- Reconnect the keyboard cables at planar P
and R.
- Use MPU MAP 5-1.
1111111111111111111111111111111111111111'
MAP: 5-1
n
MAP: 5-1
3742 ML
1-19
1-20
KEYBOARD AND OPERATIONAL SYMPTOMS
Compute Field Totals
4-5
4·2
Alphabetic Shift
4-2
4·2
4-2
Fails to override program control
Program fails
Will not alpha shift from keyboard
Always a tone
No tone at end of function
Tone or click at wrong time
No audio feedback from any key
Always displays field totals
Fails to display field totals
Displays wrong field totals
4·4
4·2
Continual copy
Copies wrong data
Fails to copy
Missing/extra records
Dash (-)
4·2
4·2
Fails to display
. Fails to enter hex D
4-2
4-4
4-2
Always displays program
Displays wrong program
Fails to display program
Always auto record advancing
Continual record advance
Fails to auto record advance
Fails to manual record advance
Data
4·2
4·4
4-6
4-SE
Field Correct
4-4
4-2
4-2
Displays wrong program
Fails to display program
Display Production Statistics
No data entered and no click from one or more keys 4~2
No data entered with or without an audio response
4-4
Dead keyboard
4-2
Altered/missing data
Displays production statistics always
Displays wrong production statistics
Fails to display production statistics
Auto Dup/Skip
Duplicate
4-3
4-3
4-3
4-3
4-3
4-3
Always auto dup/skip
Dups wrong data
Fails to auto dup/skip
Dups/skips a shift failure
Dups/skips too far
Dups/skips wrong fields
Delete Index
4-4
4·5
4-2
Deletes too many/wrong indexes
Fails to delete indexes
4-4
4-3
4-2
Dups too slow/fast
Dups wrong data
Fails to auto dup
Fails to manual dup
Delete· Record
Enter
Character Advance
4-5
4-2
4-5
4-2
4-5
Continual character advance
Fails to character advance
Multiple character advance
4-4
4-5
4-2
4-5
Character ~ackspace beyond column 1
Continual character backspace
Fails to character backspace
Multiple character backspace
4-2
4-2
2-4
Always in enter mode
Fails to go into enter mode
Fails to write on disk
Display Data
4-4
Character Backspace
Deletes too many/wrong records
Fails to delete record
4-2
Displays wrong data
Fails to display data
Error
4-6
4-6
Display Field Name
4-4
4-2
Displays wrong field name
Fails to display field name
4-5
4-2.
4·4
Display Field Program
Auto Record Advance
4-3
4-2
4·3
4·3
4-5
4·2
4-4
Continual field advance
Fails to field advance
Field advances too far
Field Backspace
Display Program
4·SC
4-6
4-6
4-6
4-6
4-2
4-2
4-4
Field Advance
Copy
4-5
Audio Feedback Device
Computes field totals wrong
Fails to compute field totals
Display Field Totals
Flashing display and no error code
Keyboard dead and no error code
Continual field backspace
Fails to field backspace
Field backspaces too far
Fails to field correct
Production Statistics
Field Totals
4-2
4-2
4-7
4-88
Always displays field totals
Fails to display field totals
Wrong field totals
Field totals fails to function'
4-2
4-2
4-4
4-80
Always displays production statistics
Fails to display production statistics
Wrong production statistics
Record count wrong
Repeat
4-5
4-2
Search Sequential Content
Continual repeat
Fails to repeat
4-4
4-2
4-2
4-2
4-SF
Continual reset
Fails to reset
Select Program
Reset
Function Select Upper or Lower
Program
4-5
4-2
4-4
4-2
4-2
4-4
4-4
Always function select
Fails to function select
Selects wrong function
4-5
4-2
Fails to program chain
Fails to shift
Wrong program
Wrong program number
4-2
4-4
Always writes EOD
Fails to write EOD
Always enters hex
Fails to enter hex
Right Adjust
4-5
4-2
4-2
Always/extra program loads
Fails to program load
Loaded wrong/no program
Initialize
4-5
4-2
4-4
Self Check
4-4
4-2
4-SA
Program Load
4-5
4-2
Fails to select program
Selects wrong program
Return to Index 1 or 2
4-2
4-2
Hex
Cannot enter content
Fails to locate record
Fails to search sequentially
Fails to start search
S errors
Continual right-adjust
Fails to right-adjust
Incorrect right-adjust
Skip
Fails to scroll forward
Always scrolls, forward
4-2
4-3
4-2
4-2
4-4
False errors
Wrong modulus
No self check error (modulus 10)
Program Numeric Shift
2-1
4-2
Fails to initialize when in initialize mode
Will not enter initialize mode
4-5
4-3
Always in numeric shift
Fails to numeric shift
Scroll Forward
4-2
4-5
Katakana Shift
Fails to alpha/num skip
Fails to auto skip
Fails to program skip
Fails to skip
Skips short/too far
Proof Keyboard Feature
4-3
4-3
4-5
5-1
Always enters Katakana characters
Katakana shift switch fails to cause a
Katakana shift
Kana shift key fails to cause a Katakana
shift
Programmed Katakana shift fails
Scroll Backward
7-6
Numeric keys enter incorrect data.
Search Address
Displays wrong data
Fai Is to read the index track
Katakana Symbol Shift
Record Advance 1 or 2
Always enters Katakana symbols
Fails to Katakana symbol shift
Fails to enter Katakana symbols
4-4
4-2
Partial index modified
Will not modify index
Continual record advances
Fails to record advance
Multiple record advances
4-5
4-2
4-5
Continual record backspaces
Fails to record backspace
Multiple record backspaces
Record Insert
Numeric Shift
4-2
4-2
4-5
4-2
4-5
Record Backspace 1 or 2
Modify Index
Always numeric shift
Fails to numeric shift
Always scrolls backward
Fails to scroll backward
Read Index
4-4
2-2
4-5
4-5
4-5
Space Bar
4-5
4-2
4-2
Fails to record insert
4-4
4-2
4-4
Cannot enter search address
Fails to 'search
Goes to wrong/no address
Cannot enter search content
Fails to locate record
Fails to search
Stops on wrong record
Search EOO
4-2
4-2
4-4
4-4
Fails to space
Cursor remains stationary
Spaces too far
Update
4-5
4-2
2-4
Search Content
4-4
4-2
4-2
4-4
4-2
4-2
4-5
Always updates
Fails to update
Fails to write on disk
Verify
4-2
4-4
4-2
Fails to verify
False errors
Verified wrong record
Fails to locate EOD
Fails to search
Locates wrong record
Stops on no EOD
3742 ML
II
1-21
1-22
MISCELLANEOUS SYMPTOMS
Power Supply
CRT
5-1
Hex characters during power up
6-2
6-1
6-1
Disk Unit Symptoms
6-1
2-1
6-3
6-2
2-6
2-2
2-9
2-4
2-11
2-6
2-6
2-2
2-12
Diskette problems
Not ready
Read check
Seek errors (no data errors)
Write check
Diskette not interchangeable with other disk units
Machine status or disk address missing
Machine status wrong
Disk address 1 or 2 wrong
Machine slow
Features
7-3
7-4
7-5
7-6
Feature A checkout procedure
128 Record length feature checkout procedure
Record Insertion checkout procedure
Proof keyboard checkout procedure
Keyboard
4-8E
4-2
4-6
4-6
4-6
4-1
4-4
4-4
4-6
2-12
4-5
4-6
4-2
4-4
4-2
4-4
4-6
4-2
4-3
Altered/missing data
Binding key
Buzzing
-Click only from reset
Dead keyboard
Error code but audio feedback device works
Incorrect data entered with or without audio response
Incorrect function performed with or without an audio response
Keyboard locked up
Machine slow
Multiple characters entered for one keystroke
No cI ick from any key
No data entered and no click from one or more keys
No data entered with or without an audio response
No function performed and no click from one or more keys
No function performed with or without an audio response
No tone at end of function
Sticking key
Will not perform function selected by toggle switches
Burnt smell
Incorrect voltage at I/O unit
Intermittent operation
Machine inoperative
Service circuit breaker tripped
Smoke
DISK MAPS
MAP 2-1 -
-
This MAP will help find diskette problems.
Remove the diskette.
Power down.
Wait 5 seconds.
Power up.
Load the diskette which is causing the errors.
Is there an error?
Y N
Is the address of the fault known? Y N
- Perform failing operation, if known.
Is there a numeric error code?
Y N
I - Use disk MAP 2-2_
Remove the diskette.
Load a different diskette. Hold NUM SHIFT, and press RESET.
Perform the failing operation.
Is there a numeric error code?
Y N
- The first diskette was defective; have
it reinitalized. -
-
Try to identify the record which had the error
to isolate the problem to the diskette or to the
disk drive unit.
Search for the defective record; if none is
evident, the disk drive unit that prepared
the diskette is probably at fault.
Try to isolate the problem to the diskette
or to the disk unit that prepared the
diskette.
- CAUTION:
The customer may wish to
recover data from the diskette
before it is reinitialized.
Use disk MAP 2-2.
Is the defective record in track DO? •
Y N
Press FUNCT SEL lower.
Press SEARCH ADDRESS. Key in the address of the suspected
record.
Press R EC ADV.
- Try to locate the defective record.
3742 ML
2-1.1
2-1.2
Is there a numeric error code?
Y N
Use disk MAP 2-2.
I-
Remove the diskette.
Load a different diskette.
Perform the failing operation.
Is there an error code?
Y N
The first diskette is defective; have
it reinitialized. -
.-
Try to isolate the problem.
- CAUTION:
The customer may wish to
recover data from the diskette
before it is reinitialized.
- CAUTION:
The customer may wish to
recover data from the diskette
before it is reinitialized.
CAUTION:
The customer may wish to
recover data from the diskette
before it is reinitialized.
Use disk MAP 2-2.
-' Press R EC ADV and advance to the faulty
record.
Is there an error?
r~
Use disk MAP 2-2.
Hold NUM SHIFT and press RESET.
Check the data set label (239).
Is the data set label 0 K?
Y N
~ Have the data set label corrected.
Does the machine still fail?
Y N
This disk is defective; have it
reinitialized. Are there any numeric error codes?
Y N
Are there any error codes?
Y N
Is the machine still failing?
Y N
This diskette is defective; have it
reinitialized. -
-
Perform the failing operation.
-
Is there a numeric error code?
Y N
Remove the diskette.
Use disk MAP 2-2.
Hold NUM SHI FT and press RESET.
Remove the diskette and insert it into
another disk drive unit. -
Try to isolate the problem to the diskette or
to the disk drive which prepared that diskette.
Perform the failing operation.
I
Is there an error code?
~
Use disk MAP 2-2.
This diskette is defective; have it
reinitialized. -
- CAUTION:
The customer may wish to
recover data from the diskette
before it is reinitialized.
- CAUTION:
The customer may wish to
recover data from the diskette
before it is reinitialized.
Remove the diskette.
Load a different diskette.
Are there any error codes?
Y N
The first diskette is defective; have
it reinitialized. -
-
Use MPU MAP 5-1.
Remove the diskette and insert it into
another disk drive.
Hold NUM SHIFT and press RESET.
Check the data set label (239).
Is the data set label OK?
Y N
~ Have the data set label corrected.
Is there a numeric error code?
Y N
The first disk drive unit is defective.
Use disk MAP 2-2.
The disk drive used prior to this one is
defective. Use MAPs on defective disk
drive.
3742 ML
2-1.3
2-1.4
The diskette is defective; have it
reinitialized. -
- CAUTION:
The customer may wish to
recover data from the diskette
before it is reinitialized.
-
CAUTION:
The customer may wish to
recover data from the diskette
before it is reinitialized.
-
CAUTION:
The customer may wish to
recover data from the diskette
before it is reinitialized.
Are there?? in the error code?
Y N
Hold NUM SHIFT and press RESET.
Check the data set label (239).
is data set label OK?
Y N
~ Have the data set label corrected.
Does the machine still fail?
Y N
The diskette is defective; have it
reinitialized. Are there any numeric error codes?
YN
Are there any error codes?
Y N
Is the machine still failing?
YN
The diskette is defective; have
it reinitialiazed. Perform the failing operation.
Is there a numeric error code?
Y N
Remove the diskette.
Use disk MAP 2-2.
Hold NUM SHIFT and press RESET.
Remove the diskette and insert it
into another disk drive unit. Perform the failing function.
Try to isolate the problem to the diskette or
to the disk drive which prepared that diskette.
Is there an error code?
I-
Y N
Use disk MAP 2-2.
This diskette is defective; have it
reinitialized. -
-
CAUTION:
The customer may wish to
recover data from the diskette
before it is reinitialized.
Are there any error codes?
Y N
The first diskette is defective; have
it reinitialized. -
-
- CAUTION:
The customer may wish to
recover data from the diskette
before it is reinitialized.
Use disk MAP 2-2.
Remove the diskette and insert it into another
disk drive.
Hold NUM SHIFTand press RESET.
- Check the data set label (239).
Is the data set label OK?
Y N
~ Have the data set label corrected.
Is there a numeric error code?
Y N
The first disk drive unit is defective.
Use disk MAP 2-2. -
The diskette is defective; have it
reinitialized. -
The disk drive used prior to this one is defective.
Use MAPs on defective disk drive.
- CAUTION:
The customer may wish to
recover data from the diskette
before it is reinitialized.
3742 ML
II
2-1.5
2-1.6
This page intentionally left blank.
MAP 2-2 -
This MAP will help find read check problems
or disk-address-wrong problems.
The purpose of this section of the MAP is to
help you determine which machine, disk drive, or
diskette is the cause of the failure when it appears
many machines or diskettes are involved.
Several conditions can exist:
1.
Diskettes written on a failing drive can
cause other machines to fail while the
failing machine appears OK to the
operator.
2.
A drive with bad write current will
cause failures on other machines and
mayor may not fail itself.
3.
A poor quality diskette that causes
failures on some or all machines.
In condition 1, a drive with a head partially out
of adjustment will normally read a diskette that
it has written since head alignment is not critical
as long as diskettes are written and read on the
same machine.
Has the failing disk drive been determined?
Y N
- To isolate the failing drive, use the CE
diskette on machines that you know
appear error free (error code 2 or 4).
Load CE diskette in disk drive to be checked.
Press REC ADV.
Press FUNCT SEL lower.
Press UPDATE.
Can a pair of matching record messages be
read correctly from tracks 06, 07,08 and 09?
Y N
Power down.
Adjust the head (208).
Verify the adjusJment with CE diskette.
Use of the test diskette is to locate' head alignment problems.
If disk drive 2 is being checked, swap disk
signal cables in positions J and Kat MPU.
Cables must be restored to original position
upon completion of this test (212A).
- See MAP 2-11 for additional expianations. (A
single pair of matching records per track is sufficient. Increment to the next track when one
good pair is found.)
3742 ML
2-2.1
2-2.2
Does the machine still fail?
Y N
- The head was out of adjustment.
Is this the first drive you are isolating?
Y N
Read the data written on the prior
disk drive unit. Use update mode.
Does the data read error free?
YN
The drive that wrote the data is
failing when writing. Return to that
drive and use disk MAP 2-4.
Use a known good diskette.
Enter at least one record taking care
not to destroy customer data. Remember the location of this record; you need
to read it on another drive.
Have all drives been tested?
Y N
Return to the start of this MAP and
test another suspect drive.
Check for a possible defective diskette in use.
Use MAP 2-1.
Check to see if you can find anyone of the
following defects in the problem/suspect
disk drive unit:
1.
Belt-off or damaged (216K).
2.
Pulley (2)-loose (2160 and G).
3.
Idler assembly-defective mechanical
operation (216E).
4.
Drive motor-bindi~g or sticking
(216N).
5.
Cover or cover pivot (2)-loose or
broken (224E).
Is the disk drive in the failing station free of all
the listed defects?
Y N
Repair OJ replace the faulty part.
- Verify the fix.
~
D E
Locates defective writing by writing a record
on one drive and readingthat record on
another drive.
Does the machine stitt fail?
Y N
Select the proper I R code and cause code
for the faulty part from the charts.
Can you make the machine fail?
Y N
When the failure is intermittent, perform the
following steps one on each call, unti I the
problem is solved.
Record the date of each action.
Vibrate the machine to try to cause the
failure.
Check the room temperature and humidity
and compare them to Installation Procedures,
page 16-1.
Check the dc voltages at the disk FC card
(204A) with respect to frame ground.
Note: There are two types of disk FC cards:
type X and type Y (204A). Test points (TP)
for the two cards are different.
VDC
Card X
Card Y
Limits
+24
+5
-5
Ground
TP1
TP23
TP5
TP17
TPA11
TPB7
TPA12
TPA3
22.0 to 26.5
4.7t05.5
4.6 to 5.4
0
Load the CE alignment diskette in the
disk drive unit to be checked.
Press R EC ADV.
Press FUNCT SEL lower.
Press UPf)ATE.
Can a pair of matching record messages be read
correctly from tracks 06, 07,08 and 09? Y N
Power down.
Adjust the head (208).
Verify the adjustment with the CE
diskette.
DATE: - . - - - - - r - - - - ,
If disk drive 2 is being checked, swap disk signal
cables in positions J and K at MPU. Cables must
be restored to original position upon completion
of th is test.
See MAP 2-11 for additional explanation. (A
single pair of matching records per track is sufficient. Increment to the next track when one
good pair is found.)
r-I
3742 ML
2-2.3
TNl.: SN31-6233 to SY31-0502-0 (9 May 1978)
2-2.4
w
-
Power down.
Reseat both ends of disk signal cable (212A,
2048).
Reseat the disk file cable at the disk F C card
(204C).
Verify the fix.
DATE: Llr---.
--r,__-_-L- ~
-- Power down.
-
Swap the disk units.
Verify the fix.
DATE:
" ' - 1- . . - - - - . - - - ,
Does the same station fail?
Y N
- Perform the following steps on the failing
drive:
- Power down.
-Replace the VFO card (2128).
Verify the fix.
DA TE:
Ir----.-I-....----.
Power down.
Replace the disk signal cable (212A,
2048).
Verify the fix.
DA TE :
----',r----r--,
"'-1
Replace the ac line filter.
Verify t,-h_e_fi"""'Tx_._.,-----,
DATE
_L.....---l
UseMPU MAP 5-1.
:L-.l_,--I
Power down.
Clean the head and pressure pad (209).
Ver i fy t,--h_e_fi--.x_._--,---------,
DA TE:
-------'1-----'
Power down.
Replace the head and carriage assembly (225).
0_
-
Verify t~h_e_fi"""Tx_._-.----..
DATE: ~I
----L..I_-L----.j
Power down.
Replace the disk FC card (204A).
Verify the fi x.
DATE:
Ir---I.....-----,---,
Power down.
Reseat both ends of disk signal cable (2048,
212A). Reseat the disk FC card (204A).
Reseat the disk file cable at the disk FC card
(204C)'
Reseat the planar cross connectors A and 8
(2128).
®
Verify the fix.
-At disk unit and MPU planar, position J for
disk 1 and K for disk 2.
~Does the machine still fail?
Y N
The cables or the disk FC card or cross
connectors were loose.
Keyboard
2
-- --..,
Control
Remove the diskette.
Power down.
Keyboard
Swap the disk signal cables at planar sockets
1
J and K. Disk drive 1 will now be connected
__
Control
----_J.-_ _ _ _.....L..--I
to station 2 and disk drive 2 will be connectedL-_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
- Control and display interactions with disk drive
to station 1 (212A). signal cables swapped at planar sockets J and K.
Power up.
Load a different diskette in the other disk drive. A disk with no history of numeric errors.
Does the display status line of the original failing
station show X R mode (mode-status) without an
error?
Y N
Power down.
Reconnect the disk signal cables to their
original connectors at planar sockets J
and K.
Replace the VFO card (2128).
- Verify the fix.
---- - -
Does the machine still fail?
Y N
I The VFO card was defective.
Power down.
Reinstall the original VFO card.
Use MPU MAP 5-1.
Power down.
Reconnect the disk signal cables at planar
sockets J and K to their original connectors.
- Power up.
- Remove the diskette from the other station
and load it in the failing station.
~ Wait for warm-up. (30 seconds)
Are the error code positions blank?
Y N
~
Hold NUM SHIFT and press RESET.
- Press F UNCT SEL lower.
Hold NUM SHIFT and press the C key. - Press the J key.
- The machine is in CER (mode-status).
Is the machine in CEW (mode-status)?
Y N
- The machine is in CEW (mode-status) displaying
disk IDs.
~ - Use disk MAP 2·3.
3742 ML
2-2.5
2-2.1
Are 26 record IDs displayed? - - - - - - - - - - .
YN
There are 4 characters displayed per record 10.
HHt1HHH~HHHj:jHHH~HHHI!IHHH~H
{
Load the CE diskette in the disk drive to
be checked.
Press R EC ADV.
- Press FUNCT SEL lower.
- Press UPDATE.
Can a pair of matching record messages be read
correctly from tracks 06, 07, 08 and 09? YN
Power down.
Adjust the head (208).
Verify the adjustment with the CE diskette.
Does the machine still fail?
Y N
I
The head was out of adjustment.
-
Use disk MAP 2-3.
Use disk MAP
2-3~
CfW
MfU,iiiHfiHHHHWiHHHfifif-WHHfiUtillfiUfiHfiWfiflfl..HHfletH
HflWHHH~HHHWHHHHHHHWHHH~HHH/,,!HflHi:!HHHtjHflHHH
If disk drive 1 is being checked, swap disk signal
cables in positions J and K at MPU. Cables must
be restored to original position upon completion
of this test.
See MAP 2-11 for additional explanation. (A
single pair of matching records per track is
sufficient. Increment to the next track when
one good pair is found.)
IVIAI'" L.-.j -
- This MAP is a continuation of MAP 2-2.
If you had changing error codes when you started
this call, was the numeric part of the first error
code 1,2,3,4,6, or 7 during the failing operation?
(If you do not have changing error codes, continue
in Y leg of this MAP.)
Y N
If it was 0, use disk MAP 2-6.
If it was 5, use disk MAP 2-4.
Power up.
Measure dc voltages at the disk Fe card
(204A) with respect to frame ground. -
Fe cards:
type X and type Y (204A). Test points (TP)
for the two cards are different:
Note: There are two types of disk
Vdc
Card X
+24
+5
-5
Ground
TPl
TP23
TP5
TP17
Card Y
TPAll
TPB7
TBA12
TPA3
Limits
22.0 to 26.5
4.7 to 5.5
4.6 to 5.4
0
Are all dc voltages within limits?
Y N
Make a note of the fail ing voltage measurement for futu re reference.
Power down.
Disconnect the disk signal cable (2048) at
the disk Fe card.
Power up.
Measure the fail ing voltage at the disk Fe
card end of the disk signal cable with respect
to frame ground. Vdc
Test Points
+24
+5
-5
Ground
B10
803
B11
808
The problem may be due to ripple in the po WE
supply. If ripple is suspected, use Power
Theory in section 15.
Limits
D B
02 : :
••
•• ••
••
•• ••
••
••
13 =;
22.0 to 26.5
4.7 to 5.5
4.6 to 5.4
0
3742 ML
II
2-3.1
TNL: SN31-6233 to SY31-0502-0 ( 9 May 1978)
2-3.2
Is the failing dc voltage within limits?
Y N
- Power down.
Reconnect disk signal cable.
- Use power supply MAP 6-1.
Power down.
Reconnect disk signal cable.
Replace the disk FC card (204A).
Verify the fix.
Try loading the diskette at least twice.
r- I
---1
A faulty disk FC card may cause a bad data set
label 03 (write gate check) to be written on
thedisk. A good disk FC card will correct the
write test label but will indicate an error for
the first time the diskette is loaded.
Does the machi ne sti II fa iI?
Y N
I
The disk
Fe card was defective.
Power down.
Reinstall the original FC card.
Use MAP 6-7.
Power down.
Place the disk drive unit in the service position
(206).
Load the diskette.
Close the cover.
Jumper the disk FC card (204A): For disk FC card X, from TP17 to TP22.
- For the disk FCcard Y, from TPA3 to
TPB4.
Power up.
Observe the head load actuator.
Is the head load actuator energized (207)?
Y N
Power down.
Check the head load actuator cable for shorts
and opens.
Is the head load actuator cable OK?
Y N
Replace the head load actuator wires in
disk file cable (204C).
Verify the fix.
The disk file cable was defective.
Check head load actuator for proper mechanical
operation (207).
- To energize the head load actuator.
Is the head load actuator mechanically OK?
V N
- Replace the head load actuator.
- Verify the fix.
The head load actuator was defective.
Check the head load actuator for opens and
shorts.
Is the head load actuator electrically OK?
V N
- Replace the head load actuator.
- Verify the fix.
The head load actuator was defective.
Replace the disk FC card (204A).
Verify the fix.
The disk FC card was defective.
- Power down.
Check the head load actuator for proper
mechanical operation (207).
Is the head load actuator mechanically OK?
V N
I
- Replace the head load actuator.
- Verify the fix.
The head load actuator was defective.
Power up.
Check/adjust the head load actuator (207).
Is the adjustment OK?
V N
- Adjust the head load actuator (207).
- Verify the fix.
The head load actuator was out of adjustment.
- Observe the pressure pad (207).
Is the pressure pad pressing the disk against the
head?
V N
Remove the jumper at the disk FC card
(204A).
- For disk FC card X, from TP17 to TP22.
- For disk FC card V, from TPA3 to TPB4.
Power down.
- Replace the head and car.riage assembly. - Verify the fix.
The head and carriage assembly was defective.
Use the Leadscrewand Head Carriage Assembly
Removal and Replacement procedure (225).
Then return to this point in this MAP.
E
3742 ML
2-3.3
2-3.4
):l
Open the disk cover.
Remove the jumper from disk TP17 and TP22
(204).
Observe the head load actuator as you close the
disk cover.
- The MPUshould attempt to read track O.
The head load actuator should be energized.
until this action is completed, then be
deenergized.
Does the head load actuator function?
Y N
Set the CE meter to the 50 Vdc scale to
test for a pulse on the disk FC card
(204A). - For disk FC card X, from TP22 (+) to
TP17 (-),
- For disk FC card V, from TPB4 (+) to
TPA3(-).
Observe the meter as you open the disk
cover and close it again. Is there a pulse?
V N
Test the probe at planar P·Bl0 (signal
ground P-DOS). Both lights should be
on.Probe the disk FC card (204A). For the disk FC card X, from TP10
(+) to TP17 (-).
For disk FC card V, from TPB13 (+)
to TPA3 (-).
- Open the disk cover and close it again.
- Checks the signal to the head load actuator coil.
A pulse should deflect the meter needle
momentari Iy.
r - Connect probe power leads to planar
_I
Are both Iights on?
V N
- Probe planar socket J or K-Ol0.
- Open the disk cover and close it again.
Are both Iights on?
V N
- Power down.
- Swap the·disk FC cards (204A).
- Power up.
Does the machine still fail when using
the same disk unit?
Y N
- Power down.
Replace the disk FC card in
other disk drive (204A).
- Verify the fix.
The disk FC card was defective.
M-D13 (-) black, M-805 (+).
Checks the signal to the head load actuator coil
- Try to isolate the trouble in the cable, or in the
MPU. Signal ground at J or K-BOS.
Power down.
Check the disk signal cable for
shorts or opens (2048).
Is the disk signal cable OK?
Y N
- Replace the disk signal cable.
- Verify the fix.
The disk signal cable was defective.
Power down.
Replace the VFO card (2128).
Verify the fix.
Does the machine still fail?
Y N
The VFO card was defective.
I
Power down.
Reinstall the original VFO card.
Use MPU MAP 5-1.
Power down.
Swap the disk FC cards (204A).
Power up.
Does the machine still fail when using the
same disk unit?
Y N
- Power down.
- Replace the disk FC card in other
drive (204A).
- Verify the fix.
The disk FC card was defective.
Power down.
Check/Replace the disk signal cable(2048).
Verify the fix.
The disk signal cable was defective.
Power down.
- Swap the disk FC cards (204A).
- Power up.
Does the machine still fail when using the same
disk unit?
Y N
Power down
Replace the disk FC card in the other
disk drive (204A).
Verify the fix.
The disk FC card was defective.
3742 ML
2-3.5
2-3.6
Power down.
Remove the diskette.
Replace the head load actuator (207).
Verify the fix.
The head load actuator was defective.
Power down.
Replace the head load actuator (207).
Verify the ·fix.
Does the machine still fail?
Y N
The head load actuator was defective.
Power down.
Reinstall the the original head load actuator.
Check or replace the head load actuator
wires in the disk file cable (204C).
Verify the fix.
Does the machine still fail?
Y N
The disk file cable was defective.
Load the CE diskette in the disk drive to be
checked. Press REC ADV.
Press FUNCT SE L lower.
Press UPDATE.
Can a pair of matching record messages be read
correctly from tracks 06, 07,08 and 09?
Y N
Power down.
Adjust the head (208).
Verify the adjustment with the CE diskette.
If disk drive 2 is being checked, swap disk signal
cables in position J and Kat MPU. Cables must
be restored to original position upon
completion of this test (212A).
See MAP 2-11 for additional explanation. (A
single pair of matching records per track is sufficient. Increment to the next track when one
good pair is found.)
Does the machine still fail?
Y N
The head was out of adjustment.
J
Power down.
Move the head and carriage assembly up by
turning stepper motor shaft two revolutions.
Power up. -
M
Ten seconds after power up, the MPU will
cause a series of seek~to-track commands.
Then the leadscrew wheel will stop in phase
o position:
Did the head and carriage assembly move down
to track O?
Y N
I-
Use disk MAP 2-9.
Load a different diskette.
Perform the failing operation.
Does the machine sti II fai I?
Y N
The problem is the diskette.
Use disk MAP 2-1 with the failing diskette.
Power down.
Swap disk FC cards (204A).
Power up.
Verify the fix.
If an error code occurs on the first attempt, reload the diskette one or more times to see if no error
occurs for those times.
I
Does the machine still fail when using the same
disk unit?
Y N
- Power down.
- Replace the disk FC card, in the other disk
drive (204A).
- Verify the fix.
The disk FC card was defective.
A faulty disk FC card may cause a bad data
set label 03 (write gate check) to be written
on the disk. A good disk FC card will correct
the write test label but will indicate an error
the first time the diskette is loaded.
Power down.
Reinstall the originalFC card.
Check the disk signal cable (2048) for opens
and/or short circuits, including short'circuits
to the frame.
Is the cable OK?
Y N
- Replace the disk signal cable (2048).
- Verify the fix.
The disk signal cable was defective.
Power down.
Replace the VFO card (2128).
Verify the frx.
3742 ML
2-3.7
2-3.8
.. ~
Does the machine still fail?
Y N
The VFO card was defective.
I
Power down.
Reinstall the original VFO card.
Replace the head and carriage assembly. Verify the fix.
Use the Leadscrew and Head Carriage Assembly
Removal and Replacement procedure (225).
Then return to this point in this MAP.
Does the machine still fail?
Y N
The head and carriageassemblv was defective.
I
I
Reinstall the head and carriage assembly.
Use MPU MAP 5-1.
MAP 2-4-
-
This MAP will help find write check problems.
Can you make the machine fail?
Y N
When the failure is intermittent, perform the
following steps, one on each call, until the
problem is solved.
Record the date of each action.
Vibrate the machine to try to cause the
failure.
Check the room temperature and the
humidity and compare it to Installation
Procedure page 16- 1 .
Check the dc voltages at the disk FC card
(204A) with respect to frame ground.
Note: There are two types of disk FC
cards: type X and type Y (204A). Test
points (TP) for the two cards are different:
Vdc
Card X Card Y
Limits
+24
TP1
TPA11
22.0 to 26.5
TP87
+5
TP23
4.7 to 5.5
-5
TP5
TPA12
4.6 to 5.4
Ground TP17
TPA3
0
Power down.
Reseat both ends of the disk signal cable
(204 8,212A).
Reseat the disk FC card.
Reseat the disk file cable at the disk FC card
(204C).
Verify the fix.
DA TE: i~-""--~---'
Power down.
Swap the disk units.
Verify the fix.
D ATE: jr-----,/r-----r-----,
Power down.
Clean the head and pressure pad (209).
Verify the fi x.
DATE:
If the failure does not follow the disk drive
unit, skip to VFO card replacement further
on in this procedure.
Lr----'Ir----.---.,
Power down.
Replace the disk Fe card (204A).
Verify the fix. DATE: IL--_IL-...-~----"
Power down.
Replace the VFO card (2128).
Verify the fix.
DATE: ---'I"'--~---'
- -Power down.
Replace the head and carriage assembly (225).
Verify the fix.
DATE:
r--I
Try loading the diskette at least twice. A
faulty disk FC card may cause a bad data set
label 03 (write gate check) to be written on
the disk. A good disk FC card will correct
the write test label but will indicate an error
the first time the diskette is loaded.
3742 ML
2-4.1
TNl: SN31-6233 to SY31-0502-0 ( 9 May 1978)
2-4.2
Power down.
Replace ,the disk signal cable (204B).
Verify tt:..:h;=.e~f..:..:.ixF._-r-_.....,
DATE
Replace the ac line filter.
Verify tr;..h;.;;.e_f..;.;.ix-r-;.._"""'T""_.....,
DATE: L-I_&.-1_ & . - . -.........
Use MPU MAP 5-1.
-.-1.,_-'--.. . .
:1,--
Power down.
Reseat both ends of the disk signal cable
(204B, 212A). Reseat the disk FC card (204A).
Reseat the disk file cable at the disk FC card
(204C).
Reseat planar cross connectors A and B (212B).
Verify the fix.
-
At disk unit and MPU planar, position J for
disk 1 and K for disk 2.
Does the machine fail now?
YN
The disk signal cable or the disk FC card or the
cross connectors were loose.
Control
Keyboard
Remove the diskette.
Power down.
Swap the disk signal cables at planar sockets
J and K. Disk drive 1 will now be connected
to station 2 and disk drive 2 will be connected
to station 1. Load a different diskette in the other disk
drive.
Do the failing operation.
Is there an error code in the display status line of
the original failing station?
Y N
Power down.
Reconnect the disk signal cables at planar
sockets J and K to their original connectors.
Use disk MAP 2-5.
Power down.
Reconnect the disk signal cables at planar
sockets J and K to their original connectors.
Replace the VFO card (212B).
Verify the fix.
Does the machine still fail?
Y N
The VFO card was defective.
Power down.
Reinstall the original VFO card.
Use MPU MAP 5-1.
2
-Keyboard
-
--
Control
~-
1
Control and display interactions with disk drive
signal cables swapped at planar sockets J and K
(212A).
MAP2-S -
-
Power down.
Wait 5 seconds. Power up.
Test the probe at planar P-B10. (Signal ground
P-OOS.) Both lights should be on. - Observe the probe for the disk F C card of
the failing disk (204A).
- This MAP is a continuation of MAP 2-4.
Time required for power on reset to discharge a
capacitor.
Connect probe power leads to planar M-O 13
(-) black, M-B05 (+).
Note: There are two types of disk FC cards:
type X and type Y (204). Test points (TP)
for the two cards are different:
For disk FC card X, from TP9 (+) to TP17
(-).
For disk FC card V, from TPA6 (+) to
TPA3 (-).
Whichever lightis on before loading the
diskette, the opposite light must turn on
(momentarily or permanently) when the
diskette is loaded. It does not matter
whether the first light turns off or remains
on.-
- Tests the 'write data' line.
- For disk FC card X, from TP12 (+) to
TP17 (-).
- For disk FC card V, from TPAS (+) to
TPA3 (-).
The UP light should turn on momentarily
when the diskette is loaded. Are both the probe results as stated?
Y N
- Observe the probe for each of the following
test points as you load a known good
diskette: Planar J-B02 (if second disk, K-B02): Whichever light is on prior to loading the
diskette, the opposite light must turn on
(momentarily or permanently) when the
diskette is loaded. It does not matter
whether the first light turns off or
remains on. - Planar J-B05 (if second disk, K-B05):
The UP light should turn on momentarily
when the diskette is loaded. -
- Tests the 'write gate' line.
- A diskette with no history of numeric errors.
- Signal ground at J or K-BOS.
- The signal you observe (write data) is very
short. Watch closely.
- The signal you observe (write gate) is very
short. Watch closely.
3742 ML
2-S.1
2-5.2
Are the probe results as stated?
VN
- Power down.
- Turn the stepper motor drive wheel several
revolutions with your fingers. - Power up.
- Observe the head and carriage assembly.
Did the head and carriage assembly move to
track O?
r~
- Moves the head and carriage assembly away
from track O.
At power up, the MPU should caus~ a series of
seek-to-track 0 commands. Then the leadscrew
wheel willstop in phase 0 position:
Use disk MAP 2-9.
Power down.
Place the disk drive unit in the service
position (206).
Load a diskette.
Close the cover.
Jumper the disk FC card (204A):
For disk FC card X, from TP17 to
TP22.
For disk Fe card V, from TPA3
to TPB4.
Power up.
Observe the head load actuator.
Is ~he head load actuator energized?
Y N
Power down.
Check the heaci load actuator cable for
shorts and opens. Is the head load actuator cable OK?
V N
Replace the head load actuator wires
in the disk file cable (204C).
Verify the fix.
Does the machine still fail?
V N
The disk file cable was defective.
Power down.
Replace the head load actuator (207).
Verify the fix.
Does the machine still fail?
V N
The head load actuator was defective.
Power down.
Reinstall the original head load
actuator.
Replace the disk FC card (204).
- Verify the fix.
The disk FC card was defective.
I
- Part of the disk file cable (204C).
Power down.
Check the head load actuator for proper
mechanical operation (207).
Is the head load actuator mechanically 0 K?
Y N
- Replace the head load actuator (207).
- Verify the fix.
The head load actuator was defective.
Power up.
Check the head load actuator (207).
Is the adjustment OK?
Y N
- Adjust the head load actuator (207).
- Verify the fix.
The head load actuator is out of
adjustment.
Power down.
Remove the jumper at the disk Fe card
(204A):
For disk FC card X, from TP17 to
TP22.
For disk Fe card Y, from TPA3 to
TPB4.
Swap the disk Fe cards (204A).
Power up.
If an error code occurs on the first
attempt, reload the diskette one or more
times to see if no error occurs for those
times. - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
1-
I
I
--.J
A faulty disk Fe card may cause a bad data set
label 03 (write gate check) to be written on
the disk. A good disk FC card will correct the
write test label but will indicate an error the
first time the diskette is loaded.
Does the machine still fail when using the
same disk unit?
Y N
Power down.
Replace the disk FC card in the other
unit (204A).
Verify the fix.
The disk FC card was defective.
Power down.
Reinstall the original disk FC card.
Check the disk signal cable for opens
and shorts (204B).
3742 ML
2-5.3
2-5.4
Is the cable OK?
Y N"
- Replace the disk signal cable
(2048).
- Verify the fix.
The disk signal cable was defective.
Replace the VFO card (2128).
Verify the fix.
Does the machine still fail?
YN
VfO card was defective.
11he
Power down.
Reinstall the original VFO card.
Replace the head and carriage assembly
(225).
Verify the fix.
Does the machine still fail?
YN
The head and carriage assembly was
defective.
- Power down.
- Reinstall the original head and carriage
assembly.
- Use MPU MAP 5-1.
Power down.
Replace the disk signal cable (2048, 202A).
Verify the fix.
The disk signal cable was defective.
Power down.
Turn the stepper motor drive wheel several
revolutions with your fingers. Power up.
Observe the head and carriage assembly. Did the head and carriage assembly move to
track O?
YN
I-
Use disk MAP 2'9.
Does the leadscrew wheel stop in phase 0
position?
YN
Power down.
Adjust the head (208).
Verify the adjustment with the CE diskette (MAP 2-11).
- Moves the head and carriage assembly away
from track O.
At power up, the MPU should cause a series of
seek-to-track 0 commands. Then the leadscrew
wheel will stop in phase 0 position:
Does the machine still fail?
Y N
The head was out of adjustment.
Load a known good diskette. Perform the failing operation.
-
A diskette with no history of numeric errors.
Does the machine still fail?
Y N
The problem is the other diskette.
Use disk MAP 2-1 with the failing diskette.
Power down.
Swap the disk Fe cards (204A).
Power up.
-. Try loading the diskette at least twice.
Does the machine still fail when using the same
disk unit?
Y N
Power down.
Replace the disk FC card in the other disk
unit.
Verify the fix.
The disk FC card was defective.
Power down.
Reinstall the original disk FC card if replaced.
Check the disk signal cable for opens, shorts,
and grounds (204B).
Is the cable OK?
Y N
- Replace the disk signal cable (204B).
- Verify the fix.
The disk signal cable was defective.
Replace the VFO card (212B).
Verify the fix.
Does the machine still fail?
Y N
The VFO card was defective.
I
-
~Power
down.
Reinstall the original VFO card.
- Replace the head and carriage assembly (225).
- Verify the fix.
The head and carriage assembly was defective.
3742 ML
2-5.5,
2-5.6
This page intentionally left blank.
MAP 2-6 -
This MAP will help find not ready, missing
disk address, and missing or wrong machine
status problems.
Check to see if you can find anyone of the
following defects in the problem/suspect disk
drive unit:
1.
Belt - off or damaged (216K).
2.
Pulley (2) - loose (2160, 216G).
3.
Idler assembly - defective mechanical
operation (216E) ..
4.
Drive motor - binding or sticking (216N).
5.
Cover or cover pivot (2) -loose or broken
(224E).
Is the disk drive in the failingstation free of all the
listed defects?
Y N
Repair or replace the faulty part.
verify the fix.
Does the machine still fail?
Y N
- Select the proper I R code and cause code
for the faulty part from t~e charts.
Can you make the machine fail?
Y N
When the failure is intermittent, perform the
following steps, one on each call, until the
problem is solved.
Record the date of each action.
Vibrate the machine to try to cause the
failure.
Check the room temperature and the
humidity and compare it to the installation
procedure, page 16-1.
Check the dc voltages at the disk FC card
(204A) with respect to fram ground.
Note: There are two types of disk FC
cards: type X and type Y (204A). Test
points (TP) for the two cards are
different:
I
.
Vdc
Card X Card Y
+24
+5
TPAll
TPB7
TPA12
TPA3
TPl
TP23
TP5
Ground TP17
~-5
Limits
22.0 to 26.5
4.7 to 5.5
4.6 to 5.4
0
A ".
L.
3742 ML
2-6.1
TNL: SN31·6233 to SY31·0502·0 ( 9 May 1978)
II
2-6.2
-
Power down.
-
Reseat both ends of the disk signal cable
(2048, 212A). Reseat the disk file cable at the disk FC
card (204C).
-
-
At the disk unitand MPU planar, position J for
disk 1 and K for disk 2.
-
At the disk unit and MPU planar, position J for
disk 1 and K for disk 2.
Verify t;.;.:h=e....;..fi,x;.;..._~---,
DATE: .....--..&.I_~--I
1
-
Power down.
Swap the disk units.
-
Verify t;.;.h.;.;;.e_f......
ix....;.._....---,-,
-
Power down.
Replace the LED assembly (223).
_,-I_'----I
DATE:L-I
-
Verify t;.:..h;.:,.e_f'""Tix_._-r----,
DATE: L-I---..JIL..-.....L.....~
Power down.
Replace the phototransistor assembly (243).
-
Verity t;.:..h.;.;;.e_f-rlx...;...- - r - - ,
.....
1 _'---oJ
Power down.
Replace the disk FC card (204A).
Verify the fix.
-
Power down.
Replace the disk file cable (204C).
Verity the fix.
DATE:L-I_
DATE:;""'I----rl-..,...I-~--,
DATE
-
:""-1-----rl-~.....,
Power down.
Replace the disk signal cable (2048).
Verify the fix .
. 0 ATE: ----'Ir----"---T---'
""'1
-
-
.c
Replace the ac line filter.
Verity the fix.
-"-1-.-----.
DATE :1"-
Power down.
Reseat both ends of the disk signal cable
(2048, 212A). Reseat the disk FC card (204A).
Reseat the disk file cable (204C).
Verify the fix .
~
Does the machine still fail?
Y N
The cables or the disk Fe card was loose.
I
- Remove the diskette.
- Power down.
- Turn the stepper motor wheel several revolutions.
Power up.
- Observe the head and carriage assembly (208G).
Did the stepper motor cause the disk unit to seek
Track OO?
Y N
I-
-
The power-up routine should cause the stepper
motor to seek track 0 several times. When the
read/write head reaches track 0, the stepping
action is audible.
Use disk MAP 2-9.
Place the disk drive unit in the service position
(206).
Close the disk cover. -
- The disk cover may be causing the failure.
Is the disk drive hub turning (216A)?
Y N
Is the disk drive motor running (216N)?
Y N
Disconnect the ac cable at the disk drive
motor (216F).
Check the machine ac voltage tag for
limits.
- Use the CE meter to measure the voltage
at the cable connector. - The ac voltage and limits are:
Voltage
100 Vac
110 Vac
115 Vac
123 Vac
200 Vac
Limits
90 to
99 to
103 to
111 to
180 to
110
121
127
136
220
Voltage
Limits
204
208
220
230
235
179 to 229
187 to 229
198 to 242
207 to 253
211 to 259
Vac
Vac
Vac
Vac
Vac
- The two outside pins are the ac voltage pins.
Is the voltage within limits?
Y N
- Measure the voltage at the power supply
transformer TB1, terminals 7 and 9 (244B).
3742 ML
2-6.3
2-6.4
Is the voltage within limits?
I-
Y N
Use power supply MAP 6-6.
Power down.
Replace the power supply ac cable (244A).
Verify the fix.
The power supplyac cable was defective.
Power down.
Place the disk drive unit in the service
position (206).
Replace the disk drive motor (216N).
Verify the fix.
The disk drive motor was defective.
Power down.
Place the disk drive unit in the service
position (206).
Remove the disk drive belt (216K).
Spin the disk drive shaft with your fingers.
Is the disk drive shaft free of binds?
YN
Open the disk cover.
Spin the disk drive shaft with your fingers.
Does the disk drive shaft bind now?
Y N
Reinstall the disk drive belt (216K).
Check the disk top cover for proper
alignment (237).
Verify the fix.
Check the collet for spring deflection
with the cover closed.
Does the spring deflect correctly?
Y N
Replace the collet assembly (222).
Verify the fix.
Does the machine still fail?
Y N
I
The disk top cover needed adjustment.
Power down.
Replace the disk collet assembly (222).
Verify the fix.
Does the machine still fail?
YN
The disk collet assembly was defective.
I
Power down.
Reinstall the original disk collet
assembly (222).
- Replace the disk drive cover (221).
- Verify the fix.
The disk drive cover was defective.
Replace the disk drive shaft bearings
and/or replace the disk drive hub and
shaft assembly (217).
- Be sure the new shaft runs free.
- Verify the fix.
The disk drive hub and the shaft assembly
and/or bearings were defective.
Spin the disk drive motor with your fingers.
Does the disk drive motor bind?
YN
Check the disk idler assembly for proper
mechanical operation and belt tracking
(216E).
Is the disk idler OK?
Y N
Adjust the disk idler assembly for
proper belt tracking.
Verify the fix.
Does the machine still fail?
Y N
The disk idler assembly was out of
adjustment.
- Replace the disk idler assembly.
- Verify the fix.
The disk idler assembly was defective.
Check/replace the disk drive belt (216K).
Verify the fix.
3742 ML
2-6.5
2-6.6
Does the machine still fail?
Y N
The belt was worn or defective.
I
Reinstall the original belt, if replaced.
- Replace the disk drive pulley (216G).
- Verify the fix.
The disk drive pulley was defective.
- Replace the disk drive motor (216N).
- Verify the fix.
The disk drive motor was defective:
-
Load a diskette.
Are the error code positions blank?
Y N
Hold NUM SHIFT and press RESET
LJ
-
Remove any diskette in the other station.
Press FUNCT SE L lower
Hold NUM SHIFT and press the C key.
Press the 0 key.
Did the machine fail to change to CEW mode?
Y N
The position of the cursor identifies the
disk speed. Position 1 is 150 ms and each
additional position is 1 ms. Is the disk-speed between 163 and 171 ms?
Y N
- Power down.
- Place the disk drive in the service
position (206).
Replace disk collet assembly (222).
- Verify the fix.
Does the machine still fail?
Y N
The disk collet assembly was defective.
I
- Reinstall the original collet assembly.
-'- Replace the disk drive cover (221).
- Verify the fix.
The disk drive cover was defective.
Use MAP 2-7.
"""I
001
o AA
01234567890123456_
00008
CEW
Is the disk turning (observe the disk collet
assembly) (224)?
YN
Is the disk drive shaft turning?
Y N
Power down.
Tighten the disk drive pulley screw.
Verify the fix.
Does the machine fail now?
Y N
The pulley was loose on the shaft.
Power down.
Replace the disk drive pulley (216G).
Verify the fix.
The disk drive pulley was defective.
Power down.
Place the disk drive unit in the service
posit ion (206).
Replace the disk collet assembly (222).
Verify the fix.
Does the machine still fail?
Y N
The disk collet assembly was defective.
I
Reinstall the original disk collet assembly.
- Replace the disk drive cover (221).
- Verify the fix.
The disk drive cover was defective.
Use MAP 2-7.
3742 ML
2-6.7
2-6.8
This page intentionally left blank.
MAP 2-7-
- Remove the diskette.
- Power down.
Swap the disk cables at planar sockets J and K.
Disk drive 1 will now be connected to
station 2 and disk drive 2 will be connected to station 1. Power up.
Load a different diskette in the other
disk drive (a disk with no history of errors).
Does the machine still fail exactly as before?
Y N
Power down.
Reconnect the disk signal cables at
planar sockets J and K to their original
connectors.
Power up .
.- Use disk MAP 2-8.
- This MAP is a continuation of MAP 2-6.
Control
Control
....
_--
--
Keyboard
1
Control and display interactions with disk drive
signal cables swapped at planar sockets J and K(212B).
Power down.
Reconnect the planar cable connectors J
and K to their original positions.
Reseat planar cross connectors A and
B (212B).
Verify the fix.
Does the machine still fail?
Y N
A cross connector was loose.
I
Power down.
Replace the VFO card (212B).
Verify the fix.
Does the machine still fail?
Y N
·1
The VFO card was defective.
Power down.
Reinstall the original VFO card.
Use MPU MAP 5-1.
3742 ML
2-7.1
2-7.2
This page intentionally left blank.
MAP 2-S -
- This MAP is a continuation of MAP 2-7.
- Power up.
- Set the CE meter to the 5 Vdc scale to measure
the voltage on the disk FC card (204A). -
Check the LED for input voltage.
Note: There are two types of disk FC cards:
type X and type V (204A). Test points (TP)
for the two cards are different:
For disk FC card X, from TP16 (+) to
TP17 (-).
For disk FC card V, from TPA2 (+) to
TPA3 (-).
Is the voltage 1.0 to 1.6 Vdc?
VN
Set the CE meter to the 15 Vdc scale to
measure the voltage on the disk FC card
(204A): For disk FC card X, from TP23 (+) to
TP17 (-).
For disk FC card V, from TPB7 (+) to
TPA3 (-).
Is the voltage 4.7 to 5.5 Vdc?
V N
Make a note of the voltage measurement
for future reference.
Power down.
Disconnect the disk signal cable from the
disk FC card (204B).
Power up.
Measure the voltage at the disk FC card
end of the disk signal cable with respect
to frame ground. -
Vdc
Test Point Range
Check the FC card for a power slJPply
voltage.
o
B
02 : :
II
••
••
••
••
••
••
••
13 • •
+5
B03
4.7 to 5.5
Is the dc voltage within limits?
VN
Power down.
Reconnect disk signal cable.
Use power supply MAP 6-1.
3742 ML
2-S.1
TNL: SN31-6233 to SY31-0502-0 ( 9 May 1978)
2-8.2
Power down.
Reconnect the disk signal cable (2048).
Replace the disk FC card (204A).
Verify the fix.
Attempt loading a diskette at least
twice. Does the machine still fail?
Y N
The disk Fe card was defective.
I
. Power down.
Reinstall the original disk FC card.
Use MAP 6-7.
Power down.
Place the disk drive unit in the service
position (206).
Replace the LED assembly (223).
Verify the fix.
Does the machine still fail?
Y N
The LED assembly was defective.
I
Power down.
Reinstall the original LED.
Replace the LED cable wires in the disk
file cable (204C).
- Verify the fix.
Does the machine still fail?
Y N
The disk file cable was defective.
I
Power down.
Replace the disk Fe card (204).
Verify the fix.
The disk FC card was defective.
Power down.
Check/adjust the disk top cover for
binds (237).
Verify the fix.
D
A faulty disk FC card may cause a bad data set
label 03 (write gate check) to be written on the
disk. A good disk FC card will correct the
write test label- but will indicate an error the
first time the diskette is loaded .
Does the machine still fail?
Y N
I
The disk drive top cover needed adjustment. -
See 237. A malfunction can be caused by a
broken pivot. Check the collet for spring
deflection with the cover closed.
-
Power down.
Place the disk drive unit in the service
position (206).
Remove the disk drive belt (216K).
Check the disk idler assembly for proper
mechanical operation (216E).
Is the disk idler OK?
Y N
Repair or replace the disk idler
assembly (216E).
Verify the fix.
The disk idler assembly was defective.
Reinstall the disk drive belt.
Power up.
Load a diskette.
- Test the probe at planar P-Bl0 (signal
r- Connect probe power leads to planar M-D13 (-)
ground P-D08). Both lights should be on. - - - - I black, M-B05 (+).
Probe the disk FC card (204A): - - -. - - - - - Output from the phototransistor amplifier.
- For disk Fe card X, from TP2 (+) to
TP17 (-).
- For disk FC card Y, from TPB14 (+) to
TPA3 (-).
Are both probe I ights on?
Y N
Check the interlock switch for loose
wires (204).
Are~tne wires OK (not loose)?
Y N
- Connect the loose wires. - Verify the fix.
A wire was loose.
Check the interlock switch for proper
adjustment (220).
-
If the switch terminals are pointing
downward, carefully form them upward
to a horizontal position or slightly above.
This will prevent the wires from slipping
off.
Is the adjustment OK?
Y N
- Adjust the interlock switch (220).
- Verify the fix.
The switch was out of adjustment.
3742 ML
2-8.3
2-8.4
The normally closed points should open
when the disk top cover is closed.
Is the switch OK?
Y N
Replace the interlock switch (220).
Reconnect the cable at the interlock
switch.
Verify the fix.
The interlock switch was defective.
Check the cable between the interlock
. witch and the disk FC card for an open
c.'rcuit (204).
Are the wires OK?
Y N
Replace or repair the cable.
Reconnect the cable at the interlock
switch.
Verify the fix.
The cable was defective.
Power down.
Reconnect the cable at the interlock
switch.
Disconnect the ac power plug from the disk
drive motor.
Remove the diskette from the drive and
close the disk top cover. Set the CE meter to the 15 Vdc scale to
measure the voltage on the disk FC card
(204A):
For disk FC card X, from TP23 (+) to
TP8 (-).
For disk FC card Y , from TPA3 (+) to
TPB5(-).
Power up.
-
Preparing to check the phototransistor.
Is the voltage:
- +3.5 Vdc or more on disk FC card X?
- -1 Vdc to -5.6 Vdc on disk FC card Y? Y N
Adjust the phototransistor assembly
(243).
Measure the voltage:
For disk FC card X, from TP23 (+) to
TP8 (-),
For disk FC card Y , from TPA3 (+) to
TPB5 (-).
The voltage should be +3.5 Vdc or more.
The voltage should be -1 Vdc to -5.6 Vdc..
Is the voltage:
+3.5 Vdc or more on disk FC card X?
-1 Vdc to -5.6 Vdc on disk FC card Y?
Y N
Replace the phototransistor
assembly (243).
Reconnect the ac power plug to
disk drive motor.
Verify the fix.
Does the machine still fail?
Y N
The phototransistor was defective.
I
Replace the disk FC card (204A).
Reinstall the original
phototransistor assembly (243).
Verify the fix.
The disk FC card was defective.
Power down.
Reconnect the ac power plug to the
disk drive motor.
Verify the fix.
The phototransistor assembly needed
adjustment.
-
Insert a diskette in the drive backwards
so that the diskette jacket blocks light
to the phototransistor.
Close the disk top cover.
Set the CE meter to the 5 Vdc scale to
measure the voltage on the disk FC card
(204A):
For disk FC card X, for TP23 (+) to
TP8 (-).
For disk FC card Y , from TPB5 (+) to
TPA3 (-).
3742 ML
2-8.5
2-SJ
Is the voltage:
+0.5 Vdc or less on disk FC card X? +1 Vdc or more on disk FC card Y?
Y N
The voltage should be +0.5 Vdc or less.
The voltage should be +1 Vdc or more.
Power down.
Replace the phototransistor assembly
(243).
Reconnect the ac power plug to the
disk drive motor.
Verify the fix.
Does the machine still fail?
Y N
The phototransistor was defective.
I
I
,Power down.
Replace the disk FC card (204A).
Attempt loading the diskette at least
twice. Reinstall the original phototransistor
assembly (243).
Verify the fix.
The disk FC card was defective.
Reconnect the ac power plug to the disk
drive motor.
Check the diskette for proper hole
al ignment.-
A faulty disk FC card may cause a bad
data set label 03 (write gate check) to be
written on the disk. A good disk Fe
card will correct the write test label but
will indicate an error the first time the
diskette is loaded.
- Diskette.
0,... . . . --<
"
Power down.
Swap the disk FC cards.
Power up.
Attempt loading the diskette at least
twice. Does the machine still fail when using
the same disk drive unit?
Y N
- Power down.
- Replace the disk FC card in the
other disk drive unit (204A).
- Verify the fix.
The disk FC card was defective.
0
Hole for index pulse (should
--":.,..,-+-- line
: @ :
\ 0 /
\,~ - - ~ ~/
...
Disk
-~--~-+--
up with hole in the disk)
Hole in disk for
disk clamping cone
Read Head Aperture
A faulty disk FC card may cause a bad
data set label 03 Write gate check) to be
written on the disk. A good disk FC
card will correct the write test label but
will indicate an error the first time the
diskette is loaded.
Power down.
Reinstall the original disk FC card.
Check the disk signal cable for opens,
shorts, and grounds (2048).
Is the disk signal cable OK?
Y N
- Replace the disk signal cable (2048).
- Verify the fix.
The disk signal cable was defective.
Does the disk drive become ready (X R mode)
for each diskette used? YN
-
One index pulse per revel uti on.
Does the disk drive fail to become
ready (XR mode) for each diskette
used?
YN
The index amplifier was affected by
light from the LED passing through
the diskette. The adjustment
successfully desensitized disk FC
card Y.
Use MPU MAP 5-1.
Use MPU MAP 5-1.
Probe planar J-D13 (or K-D13).
-
Are both probe lights on?
Y N
Power down.
Replace the disk signal cable (2048).
Verify the fix.
The disk signal cable was defective.
Jumper the disk FC card (204A).
- For disk FCcard X, from TP17 to TP22.
- For disk FC card Y, from TPA3 to TP84.
Check the pressure pad. -
-
Attempt to isolate the trouble in eitherthe disk
signal cable or the MPU. Signal ground at J or
K-80S.
Move the pressure pad away from the head
and observe its return.
3742 ML
2-8.7
2-8.8
~
Is the pressure pad (221 A) pressing the disk
against the head?
Y N
Remove the jumper from the disk FC card
(204A).
- For disk FC card X, from TP17 to TP22.
- For disk FC card Y, from TPA3 to TPB4.
- Power down.
- Replace the head carriage assembly. - Verify the fix.
The head carriage assembly was defective.
Power down.
Remove the jumper from the disk FC card
(204A).
- For disk FC card X, from TP17 to TP22.
- For disk FC card Y, from TPA3 to TPB4.
Reseat planar cross connectors A and B
(2128).
Verify the fix.
Does the machine still fail?
Y N
I
A cross connector was loose.
Power down.
Replace theVFO card (2128).
Verify the fix.
Does the machine still fail?
Y N
I
The VFO card was defective.
Power down.
Reinstall the original VFO card.
Check the disk signal cable for an open,
shorts, or grounds (204B).
Is the cable OK?
Y N
Replace the disk signal cable.
Verify the fix.
Does the machine still fail?
I
Y N
The disk signal cable was defective.
-
Use MPU MAP 5·1.
Use MPU MAP 5·1.
-
Use the Leadscrewand Head Carriage Assembly
Removal and Replacement procedure (225);
then return here.
MAP 2-9-
- This MAP will help find seek errors (without
data errors).
Can you make the machine fail?
Y N
- When the failure is intermittent, perform
the following steps, one on each call, until
the problem is solved.
Record the date of each action.
Vibrate the machine to attempt to cause the
failure.
Check the room temperature and humidity
and compare them to Installation Procedure,
page 16-1.
Check the dc voltages at the disk FC card
(204A) with respect to frame ground.
Note: There are two types of disk FC
cards: type X and type Y (204A). Test
points (TP) for the two cards are
different:
Vdc
Card X Card Y
+24
+5
-5
Ground
TPl
TP23
TP5
PT17
TPAll
TPB7
TPA12
TPA3
Limits
22.0 to 26.5
4.7 to 5.5
4.6 to 5.4
0
Remove any diskette in the other station.
Load a diskette.
Presss FUNCT SEL lower
Hold NUM SH I FT and press the C key.
Press the J key.
Hold down the REP key and the space bar
(SP on the proof keyboard) while observing
the head assembly.
Does the head assembly advance without
missing a step?
Y N
Power down.
Replace the stepper motor (229).
Ver ify t....h_e_f_ixT'"'._--.-_......,
DA TE: L-I_,--I_ . L - - - - I
Power down.
Replace the disk Fe card (204A).
Verify the
fix.
,..--.,.---..-----.
:L-I
DATE -.--...JIL----L-~
Replace the disk signal cable (2048).
Verify the fix.
~-.,.---.----.
DATE:
IL----JII.----L-----!
3742 ML
2-9.1
TNL: SN31-6233 to SY31-0502-0 (9 May 1978)
2-9.2
Power down.
Reseat the disk signal cable (2048, 212A).
Reseat the disk file cable (204C).
Reseat the disk FC card (204A).
DATE:I
I
Power down.
Swap the disk units.
Verify tr-h_e_f-.ix~._..,....._.....
DATE
Replace the ac line filter.
Verify the fix.
I
I
:11----1..1_...1....--1
DATE
:1-1-----'-I_-'--~
Does the other disk drive unit operate correctly?
YN
I-
Use MAP 5-'_
Power down.
Place the failing disk drive unit in the service
position (206).
Check the leadscrew for binds (242).
Is the leadscrew free of binds? YN
Loosen the stepper motor mounting and
move it away from the leadscrew (242Z).
Check the stepper motor for binds. Is the stepper motor assembly free of binds?
Y N
Replace the stepper motor assembly
(229). Verify the fix.
The stepper motor was out of adjustment.
Turn the stepper motor drive wheel with
your fingers.
Try to identify where the problem is before
replacing any parts.
Turn the stepper motor drive wheel with
your fingers.
Remove the stepper motor and bracket
assembly by removing two screws holding the
stepper motor bracket to the baseplate.
Check the leadscrew for binds (242).
Are there any binds?
Y N
- Reinstall and adjust the stepper
motor (230). Verify the fix.
The stepper motor was out of adjustment.
Replace the upper and lower leadscrew
bearings and/or replace the head and
carriage assembly and bearings as required
(includes leadscrew)' - Verify the fix.
The head and carriage assembly and/or the
leadscrew bearings were defective.
c
Use the Stepper Motor Adjustment procedure.
Then return to this point in this MAP.
U!'e the Leadscrewand Head Carriage Assembly
Removal and Replacement procedure (225).
Then return to this point in this MAP.
.~
Turn the stepper motor drive wheel several
revolutions with your fingers (208M). Power up.
Observe the head and carriage assembly. -
Does the head carriage assembly move to track OO?
Y N
Power down.
Set the CE meter to the 50 Vdc scale.
Measure the voltage for each listed pair
of test points at the disk FC card (204A)
as you turn the power on for each pair.
During power up, the meter first reads
24 Vdc. After 5 or 10 seconds, the meter
must pulse down to 20 or 15 Vdc.
Moves the head and carriage assembly away
from track O.
At power up, the MPU should cause a series
of seek-to-track 0 commands. Then the leadscrew wheel will stop in phase 0 position:
Note: There are two types of disk FC
cards: type X and type Y (204). Test
points (TP) for the two cards are
different:
For disk FC card X:
TP17 (-) to TP18 (+) (stepper motor
phase 0)
TP17 (-) to TP19 (+) (stepper motor
phase 3)
TP17 (-) to TP20 (+) (stepper motor
phase 2)
TP17 (-) to TP21 (+) (stepper motor
phase 1)
Fordisk·FC card Y:
TPA3 (-) to TPB2 (+) (stepper motor
phase 0)
TPA3 (-) to TPB1 (+) (stepper motor
phase 3)
TPA3 (-) to TPB3 (+) (stepper motor
phase 2)
TPA3 (-) to TPA 1 (+) (stepper motor
phase 1)
3742 ML
2-9.3
2-9.4
Does the voltage pulse down to 20 or 15 Vdc
for each pair of test points as stated before?
Y N
Test the probe at planar P-B10 (signal
ground P-D08). Both probe lights
should be on. Power down.
Probe each test point in the line to the
stepper motor amplifier at the disk FC
card (204A) as you turn power on. Both
lights should be on and pulsing during
power up.Power up for each test point.
For disk FC card X:
TP4 (+ access 2)!
.
TP6 (+ access 3) Signal ground TP17
TP7 (+ access 1)
TP15 (+ access 0)
For disk FC card Y:
TPB10
TPB11
TPB9
TPB8
(+ access 2)!
(+ access 3) Signal ground
(+ access 1) .
TPA3
(+ access 0)
Are both probe lights on and pulsing for
each test point during the disk seek
operation?
Y N
Power down.
Disconnect the disk signal cable
planar socket J (or planar socket K).
Probe the pin in the line to the failing
stepper motor amplifier at planar J
(or planar K). Both lights should be
on during power up.
Power up for each test point. (Always
wait 5 seconds after each power
down.)
- After 5 or 10 seconds, the UP light
should be on and pulsing. (Ignore
the DOWN light.)
003
D02
D04
005
(+ access 1) !
(+ access 0)
Signal ground at
(+ access 2)
J or K-B08
(+ access 3)
Connect probe power leads to planar M-D 13
(-) black, M-B05(+}.
Five or 10 seconds after power up, the MPU
should cause a series of seek-to-track 0
commands.
Is the UP light on and pulsing during the
disk seek operation for each test point?
Y N
Power down.
Reconnect the disk signal cable
connector at planar socket J (or
planar socket K).
Power up.
- Measure all voltages at 'the disk FC
card (204A) with reference to
frame ground. Vdc
Card X Card Y Limits
+24
TPl
+5
TP23
-5
TP5
Ground TP17
TPAll
22.0 to
26.5
TPB7
4.7 to
5.5
TPA12 4.6 to
5.4
TPA3 0
Are all voltages within limits?
Y N
Make a note of the failing
voltage measurement for future
reference.
Power down.
Disconnect the disk signal cable
at the diskFC card (204B).
Power up.
Measure the failing voltage at
the disk end of the disk signal
cable with respect to frame
ground. -
Vdc
+24
+5
Test
Point
B10
B03
-5
B11
Ground B08
- The problem may be due to ripple in the
power supply. If ripple is suspected, use
Power Theory in Section 15.
D B
Range
22.0 to 26.5
4.7 to 5.5
4.6 to 5.4
o
Is the failing voltage within
limits?
Y N
- Power down.
- Reconnect the disk signal
cable.
Use power supply
MAP 6-1.
3742 ML
2-9.5
TNL: SN31-6233 to SY31-0502-0 ( 9 May 1978)
2-9.6
\~~~J),~
-
.
Power down.
Reconnect the disk signal cable
(204B).
Replace the disk Fe card (204A).
Verify the fix.
Attempt loading a diskette at
least twice. -
Does the machine still fail?
YN
I
The disk Fe card was defective.
Power down.
Reinstall the original disk
card.
- Use MAP 6-7.
Fe
A faulty disk Fe card may cause a bad data set
label 03 (write gate check) to be written on the
disk. A good disk Fe card will correct the
write test label but will indicate an error the
first time the diskette is loaded.
Power down.
Swap the disk FC cards.
Power up.
Does the machine still fail when using
the same disk unit?
Y N
- Power down.
- Replace the disk FC card in the
other disk unit (204A).
- Verify the fix.
The disk FC card was defective.
Power down.
Reinstall the original disk Fe card.
Check the disk signal cable for
opens and shorts (204B).
Is the disk signal cable OK?
Y N
Replace the disk signal cable
(204B).
- Verify the fix.
The disk signal cable was defective.
Use MPU MAP 5-1.-
- The failure may be caused by ripple in the
power supply. If ripple is suspected, use
Power Theory in Section 15.
3742 ML
2-9.7
2-9.8
Power down.
Check the disk signal cable for open
and/or short circuits including short
circuits to the frame (2048).
Is the cable OK?
Y N
Replace the disk signal cable
(2048).
Verify the fix.
The disk signal cable was defective.
- Replace the disk Fe card (204A).
- Verify the fix.
The disk FC card was defective.
Use MAP 2-10.
Load the CE diskette in the disk drive to be
checked. Press REC ADV
Press FUNCT SEL lower
Press UPDATE
Can a pair of matching record messages be read
correctly from tracks 06, 07,08 and 09? Y N
Power down.
Adjust the head (208).
Verify the adjustment with the CE diskette.
Does the machine still fail?
YN
The head was out of adjustment.
Use MAP 2-10.
If disk drive 2 is being checked, swap disk
signal cables in positions J and Kat MPU.
Cables must be restored to original position
upon completion of this test.
See MAP 2-11 for additional explanation. (A
single pair of matching records per track is
sufficient. Increment to the next track when
one good pair is found.)
MAP 2-10 -
- This MAP is a continuation of MAP 2-9.
Measure the dc voltages at the disk Fe card
(204A) with respect to frame ground. Note: There are two types of disk Fe
cards: type X and type Y (204A). Test
points (TP) for the two cards are
different:
Vdc
Card X Card Y
Limits
+24
+5
-5
Ground
TPl
TP23
TP5
TP17
22.0 to 26.5
4.7 to 5.5
4.6 to 5.4
0
TPAll
TP87
TPA12
TPA3
Are all voltages within limits?
Y N
Make a note of the failing voltage measurement for future reference.
Power down.
Disconnect the disk signal cable (2048) at
the Fe card.
Power up.
- Measure the failing voltage at the Fe card
end of the disk signal cable with reference
to frame ground. Vdc
Test Point
Range
+24
+5
-5
Ground
810
803
22.5 to 26.5
4.7 to 5.5
4.6 to 5.4
0
Bll
B08
- The problem may be caused by ripple in the
power supply. If ripple is suspected, use
Power Theory in Section 15.
D 8
Is the failing voltage within limits?
Y N
Power down.
Reconnect the disk signal cable.
Use power supply MAP 6-1.
I
JA
Power down.
Reconnect the disk signal cable (204B).
Replace the disk FC card (204A).
Verify the fix.
At~empt loading the diskette at least
tWice. -
A faulty disk Fe card may cause a bad data set
label 03 (write gate check) to be written on the
disk. A good disk FC card will correct the
write test label but will indicate an error the
first time the diskette is loaded.
3742ML
2-10.1
TNL: SN31-6233 to SY31-0502-0 ( 9 May 1978)
2-10.2
~
Does the machine still fail?
I
Y N
The
disk Fe card was defective.
Power down.
Reinstall the original disk FC card.
Use MAP 6-7.
Power down.
Swap the disk FC cards (204).
Power up.
Attempt loading the diskette at least twice.
Does the machine still fail when using the same
disk unit?
YN
Power down.
Replace the disk FC card in the other
disk drive.
Verify the fix.
The disk FC card was defective.
Power down.
Reinstall the original disk FC card.
R{!place the stepper motor assembly (229). Verify the fix.
Does the machine still fail?
Y N
l:::::e::n~Otor as~mbly was defective.
Reinstall the orig-inal stepper motor
assembly.
Check the disk signal cable for shorts and
opens- (2048).
Is the cable OK?
Y N
- Rep~ace the disk signal cable (2048).
- Verify the fix.
The disk signal cable was defective.
Use MPU MAP 5-1.
Remove the stepper motor and bracket assembly
by removing the two screws holding the stepper
motor bracket to the baseplate.
MAP 2-11 -
Remove diskette(s) from both station disk
units.
Load CE diskette (PIN 2455026) in the disk
un it to be tested. -"
-
This MAP helps you check for bad head
alignment.
-
See Display Data Head Alignment Service
Check (page 8-16) and CE Alignement Check
Diskette (page 8-15).
-
Dependent upon head alignment, the disk drive
mayor may not be able to read and match up the
first 10 of track 06 with the first record of track
06. If successful, the display will look like this:
Note: The machine must be able to read and
display track 00, and also to seek to and read
other tracks on a disk. Use the Symptom Index
(page 1-2) to trouble shoot machine
malfunctions.
Power up and wait for 30 seconds.
Are the error code positions blank?
Y N
Hold numeric shift and press RESET
I-
Press REC ADV to advance to data set
label 00009.
Press FUNC SEL lower
Press UPDATE _ .... - - - - - ___
- :
I
I
1
Are the error code positions blank?
Y N
~ Hold numeric shift and press RESET.
-
001
o A A 06001
UR
TRACK 6,RECORD 1 CK STATUS LINE 06001
HEAD ALIGNMT OK IF RECORD 2 CAN BE READ
-.J
Press REC ADV-
\
J
A correctly read and displayed record message
is one that:
1.
2.
3.
The objective of the alignment check is to
find a pair of matching record messages
in each alignment check track. The tracks
are 06, 07, 08, and 09. REC ADV to tracks
07,08 and 09. Can a pair of matching record messages be read
correctly from each of the four tracks?
Y N
Check the head adjustment (208).
Verify the fix.
The head was out of adjustment.
Press FUNCT SE L lower
Press RETURN TO INDEX
Remove the diskette.
The head alignment is correct.
Is displayed immediately after R EC ADV
or REC BKSP with no error code.
Has correct data content.
Has track and record numbers in the
record that agree with the record counter
in the status line.
Matching record messages refer to each other
in pairs, like record 1 refers to record 2, and
record 2 refers to record 1. Record 3 refers
to record 4, record 4 to record 3, and so on.
Failure to pass this test does not necessarily
conclude that the head is out of adjustment
since other faults which cause marginal reading
may affect the results. (A single of matching records per track is sufficient. Increment
to the next track when one good pair is found.)
3742 ML
2-11.1
2-11.2
This page intentionally left blank.
MAP 2-12
The following MAPs are designed to assist in
locating speed or throughput problems. These
kinds of problems are normally caused by poor
diskettes, malfunctioning disk drive, sticking/
binding keys, clicker operation or head load
actuator. -
See 245 for approximate timing information
on search, copy, and initialization operations.
- Power up.
- Load a diskette is disk drive 1.
- CHAR ADV to position 29. - Hold NUM SHIFT and enter 01001
- CHAR ADV to position 35.
Hold NUM SHIFT and enter 73026
Press FUNCT SE L lower.
Press M
RECADV
- Turn OFF the AUTO REC ADV and AUTO
DUP/SKIPswitches.
Press FUNCT SEL lower
DELETE REC
Enter D-----E
Press FUNCT SE L lower
The next steps will modify the data set label
as follows: BOE=01 001, EOE=73026.
Blanks data to prepare for entering a program,
D-----E in program level 1.
/
Press FUNCT SE L lower
ENTER
SEL PROG
-
Enter 123456
Perform a 5-minute speed test.
Set Auto DUP/SKIP and AUTO REC ADV to
ON.
Wait 5 minutes.
Set AUTO REC ADV to OFF.
Observe the disk 1 address in status line
positions.
Numeric shift not necessary as D-----E program
is in numeric shift.
Is the disk address at least 28023?
Y N
Press FUNCT SEL lower
Press and hold NUM SHIFT and press C
Press 0 (letter 0).
- The position of the cursor identifies the disk
speed. Position 1 is 150 ms and each
additional position is 1 ms. -
- Check speed of disk drive.
001
0
A A
01234567890123456_
00008
\
CEW
J
3742 ML
2-12.1
2-12.2
Is the disk speed between 163 and 171 ms?
YN
- Use MAP 2-6.
- load CE diskette (PIN 2455026).
- Press REC ADV
FUNCT SE L lower
UPDATE
Can a pair of matching record messages be
read correctly from tracks 06,07,08 and 09? YN
Use Disk MAP 2-2.
I-
- See MAP 2-11 for additional information. (A
single pair of matching records per track is
sufficient. Increment to the next track when
one good pair is found.)
- Use Disk MAP 2-1.
-
Power down.
SwaP cables at MPU planar sockets J and K. Power up.
load a diskette in disk drive 2.
CHAR ADV to position 29. Hold NUM SH 1FT and enter 01001
CHAR ADV to position 35.
Hold NUM SHIFT and enter 73026
Press FUNCT SEL lower
Press M
RECADV
Turn off the AUTO REC ADV and
AUTO DUP/SKIP switches
Press FUNCT SE L lower
DELETE REC
PressD-E
Press FUNCT SEL lower
I
1
- Press FUNCT SEL lower
ENTER
- PressSELPROG
1
- Enter 123456
- This step is to perform a 5-minute speed
test. Turn on AUTO DUP/SKIP and
AUTO REC ADV switches. At the end of
5 minutes turn OFF AUTO REC ADV.
C
- Test throughput speed of drive 2.
The next steps modify the data set label
as follows: BOE=01001, EOE=73026
- Blanks data to prepare for entering a program,
D-----Ein program level 1.
Observe the disk 1 address in status line
positions.
Is the disk address at least 280237
Y N
Press FUNCT SEL lower.
Press and hold NUM SHIFT and press C.
Press the 0 (letter 0) key.
- The position of the cursor identifies the
disk speed. Position 1 is 150 ms and
each additional position is 1 ms. - - - -
r --
Check speed of disk drive.
I
I
I
~
001
o A A
01234567890123456_
00008
Is the disk speed between 163 and 171 ms7
Y N
I-
Use MAP 2-6.
Load CE diskette (PIN 2455026).
Press REC ADV
FUNCT SEL lower
UPDATE
Can a pair of matching record messages be
read correctly from tracks 06, 07,08 and
097 Y N
Power down.
Reconnect the disk signal cables at
planar sockets J and K to their original
connectors.
Use Disk MAP 2-2.
- See MAP 2·11 for additional information. (A
single pair of matching records per track is
sufficient. Increment to the next track when
one good pair is found.)
- Power down.
- Reconnect the disk signal cables at planar
sockets J and K to their original connectors.
- Use Disk MAP 2-1.
Reswap the disk unit cables to their original
locations in planar connectors J and K.
D
3742 ML
2-12.3
2-12.4
The following service aids for
1.
STICKING/BINDING KEYS
2.
CLICKER OPERATION
are to inform you of problems and corrections not
necessarily in the MAPs. Use these service aids as
required for failing keyboard(s).
1. STICKINGIBINDING KEYS
Sticking/binding keys can occur due to a design
problem. This problem is more acute when
striking the keys at an angle (normal key
operation). Due to the plane of the keyboard,
the top row of keys are affected the most. The
right adjust key and space bar are very sensitive
because both keys use two modules.
The best fix is to replace the module.
An alternate fix is to rotate the module 180
degrees.
To test the·machine's ability to accept input
at high speed (such as when rolling keys), hold
down- four data keys and the repeat key
simultaneously.' Two or three keys (depending
on the keys pressed) should alternately enter,
repetitively to the end of the record, without
an error. If an error results, or if the machine
fails to function as stated, replace the keyboard
PC board.
E
2. CLICKER OPERATION
The operation of the cl icker can also affect the
throughput. It usually results in complaints that
the keys are hard to press. The purpose of the
clicker is to indicate to the operator that the
MPU accepted the character keyed. It also
indicates to the operator when data is being
transferred from current buffer to previous buffer.
Any attempt to remove the clicker can result in
more serious problems.
serious problems.
I
Is mechanical operation correct?
~
Replace clicker (410).
The clicking noise from the disk
drive head load actuator has also
caused the operator to reduce
speed. This is especially true
when keying short records. The
operator mistakenly feels they
have to wait for the disk drive
to complete the write operation.
3742 ML
2-12.!
2-12.6
This page intentionally left blank.
DISPLAY MAPS
MAP 3-1 Can you make the machine fail?
YN
For the intermittent problem, perform the
following steps, one on each call, until the
problem is corrected.
Record the date of each step.
Unadjustable brightness and failure to blank
the CRT display can be intermittent because
of a failing CRT. Vibration or powering up
and down can remove the symptoms tern·
porarily. Under this condition:
- Power down.
Ground the CRT higb voltage anode
(304A).
Replace the chassis and CRT assembly
(304E).
Adjust the yoke (304F, 311).
Verify the fix.
DATE :1r---'I--r---,
This MAP helps you locate problems with un·
controllable brightness with video (characters)
present. Brightness on the CRT is controlled
from the 400 V dc output of the converter. The
brightness control forms part of a voltage divid~r from the 400 Vdc supply to ground. Turning the brightness control changes the voltage
applied to the video amplifier. This changes
the bias on the CRT, which regulates the electron flow to the face of the CRT and changes
the brightness.
Vibrate the machine to cause the failure.
Check the room temperature and the humidity and compare them to Installation
Procedure, page 16-1.
- Measure the voltages at 2-N with respect
to frame ground:
Vdc
Pin
Limits
+12.0
+12.0
-12.0
B08,B09
D09, Dl0
D02
11.0 to 13.2
11.0 to.13.2
11.0 to 13.2
Reseat both ends of the display signal cable
(3048) and the power supply dc cable
(308C).
Verify the fix.
DA TE: 1......- - . 11-~---'
Replace the display PC board (304C).
Verify the fix.
DA TE : I'---...L.I- - ' - - - I
Power down.
Ground the CRT high voltage anode (304A).
Replace the converter (304G).
Verify the fix.
DATE:I~~I~---J
3742 ML
3-1.1
3-1.2
Power down.
Replace the brightness control potentiometer
(304J).
Verify the fix.
DATE:
,-I--II~'----!
If the CRT has no brightness (blank CRT) or
fades out, use MAP 3·2.
Otherwise, power down.
Reseat both ends of the display signal cable
(304B).
Verify the fix.
Does the machine still fail?
Y N
The display signal cable was loose.
C
~
1- CAUTION
Using the 500 Vdc scale, connect the CE meter
from terminal 10 (+) to terminal 15 (-) on the
display PC board (304C).
Observe the caution. - - - - - - - - - Power up.
Wait 25 seconds.
Vary the brightness control to its limits (304J). -
,
:
1
-,
Never make the tube face glow or bloom. The
limit of brightness control is either:
a. that degree of brightness past which the
tube face glows or blooms, or
b. the mechanical limits of the control knob.
Checks the range of voltage available from the
brightness control.
Does the voltage vary smoothly from 0 to a minimum of 100 Vdc?
-
A failure can cause 400 Vdc to appear.
Y N
Power down.
Disconnect the wire from terminal 9 of the
display PC board.
I
DANGER
400 Vdc is present.
Using the 500 Vdc scale, connect the CE meter
fromterminal 7 (+) to terminal 6 (-) on the
display PC board (304C).
Power up.
Wait 25 seconds.
-
Checks the 400 Vdc output of the converter.
3742 ML
11
3-1.3
3-1.4
Is the voltage between 300 and 410 Vdc?
YN
Power down.
Reconnect the wire to terminal 9 of the
display PC board.
Ground the CRT high voltage anode
(304A).
Replace the converter (304G).
- Verify the fix.
The converter was defective.
Power down.
Disconnect the meter lead from terminal
7 (+) and connect it to terminal 9.
Power up. Wait 25 seconds.
Is the vottage between 300 an d 410 V dc?
YN
Power down.
Replace the PC board.
Verify the fix.
The PC board was defective.
-- Power down.
- Test the CE meter.
Set the CE meter to the Rx1 K scale and
zero the CE meter.
Remove wire 10 from the display PC
board (304C).
- While turning the brightness control to its
I,imit, measure the resistance from wire 10 to
wire 9.
- Disconnect the wire from terminal 11 of the
display PC board.
- Perform the same check from wire 10 to
wire 11. -
CE meter test:
Power down.
Disconnect the disk signal cable (307).
Set the meter to the Rxl scale.
Zero the meter.
Measure the resistance between test points
16 and 23 on the disk FC card (307). The
CE meter should read between 86 and 96
ohms.
Reconnect the disk signal cable.
Checks the resistance of the brightness control
potentiometer.
Does the resistance on both checks vary from
Oto at least aOOK ohms?
Y N
Replace the brightness control potentiometer (304J).
Verify the fix.
The brightness control potentiometer was
defective.
Reconnect the wires to terminals 9, 10,
and 11.
Power down.
Disconnect the wire from terminal 17 of the
display PC board.
Set the CE meter to the Rx 1 scale and zero
the CE meter.
Check wire 17 for ground.
Is wire 17 grounded?
Y N
Using the 500 Vdc scale, connect the CE
meter from terminal 17 (+) to terminal
16 (-)on the display PC board (wire 17 is
still disconnected).
Power up.
Wait 25 seconds.
Vary the brightness control to its limits.
Is the maximum voltage at least 100 volts?
Y N
Power down.
Replace the display PC board (304C).
Verify the fix.
The display PC board was defective.
Power down.
Reconnect the wire to terminal 17.
Disconnect the CRT socket from the CRT
(304H).
Check for bent pins on the CRT. Set the CE meter to the Rxl scale and
zero the CE meter.
Check for continuity from:
The display screen is on, but the brightness con·
trol does not have any control over the
brightness.
Loss of electrical contact due to bent pins can
cause loss of brightness control.
CRT Socket - to - Display PC Board
Pin
Pin
Pin
Pin
2
3
4
7
Terminal
Terminal
Terminal
Terminal
14
a
15
17
3742 ML
II
3-1.5
3-1.6
Is the CRT socket assembly OK?
Y N
- Replace the CRT socket assembly (304H).
- Verify the fix.
The CRT socket assembly was defective.
Ground the CRT high voltage anode (304A).
Replace the chassis-and-CRT assembly
(304E).
Adjust the yoke assembly (304F, 311 ).
Verify the fix.
The chassis-and-CRT assembly was defective.
Replace the chassis and CRT assembly (304E).
Adjust the yoke (304 F, 311).
Verify the fix.
The chassis and CRT assembly was defective.
MAP 3-2-
-
Can you make the machine fail?
Y N
-
For intermittent problems, perform the
following steps, one on each call, until
the problem is corrected.
Record the date of each step.
Vibrate the machine to cause the failure.
Check the room temperature and the
humidity and compare them to Instal/ation Procedure, page 16-1.
Measure voltage at MPU planar socket N
with respect to frame ground:
Vdc
Pin
Limits
+12.0
+12.0
-12.0
B08,B09
009,010
002
11.0 to 13.2
11.0 to 13.2
11.0 to 13.2
This MAP helps you locate a problem of a
blank CRT. A blank CRT indicates that the
electron beam is not reaching the face of the
CRT. The electron beam is generated when tt
filament heats the cathode of the tube. This
electron beam is then controlled by the grids
as it is attracted to the face of the CRT by the
high voltage applied to the anode of the CRT.
Reseat both ends of the display signal cable
(3048), the power supply dc cable (309T)
and the CRT socket assembly (304H).
Verify the fix.
_
~~~ ~L...~w-n...:...I.-----!--1
-
Replace the display PC board (304C).
Verify the fix.
DATE: ~I........l---l
Power down.
Ground the CRT high voltage anode (304A).
Replace the converter (304G).
Verify the fix.
&.....\
-
I
DATE: L-~I~--l
Power down.
Ground the CRT high voltage anode (304A).
Replace the chassis and CRT assembly
(304E).
Adjust the yoke (304F, 305).
Verify the fix.
DATE: L-I~I---'---J
Power down.
Replace the power supply PC board (309P, 419).
Verify the fix.
-
DATE: L-I---,--I~~
Power down.
Replace the display signal cable (3048).
Verify the fix.
-
DATE: ~I~--I
Power down.
Replace the power supply DC cable (309T).
Verify the fix.
4--1
DATE: I~-..L...I---L...-J
Power down.
Reseat both ends of the display signal cable.
®
Verify the fix.
3742 ML
3-2.1
3-2.2
l3IJ
.Does the machine still fail?
YN
The display ..... cables ..... Ioose.
I
- Power down.
- 0Ieck CBl (604U). if installed.
Is CBl on?
YN
I-
Use MAP 6-5.
r- CAUTION
I
:
I
;
I
Never make the tube face glow or bloom. The
limit of brightness' control is either:
a. that degree of brightness past which the
tube face glows or blooms, or
b. the mechanical limit of the control knob.
I
f
- Jumper the CE pins (304C).
I
- Power up.
I
- Wait 25 seconds.
I
- Observe the caution. -- - - - - - - - - - .J
- Tlim the brightness control (304J) dockwise
until either the display intensity is maximum,
- Checks the CRT's ability to maintain maximum
or the control·knob stops. brightness.
Is the display brightness failing and/or blank?
YN
Power down.
Remove the jumper from the CE pins (304C).
Return the brightness control to normal.
Use MAP 3-3.
- Observe the display for a full or partial raster. Is the raster always missing or fades to blank?
YN
Power down.
Remove the jumper from the CE pins
(304C).
Return the brightness control to normal.
Use MAP 3-3.
Power down.
Remove the jumper from the CE pins (304C).
Return the brightness control to normal.
Power up.
Check if the disk drive unit motors are
running.
Are the disk drive unit motors running?
YN
- Use MAP 6-6. -
B
(without viewer)
Low power supply voltage being applied to
the display PC board can cause the bad display.
A blank CRT and the stopping of disk drive
unit motors indicate an ac voltage service
problem.
~
- Power down.
Install the cable extender (307) in the display
PC board (304C).
Reconnect the display signal cable.
Power up.
- Set the CE meter to the 15 Vdc scale.
- Measure the voltages at the cable extender
with reference to the frame ground:
Vdc
Pin
Limits
+12.0
+12.0
-12.0
808,809
009,010
002
11.0 to 13.2
11.0 to 13.2
11.0 to 13.2
Are all voltages within limits?
YN
- Write down the failing voltage measurement for possible use in MAP 6-7.
Power down.
- Remove the cable extender.
- Leave the signal cable disconnected from the
display PC board.
- Power up.
- Set the CE meter to the 15 Vdc scale.
- Measure the failing voltage from the frame
ground to each of these cable pins at the
display end:
Vdc
Pin
Limits
+12.0
+12.0
-12.0
Ground
Ground
808,809
009,010
002
006,007
008
11.0 to 13,2
11.0 to 13.2
11.0 to 13.2
0
0
08
Are all voltages within limits?
Y N
- Power down.
Reconnect the display signal cable.
- Use MAP 6·1.
Power down.
Reconnect the display signal cable.
Use MAP 6-7.
C
3742 ML
3-2.3
3-2.4
- Checks for filament voltage.
Is the voltage between 5.7 and 6.9 Vdc?
YN
Is the voltage above 6.9 Vdc?
Y N
_Use MAP 6-1.
I
r-I
:
Power down.
I
Test the CE meter. _________ J
Set the meter to the Rx1 scale and zero the
meter.
Disconnect the CRT socket (304H) from
the CRT.
Check for bent pins on the CRT. Disconnect the display si!J1al cable (3048).
Measure the continui.ty from display PC
, board terminal 18 to 812 and from terminal
16to 012 (304C).
CE meter test:
- Power down.
- Disconnect the disk signal cable (608).
Set the meter to the Rx 1 scale.
- Measure the resistance between the test points
16 and 23 on the disk FC card (608).
The CE meter should read between 86 and 96 ohms.
Reconnect the disk signal cable.
loss of electrical contact due to bent pins can
cause a blank CRT.
Is each continuity measurement OK?
YN
Reconnect the CRT socket (304H).
- Replace the display PC board (304C).
- Verify the fix.
The display PC board was defective.
Measure the continuity from terminal 18 to
CRT socket pins 1 and 8 (continuity should
be found to one of the pins). - Measure the continuity from terminal 16 to
socket pins 1 and 8 (continuity should be to
the pin opposite that found from terminal
18).
Is each continuity measurement OK?
YN
Remove the cable extender.
Reconnect the display signal cable.
Replace the CRT socket assembly (304H).
- Verify the fix.
The CRT socket assembly was defective.
The filament could be connected from terminal
18 to either CRT pin 1 or 8. The opposite pin
is then connected to terminal 16 to complete
the circuit.
Remove the cable extender.
Reconnect the display signal cable (3048).
Ground the CRT high voltage anode (304A).
Replace the chassis-and-CRT assembly
(304E).
Adjust the yoke assembly (304F, 305).
Verify the fix.
The chassis-and-CRT assembly was defective.
Power down.
Remove the cable extender.
Reconnect the display signal cable to the display
PC board.
Set the CE meter to the 500 Vdc scale.
Disconnect the wire from terminal 11 on the
display PC board (304C).
Connect the CE meter to display PC board
terminals 15 (-) and 17 (+).
Power up.
-Wait 25 seconds.
Turn the brightness control (304J) both clockwise and counterclockwise to its limits.
Is the voltage at the low limit from 0 to 50 Vdc,
and is the voltage at the upper limit beyond 90
Vdc? -
Checks the range of voltage available from the
brightness control.
- A failure can cause 400 Vdc to appear.
Y N
Power down.
Disconnect the CE meter.
Set the CE meter to the 50 Vac scale.
Connect the CE meter between display PC
board terminals 1 and 3 (304C). Power up.
Wait 25 seconds.
Is the ac voltage steady between 12 and 30 Vac?
Y N
Power down.
Replace the display PC board (304C).
Verify the fix.
Does the machine still fail?
Y N
- Checks the input to the converter.
- The procedure to isolate voltage problems between the display PC board and converter requires
replacement of one FRU at a time. We recommend
obtaining both FRUs and replacing them in the
sequence shown.
The display PC board was defective.
3742 ML
II
3-2.5
3-2.6
Power down.
Ground the CRT high voltage anode
(304A).
Reinstall the original display PC board.
Replace the converter (304G).
Verify the fix.
The converter was defective.
Power down.
Reconnect the wi re to term inal 17.
Disconnect wire 9 of the display PC board.
Set the CE meter to the 500 Vdc scale.
Power up.
Measure the voltage between display PC
board terminals 6 (-) and 7 (+) (304C).
- Checks the output of the converter.
I s the voltage between 300 and 410 Vde?
Y N
Power down.
Reconnect the wire to terminal 9.
Ground the CRT high voltage anode
(304A).
Replace the converter (304G).
Verify the fix.
The converter was defective.
Power down.
Test the CE meter.
CE meter test:
Set the CE meter to the Rx 1 K scale and
Power down.
zero the CE meter.
Disconnect the disk signal cable (608).
Remove wire 10 from the display PC board
Set the meter to the Rx 1 scale.
(304C).
Measure the resistance between test points
While turning the brightness control to its
16 and 23 on the disk FC card (608).
limits, measure the resistance from wire 10
The CE meter should read between 86 and
to wire 9. - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 96 ohms.
Remove the wire from terminal 11 of the
Reconnect the disk signal cable.
1
display PC board.
1
1- Checks the resistance of the brightness control.
Perform the same check from wire 10 to
wire 11.
Does the resistance on both checks vary from 0
to at least 800K ohms?
Y N
Replace the brightness control potentiometer (304J).
Verify the fix.
The brightness control potentiometer was
defective.
- Replace the display PC board (304C).
- Verify the fix.
The display PC board was defective.
Power down.
Reconnect the wire to terminal 17.
Set the CE meter to the Rx1 scale.
Measure the continuity from display PC board
terminal 7 to terminal 8.
Is continuity measured?
Y N
- Replace the display PC board (304C).
- Verify the fix.
The display PC board was defective.
Disconnect the CRT socket from the CRT
(304H).
Check for bent pins on the CRT.
Check for continuity from:
-
Loss of electrical contact due to bent pins can
cause loss of brightness control.
CRT Socket' - to - Display PC Board
Pin
Pin
Pin
Pin
2
3
4
7
Terminal
Terminal
Terminal
Terminal
14
8
15
17
Is each continuity measurement OK?
Y N
- Replace the CRT socket assembly (304H).
- Verify the fix.
The CRT socket assembly was defective.
Did the display degrade in brightness slowly
(during several days or weeks)?
Y N
Reconnect the CRT socket.
Ground the CRT high voltage anode (304A).
Replace the converter (304G).
Verify the fix.
The converter was defective.
Ground the CRT high voltage anode (304A).
Replace the chassis-and-CRT assembly (304E).
Adjust the yoke assembly (304F, 305).
Verify the fix.
The chassis-and-CRT assembly was defective.
,3742 ML
3-2.7
3-2.8
This page is intentionally left blank.
MAP 3-3Can you make the machine fail?
Y N
- For intermittent problems, perform the
following steps, one on each call, until
the problem is corrected.
Record the date of each step.
Vibrate the machine to cause the failure.
Check the room temperature and the
humidity and compare them to Installation Procedure, page 16-1.
Measure the voltage at MPU planar socket
N with respect to frame ground:
Vdc
Pin
Limits
+12.0
+12.0
-12.0
+6.3
B08,B09
009,010
002
B12
11.0 to
11.0 to
11.0 to
5.7 to
This MAP helps you locate problems with
the video circuits for missing or fuzzy
characters.
Note: The cursor is considered a ,character.
13.2
13.2
13.2
6.9
Reseat both ends of the display signal cable
(304B) and the CRT socket (304H).
Verify the fix.
DATE: 1"'--""""'1-"""'--Power down.
Replace the display PC boa-rd (304C).
Verify the fix.
OATE r-
:1 --'-I--r--......,
Power down.
Replace the display signal cable (304B).
Verify t,....h_e_fi....x_.-,-_.....
OATE : L....I-.!-I---L----J
Power down.
Ground the CRT high voltage anode (304A).
Replace the chassis-and-CRT assembly
(304E).
Adjust the yoke (304F, 305).
Verify the fix.
OA TE:
I..--""T'"I--r--.. . .
Power down.
Ground the CRT high voltage anode (304A).
Replace the converter (304G).
Verify the fix.
DATE:
'-1--.-1-.---.. . .
Use MAP 5-1.
Power down.
Reseat both ends of the display signal cable
(304B) and the CRT socket (304H).
Verify the fix.
I
~
3742 ML
3-3.1
3-3.~
~
J
Does the machine still fait?
I
YN
The display signal cable was loose.
Power down.
Install the cable extender (307) on the display
PC board (304C).
Reconnect the display signal cable.
Power up.
Test the probe at MPU planar P·Bl0 (signal
ground MPU planar P·008). Both lights should
be on.
- Probe extender pin S07 for pulses (signal
ground pin 008) (307).
Are both lights on?
Y N
Probe 2·N·B07 for pulses (signal ground
N·D08).
Are both lights on?
Y N
- Power down.
Disconnect the display signal cable from
MPU planar N (308).
Power up.
Probe MPU planar for pulses (signal ground
MPU planar N-D08).
Are both lights on?
YN
1
Set the CE meter to the 15 Vdc scale.
Measure the voltage at 2·M with ref·
erence to frame ground:
Vdc
Pin
Limits
+5.0
B06
4.7 to 5.5
Connect the probe power leads to MPU plana
M·D13 (-) black MPU planar M·B05 (+).
Is the voltage within limits?
Y N
Power down.
Remove the cable extender.
Reconnect the display signal cable
at both ends.
Use MAP 6-1.
Power down.
Remove the cable extender.
Reconnect the display signal cable to
the PC board.
Replace the MPU planar
(504,505).
Verify the fix.
The MPU planar was defective.
Power down.
Disconnect the display signal cable from
the cable extender.
Reconnect the display signal cable at
2-N.
Power up.
Probe 2-N-B07 for pulses (signal
ground N-D08).
Are both Iights on?
Y N
Power down.
Replace the display signal cable
(3048).
Verify the fix.
The display signal cable was defective.
Power down.
Replace the display PC board (304C).
Verify the fix.
The display PC board was defective.
Power down.
Replace the display signal cable (3048).
Verify the fix.
T~e display signal cable was defective.
B
3742 ML
II
3-3.3
3-3.4
~
I
Set the CE meter to the 15 Vdc scale.
Measure the voltage from the frame ground to
each of these extender pins: Vdc
Pin
Limits
+12.0
+12.0
-12.0
+6.3
Ground
Ground
B08,B09
009,010
002
B12
006,007
008
11.0
11.0
11.0
5.7
0
0
to
to
to
to
Checks the voltages to the display PC board
for distribution to deflection coils in the
yoke and to the CRT filament. Does not
check for loose connectors (3040 or 304H).
13.2
13.2
13.2
6.9
Is the v9'tage within limits?
Y N
- Write down the failing voltage measurement for possible use in MAP 6,7.
Power down.
Remove the cable extender.
Leave the signal cable disconnected from
the display PC board.
Power up.
Set the CE meter to the 15 Vdc scale.
Measure the failing voltage from the frame
ground to each of these cable pins at the
display end:
Vdc
Pin
Limits
+12.0
+12.0
-12.0
+8.5
Ground
Ground
B08,B09
009,010
002
812
006,007
008
11.0 to
11.0 to
11.0 to
8.0 to
0
0
13.2
13.2
13.2
9.4
Is the voltage within limits?
Y N
Power down.
Reconnect the display signal cable.
Use MAP 6-1.
Power down.
Reconnect the display signal cable.
Use MAP 6-7.
o8
- When the cable is disconnected, the 6.3V
goes to 8.5V level.
~
I
I
Power down.
Disconnect the wire from terminal 9 of the
display PC board.
DANGER
400 Vdc is present.
- Using the 500 Vdc scale, connect the CE meter
from terminal 7 (+) to terminal 6 (-) on the
display PC board (304C).
Power up.
- Wait 25 seconds.
- Checks the 400 Vde output of the converter.
Is the voltage between 300 and 410 Vdc?
Y N
Power down.
Remove the cable extender from the display
PC board.
Reconnect the display signal cable (3048).
Reconnect the wire to terminal 9 of the
display PC board.
Ground the CRT high voltage anode (304A).
Replace the converter (304G).
Verify the fix.
The converter"was defective.
Power down.
Reconnect the wire to terminal 9 of the display
PC board.
Disconnect the display signal cable from the
display PC board (304C).
Test the CE meter. Set the CE meter to the Rx 1 scale.
Measure the continuity in the display PC
board circuits (304C).
Terminal 7 to terminal 8
Terminal 14 to terminal 15
Terminal 14 to cable connector pin 013
CE meter test:
Power down.
Disconnect the disk signal cable (608).
Set the meter to the Rx 1 scale.
Measure the resistance between test points
16 and 23 on the disk FC card (608).
The CE meter should read between 86 and
96 ohms.
Reconnect the disk signal cable.
Is each continuity measurement OK?
Y N
- Replace the display PC board (304C).
- Verify the fix.
The display PC board was defective.
G
3742 ML
3-3.5
3-3.6
~
I
Remove the cable extender from the display
PC board.
Reconnect the display signal cable (3048).
Disconnect the CRT socket from the CRT
(304H).
Check for bent pins on the CRT. Set the CE meter to the Rx1 scale.
Check for continuity from:
Loss of electrical contact due to bent pins can
cause loss of brightness control or loss of video.
CRT Socket - to - Display PC Board
Pin
Pin
Pin
Pin
2
3
4
7
Terminal
Terminal
Terminal
Terminal
14
8
15
17
Is the CRT socket assembly OK?
Y N
- Replace the CRT socket assembly (304H).
- Verify the fix.
The CRT socket assembly was defective.
Are characters fuzzy (rather than missing)?
Y N
Reconnect the CRT socket to the CRT.
Disconnect the wire from terminal 17 on
the display PC board (304C).
Power up.
Wait for 25 seconds.
Touch the wire removed from terminal 17
to the frame ground.Does the display flash when the pin is
grounded?
Y N
Power down.
Reconnect the wire to terminal 17.
Ground the CRT high voltage anode
(304A).
Replace the chassis-and-CRT assembly
(304E).
Adjust the yoke assembly (304F, 305).
Verify the fix.
The chassis-and-CRT assembly was defective.
Grounds the CRT control grid, which increases
the brightness of the CRT. The display could
then go blank for a few seconds before
resuming its former condition.
Power down.
Reconnect the wire to terminal 1.
Disconnect the display signal cable from the
PC board.
Use a CE meter set to the Rxl0 scale.
Check for shorts (resistance must exceed
1K ohm) between the signal cable pins at
the display end:
B07 to B05
B07 to B10
Are all resistance checks OK?
Y N
Checks for shorts of the MPU planar modules
and the cable. For display theory, see page 12-1.
DB
Remove the cable at MPU planar N (308).
Check the failing cable wires for shorts.
Is the display signal cable OK?
Y N
- Replace the display signal cable (304B).
- Verify the fix.
The display signal cable was defective.
Reconnect the display signal cable to the
display PC board.
Replace the MPU planar (504, 505).
The MPU planar was defective.
Replace the display PC board (304C).
Verify the fix.
The display PC board was defective.
Ground the CRT high voltage anode (304A).
Replace the chassis-and-CRT assembly (304E).
- Adjust the yoke assembly (304F, 305).
- Verify the fix. The chassis-and-CRT assembly was defective.
If characters are fuzzy on a new CRT assembly,
the only correction is to try another CRT
assembly.
3742 ML
3-3.7
3-3.8
This page is intentionally left blank.
MAP 3-4-
-
Can you make the machine fail?
Y N
- For the intermittent problem, perform the
following steps, one on each call, until the
problem is corrected.
Record the date of each step.
Vibrate the machine to cause the failure.
Check'the room temperature and the
humidity and compare them to the
Installation Procedure, page 16-1.
- Measure the dc voltages at MPU planar N
with respect to frame ground:
Vdc
Pin
Limits
+12.0
+12.0
-12.0
808,809
009,010
002
11.0 to 13.2
11.0 to 13.2
11.0 to 13.2
This MAP helps you locate a jittery display
problem. A jittery (moving, unstable) display
can be caused by ripple in the +12 Vdc power
supply; or a magnetic field caused by a motor,
transformer, or a machine operating nearby.
If you suspect ripple, use Power Theory in
Section 15.
Reseat both ends of the display signal cable
(3048) and the power supply dc cable
(309T).
Verify the fix.
DATE: ,-"":"""~r"""I"""''Z'''''''''''''1~-l:--'a
Replace the display PC board (304C).
Verify the fix.
DATE: ""'1--"1-"'--'
-
Ground the CRT high voltage anode (304A).
Replace the converter (304G).
Verify the fix.
OAT E :1,-,-.,.I--r------.
Replace the power supply PC board (309P).
Verify the fix.
DATE: '.....-1..---.-----,
Replace the display signal cable (3048).
Verify the fix.
DATE: Ir---rl--r---..
-
Replace the power supply dc cable (309T).
Verify the fix.
DATE:
'-'1--"1-"'--'
Replace the ac line filter (309Q).
Verify the fix.
DATE r-
:1 --'I--r--....,
Power down.
Reseat both ends of the display signal cable
(3048).
Verify the fix.
3742 ML
3-4.1
3-4.2
~I
Does the machine still fail?
Y N
The display signal cable was loose.
I
Power down.
Install the cable extender (307) in the display
PC board (304C).
Reconnect the display signal cable.
Power up.
Set the CE meter to the 15 Vdc scale.
Measure the voltage from the frame ground
to each of these extender pins: Vdc
Pin
Limits
+12.0
+12.0
-12.0
Ground
Ground
808,B09
009,010
002
006,007
008
11.0 to 13.2
11.0 to 13.2
11.0 to 13.2
0
0
Are all voltages within limits?
Y N
- Write down the failing voltage measurement for possible use in MAP 6-7.
Power down.
Remove the cable extender.
leave the signal cable disconnected from
the display PC board.
Power up.
Set the CE meter to the 15 Vdc scale.
Measure the failing voltage from the frame
ground to each of these cable pins at the
display end:
Vdc
Pin
Limits
+12.0
+12.0
-12.0
Ground
B08,B09
009,010
002
006,007
008
11.0 to 13.2
11.0 to 13.2
11.0 to 13.2
0
0
Grou~cr ,.
Are all voltages within limits?
Y N
- Power down.
Reconnect the display signal cable.
- Use MAP 6-1.
Power down.
Reconnect the display signal cable.
Use MAP 6-7.
B
Checks the voltages to the display PC board
for distribution to the deflection coils in the
yoke assembly. Does not check for loose connectors (3040 or 304H).
A ripple in the +12 Vdc power supply can cause
a jittery display. If you suspect ripple, use
Power Theory in Section 15.
DB
02 : :
••• •••
••• •••
••
•• •••
13 •
®
I Power down.
Remove the cable extender.
Reconnect the display signal cable.
Visually check for items that could cause a
magnetic field near the machine.-
Is there a magnetic field?
YN
- Power down.
Replace the display PC board (304C).
- Verify the fix.
Does the machine still fail?
YN
The display PC board was defective.
I
A motor, transformer, or a machine operating
nearby can cause a magnetic field.
The procedure to isolate voltage problems between the display PC board and converter
requires replacement of one FRU at a time.
We recommend obtaining both FRUs and
replacing them in the sequence shown.
- Power down.
- Reinstall the original disptay PC board.
- Ground the CRT high voltage anode (304A).
- Replace the converter (304G).
- Verify the fix.
The converter was defective.
- Eliminate the cause of the magnetic field.
3742 ML
3-4.3
3-4.4
This page is intentionally left blank.
MAP 3-5 Can you make the machine fail?
Y N
For the intermittent problem, perform the
following steps, one on each call, until the
problem is corrected.
Record the date of each step.
A symptom of a spot, or a vertical line on
one side of the display, which returns to
correct operation following a power on reset,
is an indication of an arcing CRT. A CRT
assembly causing this problem more than
once a week should be replaced:
Ground the CRT high voltage anode
(304A).
Replace the chassis-and-CRT assembly
(304E).
Adjust the yoke assembly (304F, 305).
Verify the fix.
. . ____
DATE: 1..---..1
- Vibrate the machine to cause the failure.
- Check the room temperature and the
humidity and compare them to Installation
Procedure, page 16-1.
- Measure the dc voltages at MPU planar N
with respect to frame ground:
Vdc
Pin
limits
+12.0
+12.0
-12.0
B08,B09
009,010
002
11.0 to 13.2
11.0 to 13.2'
11.0 to 13.2
Reseat both ends of the display signal cable
(304B), and the yoke connector (3040).
Verify the fix.
DATE :1.....---,-I---L.~
Replace the display PC board (304C).
Verify the fi x.
DATE: I~.!....I- - ' - - - - - I
Replace the yoke assembly (304F).
Adjust the yoke assembly (305).
Verify the fix.
DATE: ,'--"",-1'--""1
Replace the display signal cable (304B).
Verify the fix.
DATE: --'-1--.----.
This MAP helps you locate CRT yoke coils
and the deflection circuits problems.
The wiggle sweep circuit moves the electron
beam up and down to give the characters
height. Control pulses are generated by the
MPU, sent to the display PC board, amplified,
and used to drive current through the character
yoke. This current generates the magnetic field
to move the electron beam.
The vertical sweep circuit positions the electron
beam vertically on the face of the CRT. This
positioning provides the six lines on the display.
Vertical inputs are generated by the MPU, sent
to the display PC board, amplified, and used to
drive current through the vertical yoke. This
current generates the magnetic field to move
the electron beam.
The horizontal sweep circuit moves the electron
beam in a horizontal line across the face of the
CRT. The MPU generates horizontal input pulses.
These pulses trigger amplifiers on the display PC
board. These amplifiers drive current through
the two horizontal yoke windings. This current
generates the magnetic field to move the electron beam. The magnetic field from each winding moves the beam halfway.
No horizontal or vertical deflection causes
a spot on the screen.
A failure of the horizontal sweep circuit causes
characters to be distorted at the edge of the display. The failure causes the sweep to be nonlinear at the ends. A bad yoke assembly or incorrect drive current through the yoke assembly can cause the problem.
r-,
Use MAP 5-1.
Power down.
Reseat both ends of the display signal cable
(304B).
Verify the fix.
Does the machine still fail?
Y N
~ The displav signal cable was loose.
3742 ML
II
3-5.1
3-5.2
(3J
- Power down.
- Install the cable extender (307) in the display
PC board (304C).
- Reconnect the display signal cable.
- Power up.
- Test the probe at MPU planar P-810 (signal
ground MPU planar P-D08). 80th lights
should be on. Probe these extender pins for pulses (307).
:~~!
804
805
810
Signal ground
pin 008
Are bot~ lights on for each pin?
YN
- Probe these 2-N pins for pulses:
802 ("
803
804 ~
805
810
Signal ground
N-D08
Are both lights on for each pin?
Y N
- Power down.
- Disconnect the display signal cable from
MPU planar (308).
- Power up.
- Probe these MPU planar N pins for pulses.
802
803
804
805
810
1 .
Signal ground
MPU planar N-D08
Are both lights on for each pin?
Y N
-
Connect probe power leads to MPU planar
M-D13 (-) black, MPU planar M-805 (+).
- Set the CE meter to the 15 Vdc scale.
- Power down.
- Wait 5 seconds.
- Measure POR with reference to frame
ground at 2-M-BOB at power up. POR
should be a +5 volt pulse during
power up.
- Power-up.
- Measure the voltage at MPU planar M wi:th
reference to frame ground:
Vdc
Pin
limits
+5.0
806
4.1 to 5.5
Are the voltage and POR within limits?
YN
- Power down.
- Remove the cable extender.
- Reconnect the display signal cable
at both ends.
- Use MAP 6-1.
- Power down.
- Remove the cable extender.
- Reconnect the display signa' cable to
the display PC board.
- Replace the MPU planar (504).
The MPU planar was defective.
~ Power down.
- Disconnect the display signal cable from
the cable extender.
- Reconnect the display signal cable at 2-N.
- Power up.
- Probe these MPU planar pins for pulses:
802~.
BOO
804
B05
Signal ground
MPU planar N-DOB
810 ..
Are both lights on for each pin?
YN
..... Power down.
- Replace the display signal cable (304B).
- Verify the fix.
The display signal cable was defective.
3742 ML
3-5.3
3-5.4
Power down.
Replace the display PC board (304C).
Verify the fix.
The display PC board was defective.
- Power down.
Replace the display signal cable (304B).
Verify the fix.
The display signal cable was defective.
Set the CE meter to the 15 Vdc scale.
Measure the voltage from the frame ground to
each of these extender pins: Vdc
Pin
Limits
+12.0
+12.0
-12.0
Ground
Ground
B08,B09
009,010
002
006,007
008
11.0 to 13.2
11.0 to 13.2
11.0to13.2
0
0
Checks the voltages to the display PC board
for distribution to deflection coils in the yoke.
Does not check for loose connectors (3040
or 304H).
Are all the voltages within limits?
Y N
Write down the failing voltage measurement for possible use in MAP 6-7.
Power down.
Remove the cable extender.
Leave the signal cable disconnected from
the PC board.
Power up.
Set the CE meter to the 15 Vdc scale.
Measure the failing voltage from the frame
ground to each of these cable pins at the
display end:
Vdc
Pin
Limits
+12.0
+12.0
-12.0
Ground
Ground
B08,B09
009,010
002
006,007
008
11.0 to 13.2
11.0 to 13.2
11.0 to 13.2
0
0
Are all the voltages within limits?
Y N
Power down.
Reconnect the display signal cable.
Use MAP 6-1.
Power down.
Reconnect the display signal cable.
Use MAP 6-7.
G
DB
02 : :
••• •••
•• ••
•• ••
•• •••
13 •
(eJ
I
Power down.
Test the CE meter. Remove the yoke connector (3040) from the
display PC board (304C) and check for faulty
contacts.
Set the CE meter to the Rx1 scale.
Lines or dots on the display are an indication
of a gross failure, which could occur from an
open coil. Be more critical of the coil
resistance measurement if the display or
characters show distortion, which could occur
from an out-of-specification coil.
Exact resistance specifications are given for
the yoke coils. The CE meter might not
measure with the accuracy stated. If all
readings are high, or all are low, suspect an
inaccurate meter. If only one reading is high
or low (more than 10% error), suspect a bad
coil.
Perform the yoke coil resistance checks at the
yoke connector (3040 and 304C):
CE meter test:
Power down.
Disconnect the disk signal cable (608).
Set the meter to the Rx 1 scale.
Measure the resistance between test points
16 and 23 on the disk FC card (608).
The CE meter should read between 86 and
96 ohms.
Reconnect the disk signal cable.
i-
Measure Yoke Coil
Resistance
Wire B to wire 0
Wire C to wire E
Wire A to wire F
11.0 to 12.5 ohms-----1
10.5 to 12.0 ohms
9.5 to 11.0 ohms - - - -I
I
Wire B to wire 0 and wire C to wire E checks
the two horizontal deflection windings in the
CRT yoke. A horizontal yoke with some of the
windings shorted can cause horizontal sweep
problems.
1
Disconnect the wire from terminal 12 on the
display PC board (304C):
Measure Yoke Coil
Resistance
PC board terminal 13 to
wire from terminal 12
0.7 to 1.0 ohms-
Check the yoke connector for shorts from wire
A to wire B, from wire A to wire C, and from
wire B to wire C.
The vertical yoke is connected between terminals A and F of the display PC bo~rd. A vertical
yoke with some of the windings shorted can
cause vertical sweep problems.
The character yoke is connected between terminals 12 and 13 of the display PC board. Removing the wire from terminal 12 isolates the
yoke from the circuit. An open character yoke
causes the characters to appear as cu rsors.
Are the yoke coils and the connector 0 K?
Y N
Remove the cable extender.
Reconnect the cable to the display PC
board.
Replace the yoke assembly (304F).
Adjust the yoke assembly (305).
Verify the fix.
The yoke assembly was defective.
I
eJ
3742 ML
II
3-5.5
3-5.6
~ Remove the cable extender.
Leave the signal cable disconnected from the
display PC board.
Use a CE meter set to the Rxl0 scale.
Check for shorts (resistance must exceed 1K
ohm) between the signal cable pins at the display end:
802 to
802 to
B02 to
802 to
802 to
B03
B04
805
B07
810
B03 to B04
B03 to 805
B03 to 807
803 to 810
B04 to 805
B04 to
804 to
B05 to
805 to
B07 to
B07
810
B07
Bl0
Bl0
Are all resistance checks OK?
Y N
-
Reconnect the yoke connector and
the wire on terminal 12.
Disconnect the display signal cable at 2-N.
Check the failing cable wires for shorts.
Is the display signal cable OK?
Y N
- Replace the display signal cable (3048).
- Verify the fix.
The display s!gnal cable was defective.
Reconnect the display signal cable to the'
display PC board.
Replace the MPU planar (504).
The MPU planar was defective.
- Replace the display PC board (304C).
- Verify the fix.
The display PC board was defective.
- Checks for shorts of the MPU planar modules
and the display Signal cable. For display theory,
see page 12-1.
DB
MAP 3-6-
-
Can you make the machine fail?
Y N
-- This symptom is a normal condition if it
occurs no more than once a week. More
frequent occurrence is cause to perform the
following steps, one on each call, until the
problem is corrected.
Record the ddte for each step.
-- Vibrate the machine to cause th~ failure.
Check the room temperature and humidity
and compare them to Installation Procedure,
page 16-1.
Measure the 'JOltflges at MPU planar N
VJith respect to frame ground:
Vdc:;
Pin
Limits
+i2.0
t12.0
B08, B09
D09,D1O
-·12.0
D02
11.0 iO 13.2
11.0 to 13.2
11.0to 13.2
This MAP helps you locate an overload
condition on the high voltage power supply.
The display flashes because the high voltage is
being cut off. When the high voltage supply is
overloaded, it turns off. After 10 seconds, the
high voltage suppiy turns on again. If an overload condition still exists, the display flashes or
for 1 second and then off for 10 seconds.
Changes in the 400 Vdc used for brightness
control can cause flashing or changes in the
br igh tness.
-- Ground tne CRT high voltage anode (304A).
Heplace the chassis and CRT assembly
(3041::) .
,t\djust the yoke assembiy (305, 304F).
Verify the fix.
DATE: C]~=rJ
-.- Replace the display PC board (304C).
Verify the fix.
DATE:CrJ=-:J
Ground the CRT high voltage.anode (304A)'
- Replace the COllvHter (304G).
- Verify the fIx
DATE: L~I~.-r·]
-- Replace the ae line filter (309Q).
Verify the fix.
DATE: [-rr~
I
r'Al
V
3742 ML
3-*, 1
3-6.2
~
I Power down.
Ground the CRT high voltage anode (304A).
Disconnect the anode wire from the CRT.
Disconnect wire 9 from the display PC board.
Set the CE meter to the 500 Vdc scale.
Measure the voltage between terminals 6 (-)
and 7 (+) on the display PC board (304C).
Power up.
Wait 25 seconds.
Place the end of the anode wire at least 1/2
inch (12.7 mm) from a conducting surface,
otherwise arcing can occur with power on.
The 400 Vdc brightness control voltage should
not vary.
I s the voltage steady and between 300 and 410
Vdc?
Y N
- Power down.
- Ground the CRT high voltage anode wire
(304A).
- Reconnect the CRT anode wire to the anode.
- Replace the display PC board (304C).
- Verify the fix.
Does the machine still fail?
YN
The display PC board was defective.
I
- Power down.
- Ground the CRT high voltage anode (304A).
- Reinstall the original display PC board.
- Replace the converter (304G).
- Verify the fix.
The converter was defective.
Power down.
Reconnect terminal 9 (304C).
Disconnect terminal 17.
Set the CE meter to the 500 Vdc scale.
Measure terminal 17 (+) to frame ground (-).
Power up.
Wait 25 seconds.
Vary the brightness control.
Does the voltage vary at least 60 volts?
Y N
Power. down.
Ground the CRT high voltage anode wire
(304A).
- Reconnect the CRT anode wire to the anode.
- Replace the display PC board (304C).
- Verify the fix.
The display PC board was defective.
The procedure to isolate voltage problems
between the display PC board and converter
requires replacement of one FRU at a time.
We recommend obtaining both FRUs and
replacing them in the sequence shown.
~
- Power down.
- Reconnect the wire to terminal 17.
Disconnect the CRT socket from the CRT
(304H).
Test the CE meter. Use the CE meter set to the Rx1 scale.
Check for continuity from:
CR T Socket - to - Display PC Board
Pin
Pin
Pin
Pin
2
3
4
7
Terminal
Terminal
Terminal
Terminal
14
8
15
CE meter test:
Power down.
Disconnect the disk signal cable (608).
Set the meter to the Rx 1 scale.
Measure the resistance between test points
16 and 23 on the disk FC card (608).
- The CE meter should read between 86 and
96 ohms.
- Reconnect the disk signal cable.
17
Is the CRT socket assembly OK?
Y N
- Ground the CRT high voltage anode wire'
(304A).
Reconnect the CRT anode wire to the
anode.
Replace the CRT socket assembly (304H).
Verify the fix.
The CRT socket assembly was defective.
- Ground the CRT high voltage anode wire
(304A).
Replace the chassis·and:CRT assembly.
Adjust the yoke assembly (305).
Verify the fix.
The chassis-and-CRT assembly wa,s defective.
3742 ML
11
3-6.3
3-6.4
This page is intentionally left blank.
to
MAP 3-7Can you make the machine fail?
Y N
- For the intermittent problem, perform the
following steps, one on each call, until the
problem is corrected.
Record the date of each step.
Vibrate the machine to cause the failure.
Check the room temperature and humidity
and compare them to Installation Procedure,
page 16-1.
- Measure the voltages at 2-N with respect to
frame ground:
Vdc
Pin
Limits
+12.0
+12.0
-12.0
B08,B09
D09, Dl0
002
11.0 to 13.2
11.0 to 13.2
11.0 to 13.2
,
This MAP helps you locate a problem of low
voltage output of the high voltage power supply.
A very large display is caused when the high
voltage applied to the CRT anode is low. When
this voltage is low, the electron beam moves
slower toward the face of the CRT. This permits
the magnetic field developed by the yoke to deflect the beam a greater distance. The high
voltage oscillator on the display PC board provides the drive pulses to the converter. The
converter changes these pulses to 400 Vdc for
brightness control and the high voltage for the
anode lead.
Reseat both ends of the display signal cable
(304B) and the power supply dc cable
(309T).
Verify the fix.
~I---'--'
DATE:
Replace the display PC board (304C).
Verify the fix.
DATE: Ir----rl---"--'
r-I
Ground the CRT high voltage anode (304A).
Replace the converter (304G).
Verify the fix.
DATE: r-"I---1--'--'
Replace the display signal cable {304B).
Verify the fix.
DATE: r-"I-r-I--Y--I""'1
Replace the power supply dc cable (309T).
Verify the fix.
DATE:
Replace the power supply PC board (309P).
Verify the fix.
DA TE : 1
....----.Ir---p--.
r - I- - - , - - - ' - - '
Replace the ac line filter (309Q).
Verify the fix.
DATE: 1'---"',---"---'
3742 ML
3-7.1
3-7.2
r¢J
- If the raster and characters are off the display
screen or expanded in only one direction, use
MAP 3-5.
- If the total display is enlarged such that all
the characters are enlarged including the
width and height of each line and the
total height of all the lines of the raster,
continue in this MAP.
- Power down.
- Reseat both ends of the display signal. cable
(3048).
- Verify the fix.
Is the display unit still failing?
YN
The display signal cable was loose.
I
- Power down.
.
Install the cable extender (307) on the display
PC board (304C).
Reconnect the display signal cable.
- Power up.
- Set the CE meter to the 15 V dc scale.
- Measure the voltage from the frame ground to
each of these extender pins. Vdc
Pin
Limits
+12.0
+12.0
-12.0
Ground
Ground
808,809
009,010
002
006,007
008
11.0 to 13.2
11.0 to 13.2
11.0 to 13.2
0
0
- Checks the voltages to the display PC board
for distribution to deflection coils in the yoke.
Does not check for loose connectors (304H or
3040).
.~
I
Are all the voltages within limits?
YN
- Write down the failing voltage measurement for possible use in MAP 6-7.
- Power down.
Remove the cable extender.
- Leave the signal cable disconnected from
the display PC board.
- Power up.
- Set the CE meter to the 15 Vdc scale.
- Measure the failing voltage from the frame
ground to t:ach of these cable pins at the
display end:
Vck
Pin
Limits
+12.0
+12.0
-12.0
Ground
Ground
BOO. BOO
009.010
002
006.007
008
11.0 to 13.2
11.0 to 13.2
11.0 to 13.2
0
0
DB
02 : :
•• ••
••
•• ••
••• •••
•• ••
Are all the voltages within limits?
YN
- Power down.
Reconnect the display signal cable.
- Use MAP 6-1.
Power down.
Reconnect the display signal cable.
- Use MAP 6-7.
-
- Power down.
- Remove the cable extender from the display
PC board.
~ Reconnect the signal cable.
- Set the CE meter to the 500 Vdc scale.
- Measure the voltage between display PC board
terminals 6 (-) and 7 (+) (304C).
- Power up.
- Wait 25 seconds.
I CE meter test:
I
Is the voltage between 300 and 410 Vdc?
YN
- Power down.
- Ground the CRT high voltage anode (304A).
- Disconnect the anode wire from the CRT.
- Test the meter. - - - - - - - - - - - - J
- Set the CE meter to the Rx 1 scale.
- Test for a short circuit; CRT anode wire to
frame ground. -
Power down.
Disconnect the disk signal cable (608).
Set the meter to the Rxl scale.
Measure the resistance between test points
16 and 23 on the disk FC card (608).
The CE meter should read between 86 and
96 ohms.
Reconnect the disk signal cable.
It is possible that the high voltage wire or can·
verter is shorted, thus putting a heavier than
normal load on the converter.
3742 ML
3-7.3
3-7.4
Is there a short circuit?
Y N
Reconnect the anode wire to the CRT
(304A).
Replace the display PC board (304C).
Verify the fix.
Does the machine still fail?
I
Y N
The display PC board was defective.
Power down.
Ground the CRT high voltage anode
(304A).
Reinstall the original display PC board.
Replace the converter (304G).
Verify the fix.
The converter was defective.
Power down.
Ground the CRT high voltage anode (304A).
Replace the converter (304G).
Verify the fix.
The converter was defective.
The procedure to isolate voltage problems between the display PC board and converter requires replacement of one FRU at a time. We
recommend obtaining both FRUs and replacing
them in the sequence shown.
KEYBOARD MAPS
MAP 4-1
Can you make the machine fail? Y N
- When the failure is intermittent, perform
the following steps, one on each call, until
the problem is solved.
- Record the date of each action.
- Vibrate the machine to cause the failure.
- Check the room temperature and humidity
and compare to Installation Procedure, page
16-1. Check dc voltage at the keyboard
with respect to frame ground (407 L). Voltage
Pin
Limits
+5.0
+8.5
ground
--5.0
809
D03
D08
D06
4.7 to 5.5
8.0 to 9.4
0
4.6 to 5.4
-
This MAP will find failures in the keyboard
PC board.
-
For easier probing with the CE probe, remove
the ground lead of the switch cable (407F) and
use that ground pin.
- Power down.
Reseat both ends of keyboard signal cable
(407H).
Verify the fix.
OAT E:
----r,--r----,
r--I
Power down.
Replace keyboard PC board (407G).
Verify the fix.
D ATE:
---'--;r----.
-r-,
r-I
Power down.
Replace MPU (504).
Verify the fix.
D AT E: .r-I
-r-!-,.----,
Power down.
Replace the failing key modules as they
are identified (408,409).
Verify the fix.
DATE: ~I
-r----.
-'--1
Power down.
Clean flyplates (407D) and pad area (407K)
of the keyboard PC board with a lint-free
cloth (PIN 2108931)
Verify the fix.
DATE :1r-- r oIo-r----.
Dampen the cloth with water or alcohol
(P IN 2200200).
Power down.
Replace theac line filter (418A).
Verify the fix.
DATE: -',r--~---.
r-I
..
3742 M L
4-101
4-1.2
Is the machine equipped with a data entry
keyboard rather than a proof keyboard?
Y N
Power down.
Replace the ROS feature card at sockets
C and D (5058).
Verify the fix.
DATE:
r-I-"--1-,----,
Power down.
Replace cross connectors C and D (5058).
Verify the fix.
D ATE:
\"'------',r-----r-----,
Error Code Positions 7 and 8
If the T error code occurs with the AUTO REC
ADV switch on, use-keyboard MAP 4-5. Otherwise, continue with this MAP.
Power down.
Reseat both ends of the keyboard signal
cable (407H).
Verify the fix.
Does the machine still fail?
Y N
A cable was loose.
I
01
Is the machine equipped with a data entry keyboard rather than a proof keyboard?
Y N
Power down.
Disconnect cross connectors C and D
(5058).
Power up.
The ROS feature card is now disconnected.
Perform the failing operation. Does the machine still fail?
Y N
Power down.
Reconnect cross connectors C and D
(5058).
Use MAP 5-1.
I : Reconnect cross connectors C and D.
Power down.
-
~'
Power down and wait 5 seconds.
Power up.
Load a diskette.
Perform the failing operation.
~
00
A A
00008
X R
The keyboard function with the ROS feature
card removed is the same as that of a standard
data entry keyboard. For example, pressing
NUM SHI FT and M enters a 7 rather than a 1.
~
Are the status line error code positions blank?
Y N
Power down.
Disconnect the keyboard signal cable from
MPU planar sockets P and R.
Power up.
Load a diskette.
Is an error code displayed now?
Y N
Power down.
Reinstall the keyboard signal cable in
MPU planar sockets P and R.
Replace the keyboard PC board (407G).
Verify the fix.
Does the machine still fail?
Y N
The keyboard PC board was defective.
I
_
Power down.
Reinstall the original keyboard PC board.
Check the keyboard signal cable for
opens/shorts/ground (407 H).
Is the cable OK?
Y N
- Replace the keyboard signal cable.
- Verify the fix.
The keyboard signal cable vyas defective.
Reconnect the cable.
Use MPU MAP 5-1.
Power down.
Reconnect the keyboard signal cables at
planar sockets P and R.
Use MPU MAP 5-1.
Insert a diskette in the other station.
Test the keyboard at the other station by
pressing all of the data keys. The correct data
should be displayed as each key is pressed.
o
"3742 ML
4-1.3
4-1.4
Does the machine still fail?
I-
Y N
Use MPU MAP 5-1.
Power down.
Swap the keyboard signal cables at MPU planar
sockets P and R.
Remove the viewer.
Power up:
Ensure that a diskette is in each dnve.
Swapping keyboard cables causes one keyboard to control the other station. Therefore,
data keyed at-one station wi II be displayed on
the other station's area of the display. Press all of the data keys. The correct data
should be displayed as each key is pressed.
Perform this operation at the station which
originally reported the trouble.
Does the machine still fail?
Y N
-; Power down.
Reconnect the cables to their original
locations.
Use MPU MAP 5-1.
Power down.
Reconnect the keyboard cables to their
original connectors at MPU planar sockets P
and R.
Check the failing keys for binds.
Remove key top buttons from failing keys (4078).
Remove the all keys unit (407 A).
Turn the all keys unit over carefully and check
the flyplates of the failing keys (4070).
E
-----Control
Keyboard
2
Control
--
------
Keyboard
1
Control and display interactions with keyboard
signal cables swapped at planar sockets P and R.
Are all keys free of binds and are flyplates
attached to the modules?
Y N
Repair or replace the key modules (407C,
408,409).
Verify the fix.
Certain key modules were defective.
Clean the key module flyplate (4070) and pad
area (407K) of the keyboard PC board with a
lint-free cloth (PIN 2108930) dampened with
water or alcohol (PIN 2200200).
Reinstall the all keys unit after all flyplates
and the pad area are dry.
Power up.
Load a diskette.
Press the failing key and check for binds and
correct data entry.
Does the machine still fail?
Y N
The keyboard PC board was dirty.
I
Power down.
Replace the keyboard PC board (407G).
Verify the fix.
Does the machine still fail?
Y N
The keyboard PC board was defective.
I
Power down.
Reinstall the original keyboard PC board.
Replace the keyboard signal cable (407H).
Verify the fix.
The signal cable was defective.
3742 ML
II
4-1.5
4-1.6
This page is intentionally left blank.
MAP 4-2-
This MAP will find problems in data and
function keys.
Can you make the machine fail?
Y N
- When the failure is intermittent, perform
the following steps, one on each call, until
the problem is solved.
Record the date of each action.
When operating the 3742, does the display
suddenly go blank but come on again in about
10 seconds and the keyboard locks up? - - - - -.,
Y N
1-- Highly intermittent keyboard lockups with/without flashing screen and with/without error codes
- Vibrate the machine to cause the failure.
may occur due to arcing in the CRT. These lockCheck room temperature and humidity
ups cannot be reset with the RESET key. On
and compare to Installation Procedure,
machines with keyboard PC board at EC level
page 16-1. Check dc voltages at keyboard
310084 and 309728, these lockups can be reset
with respect to frame ground (407L).---1
with the REPEAT key. On machines with keyboard PC board at EC 309786 (latest), it requires
Voltage
Pin
Limits
power OFF/ON to reset the lockup. A CRT high
+5.0
B09
4.7 to 5.5
voltage converter with excessive high voltage out+8.5
D03
8.0 to 9.4
put or a defective CRT can cause CRT arcing.
ground
D08
0
-5.0
D06
4.6 to 5.4
A CRT causing these intermittent problems more
Power down.
Reseat both ends of keyboard signal cable
(407H).
Verify the fix.
D ATE:
than once a week should be replaced. On initial
installation, a CRT may arc once or twice. This i!
not unusual after shipping and handling.
Ir--;';"';'I=-------r-----.
Power down.
Replace the keyboard PC board (407G).
Verify thr-e::.....:.;fi.::,x;,...._~_~
DATE
-----l1~.......J...,..--l
Power down.
Replace MPU (505N, 504).
Verify the fix.
D AT E:
:1'--
For easier probing with the CE probe, remove the
ground lead of the switch cable (407F) and use
that ground pin.
\r--.......,Ir------r---
Power down.
Replace the keyboardsignal cable (407H).
Verify the fix.
DATE:
---..:----1--
r-I
Power down.
Clean flyplates (407D) and pad area (407K)
of keyboard with a lint·free cloth. (P/N
2108930) Verify the fix.
DATE:
Replace audio feedback device (407J, 410).
Verify tr-he_._fi-i-x;,....____~
DATE:
1
Ir-"·-'-1--'-,---I
Dampen cloth with water or alcohol
(P/N 2200200).
I
Powerd~o-w-n~.-~-~
Replace the ac line filter (418A).
Verify the fix.
C DATE:
,..-.....-~
r-I---,1--.----.
3742 ML
II
4-2.1
4-2.2
If the machine is equipped with a proof keyboard, perform the following steps:
Power down.
- Replace the ROS feature card at C and D
(5058).
Verify the fix.
DATE
:1,---r-I--.-----.
Power down.
Replace cross connectors C and D (5058).
Verify the fix.
DATE
:1,---1.---,-----,
Power down.
Disconnect the wire from terminal 9 of
the display PC board (304C).
Using the 500 Vdc scale. connect the
CE meter from terminal 7 (+) to terminal 6 (-) on the display PC board.
- Power up and wait 25 seconds.
-
Is the voltage between 300 and 410 Vdc?
Y N
-
Power down.
Reconnect the wire to terminal 9 of
the display PC board.
- Ground the CRT high voltage anode
(304A).
- Replace the converter (304G).
- Verify the fix.
DATE: ----,I;----~____t
-I
- Power down.
- Reconnect the wire to terminal 9 of the
display PC board.
- Ground the CRT high voltage (304A).
- Replace the chassis and CRT assembly
(304E).
- Adjust the yoke assembly (304F, 305).
Verify th..-e_f_ix....,..._--.-_-,
DATE: ----'IL....--~-----'
1.-1
A
The following service aids for
1. STICKING/BINDING KEYS
2. EXTRA CHARACTERS
are to inform you of problems and corrections
not necessarily in the MAPs. Use these service
aids as required.
1. STICKING/BINDING KEYS
Sticking/binding keys can occur due to a
design problem. This problem is more acute
when striking the keys at an angle (normal
key operation). Due to the plane of the
keyboard, the top row of keys are affected
the most. The right adjust key and space bar
are very sensitive because both keys use two
modules.
Key Module Differences
Nonbinding Key Module
New modules are white and have a different part
number. PIN 1643192 is used in all positions
except the right adjust key. For positions that
do not require a flyplate, use the same PIN
1643192 and remove the flyplate.
The best fix is to replace the module.
Right Adjust Key Position
There are two styles of right adjust keys. One
(old style) uses two modules, and the new style
uses one module. The new style uses module
1643192 (same as all other positions). The old
style uses module 5183447. The only difference
between the two parts is the key stem spring.
PIN 5183447 uses a lighter spring to compensate
for using two modules for one key. For the position not requiring a flyplate on the old style, use
PIN 5183447 and remove the flyplate.
Field Update of Keyboards
A field B/M will be provided to update keyboards
with PC board at EC 310084. This field B/M (EC
823177) will provide a complete keyboard
assembly.
A field B/M will be provided to update keyboards
with PC boards at EC 309728 and 309786. This
B/M (EC 825709) will provide all contamination shields and 10 new modules for critical
positions.
o
3742 ML
4-2.3
4-2.4
An alternate fix is to rotate the modules 180
degrees.
An ECA will be released to provide a new
keyboard assembly. This keyboard assembly
will include the latest level PC board, dust
seals and improved key modules.
To test the machine's ability to accept input
at high speed (such as when rolling keys),
hold down four data keys and the Repeat
key simultaneously. Two or three keys
(depending on the keys pressed) should
alternately enter, repetitively to the end of
the record, without an error. If an error
results, or if the machine fails to function
as stated, replace the keyboard PC board.
2. EXTRA CHARACTERS
A quick check to determine a failing data
key is to hold down the repeat key with a
diskette loaded and observe the display.
The PC board must be cleaned with a
lint-free cloth and alcohol or tape cleaner.
Any contamination over 0.001 inch (0.02
mm) thick will cause failures on PC boards
at EC level 310084.
New level PC boards (EC 309728 and
3(07868) have been desensitized and will
allow contamination of .005 to .007 inch
before failing. An ECA will be released to
provide a new keyboard assembly. This
keyboard assembly will include the
latest level PC board, dust seals and
improved key modules.
EC and part number are either in the upper
left hand corner of the PC board or on the
signal cable connector.
Load a diskette.
Press several data keys.
Observe the display -
E.
Any data keyed should
display.
appe~r
on the
~Does the data display correctly?
I-
YN
Use keyboard MAP 4-6_
Is the machine equipped with a data entry keyboard rather than a proof keyboard?
Y N
Power down.
Disconnect cross connectors (505B).
Power up.
Perform the failing operation.
Does the machine still fail?
Y N
Reconnect cross connectors C and D.
Use MAP 5-1.
- The ROS feature card is now disconnected (505E
- The keyboard function with the ROS feature
card removed is the same as that of a standard
data entry keyboard. (For example, pressing
NUM SHIFT and M enters a 7 rather than a 1.)
Power down.
Reconnect cross connectors C and D.
Power up.
Insert a diskette in each station.
Perform the same function and/or key data
on the other keyboard.
Does this keyboard work correctly?
Y N
-Testthe probe at planar P-B12 (signal
ground P-D08). Both probe lights
should be on. Probe keyboard B10, signal ground
008 (407L).
Connect probe power leads to planar M-D13 (-)
black, M-B05 (+).
Are both lights on?
Y N
Power down.
Disconnect keyboard signal cable at
original keyboard.
Power up.
Probe keyboard B10 at the other
keyboard.
Are both lights on?
Y N
Power down.
Disconriecfkeyboard" signal cable
from"other keyboard.
Reconnect keyboard signal cable to
original keyboard.
Power up.
Probe original keyboard B10.
®
3142 ML
4-2.5
4-2.6
Are both lights on?
Y N
Power down.
Disconnect keyboard signal cable
at MPU planar sockets P and R.
Power up.
Probe planar sockets P and R, B10.
Are both lights on?
Y N
Power down.
Reconnect the cables to thei r
original locations.
Use MPU MAP 5-1.
Power down.
Check both cables.
Replace defective keyboard signal
cable (407H).
Verify the fix.
The keyboard signal cable was defective.
Power down.
Replace the keyboard PC board for
both keyboards (407G).
Verify the fix.
The keyboard PC boards were defective.
Power down.
Replace keyboard PC board (407G).
Verify the fix.
The keyboard PC board was defective.
Power down.
Swap the keyboard signal cables at MPU planar
sockets P and R.
-------Remove the viewer.
Control
Power up.
Keyboard
Ensure that a diskette is in each drive.
2
Reversing the keyboard cables causes one
keyboard to contr'ol the other station.
Therefore, data keyed ~t one station will
be displayed on the other station's area of
Keyboard
the display: Control
Perform the failing operation at the station
1
....._--which originally reported the trouble.
Control and display interactions with keyboard
Does the machine still fail?
signal cables swapped at planar sockets P and R.
Y N
Power down.
Reconnect the cables to their original
locations.
Use MPU MAP 5-1.
J
--
-
Power down.
Reconnect the keyboard signal cables to their
original connectors at MPU planar sockets P
and R.
Check the failing keys for binds.
Remove the all keys unit on the failing
keyboard (407 A).
Turn the all keys unit over carefully and
check the flyplates (407D).
Are all keys free of binds and are all flyplates
attached to the module?
Y N
Repair or replace the defective key modules
(407C, 408, 409).
Verify the fix.
Certain key modules were defective.
Clean the key module flyplates and pad area
of the keyboard PC board with lint-free cloth
(P/N 2108930) dampened with water or
alcohol. (P/N 2200200).
Reinstall the all keys unit after all flyplates
and pad areas are dry.
Verify the fix.
Does the machine still fail?
Y N
The keyboard PC board was dirty.
I
Power down.
Replace the keyboard PC board (407G).
Verify the fix.
Does the machine still fail?
Y N
The keyboard PC board was defective.
I
- Power down.
- Reinstall the original PC board.
Check the keyboard signal cable for opens/
shorts/ground. If station 1, check the cable
at power supply test point 4 (419B).
Is the cable OK?
Y N
Replace the keyboard signal cable (407H).
Verify the fix.
Does the machine still fail?
Y N
The keyboard signal cable was defective.
Use MPU MAP 5-1.
3742 ML
4-2.7
4-2.8
This page is intentionally left blank.
MAP 4-3 -
- This MAP will find problems in the switches.
Can you make the machine fail?
Y N·
- When the failure is intermittent, perform
the following steps, one on each call, until
the problem is solved.
Record the date of each action.
Vibrate the machine to cause the failure.
Checkroom temperature and humidity
and compare to Installation Procedure,
page 16-1. Check de voltages at keyboard
with respectto-frame ground (407l). -
Voltage
Pin
Limits
+5.0
+8.5
Ground
B09
-5.0
006
4.7 to 5.5
8.0 to 9.4
0
4.6 to 5.4
003
008
For easier probing with the CE probe, remove
the ground lead of the switch cable (407F) and
use that ground pin.
Power down.
Reseat both ends of the keyboard signal
cable (407H).
- Verify tp..;h;.:;..e...;..fi~x~._...------,
DATE
- Power down.
- Replace the toggle switch associated with
failing machine operation (407E).
- Verify t;,;.;h;.:;..e...;..fi;.;wx~._~---.
DATE:
- Power down.
Replace the MPU (505N, 504).
Verify the fix.
DATE: 1~.;...r.1~-r--......,
:lL---LI_..L----.I
L-I_IL--.--L-----I
Power down.
Replace the keyboard signal cable (407H).
- Verify t,....h_e_"fi_x_._....-_
DATE:".
Replace keyboard PC board (407G).
Verify the fix.
DATE: I---I....--~----.
I
Power down.
Replace the ac line filter (418A).
Verify the fix.
DATE: . ,.;. ,---.,.----
A
3742 ML
4-3.1
4-3.2
Power down.
Reseat both ends of the keyboard signal (407H)
and toggle switch (407 F) cables.
Verify the fix.
Does the machine fail now?
V N
A cable was loose.
I
Is an error code displayed?
V N
Load a diskette.
Press CHAR ADV 16 times. Set all toggle switches down.
Remove disk from other station. Press FUNCT SE L lower
Hold NUM SHIFT and press C
R~lease NUM SHIFT and then press U
Observe the toggle switch test code on the
display and do not operate the toggle
switches. -
Switches
- This locates the test code position.
An F error will occur if CE mode is
attempted while a disk is in the other station.
The machine is now in CER mode.
The machine is now in CEW mode.
- Toggle Switch Test Code location
Code
1. No switches defective.
(ARA, PNS, ADS, & KSW)
0
01 01 00 00 00
07 00 00 00 00
2. AUrO REC/ADV circuit shorted. 2
3. PROG NUM SHIFT circuit shorted. 4
4 .. AUTO DUP/SK IP circuit shorted. 8
5. KATAKANA SHIFT circuit open 1 • 2
Any switch circuit failing?
V N
- Operate the toggle switches in the
(407E) sequence shown in the following chart:
Katakana shift switch test code location.
Correct Open Switch
Code
Circuit Code
1. AUTO DU'P/SKIPup.
2. AUTO REC ADV up.
8
o
A
8
3. PROG NUM SH I FT up.
4. KATAKANA SHIFT Upl.
E
2
A
Any switch circuit failing?
Y N
- Use MPU MAP 5-1.
o
1 Test
applies on Katakana machines only.
Press a data key several times to test while
observing the Katakana shift switch test
location.
Power down.
Disconnect the toggle switch cable wire from
the failing switch (411).
Use the CE meter set to the Rx1 scale and
check the switch (407E, 411).
Does the switch function correctly?
Y N
Replace the defective toggle switch.
Reconnect the cable wire to the switch.
Verify the fix.
The toggle switch was defective.
Is this machine other than a Katakana machine?
Y N
Is the failure in the ARA, ADS, or PNS switch
circuit?
Y N
Check the KAT AKANA SH IFT switch
cable wire for opens, shorts, grounds
(411 ).
Is the cable OK?
Y N
- Replace the toggle switch cable.
- Verify the fix.
The toggle switch cable was defective.
Check the KANA SHIFT key for binds.
Remove the KANA SH IFT key top.
Remove the all keys unit (407 A).
Turn the all keys unit over carefully
and check the flyplate on the KANA
SHIFT key (407D).
Is the key free of binds and is the flyplate
attached to the module?
Y"'N
Repair or replace the key module
(407C). (See Flyplate Replacement
on page 414.)
Reinstall the all keys unit.
Verify the fix.
The key module was defective.
Replace the keyboard PC board (407G).
Verify the fix.
3742 M L
D
4-3.3
4-3.4
~ Disconnect the keyboard signal cable from
-=--
MPU planar socket P or R (505).
- Check the switch circuit from the switch cable
wire to the signal cable for opens/shorts/
grounds (411).
Are there any opens/shorts/grounds?
YN
Power down.
Reconnect all cables.
Use MPU MAP 5-1.
Disconnect the keyboard signal cable from
the keyboard PC board connector (407H).
- Check the switch circuits of the signal cable for
opens/shorts/grounds (407H).
Are there any opens/shorts/grounds?
YN
- Check the toggle switch cable for opens/
shorts/ground (407 F. 411).
Is the cable OK?
YN
- Replace the toggle switch cable.
- Verify the fix.
The toggle switch cable was defective.
Power down.
Reinstall original toggle switch cable.
Replace the keyboard PC board (407G).
Verify the fix.
The keyboard PC board was defective.
- Replace the keyboard signal cable (407H).
- Verify the fix.
The keyboard signal cable was defective.
- This MAP will find problems in the keyboard
data gate line.
MAP4-4-
Can you make the machine fail?
YN
- When the failure is intermittent, perform
the following steps, one on each call, until
the trouble is fixed.
- Record the date of each action.
- Vibrate the machine to cause the failure.
Check room temperature and humidity
and compare to Installation Procedure,
page 16-1. Check dc voltages at keyboard
with respect to frame ground (407L). -
-
Voltage
Pin
Limits
+5.0
+8.5
Ground
-5.0
B09
003
DOS
006
4.7 to 5.5
S.O to 9.4
0
4.6 to 5.4
-
For easier probing with the CE probe, remove
the ground lead of the switch cable (407F) and
use that ground pin.
Power down.
Reseat both ends of the keyboard signal
cable (407H).
Verify the fix.
DATE:
-or--""'"
'-1-"--1
Power down.
Replace the keyboard PC board (407G).
Verify the fix.
DATE:
--r-----,
'-1-"--1
Power down.
Replace the MPU (505N, 504).
Verify the fix.
DATE:
' - 1- . . - - \- . , . . . . - . . . . . . ,
-
Power down.
Replace the keyboard signal cable (407H).
Verify the fix.
D AT E
:1'-----'1""----'-----'
-
Power down.
Replace the ac line filter (41SA).
-
Verify tr-he.;....fi""Tx.~--r-_...,
DATE :1'-_ .....
1 _.l.--.....J
A
3742 ML
II
4-4.1
4-4.2
Is the machine equipped with a data entry
keyboard rather than a proof keyboard?
YN
- Power down.
- Replace the ROS feature card at
sockets C and 0 (5058).
Verify the fix.
DATE:
r-I-r-I
-r----,
Power down.
Replace cross connectors C and 0 (5058).
Veri fy th,e_f_ix..,.,....-----,,.-----,
DATE:
1____.. . .1. .____--'
Power down.
Reseat both ends of the keyboard signal
cable (407H).
Verify the fix.
Does the machine still fail?
I
Y N
The cables were loose.
Is the machine equipped with a data entry
keyboard rather than a proof keyboard?
YN
Power down.
Disconnect cross connectors C and 0 (5058).
Power up.
Perform the failing operation.
Does the machine still fail?
Y N
Reconnect cross connectors C and O.
Use MAP 5-1.
- Power down.
Reconnect cross connectors C and
Power up.
B
o.
- The ROS feature card is now disconnected (5058)
- The ,keyboard function with the ROS feature
card removed is identical to that of a standard
data entry keyboard. For exampte, pressing the
NUM SHi FT and M enters a 7 rather than a 1.
Load a diskette.
Press several data keys.
Is the audio feedback device making a clicking
noise (407J, 410)?
Y N
II-
Use keyboard MAP 4-6.
Does the other keyboard work correctly?
Y N
Use MPU MAP 5-1.
- Power down.
- Swap the keyboard signal cables at MPU
planar sockets P and R.
Remove the viewer.
Power up.
Ensure that a diskette is in each drive.
Swapping the keyboard cables causes one
keyboard to control the other station. Therefore, data keyed at one station will be displayed
on the other station's area of the display. Press the failing key on the failing keyboard.
Perform this operation at the station which
originally reported the trouble.
------~
.......
Control
Keyboard
2
Control
Does the machine still fail?
YN
- Power down.
- Reconnect the keyboard signal cables to
their original position.
- Use MPU MAP5-1.
...... --.
--- - ----
Control and display interactions with keyboard
signal cables swapped at planar sockets P and R.
Power down.
Reconnect the keyboard cables to their original
connectors.
Check the keyboard signal cable (407H) for
opens/shorts/ground. If at station 1, check
cable at power supply TP4 (419B).
Is the cable OK?
YN
- Replace the keyboard signal cable (407H).
- Verify the fix.
The keyboard signal cable was defective.
- Replace the keyboard PC board (4076).
- Verify the fix.
The keyboard PC board was defective.
3742 ML
II
4-4.3
4-4.4
This page is intentionally left blank.
MAP 4-5 -
- This MAP will find problems in the REP
key.
Can you make the machine fail?
Y N
- When the failure is intermittent, perform
the following steps, one on each call, until
the trouble is fixed.
Vibrate the machine to cause the failure.
Check room temperature and humidity
and compare to Installation Procedure,
page 16-1. Check dc voltages at keyboard
with respect to frame ground (407 L). Voltage
Pin
Limits
+5.0
+S.5
Ground
-5.0
B09
003
DOS
DOS
4.7 to 5.5
S.O to 9.4
0
4.S to 5.4
-
For easier probing with the CE probe remove the
ground lead of the switch cable (407F) and use
that ground pin.
Power down.
Replace the REP key module (407C).
Verify the fix.
DATE:
Power down.
-' Replace the failing key module (407C,
40S, 409).
- Verify t,...h_e_f-rix_._,....----,
DATE: IL..--...LI_,---~
Power down.
Replace the keyboard PC board (407G).
I
I
D
Verify tr-h_e_fi-rx_.--r-----,
DATE:II.-_IL,.....---..L...~
Power down.
Replace the ac line filter (41SA).
Verify the fix.
DATE:
"'-1---'1"-----'----'
3742 ML
4-5.1
4-5.2
Is the machine equipped with a data entry
keyboard rather than a proof keyboard?
YN
Power down.
Replace the ROS feature card at C and
o (5058).
Verify the fix.
DATE:
Ir-----,I---.---,
- Power down.
Replace cross connectors C and 0 (5058).
Verify the fix.
DATE:
-I--...-1-.,..-----,
Power down.
Reseat both ends of the keyboard signal
cable (407H).
Verify the fix.
Does the machine still fail?
Y N
The cable was loose.
I
Is the machine equipped with a data entry keyboard rather than a proof keyboard?
YN
Power down.
Remove cross connectors C and 0 (5058).
Power up.
Perform the failing operation.
Does the machine still fail?
YN
Power down.
Reinstall cross connectors C ar:ld 0
(5058).
Use MAP 5-1.
- The ROS feature card is now disconnected (5058).
-,,
I _
The keyboard function with the ROS feature
card removed is identical to that of a standard
data entry keyboard. For example, pressing
NUM SHIFT and M enters a 7 rather than a 1.
Power down.
Reconnect cross connectors C and D.
- Power up.
=
W
-
Remove the diskette from the other station.
Load a diskette.
Press and hold CHAR ADV.
Did the cursor move more than one position?
Y N
Press and hold CHAR ADV.
Advance the cursor to position 13 by pressing the REPEAT key.
- This checks the REPEAT function.
- This checks the REPEAT key.
Did the cursor fail to move to position 13.
Y N
Press FUNCT SEL lower.
Hold NUM SHIFT and press C.
- Position 13 locates the keyboard test code
when the machine is in CE mode.
Did the machine fail to change to CER
(mode-status) ?
Y N
- Release NUM SH I FT and press U
+__'~08~5~0~0:r~00~00
01 01 00 00 00
66 00 00 00 00 07 00 00 00 00
For Katakana: Is re:::yg:is:te~r:gr~0~uP~2:4:.-_ _
different from this?For standard keyboard: Is register
04 02 00 00 00 00 02 00
group 4 different from this?--_ _-Y N
Press every key except RESET and
A key may have to be pressed more than
REP several times. Check ALPHA
once because the keyboard data register is
SHIFT and NUM SHIFT keys by
periodically reset by the diagnostic program
pressing L with each; ALPHA
and may not accept the first key depression.
SHIFT should give A6, NUM
SHIFT should give 66 (415).-----'
Look at group 4 of the data display. - - - I f - - - - - - . . . . , .
For Katakana: Pressing the L key
wi~h
KANA SYMB should give E6
in group 24. If E6 is displayed by
pressing the KANA SYMB key
alone, the key is defective.
66 00 00 00 00 07 00 00 00 00
00 00 04 02 00 00 00 00 02 00
To check the Kana shift key, press
KANA SHIFT then L several times.
Register 24 should display 20 (416).
-
look at group 24 pf the data
display.
Are there any failing keys (415)?
Y N
- Press RESET several times.
Did the machine fail to change to
XR (mode-status)?
Y N
- Use MPU MAP 5-1.
- Power down.
- Check the failing key for binds.
- Remove the all keys unit (407 A).
- Turn the all keys unit over carefully, and check
the flyplate on the failing key (4070).
@
3742 ML
II
4-5.3
4-5.4
Is the key free of binds and is the flyplate at. tached to. the module?
Y N
Repair or replace defective key modules
(407C)~
Reinstall the all keys unit.
- Verify the fix.
The key module was defective,
- Clean the key module flyplates (4070) and pad
area (407K) of the keyboard PC board with a
lint-fre~ cloth (P/N 2108930) dampened with
water or alcohol (P/N 2200200).
- Reinstall thea" keys unit after all flyplates
and the pad area are dry.
- Verify the fix.
Does the machine still fail?
Y N
The keyboard
board was dirty.
l
PC
- Power down.
- Replace the keyboard PC board (407G).
- Verify the fix.
Does the machine still fail?
Y N
The keyboard PC board was defective.
I
Power down.
- Reinstall the original PC board.
- Check the keyboard signal cable (407H) for
opens/shorts/grounds. If at station 1, check
cable at power supply TP4 (419B).
Is the cable OK?
Y N
- Replace the keyboard signal cable (407H).
- Verify the fix.
The keyboard signal cable was defective.
-
Use MPU MAP 5-1.
This MAP will find problems in the audio
feedback device.
MAP 4-6-
Can you make the machine fail?
Y N
- Where the trouble is intermittent, perform
the following steps, one on each call, until
the problem is fixed.
- Record the date of each step .
. When operating the 3742, does the display
suddenly go blank but come on again in
about 10 seconds and the keyboard locks up? Y N
Vibrate the machine to cause the failure.
Check room temperature and humidity
and compare to Installation Procedure,
page 16·1. Check dc voltages at keyboard
with respect to frame ground. -------1
Voltage
Pin
Limits
+5.0
+8.5
Ground
-5.0
B09
003
008
006
4.7 to 5.5
8.0 to 9.4
I
I
I
Highly intermittent keyboard lockups with/without flashing screen and with/without error codes
may occur due to arcing in the CRT. These lockups cannot be reset with the RESET key. On
machines with keyboard PC boards at EC level
310084 and 309728, these lockups can be reset
with the REPEAT key. On machines with keyboard PC board at EC 309786 (latest), it will
require power OFF/ON to reset the lockup. A
CRT high voltage converter with excessive high
voltage output or a defective CRT can cause CRT
arcing.
o
4.6 to 5.4
Power down.
.
j
Clean the key module flyplates and pad area,
of the keyboard PC. board with a lint-free I
(P/N 2108930) cloth dampened with water I
or alcohol (P/N 2200200).
Reinstall the all keys uni;t (407 A) after all
flyplates are dry.
Verify t,. .h. ;. .e_fi,x..;....-'""T-"--'
DATE: ----'I_~----'
Power down.
Reseat both ends of the keyboard signal
cable (407H).
Verify the fix.
DATE:
A CRT causing these intermittent problems more
than once a week should be replaced. On initial
installation, a CRT may arc once or twice. This
is not unusual after shipping and handling.
I....
---rl---r-----,
-I
Power down.
Replace the audio feedback device (407J,
410).
Verify the fix.
DATE:
-r----,
Power down.
Replace the keyboard PC board (4C7G).
Verify the fix.
DATE:
-r----.
-I-r-I
'- -
For easier probing with the CE probe, remove
the ground lead of the switch cable (407F) and
use that ground pin.
I- -_I
Power down.
Replace the keyboard signal cable (407H).
Verify the fix.
I""""-T""""""'' ' DATE: ----,I~--r-_.
C
r-I
3142 ML
n
4-6.1
4-6.2
AB~
Power down.
Replace the ac line filter (418A).
Verify t.;.;,he::...:..:fi.:,;x.=--_-_
DATE: 1~--lfL......---L--....J
Is the machine equipped with a data entry
keyboard rather than a proof keyboard?
YN
Power down.
Replace the ROS feature card at C and
D (5058).
Verify the fix.
DATE: (..---.-,-"",,-Power down.
- Replace cross connectors C and D (5058).
Verify the fix.
DATE: r -- ,......- . - -........
I
-
-
Use MAP 5-1.
- Use MAP 5-1.
Power down.
Disconnect the wire from terminal 9
of the display PC board (304C).
Using the 500 Vdc scale, connect the
CE meter from terminal 7 (+) to terminal 6 (-) on the display PC board.
Power up and wait 25 seconds.
Is the voltage between 300 and 410 Vdc?
YN
- Power down.
- Reconnect the wire to terminal 9 of
the display PC board.
- Ground the CRT high voltage anode
(304A).
Replace the converter (304G).
Verify the fix.
----.-----....-.......
DATE
:1 _L-I
L..
_L-....J
- Power down.
- Reconnect the wire to terminal 9 of
the display PC board.
- Ground the CRT high voltage (304A).
- Replace the chassis and CRT assembly
(304E).
- Adjust the yoke assembly (304F, 305).
- Verify the fix.
DATE:
' - 1- , . - - - - - - - . - - - - .
Power down.
Reseat both ends of the keyboard signal
cable (407H, 505).
- Verify the fix.
~
Does the machine still fail?
Y N
The cable was loose.
I
Is the machine equipped with a data entry keyboard rather than a proof keyboard?
Y N
Power down.
Remove cross connectors C and D (5058).
Power up. - - - - - - - Perform the failing operation.
- The ROS feature card is now disconnected
I (5058).
- The keyboard function with the ROS featu~e
card removed is the same as that of a standard
data entry keyboard. For example, pressing
NUM SHIFT and M enters a 7 rather than a 1.
Does the machine still fail?
Y N
Power down.
Rei.nstall cross connectors C and D.
Use MAP 5-1.
Power down.
Reconnect cross connectors C and D.
Power up.
Error Code Positions 7 and 8
Are the error code positions blank?
Y N
Power down.
Disconnect the keyboard signal cables
from MPU planar sockets P and R.
Power up.
Load a diskette.
Is an error code displayed now?
Y N
Power down.
Reconnect the keyboard signal cables to
MPU planar sockets P and R.
Replace the keyboard PC board (407G).
-- Verify the fix.
01
00008
X R
Does the machine still fail?
Y N
The keyboard PC board was defective.
I
Power down.
Reinstall the original keyboard PC board.
Check/replace the keyboard signal cable
(407H).
Verify the fix ..
The keyboard signal cable was defective.
Power down.
Reconnect the keyboard signal cables.
Use MPU MAP 5-1.
E
3742 ML
4-6.3
4-6.4
~Is the display flashing?
Y N
Load a diskette in the other station.
At the other station, perform failing
operation.
Does this keyboard work correctly?
Y N
- Power down.
Disconnect the other signal cable at
either MPU planar sockets P or R and at
power supply TP4 (419B) if the other keyboard is at station 1.
Check the following dc voltages at the
failing keyboard PC board with reference
to frame ground (407L).
Power up.
Voltage
Pin
Limits
+5.0
+8.5
Ground
-5.0
B09
003
008
006
4.7 to 5.5
8.0 to 9.4
0
4.6 to 5.4
Are all voltages within limits?
YN
- Make a note of the failing voltage
measurement for future reference.
- Power down.
- Disconnect signal cable (407H) at
keyboard PC board.
- Check the following dc voltages at the
keyboard end of the signal cable with
reference to the frame ground.
Power up.
Voltage
Pin
Limits
+5.0
+8.5
Ground
-5.0
BOO
003
008
006
4.7 to 5.5
8.0 to 9.4
Are all voltages within limits?
Y N
Power down.
Reconnect the cable.
Use power MAP 6-1.
o
4.6 to 5.4
- The problem may be due to ripple in the
power supply. If ripple is suspected, use
Power Theory in Section 15.
13----
o
B
Keyboard
Signal
Cable
Power down.
Reconnect the keyboard signal cable.
- Replace the keyboard PC board
(407G).
- Verify the fix.
- Attempt loading a diskette at least
twice. Does the machine still fail?
YN
The keyboard PC board was defective.
- A faulty disk FC card may cause a bad data set
label 03 (write gate check) to be written on the
disk. A good disk Fe card will correct the
write test label but will indicate an error the
first time the diskette is loaded.
Power down.
Reinstall the original keyboard PC
board.
Use MAP 6-7.
- Test the probe at planar P-B12 (signal
ground P.:D08). Both probe lights should
be on. Probe keyboard B10 (signal ground
D08) (407L). Are both lights on?
YN
Power down.
Disconnect signal cable (407H) from
keyboard.
Power up.
Probe cable B10 at keyboard end
(signal ground pin 008).
Are both lights on?
YN
- Power down.
- Disconnect the keyboard cable
from MPU connector P or R.
- Power up.
- Probe planar P-Bl0 (R-Bl0). Signal ground P-D08 (R-D08).
- Connect probe power leads to planar M-D 13
(-) black, M-B05 (+).
Checks for oscillator pulses.
1 3 - - - - 02
D
B
Keyboard
Signal
Cable
- Checks for oscillator pulses.
3742 M L
II
4-6.5
4-6.6
Are both lights on?
Y N
-
Power down.
Reconnect the keyboard signal
cable.
Use MPU MAP 5-1.
Power down.
Replace the keyboard signal cable
(407H).
Verify the fix.
The keyboard signal cable was
defective.
Power down.
Replace keyboard PC board (407G).
Verify the fix.
The keyboard PC board was defective.
Probe keyboard 811 (407L).
Power down and wait 5 seconds.
As you watch the probe for the DOWN
light, turn the power on. Did the DOWN light come on?
Y N
Power down.
Disconnect signal cable (407H) from
keyboard.
Probe cable 811 at keyboard end
(signal ground pin 008). Observe the DOWN light as you turn
power on.
-
Checks for power-on reset pulse. If functioning properly, the POR pulse occurs and
the DOWN light comes on for a short time
after the POWER switch is turned on.
1 3 - - - - 02
o
8
Did the DOWN light come on?
Y N
-
p
Power down.
Disconnect the keyboard signal
cable from MPU connector P
(or R).
Probe planar P-811 (R-811).
Signal ground P-D08 (R-D08).
As you watch the probe for the
DOWN light, turn the power on. -
Keyboard
Signal
Cable
Checks for power-on reset pulse. If functioning properly, the POR pulse occurs and
the DOWN light comes on for a short time
after the POWER switch is turned on.
Did the DOWN light come on?
YN
PotNer down.
Reconnect the cable.
USE MPU MAP 5-1.
Power down.
Replace the keyboard signal cable
(407H).
Verify the fix.
The keyboard signal cable was defective.
Power down.
Replace the keyboard PC board (407G).
Verify the fix.
Does the machine still fail?
YN
The keyboard PC board was defective.
I
Power down.
Reinstall the original keyboard PC board.
Check the keyboard signal cable (407H)
for opens/shorts/ground. If at station 1,
check cable at power supply TP4 (419B).
Is the cable 0 K?
YN
Replace the keyboard signal cable
(407H).
Verify the fix.
The keyboard signal cable was defective.
Use MPU MAP 5-1.
Power down.
Swap the keyboard signal cables at MPU
planar sockets P and R.
Remove the viewer.
Power up.
Ensure that a diskette is in each drive.
Swapping the keyboard cables causes one
keyboard to control the other station.
Therefore, data keyed at one station will
be displayed on the other station's area of
the display. At the failing keyboard, perform the failing
operation.
Keyboard
2
Control
-.... ......
-- ---- - ---...-
Keyboard
1
Control and display interactions with
keyboard signal cables swapped at planar
sockets P and R.
3742 ML
4-6.7
4-6.8
Does the machine still faiH
YN
Power down.
Reconnect the cables to their original
location.
Use MPU MAP 5-1.
- Power down.
- Reconnect the keyboard cables to their
originaJ connectors.
- Reinstall the viewer.
- Check the audio feedback device for correct
mechanical operation (410).
Does the audio feedback device operate OK
mechanically?
YN
- Repair or replace the audio feedback
device (407J. 410).
- Verify the fix.
The audio feedback device was defective.
- Power down.
- Test the CE meter. - On the failing keyboard, disconnect one
wire from the audio feedback device (407J).
- Measure the resistance of the audio feedback device.
Is the resistance 55 to 60 ohms (new style) or
90 to 110 ohms (old style) (410)1
YN
- Replace the audio feedback device
(407J).
- Verify the fix.
The aud io feedback device was defective.
Reconnect the wire to the audio feedback
device.
- Power up.
- Check the following dc voltages at the keyboard PC board with reference to the frame
ground (407 L). - Power up.
CE meter test:
Power down.
Disconnect the disk signal cable (204B).
Set the meter to the Rx1 scale.
Measure the resistance between test
points 16 and 23 on the disk FC card
(204A).
- The CE meter should read between 86
and 96 ohms.
- Reconnect the disk signal cable.
-
Voltage
Pin
Limits
+5.0
+8.5
Ground
5.0
B09
003
008
006
4.7 to 5.5
8.0 to 9.4
0
4.6 to 5.4
The problem may be due to ripple in the
power supply. If ripple is supected, use
Power Theory in Section 15.
Are all voltages within limits?
YN
- M~ke a note of the failing voltage
measurement for future reference.
- Power down.
- Disconnect the signal cable at keyboard PC
board.
- Power up.
- Check the following dc voltage at the
keyboard end of the signal cable with
reference to frame ground (407H).
Voltage
Pin
Limits
+5.0
+8.5
Ground
-5.0
B09
003
008
006
4.7 to 5.5
8.0 to 9.4
0
4.6 to 5.4
o
B
Keyboard
Signal
Cable
Are all voltages within limits?
YN
Power down.
Reconnect the keyboard signal cable
(407H).
Use MAP 6-1.
Power down.
Reconnect the keyboard signal cable.
Replace keyboard PC board (407G).
- Verify the fix.
- Attempt loading a diskette at least
twice. -
A fault disk FC card may cause a bad data set
Does the machine still fail?
YN
The keyboard PC board was defective.
label 03 (write gate check) to be written on
the disk. A good disk FC card will correct
the write test label but will indicate an error
the first time the diskette is loaded.
I
Power down.
Reinstall the original keyboard PC board.
Use MAP 6-7.
3742 M L
II
4-6.9
4-6.10
- load it diskette.
-Test the probe at planar P~B12 (signal
ground P-D08). Both probe lights-should
be on. Probe keyboard 010, signatground D08
(407l). Observe the probe as you load a diskette.
Does the UP light turn-on?
YN
Unload the diskette.
Power down.
Disconnect-signal cable (407H) from
keyboard.
Po~er up.
Probe cable 010 at keyboard end. Signal ground pin 008.
Observe the probe as you insert a
diskette.
Does'the UP light turn on?
Y N
- Power down.
- Replace keyboard signal cable (407H).
- Verify the fix.
The keyboard signal cable was defective.
- Probe keyboard B10 (407 L).
Signal ground pin 008.
Are both lights on?
YN
- Power down.
Disconnect signal cable (407H) from
the keyboard.
Power up.
Probe cabte B 10 at keyboard end.
Signal ground pin 008.
Are both lights on?
Y N
Power down.
Replace the keyboard signal cable
(407H).
Verify the fix.
The keyboard signal cable was defective.
Power down.
Replace keyboard PC board (407G).
Verify the fix.
The keyboard PC board was defective.
- Connect probe power leads to planar M-D13
-f-1 black, ~B05 (+).
Checks for busy-pulse. The DOWN lightsshould bean ~fno keys were pressea~ For
easier probing with the CE probe, remove- the
ground read-of tfieswitch cable (407F f and
use that ground pin.
13----
o
B
Keyboard
Signal
Cable
- Checks for oscillator pulses.
Probe keyboard 811 (407 L).
Signal ground pin D08.
Power down and wait 5 'seconds.
As you watch the probe for the DOWN
light, turn the power on. Did the DOWN light come on?
YN
Power down.
Disconnect the signal cable from the
keyboard (407 H).
Probe cable 811 at keyboard end. Signal ground pin D08.
Observe the DOWN light as you power
up.
Checks for power-on reset pulse. If functioning properly, the paR pulse occurs and
the DOWN light comes on for a short time
after the POWER switch is turned on.
13----
D
8
Did the DOWN light come on?
Y N
Power down.
Replace the keyboard signal cable
(407H).
Verify the fix.
The keyboard signal cable was defective.
Keyboard
Signal
Gable
Power down.
Replace keyboard PC board (407G).
Verify the fix.
The keyboard PC board was defective.
Power down.
Repl~ce the keyboard PC board (407G).
Verify the fix.
Does the machine still fail?
Y N
The keyboard PC board was defective.
I
Power down.
Reinstall the original keyboard PC board.
Check the keyboard signal cable for opens/
shorts/ground. If at station 1, check the
cable at power supply TP4 (4198).
Is the cable OK?
Y.N
Replace the keyboard signal cable
(407H).
Verify the fix.
The keyboard signal cable was defective.
Use MPU MAP 5-1.
3742 Ml
4-6.11
4-6.12
Load a diskette in the other station.
At the other station, perform the failing
operation.
Did all keys work correctly?
Y N
I-
Use MPU MAP 5-1_
Power down.
Swap the keyboard signal cables at MPU
planar sockets P and R.
Remove the viewer.
Power up.
Ensure that a diskette is in each drive.
Swapping the keyboard cables causes one keyboard to control the other station. Therefore,
data keyed at one station will be displayed on
the other station's area of the display. At the failing keyboard, perform the failing
operation (at the station which originally
reported the trouble).
Does the machine still fail?
Y N
Power down.
Reconnect the cables to their original
locations.
Use MPU MAP 5-1.
Power down.
Reconnect the keyboard cables to their original
connectors at MPU planar sockets P and R.
Reinstall the viewer .
. Check the keyboard signal cable for opens/
shorts/ground. If at station 1, check the cable
at power supply TP4 (419B).
Is the cable OK?
Y N
- ·Replace the keyboard signal cable (407H).
- Verify the fix.
The keyboard signal cable was defective.
Replace the keyboard PC board (407G).
Verify the fix.
The keyboard PC board was defective.
-------....
Control
Keyboard
2
--
Control
--.-----
-
Keyboard
1
MAP 4-7
INCORRECT ONLINE FIELD TOTALS
Online field totals errors can result from seeningly correct operator procedures. There are
restrictions relative to record backspace, record
advance, and program selection. The restrictions
are shown below and should be used to ensure
the failure is not caused by violations. Additional information about online field totals
can be found on page 9-22.
If the problem cannot be isolated using this
information, use MAP 4-4.
-
The following steps detail a seemingly correct
operator procedure which is one example of
causing a field totals error.
1.
The operator fails to select a program at
the beginning of a job. (The machine is
now in program level 0.)
2.
The operator enters some data before
remembering to select a program. Assume
a 123 is keyed. This will display as UIO
since the program is in alpha shift.
3.
The operator backspaces to the beginning of the record and selects the correct
program.
4.
If the selected program has a 4 position
field total program in program position 1,
the machine will subtract what was keyed
in step 2 (the numeric portion of U 10
which is 496).
5.
The operator now keys in the correct
data, 123, etc. The value in the accumulator is now the difference between the
two keying operations (373, etc).
Restrictions
To ensure the accuracy of the field total in the
accumulator, remember the following restrictions.
When using more than one program to process
a record, all programs used must have identical
field total fields.
When deleting a record or backspacing to a
previous record from a partially entered,
updated, or verified record, select the same
program for deleting and backspacing over
the record that was used to create that
record.
A field programmed to have the contents
of an accumulator read into it must be
preceded by at least one programmed manual
field and must not be followed within the
same record by a field totals field relating to
that accumulator.
Backspacing over a previous record with a
field programmed to have an accumulator
read into it is not allowed.
Example of Violation
The correct operation to prevent this
error is to press FUNCT SEL and
DELETE REC prior to selecting the
correct program in step 3.
A
3742 ML
II
4-7.1
4-7.2
After updating a record, deleting a record, or
correcting a record in the verify mode, all
succeeding fields programmed to accept in
accumulator total that were affected by the
operation must be executed. To execute this
field total operation, record advance to the
record that the accumulator is to be read
into, select the correct program level, and
field advance over the field that is to contain
the total.
In update mode, a field that is to have a
total read into it is not executed if REC
ADV is pressed before the cursor enters
that field.
Selection of second disk functions, communications functions, and print functions
other than print record should be avoided to
maintain online field total integrity.
Program load functions should be done
under program level 0 to maintain online
field totals integrity.
MAPS 4-8 A THROUGH F
MAP 4-8A NO SELF-CHECK ERROR
(MODULUS 10)
No Self Check Error (Modulus 10)
It is possible to fail to ind icate a C self-check
error using modulus 10. This situation occurs
when all the following conditions are met.
1. Program numeric switch set to numbers
only.
2. The self check digit is zero.
3. The operator fails to key enough numerical
data to fill the self-check field, and then
enters an alpha character in the last position.
MAP 4-S8 OFFLINE FIELD TOTALS FAILS
TO FUNCTION
Field Totals Fails to Function
Offline field totals cannot be selected after a disk
copy if during disk copy a deleted record was
encountered. To correct, press rest then select
offline field totals.
If the problem cannot be isolated using this
information, use MAP 4-2.
MAP 4-SC DISK COpy MISSING/EXTRA
RECORDS
Disk Copy - Missing/Extra Records
-
Missing or extra record may occur during
disk copy using diskettes initialized with
alternate record sequence. Records are
located on the diskette in the following
sequence:
1,3,5.... 25,2,4,6 .... 24.
This will be corrected on an EC.
If the problem cannot be isolated using this
information, use MAP 4-2.
3742 ML
4-8:
4-8.2
MAP 4-80 RECORD COUNT WRONG
Record Count Wrong
Record counts can be different when entering or
verifying the same job. Some examples are as
follows:
If the operator enters a record on the disk
(record count adds 1) and then decides to
change the record, the act of changing and
recording it on the disk causes another record
count. In effect, for one rcord on the disk the
record count is two. When this record is
verified, it counts as one record.
The same is true during verification; if a record
is verified and then the operator decides to
change the data, the machine counts this as
two re.cords processed.
The record counter counts the number of
records processed in enter, update and verify
modes. The maximum count is 65,535,. the
counter then resets to zero. In enter mode
every RECADV is counted. In update mode
every REC ADV is counted if any data is
keyed or auto dupli~ated. In verify mode a
REC ADV is counted if any data has been
verified or auto verified.
If the above information does not solve the
problem, use MAP 4-4.
MAP 4-8E ALTERED OR MISSING DATA
ALTERED or MISSING DATA
Caution must be used when using diskettes
having file protected data sets. The machine
can write over protected data if the extents
for the nonprotected data set overlaps with
a protected data set. For example:
(nonprotected data set)
(protected data set)
01001------------
...
CD
~
-~--------------
CD
----------------
~
.!!
BOE
01001
08001
EOE
10026
15026
Nonprotected
data set
o 08001-----------c _______________ _
o
-0 ------------10026
ou -------------__ _
CD
~
Protected
data set
...-/
---------------15001------------
Data can be written into records 08001 to 10026
in the above example despite being within the
protected data set extents. The machine works
with one data set at a time and in the case of
the example, the machine is unaware it may be
writing in a protected area.
3742 ML
4-8.~
4-8.4
MAP 4-SF S ERRORS, SEARCH SEQUENTIAL
CONTENT DISK 2
Search sequential content works on disk 1, with
the complete 64-character set (421). This is not
true, however, for disk 2 on some machines.
The character set is divided into two groups;
27 characters (blank through "), and 43 characters (: through 9). Data, to be successfully
searched on disk 2, must contain characters from
one group; either one but not both.
If the data meets requirements, and the machine
still fails, use MAP 4-2.
If you have one of these machines, and it is a
problem to the customer, refer to ECA 6 for
a method of correcting it.
MPU MAPS
MAP 5-1 -
This MAP is the primary entry point for MPU
problems.
Can you make the machine fail?
YN
- When the problem is intermittent, perform
the following actions, one on each call, until
the problem is corrected.
- Record the date of each action.
- Vibrate the machine to try to cause the
failure.
- Check room temperature and humidity and
compare to Installation Procedure, page 16-1.
- Check dc voltages at planar M with reference
to frame ground:
Vdc
Pin
+8.5
+5.0
+6.3
+12.0
+24.0
Ground
-5.0
-12.0
Limits
B05
B06
- B09
B12
D05
D13
Bl0
B 11
8.0 to 9.4
4.7 to 5.5
5.7 to 9.4
11.0 to 13.2
22.0 to 26.5
0
4.6 to 5.4
11.0 to 13.2
Replace the ROS feature card (505B) in
sockets C and D.
Verify t.-h_e_fi-rx_._~--,
DATE:I
Replace the ROS feature card'(505D) in
sockets E and F.
Verify the fix.
DATE :\r-- . . - ,- , - - - . ,
I
I
Replace all memory cards (505C).
Verify the fix.
D ATE:
,'-----'1'----"----'
If the machine has 128 record length feature,
replace the memory socket card assembly
(505C).Verify the fix.
DATE
- Replace the MPU planar assembly (504, 505N).
Verify the fix.
DATE :/p.;..;.;""';"';";'1~""I--'1
Replace the MPU cross connectors (505P).
e __fi......x~.--r----,
Verify tr-h__
DATE: I~--,I_-,------,
Power down.
Replace the ac line fi Iter (418A).
Verify theJix.
DATE:
:1,.----..,.'-,-1--'1
- Two interchangeable memory cards are connected in parallel for the 128 record length
feature.
On some WTC machines with the 128 record
length feature, one 4K memory card is used ir
place of two 2K cards. With the 4K card, the
memory socket-card-a~sembly is not present.
----r,--r----.
_I
A
3742 ML
5-1.1
5-1.2
~- Power down.
Reseat the display cable at planar N.
Reseat the keyboard cable at planars P and R.
Reseat the power supply cable at planar M.
Reseat all MPU cross connectors (505P).
Reseat the disk cable at planars J and K.
Verify the fix.
Does the machine still fail?
Y N
The connectors were loose.
I
If the symptom is a hex character appearing
immediately after power up, see note. Is the symptom other than extra characters
appearing when the disk is loaded?
Y N
Power down.
Disconnect the keyboard signal cable
at the keyboard PC board (407H).
Power up.
Do extra characters sti II appear when the
disk is loaded?
Y N
- Power down.
Reconnect the keyboard signal cable.
- Use MAP 4-2.
Note: The high voltage delay circuit forces the
display to remain blank for at least 15 seconds
after each power up. If the display brightness
comes on with hex characters before 15 seconds,
the display PC board is failing. Hex characters
may appear briefly after the 15 seconds due to
machine self-check procedures still in progress.
Replace a failing display PC board if this symptom is a customer complaint. Machine functions are not affected by this problem.
- Power down.
- Reconnect the keyboard signal cable.
Power down for at least 5 seconds.
Measure paR, with reference to frame ground,
at planar M-B08 at power up. PO R should be
a +5 volt pulse during power up. Power up.
Check dc voltages at planar M with reference
to frame ground.
Vdc
Pin
Limits
+8.5+5.0
+6.3
+12.0
+24.0
Ground
-5.0
-12.0
B05
B06
BOO
B12
005
013
B10
B11
8.0 to 9.4
4.7 to 5.5
5.7 to 9.4
11.0 to 13.2
22.0 to 26.5
0
4.6 to 5.4
11.0 to 13.2
Are all dc voltages and paR within limits?
YN
®-
Use MAP 6-'_
- paR means power on reset.
The problem may be due to ripple in the
power supply. If ripple is suspected, use Power
Theory in Section 15.
~
Does the machine have a ROS feature card in sockets
E and F (505D).
Y N
The ROS feature card in sockets E and F has only
record insert.
Does the machine have RDS feature card in
sockets C and D (5058)? Y N
- The ROS feature card can include one of the
following feature combinations.
Proof keyboard.
Use MPU MAP 5-2.
128 feature and proof keyboard.
Power down.
128 feature, proof keyboard, and feature
Disconnect ROS feature card in sockets C - - I
group A.
and D (5058). - - - - - - - - - - ,
Proof keyboard and feature group A.
Power up.
I
Feature group A.
Perform the failing operation that caused the
Feature group A and 128 feature.
original failure symptom.
If a proof keyboard feature is installed on the
Does the machine fail to indicate an F error?
machine (5058), keyboard function with the
Y N
ROS feature card removed is that of a standard
Power down.
data entry keyboard. (For example, pressing
Replace the RDS feature card in sockets
the NUM SH IFT and M enters a 7 rather than a
C and D and connect it (5058).
1.) .
Verify the fix.
L
- If RDS feature 128 card is not installed, remove
Does the machine still fail?
MPU cross connectors C and D (504); otherwise,
Y N
disconnect RDS feature card from RDS feature
The ROS feature card in sockets C and
128 card.
D was defective.
I-
L...
-
Power down.
Reinstall the original ROS feature card in
sockets C and D (5058).
Replace MPU planar assembly, (504, 505N).
Verify the fix.
Does the machine still fail?
Y N
The planar assemby was defective.
I
Power down.
Reinstall the original MPU planar assembly.
Replace MPU cross connectors C and D
(504,505P).
Verify the fix.
The cross connectors were defective.
Does the machine still fail?
Y N
Power down.
Replace the ROS feature card in sockets
C and D and connect it (5058).
Verify the fix.
Does the machine still fail?
Y N
-'"--'............. The RDS feature card in sockets C and
E D was defective (5058).
3742 ML
5-1.3
5-1.4
Power down.
Reinstall the original ROS feature card in
sockets C and D (5058).
Replace MPU planar assembly (504, 505N).
Verify the fix.
Does the machine still fail?
Y N
The planar assembly was defective.
I
Power down.
Reinstall the original MPU planar assembly.
Replace MPU cross connectors C and D
(504,505P).
Verify the fix.
The cross connectors were defective.
Power down.
Reconnect the ROS feature card in sockets
C and D (5058).
Use MPU MAP 5-2.
Power down.
Disconnect the ROS feature card in sockets
E and F (505D). Power up.
Perform the failing operation that caused the
original failure symptom.
Does the machine fail to indicate an F error?
Y N
Power down.
Replace the ROS feature card in sockets
E and F (505D).
Verify the fix.
Does the machine still fail?
Y N
The ROS feature card in sockets E and F was
defective (505D).
Power down.
Reinstall the original ROS feature card in
sockets E and F (505D).
Replace MPU cross connectors E and F (505D).
Verify the fix.
Does the machine still fail the same?
Y N
The cross connectors in E and F were
defective.
ROS feature card in sockets E and F controls
record insert function.
Does the machine still fail?
YN
- Power down.
- Replace the RDS feature card in sockets E
and F and connect it (5050).
- Verify the fix.
Does the machine still fail?
Y N
The RDS feature card in sockets E and F
was defective (5050).
Power down.
Reconnect the RDS feature card in sockets E
and F (5050).
Does the machine have a RDS feature card in
sockets C and 0 (5058)?
I-
YN
Use MPU MAP 5-2.
- Disconnect RDS feature card in sockets C
and 0 (5058). - - - - - - - - - - Power up.
- Perform the failing operation that caused the
original failure symptom.
Does the machine fail to indicate an F error?
Y N
- Power down.
Replace the RDS feature card in sockets
C and 0 and connect it (5058).
- Verify the fix.
- If RDS feature 128 card is not installed, remove
MPU cross connectors C and 0, (504); otherwise
disconnect RDS feature card from RDS feature
128 card.
- If a proof keyboard feature is installed on the
machine (5058), keyboard function with the
RDS feature card removed is that of a standard
data entry keyboard. For example, pressing
NUM SHIFT and M enters a 7 rather than a 1.
Does the machine still fail?
Y N
The RDS feature card in sockets C and 0
was defective (5058).
Power down.
Reinstall the original RDS feature card in
sockets C and 0 (5058).
Replace MPU planar assembly (504).
Verify the fix.
3742 ML
EI
5-1.5
5-1.E
Does the machine still fail?
Y N
The planar assembly was defective.
I
Power down.
Beinstall the original MPU planar assembly.
Replace MPUcross connectors C and D (504,
505).
Verify the fix.
The cross connectors were defective.
Does the machine still fai I?
YN
Power down.
Replace the ROS feature card in sockets C and
D and connect it (505B).
- Verify the fix.
Does the machine still fail?
Y N
The ROS feature card in sockets C and D
was defective (5058).
Power down.
Reinstall the original ROS feature card in
sockets C and D (505B).
Replace MPU planar assembly (504, 505N).
Verify the fix.
Does the machine still fail?
YN
The planar assembly was defective.
I
Power down.
Reinstall the original MPU planar assembly.
Replace MPU cross connectors C and D
(504, 505P).
Verify the fix ..
.The cross connectors were defective.
~ Power down.
- Reconnect the ROS feature card in sockets
C and D (505B).
- Use MPU MAP 5-2.
MAP 5-2 -
- This MAP is a continuation of MAP 5-1.
If the machine completes its power on diagnostics
OK, (both stations show XN status/mode correctly on power up), apply this test to the disk
unit of the faulty station, otherwise test disk
unit 1(510).
Power down.
Turn stepper motor wheel several revolutions on
the disk unit selected for test.
Observe disk unit carriage while you power up.
Does the disk unit carriage seek track OO?
YN
Test the probe at planar P-B 10 (signal
ground P-008). Both lights should be on.
Power down.
On planar J or K, depending on which disk
unit is being tested, probe the following
pins:
Turn power on for each pin probed. (Always wait at least 5 seconds after power
down before power up.) Observe the probe
for both lights on/pulsing a few seconds
after power on for drive 1, a longer delay
for drive 2.
~~~
004
005
I
Connect probe power leads to planar M-O 13
(-) black, M-B05 (+).
The stepping motor control (MC) lines
should pulse during power up (after a delay,
possibly as much as a few seconds). If the
lines pulse, and if there is power to the
motor, the disk unit carriage should seek a
lower position.
Signal ground
J/K-808
Are both probe lights on and pulsing during
the disk seek operation for each test point?
Y N
Power down.
Disconnect the signal cable of the disk
unit being tested from planar J or K.
On the vacated planar connector (J or K)
probe the following pins:
Turn power on for each pin probed.
(Always wait at least 5 seconds after power
down before power up.) Observe the probe
lights during disk seek time. The up light
should turn on and pulse a few seconds
after power up for drive 1, a longer delay
for~~rI2. 19:::~:r:~n:N light.
004
005
J/K-B08
3742 ML
iii
5-2.1
5-2.2
Is the UP light on and pulsing during the disk
seek operation for each test point?
Y'N
- The problem may be due to ripple on the
power supply. If ripple is suspected, use Power
Theory in Section 15.
Did you have to disconnect and reconnect
MPU cross connectors C and 0 to disconnect/reconnect ROS feature card?
Y N
Are MPU cross connectors C and D not
used in this machine (505P)?
Y N
Power down.
Check MPU cross connectors C
and 0 for opens and shorts.
Are the MPU cross connectors OK?
Y N
Replace the defective cross
connector(s) .
Verify the fix.
Does the machine still fail?
Y N
The cross connector(s) was defective.
Power down.
Replace the MPU planar assembly
(504,505N).
Verify the fix.
The planar assembly was defective.
- Power down.
- Reconnect the signal cable at planar
socket J.
- Use disk MAP 2-9.
- Power down.
- Replace the planar assembly (504, 505N).
- V~rify the fix.
The planar assemby was defective.
Remove the diskette.
Observe the display after warm-up.
o
o
0000
- The cursor may not be as shown.
X N
as the display status line as shown?
Y N
- Test the probe at planar P-B 10 (signal
ground P-D08). Both lights shoud be on.
Probe planar N-B05, B07, B10 (signal ground
N-D08) for pulses. -
Connect probe power leads to planar M-D 13
(-) black, M-B05 (+).
Test points in the horizontal return, CRT
dot, and wriggle return respectively.
Are both probe lights on for each test point?
Y N
Power down.
Disconnect the display signal cable from
planar socket N.
Power up.
Probe planar N-B05, B07, B10 (signal
ground N-D08) for pulses.
Power down.
Reconnect the signal cable at planar N.
If 805 failed, use display MAP 3-5.
If 807 failed, use display MAP 3-3.
If 810 failed, use display MAP 3-5.
-:- Observe the display.
Is the display filled with characters and are they
all the same character?
Y N
Power down.
Remove planar cross connectors G and H
(505P). Power up.
Probe planar H-D02.
Signal ground H-B08.
- This will change the display.
3742 ML
5-2.3
5-2.~
Is the UP light on?
Y N
Power down.
Replace the MPU planar assembly
(504,505N).
- Verify the fix.
The planar assembly was defective.
-
Probe planar H-B04_
Is only the down light on?
YN
Power down.
Replace the MPU planar assembly
(504,505N).
Verify the fix.
The planar assembly was defective.
Probe -planar G-OOS. Signal ground
G-BOS.
Are both probe lights on?
Y N
Probe planar G-002. Signal ground
G-BOS.
Are both probe lights on?
Y N
=~~;:C~~~:MPU
planar assembly
(504,505N).
- Verify the fix.
The planar assembly was defective.
J
Probe planar H-OOS. Signal ground
H-BOS.
Are both probe lights on?
Y N
Probe planar H-B07. Signal ground
H-BOS.
Are both probe lights on?
Y N
Power down.
Replace the MPU planar assembly.
Verify the fix.
The planar assembly was defective.
Power down.
Reinstall MPU cross connectors G and H.
- This reconnects the memory.
- Power down.
- Jumper planar H·D02 to planar H·B08 (and
jumper planar H·B09 to planar G·B08 if there
are two memory cards installed) (505C).
- Power up. Wait:l) seconds.
- Observe the display.
HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHrlHHHHHHH~
HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH
Is the display as shown?
YN
"HHHHH""~HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHhHHHHHHH
HHUH~~H4~HHHHHHHHHHHH~HHHHHHHHHHHHWHH~
- Power down.
Remove the jumper from planar H·D02 to
planar H-B08 (and planar H-B09 to planar
'~HHHHHHHHHH~HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH
~HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH
G-808).
Remove MPU cross connectors G and H
(505P).
The display may be flashing; disregard the cursor.
- Power up. Wait 30 seconds.
- Observe the display.
Is the display as shown?
YN
Power down.
Replace the MPU planar assembly
(504,505Nl.
Verify the fix.
The planar assembly was defective.
- Power down.
- Replace all memory cards and connect
them (505C). - Verify the fix.
Two interchangeable memory cards are
connected in parallel for the 128 record
length feature.
Does the machine still fail?
I
YN
The memory cards were defective.
Power down.
Reinstall the original memory cards.
On some WTC machines with the 128 record
length feature, on 4K memory card is used in
place of two 2K cards. With the 4K card, the
memory socket·card-assembly is not present.
Is this an 80 record length machine (128
record length feature not installed)?
YN
-
Replace the memory socket card
assembly (505C).
- Verify the fix.
Does the machine still fail?
I
YN
The socket card assembly was defective.
- Power down.
- Reinstall the original memory socket
card assembly.
3742 ML
5-2.5
5-2.6
Check MPU cross connectors G and H for
shorts and opens (505P).
Are the cross connectors OK?
Y N
- Replace defective cross connectors.
- Verify the fix.
The cross connectors were defective.
Power down.
Replace the MPU planar assembly (504,
505N).
Verify the fix.
The planar assembly was defective.
Power down.
Remove the jumper from planar H-D02 to
planar H-B08 (and planar H~B09 to planar
G-B08).
Remove MPU cross connectors G and H
(505P).
Remove MPU cross connectors A and B,
(505P) and reinstall in MPU sockets G and
H as shown (509).
Power up.
Connect one end of a jumper wire to planar G-B 12.
Observe how the displays change as you
connect the other end of the jumper wire
to each of the te.st points listed (508).
Does data line 1 of the display change according to test patterns (508) when jumper is installed on test points shown?
Y N
Power down.
Replace MPU planar assembly (504, 505N).
Verify the fix.
The planar assembly was defective.
Power down.
Reinstall the original MPU cross connectors
A and B.
Replace all memory cards and connect them
(505C). Verify the fix.
HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH~HHH~
HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH44HH
"HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHhHHHHHHH
~
H~~H~H4~HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH~HHHHHHHHHHH
t1~Ht;HHHHHHHHIiHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH
HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH
Display may be flashing, disregard cursor.
Data line 1 with viewer removed and viewed
from station 1 side. _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _--1
In some cases, data line 1 may start with blank
character(s) rather than with the H character(s).
Two interchangeable memory cards are
connected in parallel for the 128 record
length feature.
Does the machine still fail?
Y N
I
The memory cards were defective.
Power down.
Reinstall the original memory cards.
Is this an 80 record length machine (128
record length feature not installed)?
Y N
Replace the memory socket card
assembly (505C).
Verify the fix.
Does the machine still fail?
Y N
I
J
The socket card assembly was defective.
Power down.
Reinstall the original memory socket card
assembly.
Replace MPU cross connectors G and H.
Verify the fix.
Does the machine still fail?
Y N
I The cross connectors were defective.
Reinstall original MPU cross cO,nnectors
G and H.
Replace MPU planar assembly.
Verify the fix.
01
00008
X R
Load a diskette.
Observe the display.
Is the display correct?
Y N
- Test the probe at planar P-B 10, (signal
ground P-D08). Both lights should be on.
- Probe planar J-O 13 (signal ground J-B08).
,
The data set label will be shown with the
status line.
Connect probe power leads to planar M-D 13
(-) black, M-B05 (+).
3742 ML
5-2.7
5-2.8
Are both Iights on?
Y N
Power down.
Replace the V FO card (505A).
Verify the fix.
Does the machine still fail?
YN
I The VFO card was defective.
Power down.
Heinstall the original VFO card.
Replace the MPU planar assembly (504,
505N).
Verify the fix.
Does the machine still fail?
I
YN
The planar assembly was defective.
Power down.
Reinstall the original planar.
Replace MPU cross connectors A and B
(505P).
The cross connectors were defective.
Is the keyboard dead?
Y N
Power down.
Replace the MPU planar assembly (504, 505N).
Verify the fix.
The planar assembly was defective.
Does the machine still fail?
Y N
I
The planar assembly was defective.
Power down.
Reinstall the original planar assembly.
Replace all memory card(s).
Reinstall cross connectors G and H.
-' Verify the fix.
Does the machine still fail?
Y N
I
The memory cards were defective.
Power down.
Reinstall the original memory cards.
Replace the memory socket card assembly.
Replace MPU cross connectors G and H.
Verify the fix.
P The memory socket card and the cross
connectors were defective.
~
-
Probe 2-P-D02 (diskette loaded), signal
ground 2-P-D08, for keyboard 1. - Probe 2-R-002 (diskette loaded), signal
ground 2-R-D08, for keyboard 2.
Connect the probe power leads to 2-M-D13 (-)
black, 2-M-805 (+).
Is the UP light on?
YN
Power down.
Replace the MPU planar (504, 505N).
Ground the CRT high voltage anode (304A).
Replace the CRT and chassis assembly
(304E).
- Adjust the yoke (304F, 305).
- Verify the fix.
The MPU planar and CRT and chassis assembly
were defective.
An arcing CRT caused the MPU to be defective
both must be replaced.
- Power down.
- Replace the MPU planar (504, 505N).
- Verify the fix.
The MPU planar was defective.
3742 ML
iii
5-2.9
5-2.10
This page intentionally left blank.
MAP 5-3 Is an RDS feature card directly connected to the
planar by MPU cross connectors C and D (505B)? Y N
Power down.
Reseat the ROS feature card in sockets on
the RDS feature 128 card (5058).
- Verify the fix.
This MAP checks for failure in the RDS feature
card.
Answer wi II be yes for all mach ines except
those with field installed 128 record length
feature or an RDS EC.
Does the machine still fail?
Y N
The ROS feature card was loose.
I
Power down.
Replace the RDS feature card (5058).
Verify the fix.
Does the machine still fail?
Y N
The ROS feature card was defective.
I
Power down.
Reinstall the original RDS feature card.
Use MPU MAP 5-1.
Power down.
Reseat MPU cross connectors C and D (505P).
Verify the fix.
Does the machine still fail?
Y N
The cross connector(s) was loose ..
I
-
Power down.
Replace the RDS feature card in sockets C
and D (5058).
Verify the fix.
Does the machine still fail?
Y N
The RDS feature card in sockets C and D
was defective (5058).
Power down.
Reinstall the original RDS feature card in
sockets C and D.
Replace MPU cross connectors C and D (505P).
Verify the fix.
Does the machine still fail?
Y N
The cross connector(s) was defective.
I
Use MPU MAP 5-1.
3742 ML
5-3.1
5-3.2
This page intentionally left blank.
POWER MAPS
MAP 6-1 -
- Incorrect voltage at I/O unit. Intermittent
machine operation. Machine inoperative.
Power down.
Reseat the power supply de cable (604F).
Verify the fix.
I~
Does the machine still fail?
The pOwer supply dc cable was loose.
Power down
Check CBl (604U), if installed.
Is CBl on?
YN
Use MAP 6-5.
I-
- Test the CE meter. Check/replace the primary (6040) and
secondary fuses (604E). -
Adjust the meter to 0 ohms with the meter
leads shorted and using the Rxl scale.
Remove each fuse and measure its resistance
with the ohmmeter.
Note: There may be multiple blown fuses.
Is the B.5V fuse (fuse 3) OK?
Y N
An arcing CRT can cause the B.5V fuse to
blow. If the fuse blows intermittently during
normal operation, suspect a failing CRT.
Replace it as shown on the first N below. If
the fuse blows very often, proceed as follows:
Power down.
Replace the B.5V fuse.
.
Ground the CRT high voltage anode (304A).
Disconnect the lead from the CRT high
voltage anode.
- Power up.
Does the B.5V fuse blow again?
Y N
Power down.
Ground the CRT high voltage anode
(304A) and lead.
Replace the chassis and CRT assembly
(304E).
Adjust the yoke (304F, 305).
Verify the fix.
The chassis and CRT assembly was
defective.
- Power down.
- Ground the CRT high voltage anode (304A)
and lead.
- Reconnect the lead to the anode.
~ Verify the fix.
3742 ML
6-1.1
6-1.2
(3J
Does the machine still fail?
YN·
The fuse was open.
I
Power down.
Recheck the primary (6040) and secondary
fuses (604E). -
Remove each fuse and measure its resistance
with the ohmmeter.
Are any fuses blown now?
Y N
- Power up.
- Test your voltmeter on the pins shown.
Old Power Supply
PC Board
(+) ----'-~
Measure the following dc voitages at the
power supply PC board with reference to
frame ground (604H).
Vdc
Test Point
Limits
-12
+5
+8.5
+12
+24
Fuse F2
DCTP4
Fuse F3
Fuse F1
Fuse F4
11.0 to 13.2
4.7 to 5.5
8.0 to 9.4
11.~ to 13.2
22.0 to 26.5
6 Vdc Meter
Test
(-)
..
B~.
.. ~I
~~
: : 13
(-) --~=========::;J
-6 Vdc
Meter Test
(+)
Are all dc voltages within limits?
Y N
New Power Supply
PC Board
B
0
~ ~[:
Are any dc voltages within limits?
Y N
Use power MAP 6-6.
I-
Power down.
Disconnect the power supply (604F), disk
(6040), and keyboard (604R) dc cables
from the power supply PC board. Measure POR at the power supply (604F),
pin B08, as you turn power on. PO R
should be a +5 volt pulse during power up. Power up.
- Check the following dc voltages at the
power supply with reference to frame
ground (604F).
Vdc
Pin
Limits
+8.5
+5.0
+6.3
+12.0
+24.0
Ground
-5.0
-12.0
B05
B06
B09
B12
005
013
B10
B11
8.0 to 9.4
4.7 to 5.5
5.7 to 9.4
11.0 to 13.2
22.0 to 26.5
0
4.6 to 5.4
11.0 to 13.2
- Try to isolate the problem.
-
POR means power on reset.
Are all dc voltages and POR within limits?
Y N
Power down.
Reconnect all dc cables.
Power up.
Check the following ac secondary
voltages to the power supply at the
power supply ac test points (604H).
Vac
Between TP
Limits
5
8.5
12
12
24
K and L
Cand D
A and D
Band D
F and G
4.75 to 6.5
8.0 to 10.5
11.4to14.0
11.4to14.0
22.5 to 26.5
I~
Are the ac input voltages within limits?
Use power MAP 6-6.
Power down.
Check/replace the power supply PC
board (604H). Verify the fix.
The power supply PC board was defective.
- Check for loose parts. Repair as required.
Use power MAP 6-4.
Measure the following dc voltages at the
power supply PC board with reference to
frame ground (604H).
Vdc
-5
+6.3
Ground
Test Point
12
13
3
limits
4.6 to 5.4
5.7 to 9.4
o
3742 ML
6-1.3
6-1.4
Are all dc voltages within limits?
Y N
Power down.
Disconnect the power supply (604F), disk
(6040), and keyboard (604R) dc cables
from the power supply PC board.
Measure POR, at the power supply (604F),
pin B08, as you turn power on. POR
should be a +5 volt pulse during power up. Power up.
Check the following dc voltages at the
power supply with reference to frame
ground.
Vdc
Pin
Limits
+8.5
+5.0
+6.3
+12.0
+24.0
Ground
-5.0
-12.0
B05
B06
B09
B12
D05
D13
Bl0
Bll
8.0 to 9.4
4.7 to 5.5
5.7 to 9.4
11.0 to 13.2
22.0 to 26.5
0
4.6 to 5.4
11.0 to 13.2
Are all dc voltages and POR within limits?
Y N
- POR means power on reset.
- The problem may be due to ripple. If ripple
is suspected, use Power Theory in Section 15.
Power down.
Reconnect all dc cables.
Power up.
Check the following ac secondary
voltages to the power supply at the
power supply ac test points (604H).
Vac
Between TP
Limits
5
8.5
12
12
24
K and L
Cand D
A and D
Band D
F and G
4.75 to 6.5
8.0 to 10.5
11.4 to 14.0
11.4 to 14.0
22.5 to 26.5
Are the ac input voltages within limits?
I-
YN
Use power MAP 6-6.
Power down.
Check/replace the power supply PC
board (604H). - Verify the fix.
The power supply PC board was defective.
Use power MAP 6-4.
- Check for loose parts. Repair as required.
- Power down.
Disconnect the power supply (604F) dc
cables from the power supply PC board.
Measure POR at the power supply (604F),
pin B08, as you turn power on. POR should
be a +5 volt pulse during power up. Power up.
Check the following dc voltages at the power
supply with reference to frame ground (604F).
Vdc
Pin
Limits
+8.5
+5.0
+6.3
+12.0
+24.0
Ground
-5.0
-12.0
B05
BOO
B09
B12
005
D13
B10
Bll-
8.0 to 9.4
4.7 to 5.5
5.7 to 9.4
11.0 to 13.2
22.0 to 26.5
0
4.6 to 5.4
11.0 to 13.2
Are all dc voltages and POR within limits?Y N
- Power down.
- Reconnect all dc cables.
Power up.
Check the following ac secondary
voltages to the power supply at the
power supply ac test points (604H).
Vac
Between TP . Limits
5
8.5
12
12
24
K andL
Cand 0
A and D
Band D
F and G
- PO R means power on reset.
- The problem may be due to ripple in the power
supply. If ripple is suspected, use Power Theory
in Section 15.
4.75 to 6.5
8.0 to 10.5
11.4 to 14.0
11.4 to 14.0
22.5 to 26.5
Are the ac input voltages within limits?
Y N
Use power MAP 6-6.
I-
Power down.
Check/replace the power supply PC
board (604H). Verify the fix.
The power supply PC board was defective.
- Check for loose parts. Repair as required.
Power down.
Reconnect the power supply dc cable.
Use power MAP 6-7.
B
3742 ML
6-1.5
6-1.6
Is the blown fuse a secondary fuse?
Y N
Replace the primary fuse (6040).
Disconnect the ac input cable at the power
supply PC board (transformer secondary wires
A through L to PC-board).
Power up.
Power down.
Recheck the primary fuse (6040).
Did the primary fuse blow again?
Y N
Check/replace the power supply PC
board (604H). Verify the fix.
The power supply PC board was defective.
Replace the primary fuse (6040).
Replace the ac capacitor (604J).
Verify the fix.
Does the machine still fail?
I~he
ac capacitor was defective.
Power down.
Reinstall the previously removed ac
capacitor in the machine.
Replace the transformer (604K).
Verify the fix.
The transformer was defective.
Replace the secondary fuse (604E).
Disconnect the power supply, disk, and keyboard dc cables from the power supply PC
board (604F, a, and R).
Power up.
Power down.
Recheck the secondary fuse (604E).
Did a fuse blow again?
YN
Use power MAP 6-5.
I-
- Check/replace the power supply PC board (604H).
Verify the fix.
The power supply PC board was defective.
-
Remove the fuse and measure its resistance.
- Check for loose parts. Repair as required.
MAP 6-2 -
- This MAP will help find overheating problems.
- Disconnect the machine line cord.
Check the machine for burned smell or burned
parts. -
-
Look for parts that appear overheated.
Does the power supply appear to be OK?
YN
look for burned parts on the power supply
PC board (~H).
Is the power supply PC board burned?
YN
- Test the CE meter. - Test the transformer primary and
secondary windings for open circuits
(604K).
Adjust the meter to 0 ohms with the meter
leads shorted and using the Rx 1 scale.
Do the transformer windings all have
continuity?
YN
- Replace the transformer.
- Replace the ac capacitor (604J).
- Verify the fix.
Does the machine work OK how?
I-
YN
Use power MAP 6-3.
The power supply transformer and the ac
capacitor were defective.
Test the CE meter. - Test the transformer primary' and secondary
windings for shorts between windings (604K).
Adjust the meter to 0 ohms with the meter
leads shorted and using the Rx 1 scale.
Are there any shorts?
YN
- Replace the power supply PC board (604H).
- Verify the fix.
The power supply PC board was defective.
Replace the power supply PC board (604H).
Replace the transformer (604K).
Replace the ac capacitor (604J).
Verify the fix.
The power supply PC board, the transformer, and
the ac capacitor were defective.
A
3742 ML
6-2.1
6-2.2
Check the display unit for burned smell or
burned parts. -
Look for parts that appear overheated.
Does the display unit appear OK?
Y N
- Rep!ace the burned FRU in the display unit.
- Verify the fix.
The display unit was defective.
Check the MPU for burned smell or burned
parts. -
-
Look for parts that appear overheated.
-
Look for parts that appear overheated.
-
Look for parts that appear overheated.
Does the MPU appear OK?
Y N
- Replace the burned F RU in the MPU.
- Verify the fix.
The MPU was defective.
Check both keyboards for burned smell or
burned parts. Do the keyboards appear OK?
Y N
- Replace the burned F RU in the keyboard.
- Verify the fix.
The keyboard was defective.
Check both disk units for burned smell or
burned parts. Replace the burned FRU in the disk unit.
Verify the fix.
The disk unit was defective.
MAP 6-3 -
Power down.
Remove the attachment cord from the
customer's ac outlet.
Test the CE meter. -:Check the attachment cord for shorts (604P).
Are there any shorts?
Y N
Turn the mainline switch on.
Check the attachment cord for shorts
(604P). Are there any shorts?
Y N
Inform the customer that no trouble
was found. -
~.-
This MAP will help find why the service breaker
tripped.
Adjust the meter to 0 ohms with the meter
leads shorted and using the Rx 1 scale.
Measure between the prongs on the attachment cord.
Measure between the prongs on the attachment cord.
The problem is probably in the customer's
service.
Disconnect both disk unit ac cables
(6048 and M).
Check attachment cord for shorts (604P).
Are there any shorts?
Y N
Reconnect the disk unit 1 ac cable (604M).
Check attachment cord for shorts.
Are there any shorts?
Y N
Check/replace the disk unit 2 drive
motor (604A).
Verify the fix.
The disk drive motor was defective.
Check/replace the disk unit 1 drive motor
(604N).
Reconnect the disk unit 2 ac cable (6048).
Verify the fix.
The disk drive motor was defective.
Check/replace the POWER switch (604C).
Verify the fix.
Does the machine still fail?
Y N
The POWE R switch was defective.
3742 M L
6-3.1
6-3.2
- Power down.
- Remove the attachment cord from the
customer's ac outlet.
- Check/replace the primary fuse holder (6040).
- Verify the fix.
Does the machine still fail?
I
YN
The mainline fuse holder was defective.
- Power down.
- Remove the attachment cord from the
customer's ac outlet.
- Check/replace the power supply ac cable
(604L).
~ Verify the fix.
Does the machine still fail?
I
YN
The power supply ac cable
was defective.
Power down.
- Remove the attachment cord from the
customer's ac outlet.
- Check/replace the transformer (604K).
- Verify the fix.
The transformer was defective.
Check/replace the ac line filter (604G).
Verify the fix.
Does the machine still fail?
I
YN
The ac line filter was defective.
- Power down.
Remove the attachment cord from the ac
outlet.
Reinstall the ac line filter.
Check/replace the POWER switch (604C).
Verify the fix.
Does the machine still fail?
I
YN
The POWER switch was defective.
Power down.
Remove the attachment cord from the
customer's ac outlet.
Check/replace the attachment cord (604P).
Verify the fix.
The attachment cord was defective.
MAP 6-4 -
This MAP will help find the cause of a missing
or incorrect dc voltage.
Power down.
Disconnect all signal cables from the MPU.
Disconnect the keyboard and disk dc cables
at the power supply TP3 and TP4 (604Q and R).
Reconnect the power supply dc cable at both
the power supply PC board and at MPU-M
(604F,610).
Measure PO R at planar M-80B as you turn
power on. POR should be a +5V pulse during
power up.
Power up.
Check the following dc voltages at planar M
with reference to frame ground (610).
Vdc
Pin
Limits
+B.5
+5.0
+6.3
+12.0
+24.0
Ground
-5.0
-12.0
805
806
809
812
005
013
810
811
B.O to 9.4
4.7 to 5.5
5.7 to 9.4
11.0 to 13.2
22.0 to 26.5
0
4.6 to 5.4
11.0 to 13.2
Are all dc voltages and POR within limits?
Y N
Power down.
Reconnect all signal cables and dc cables.
Check/replace the power supply dc cable
(604F). Verify the fix.
Check for open wires, shorts to adjacent
wires, and shorts to the frame.
Does the machine still fail?
Y N
The power supply dc cable was defective.
Power down.
Reinstall the previously removed power
supply dc cable.
Replace the MPU planar (504, 505N).
Verify the fix.
The MPU planar was defective.
A
3742 ML
6-4.1
6-4.2
- Check the following dc voltages at planar N
with reference to frame ground (610).
Vdc
Pin
Limits
-12.0
+6.3
+12.0
Ground
002
812
009
008
-11.0 to -13.2
5.7 to 9.4
11.0 to 13.2
0
Are aU dc voltages within limits?
YN
- Power down.
Replace the MPU planar (504, 505N).
- Reconnect all signal cables and dc cables.
- Verify the fix.
The MPU planar was defective.
- Power down.
- Reconnect the display signal cable at MPU·N.
- Install a cable extender (607C) at the display
PC board (607 A).- Power up.
- Check the following dc voltages at the cable
extender (607C) with reference to frame
ground.
Vdc
Pin
Limits
+6.3
812
009
008
002
5.7 to 9.4
11.0 to 13.2
0
-11.0 to -13.2
+12.0
Ground
-12.0
Are all dc voltages within limits?
YN
Power down.
Reconnect all signal cables and dc cables.
Remove the cable extender.
Check/replace the display signal cable
(6078). . - Verify the fix.
Does the machine still fail?
Y N
The display signal cable was defective.
I
- Power down.
- Reinstall the previously removed display
Signal cable in the machine.
Do not twist the cable when attaching it to
the cable extender.
Check for open wires, shorts to adjacent
wires, and shorts to the frame .
- Replace the display PC board (607 A).
- Verify the fix.
The display PC board was defective.
- Power down.
- Remove the cable extender (607C) and reconnect the display signal cable (607B).
- Power up.
- Check the following dc voltages at planar R
with reference to frame ground (610).
Vdc
Pin
Limits
+5.0
+8.5
Ground
-5.0
B09
003
008
006
4.7 to 5.5
8.0 to 9.4
0
-4.6 to -5.4
Are all dc voltages within limits?
YN
- Power down.
- Replace the MPU planar (504, 505N).
- Reconnect all signal cables and dc cables.
- Verify the fix.
The MPU planar was defective.
- Power down.
- Reconnect the keyboard 2 signal cable at
MPU-R.
- Power up.
- Check the following dc voltages at the station
2 keyboard, K2, with reference to the frame
ground (609A).
Vdc
Pin
Limits
+5.0
+8.5
Ground
-5.0
B09
003
008
006
4.7 to 5.5
8.0 to 9.4
0
-4.6 to -5.4
Are all dc voltages within limits?
YN
Power down.
Reconnect all signal cables and dc cables.
Check/replace the keyboard 2 signal cable.
Verify the fix.
- Check for open wires, shorts to adjacent
wires, and shorts to the frame.
3742 ML
6-4.3
6-4.4
Does the machine still fail?
Y N
The keyboard 2 signal cable was defective.
Power down.
Reinstall the previously removed keyboard 2
signal cable in the machine.
Replace the keyboard 2 PC board (609A).
- Verify the fix.
The keyboard PC board was defective.
Check the following dc voltages at planar K
with reference to frame ground. {61 0).
Vdc
+5.0
Ground
+24.0
-5.0
Pin
B03
' B08
Bl0
Bll
Limits
4.7 to 5.5
0
22.0 to 26.5
-4.6 to -5.4
Are all dc voltages within limits?
Y N
Power down.
Replace the MPU planar (504, 505N).
Reconnect all signal cables and dc cables.
Verify the fix.
The MPU planar was defective.
- Power down.
Reconnect the disk 2 signal cable at MPU-K.
- Power up.
Check the following dc voltages at the FC
card of the disk, D2, with reference to
frame ground (608B).
F
Vdc
TP
Limits
+24.0
Ground
+5.0
-5.0
17
23
5
22.0 to 26.5
0
4.7 to 5.5
-4.6 to -5.4
Are all dc voltages within limits?
Y N
Power down.
Reconnect all signal cables and dc cables.
Check/replace the disk 2 signal cable.
Verify the fix.
Check for open wires, shorts to adjacent
wires, and shorts to the frame.
Does the machine still fail?
Y N
The disk signal cable was defective.
I
Power down.
Reinstall the previously removed disk
signal cable in the machine.
Replace the disk 2 FC card (6088).
Verify the fix.
The disk FC card was defective.
Check for the following voltages at planar J
with reference to frame ground (610).
Vdc
Pin
Limits
+24.0
-5.0
810
811
22.0 to 26.5
-4.6 to -5.4
Are all dc voltages within limits?
YN
Power down.
Replace the MPU planar (504, 505N).
Reconnect all signal cables and dc cables.
Verify the fix.
The MPU planar was defective.
G
3742 ML
6-4.5
6-4.6
- Power down.
- Reconnect the disk 1 signal cable (6040) at
MPU-J and the D 1 dc cables at TP3 and TP4 of
the power supply (604H).
- Power up.
- Check the following dc voltages at the FC card
(6088) of station 1 disk, D 1, with reference to
frame ground.
Vdc
TP
Limits
+24.0
Ground
+5.0
-5.0
1
17
23
5
22.0 to 26.5
0
4.7 to 5.5
-4.6 to -5.4
Are all dc voltages within limits?
YN
- Power down.
- Reconnect all signal cables and de cable.
- Check/replace the disk 1 signal cable
(6040). - Verify the fix.
Does the machine still fail?
YN
The disk signal cable was defective.
I
Power down.
Reinstall the previously removed disk 1
signal cable in the machine.
Replace the disk 1 FC card (6088).
- Verify the fix.
The disk FC card was defective.
- Check the following dc voltages at planar P
with reference to frame ground (610).
H
Vdc
Pin
Limits
+8.5
Ground
-5.0
003
DOS
8.0 to 9.4
0
-4.6 to -5.4
D06
- Check for open wires, shorts to adjacent
wires, and shorts to the frame.
~
Are all dc voltages within limits?
YN
Power down.
Replace the MPU planar (504, 505N).
Reconnect all signal cables and dc cable.
Verify the fix.
The MPU planar was defective.
Power down.
Reconnect the keyboard 1 signal cable at MPU-P
and the Kl dc cable at TP4 of power supply.
Power up.
Check the following voltages at the station 1
keyboard, K 1, with reference to frame ground
(609A).
Vdc
Pin
Limits
-5
+5
+8.5
Ground
006
B09
003
008
-4.6 to -5.4
4.7 to 5.5
9.0 to 9.4
0
Are all dc voltages within the limits?
YN
Power down.
Check/replace the keyboard 1 signal cable
(604Q). -
-
Check for opens and shorts.
Verify the fix.
Does the machine still fail?
YN
The keyboard signal cable was defective.
I
Power down.
Reinstall the previously removed keyboard
1 signal cable in the machine.
Replace the keyboard 1 PC board (609A).
Verify the fix.
The keyboard PC board was defective.
-
Use Symptom Index, page 1-1.
3742 ML
6-4.7
6-4.8
This page intentionally left blank.
MAP 6-5Power down.
Disconnect all signal cables from the MPU.
Disconnect the keyboard and disk dc cables
at the power supply (TP3 and TP4).
Reconnect the power supply dc cable at both
the power supply PC board and at MPU-M
(604F, 610).
Power up.
Power down.
Recheck the secondary fuse (604E) and CB1
(604U). -
This MAP will help find the cause of a blown
secondary fuse or a tripped circuit breaker
(CB1), if installed.
-
Remove the fuse and measure its resistance.
Are the fuse and CB1 OK?
Y N
Reconnect all signal cables and dc cables.
Replace the secondary fuse (604E) or turn
on CB1 (604U).
Check/replace the power supply dc cable
(604F). Verify the fix.
Check for shorts to adjacent wires and to the
frame.
Does the machine still fail?
Y N
The power supply dc cable was defective.
I
Power down.
Reinstall the previously removed power
supply dc cable in the machine.
Disconnect all cross connectors (A, B, C, 0,
E, F, G, and H) from the MPU planar
(505P). Replace the secondary fuse or turn on
CB1 (604U).
Power up.
- Some connectors may not be installed.
Did the fuse blow or CB 1 trip?
Y N
Power down.
Install cross connectors one-at-a-ti me,
powering up after each cross connector is
is installed. If the fuse blows, there is
a short circuit either in the cross connector that was just removed or in the
card that was connected by the cross
connector.
Power down.
Replace the cross connector that was
just installed.
Replace the secondary fuse or turn on
CB1.
Power up.
3742 ML
6-5.1
6-5.2
Are the fuse and CB 10K?
YN
Replace the card that was connected
by the cross connector just installed.
Replace the secondary fuse or turn
on CBl (604U).
- Reinstall all remaining cross connectors.
- Verify the fix.
The circuit card (VFO, memory. or ROS)
was defective.
Power down.
Reinstall the remaining cross connectors.
Verify the fix.
The cross connector was defective.
Replace the MPU pianars (504, 505N).
Replace the secondary fuse or turn on
COl (604U).
- Verify the fix.
The MPU planar·was defective.
Reconnect the display signal cable at MPU·N.
Power up.
Power down.
Recheck the secondary fuse (604E).-
-
Is the fuse OK?
YN
- Reconnect all signal and dc cables.
-Replace the secondary fuse (604E).
- Check/replace the display signal cable
(607B). - Verify the fix.
Remove the fuse and measure its resistance.
Check for shorts to adjacent wires and to the
frame.
Does the machine still fail?
YN
The display signal cable was defective.
I
- Power down.
- Reinstall the previously removed display
signal cable in the machine.
- Replace the display PC board (607A).
- Verify the fix.
T~e display PC board was defective.
- Reconnect the station 1 keyboard signal cable,
Kl at MPU-P and at the power supply, dc
test point 4 (604R).
- Power up.
- Power down.
Recheck the secondary fuse (604E) and CBl
,1604UI. -
@J
-
Remove the fuse and measure its resistance.
Are the fuse and CB 10K?
YN
- Reconnect all signal cables and dc cables.
- Replace the secondary fuse (604E) or turn
on CBl (604U).
- Check/replace the station 1 keyboard signal
cable (604R). - Verify the fix.
Check for.shorts to adjacent wires and for
shorts to the frame.
Does the machine still fail?
YN
The keyboard signal cable was defective.
I
-
Power down.
Reinstall the previously removed keyboard
signal cable in the machine.
Replace the station 1 keyboard PC board
(609A).
Verify the fix.
The keyboard PC board was defective.
Reconnect the station 1 disk signal cable at
MPU-J and at power supply, dc test points 3
and 4 (604Q).
- Power up.
Power down.
Recheck the secondary fuse (604E) and CBl
(604U). -
Re~ove
Are the fuse and CBl OK?
YN
- Reconnect all signal cables.
- Replace the secondary fuse (604E) or turn
on CBl (604U).
- Check/replace the station 1 disk signal
cable (604Q). - Verify the fix.
Check for shorts to adjacent wires and to the
frame.
-
the fuse and measure its resistance.
Does the machine still fail?
YN
The disk signal cable was defective.
I
- Power down.
- Reinstall the previously removed disk signal
cable in the machine.
- Replace the station 1 disk FC card (608B).
- Verify the fix.
The disk FC card was defective.
Reconnect the station 2 disk signal cable at
MPU-K.
- Power up.
- Power down.
- Recheck the secondary fuse (604E) and CBl
-
~(604U).-
-
Remove the fuse and measure its resistance.
3742 ML
6-5.3
6-5.4
~
Are the fuse and CB1 OK?
YN
- Replace the secondary fuse (604E) or turn
on CB1 (604U).
Check/replace the station 2 disk signal
cable. Verify the fix.
- Check for shorts to adjacent wires and to the
frame.
Does the machine still fail?
Y N
The station 2 disk signal cable was defective.
I
- Power down.
- Reinstall the previously removed station 2
disk signal cable in the machine.
- Replace the station 2 disk FC card (608B).
- Verify the fix.
The disk FC card was defective.
-
Reconnect all signal cables.
Check/replace the station 2 keyboard signal
cable. Verify the fix.
Does the machine still fail?
Y N
/. The station 2 keyboard signal cable was defective.
- Power down.
- Reinstall the previously removed station 2
keyboard signal cable in the machine.
- Replace the station 2 keyboard PC board
(609A).
- Verify the fix.
The keyboard PC board was defective.
Check for shorts to adjacent wires and to the
frame.
- This MAP will help find problems in theac
voltages.
MAP6-6 -
- Check the machine tag for line voltage limits.
- Check for line voltage between terminals TB 1-1
and TBl-2 (or TBl-3, 4, 5,6, 13, or 14) on
the transformer (604K).
Ac line voltage limits:
Is the line voltage within limits?
YN
- Power down.
- Check for line voltage between the top
terminals of the ac line filters (604G).
AC Voltage
Is the line voltage within limits?
YN
- Power down.
- Remove the attachment cord from the
customer's ac outlet.
- look at the attachment cord plug (604P).
The key prong should be wired to the
machine frame. Each of the other two
prongs should be wired individually to
one of the ac line filters.
Measure for continuity between each of
the other two prongs and the top of the
ac line filters. -
100
110
115
123.5
200
204
208
220
230
235
Limits
90 to 110
99 to 121
103 to 127
111 to 136
180 to 220
179 to 229
187 to 229
198 to 242
207 to 253
211 to 259
Adjust the meter to 0 ohms with the meter
leads shorted and using the Rxl scale.
Are there any improper open circuits?
YN
The problem is the customer's responsibility.
I
- Check/replace the ac line filters (604G).
- Verify the fix.
Does the machine still fail?
YN
The ac line filter was defective.
I
- Power down.
- Remove the attachment cord from the ac
outlet.
- Reinstall the ac line filters.
- Check/replace the attachment cord (604P).
- Verify the fix.
3742 ML
II
6-6. 1
6-6.2
Does the machine still fail?
y N
1\\"1'.~~
The attachment cord was defective.
I
Check/replace the power supply ac
cable (604l).
Verify the fix.
The power supply ac cable was defective.
Remove the primary fuse (6040).
Power up.
Check for line voltage between terminals
TBl-8 and TP1-10 at the transformer (604K).
Is the line voltage within limits?
YN
Power down.
Disconnect both disk ac cables (604B and M).
Power up.
Check for line voltage between terminals
TBl-8 and TB1-l0 at the transformer (604K).
Is the line voltage within limits?
YN
Power down.
Check/replace the power on switch
(604C).
Verify the fix.
Does the machine still fail?
I
YN
The POWER switch was defective.
Power down.
Check/replace the primary fuse holder
(6040).
Verify the fix.
Does the machine still fail?
I
YN
The primary fuse holder was defective.
- Power down.
- Check/replace the ac power supply cable
(604l).
- Verify the fix.
The power supply ac cable was defective.
- Power down.
- Reconnect the disk ac cable for the station
2 disk, 02 (604B).
- Power up.
- Check for line voltage between terminals
TBl-8 and TB1-10 at the transformer (604K).
Is the line voltage within limits?
YN
- Power down~
- Replace station 2 disk drive motor (608A).
- Verify the fix.
The disk drive motor was defective.
Power down.
Reconnect the disk ac cable for the station
1 disk, 01 (604M).
Power up.
- Check for line voltage between terminals
TBl-8 and TB1-10 at the transformer (604K).
Is the line voltage within limits?
YN
Power down.
Replace station 1 disk drive motor
(604N).
- Verify the fix.
The disk drive motor was defective.
- The problem is corrected.
- Power down.
- Check/replace the primary fuse holder (6040).
- Verify the fix.
- Ac line voltage limits:
ACVoitage
100
110
115
123.5
200
204
208
220
230
235
Limits
90 to 110
99 to 121
103 to 127
111 to 136
180 to 220
179 to 229
187 to 229
198 to 242
207 to 253
211 to 259
Does the machine still fail?
YN
The primary fuse holder was defective.
I
- Power down.
- Check/replace the POWER switch (604C).
- Verify the fix.
Does machine still fail?
YN
The POWE R switch was defective.
A F
3742 ML
ffi Mtii liMh' 'UiAhlMiI4W."
6-6.3
6-6.4
Power down.
Reinstall the previously removed power on
switch in the machine (604C).
Check/replace the transformer (604K).
Verify the fix.
Does the machine still fail?
Y N
The transformer was defective.
I
Power down.
Reinstall the previously removed transformer
in the machine (604K).
Check/replace the power supply ac cable
(604L).
Verify the fix.
The power supply ac cable was defective.
Power down.
Check/replace the ac capacitor (604J).
Veri fy the fix.
Does the machine still fail?
Y N
I The ac capacitor was defective.
Power down.
Reinstall the previously removed ac capacitor.
Replace power supply PC board (604H).
Verify the fix.
Does the machine still fail?
Y N
I
The power supply PC board was defective.
Power down.
Reinstall the previously removed power supply
PC board in the machine.
Replace the transformer (604K).
Verify the fix.
The- transformer was defective.
MAP 6-7 -
- This MAP helps you locate dc voltage distribution problems.
General Power Distribution Information
-Use this MAP for free-lance fault-finding
instead of the normal directed procedure. If
you have any problem using this MAP, use
MAP 6-4.
Read through this MAP. Then use 610,
which is an easy to understand layout of the
power-distribution. Make point-to-point
measurements to locate an open or overloaded
circuit.
Power distribution to the units can be either
through the MPU planar lands or directly
from the power supply PC board. - Some voltages are on multiple wires in
the cables.
- Some voltages are used only on a specific
unit.
- Cables to the units contain both voltages
and signals.
- Probing cross connectors could require
using an exposed pin, rather than the
actual circuit pin shown.
Power down to disconnect or reconnect any
of the cables.
Be sure you reconnect all the cables when
you are done.
Unit locations are:
Disk FC card (204)
CRT (304)
Keyboard (407)
MPU and features (504)
Power supply (604)
General References Information
- The correct voltage limits measured to frame
ground at any unit are:
Vdc
Test Point
Limits
All test poi nts
are shown on
610.
4.6 to 5.4
11.0 to 13.2
4.7 to 5.9
5.7 to 6.9 1
8.0 to 9.8
11.0 to 13.2
22.0 to 26.5
-5.0
-12.0
+5.0
+6.3
+8.5
+12.0
+24.0
Ground
1
-
Unit locations are:
Disk FC card (204)
CRT (304)
Keyboard (407)
MPU and features (504)
Power supply (604)
o
If the load is open, the upper limit of the
+6.3 Vdc can be 9.8 Vdc.
A
3742 ML
6-7.1
6-7.2
~
Cross Connector Pin Identification
D
Cable Connector Pin Identification
D
B
To Locate an Open Circuit (Missing Voltage)
- While using MAP 6-1, the power supply de
cable output voltages could have been OK.
But, one or more of these voltages could have
been missing at a specific unit while using the
MAP for that unit. - Use either continuity or voltage checks to
locate the open circuit per 610.
- Repair or replace the failing FRU.
Unit locations are:
Disk FC card (204)
- CRT (304)
Keyboard (407)
MPU and features (504)
Power supply (604)
To Locate an Overloaded Circuit
This is when the voltage is OK unloaded but is
low when loaded.
Use a voltage check to determine any difference between the failing voltage when
measured at the power supply fuse or the
test point as shown in 610 and the measurement at the unit with all the cables connected. If the voltage is normal at the power supply
but low at the load, a resistance within the
circuit is dropping the voltage. Use the CE
meter to locate the F RU causing the failure,
by progressing along the circuit with voltage
checks at each test point.
- If the voltage is low at the power supply
but no appreciable voltage difference exists
from the power supply to the load, replace
the load (the disk FC card, display PC board,
keyboard PC board, or a planar).
Unit locations are:
Disk FC card (204).
- CRT (304)
Keyboard (407)
MPU and features (504)
Power supply (604)
MACHINE CHECKOUT
7·' BASIC MACHINE HARDWARE
CHECKOUT PROCEDURE (EITHER STATION)
- Remove all diskettes.
- Power down and wait 5 seconds.
- Set all keyboard switches down.
- Power up and wait for machine warm-up, (for
128 feature. wait 30 seconds).
The cursor is not always in this position.
Is the display like this? Y N
Is the display blank?
YN
Use the MPU MAP 5-1.
I-
a
00000
X N
- Use the display MAP 3-2.
Load a diskette (a diskette with no known
history of errors).
This checks the display.
Is the display like this? YN
Is the mode correct?
Y N
Is the mode-status XW?
YN
Use. disk MAP 2-2.
I-
010
AA
00008
X R
Use disk MAP 2-6.
This checks the disk drive.
Disk data set label will be shown with the status
line. Cursor position shows 001 if 128 feature is
installed.
A B
3742 ML
n Alii
""iD
rnA MdIIMP¥IN"
i"iLfili iPhRMiiD41
7·1.1
7-1.2
Are the error code positions blank?
Y N
If your error code is one of these, use
the indicated MAP.
Error Code
?
2
3
4
N
A
B
5
MAP
Page
Disk
Disk
Disk
Disk
Keyboard
Disk
Disk
Disk
2-4
2-2
2-9
2-2
4-2
2-1
2-1
2-4
If your error code is not shown in the
above list, use Starting of call, page 1-1.
'-- 'Use the MPU MAP 5-1.
Listen and press RESET.
The disk data set label will be shown with the
status line.
Did you hear the audio feedback device click?
YN
Use the keyboard MAP 4-6_
Cursor position
001 for 128 feature
Is the display like this? Y N
Use keyboard MAP 4-1.
010
II-
- Press CHAR ADV 12 times.
Is cursor in position 13? Y N
Use keyboard MAP 4-2.
I -'
-
Unload the other disk drive.
Press FUNCT SEllower.
- Hold down NUM SHIFT and press C.
c
This checks RESET and NUM SHI FT.
- This checks CHAR ADV.
X R
Did machine change to CER (mode-status)?
Y N
Use keyboard MAP 4-6.
- This checks FUNCT SEL lower.
I-
-
Release NUM SHIFT and press U.
Puts machine in CEW mode-status to display
keyboard data.
Is the left half of register group 4 as shown?
YN
Use keyboard MAP 4-6.
--------4-----___
I-
Listen for the audio-feedback device and observe register group 4 as you press every key, - ,
except RESET and REP, several times. Regis- I
ter group 4 should change to the code shown
I
for eaoh key (705A).
I
Press L along with ALPHA SHIFT; the code
displayed is A6.
Press L along with NUM SHIFT; the code is
66.
On Katakana machines, press L along with
KANA SHIFT; the code is E6.
Did you hear the audio feedback device click
every time a key was pressed?
Y N
Use keyboard MAP 4-6.
I-
uo 07 00 00 00 00
00 00 04 02 00 00 00 00 02 00
l . . .________________--'~
I
L -
-
A key may have to be pressed more than
once because the keyboard data register is
periodically reset by the diagnostic program
and may not accept the first key depression.
Checks the audio feedback device and the
key encoder.
Register Group 24 (Katakana only)
Did the correct code for each key appear in group
4 (checks the key encoder) (705A)?
Y N
Use keyboard MAP 4-2.
I-
Look at the left half of group 5 of the data
display as you set the keyboard switches
to the UP position in the following sequence:---If---------I
All switches down
AUTO DUP/SKIP up
AUTO REC ADV up
PROG NUM SHIFT up
00 01 01 00 00 00
07 00 00 00 00
= ,0
=8
= A
= E
Did the correct code for each switch appear in
group 5?
Y N
- Use keyboard MAP 4-3.
o
3742 ML
7-1.3
7-1.4
Is this machine other than a Katakana machine?
Y N
- Look at group 24 of the data display as
you set the KAT AKANA SH IFT switch
up and press a data key several times.
Did the code change from 00 to 20 in group
241
Y N
Use keyboard MAP 4-3.
I
Set all switches down.
Press RESET several times.
- Press FUNCT SEL lower
Hold NUM SHIFT and press C
- Release NUM SH IFT and press U
Look at group 24 of the data display as
you hold KAT A SH IFT key and press a
data key several times.
,Did the code change from 00 to 20 in group
24?
Y N
Use keyboard MAP 4-5.
J-
- Press RESET enough times to return to
CER mode.
- Press 0
E
Is there a cursor?
Y N
Use keyboard MAP 4-2.
I-
Position 1 is 150 ms and each additional position is 1 ms. The position of the cursor identifies the disk speed.
Is the disk speed between 163 and 171 ms?
Y N
I-
CEW
01234567890123456
Use disk MAP 2-6.
Press RESET. Press J. Look at the display and press the space bar
four times slowly. -
RESET puts machine in CER mode.
The J key puts the machine in CEW mode to
display the disk IDs.
The disk read/write head should advance one
track each time the space bar is pressed. The
track ID characters should change with each
track advance. The first character of each
line should change from
Do the track ID characters change correctly and
remain stable after each time the space bar is
pressed?
Y N
- Use disk MAP 2-2.
I! ,HldHHHHHH!-h-lH' ":1"
CEW
''''''iff· ,·'·""H "iHHt ,,~·H IH'·'1tlhH
r+·1·jHHHt~"l-tt-tt--lITriH'it"
tHtt'-HjH',H'" 'i
• .. I~IHHHHHt'HHHHHfjHHhl;t-H-I~,·'t1
tht'f--;I·~t:, irit-tr1H~'H
A defective record is identified by missing or
unstable hex characters.
Puts machine in XR mode.
Press RESET two times. Set all keyboard switches down.
Is the display like this? Y N
Use disk MAP 2-9.
I-
Hold REP and press A. -
01
F
o
AA
00008
X R
Disk data set label is shown with the status
line (cursor position 001 for 128 feature).
Checks the repeat key.
3742 ML
7-1.5
7-1.6
I~
Does character A repeat?
Use keyboard MAP 4-2.
Press REC BKSP.
The hardware checkout for one station is
complete.
Repeat MAP 7-1 for the other station, unless
already done (needed only for installation
or to find a symptom on other station).
If you wish to check the functions in the
basic machine, use MAP 7-2.
7-2 BASIC MACHINE FUNCTIONAL
CHECKOUT
This procedure is based on the assumption that
MAP 7-1 has been successfully completed.
Unload diskettes.
Power down.
Set all keyboard switches down.
Power up.
- Wait for warm-up delay (30 seconds for 128
feature).
Load a diskette (a diskette with no known
history of errors).
Press N
E
FUNCT SE L lower
PROG LOAD
4
SEL PROG
4
Look at the display and listen for the audio
feedback device.
Enters a program.
N is program numeric shift.
E is end of program.
Checks program load.
Loads program in storage area 4.
Checks program select.
Selects the program from storage area 4.
Checks the program numeric shift switch
function. The disk data set label will be
shown with the status line. (Cursor position 001 for 128 feature.)
r- - - I
I
I
I
I
~~S-------------~
Is a K error displayed? Y N
1-
01 K
4
N N
00008
X R
Use MPU MAP 5-1_
Was the audio feedback device quiet? Y N
1-
The error circuits prevent the audio feedback
device from clicking.
Use keyboard MAP 4-6.
Press RESET.
Press REC BKSP.
Set PROG NUM SHI FT to ALL CHAR.
Press SEL PROG
4
5
Did you hear the audio feedback device click?
Y N
- Use keyboard MAP 4-6.
-
Checks the record backspace function.
Program chaining may force a different
program.
A
3742 ML
R
7-2.1
7-2.2
Is the record address 00007?
YN
I-
The record address will advance if the auto
record advance function is failing.
,
Use MPU MAP 5-1.
TSet AUTO REC ADV up. -
-
Checks the auto record advance function.
-
Depending on the information in the index
track, an error may be caused by a normal
operating procedure.
Is the record address 00008?
YN
I-
UseMPU MAP 5-1.
- Set AUTO REC ADV down.
Is the error code position blank?YN
- Use Error Code Description under Symptom
Index, page 1-2.
Checks the auxiliary duplicate function.
Hold NUM SHIFT and press DUP. -
Look at the first character of the data line.
The cursor counter will show 000 (between
records) because of the short program.
Is there an N in position 001 ? YN
I-
Use MPU MAP 5·1.
-
Unload the diskett~.
Power down.
Wait 5 seconds.
Power up.
Wait 30 seconds. Set all switches down.
Set PROG NUM SHIFT to ALL CHAR.
Load a diskette (a diskette with no known
history of errors).
Press U N V- N D E
FUNCT SEL lower
PROG LOAD
1
SEL PROG
1
Set the AUTO DUP/SK IP up.
1~
Does. 02 appear in the column indicator? -
-
Resets all buffers.
This is a program.
U is AUTO DUP ALPHA SHIFT.
N is program NUM SHI'FT.
Y is verify, bypass, numeric shift, rightadjust, blank fill.
- is continuous field numeric shift.
D is AUTO DUP NUM SHIFT.
E is End-ot-Program.
Checks the auto duplicate/skip function.
Use MPU MAP 5-1.
Press HEX
A
B
B
Checks the hex function. The H EX key
requires that two key depressions follow it.
~
Does a hex character
1-
-=I=- appear on the display?
Y N
Use MPU MAP 5-1.
Press 2.
Press RIGHT ADJ.
Did the 2 move to position 004?
Y N
I-
- The hex character appears as several lines
within the dot matrix of one character (page
8-4).
Checks the right adjust function.
Cursor is in position 005'.
See MPU MAP 5-l.
Set AUTO DUP/SKIP down.
Press FIELD BKSP.
- Checks the field backspace function.
Did the cursor move to position 003?
I~
Use MPU MAP 5-l.
Press FIELD ADV.
- Checks the field advance function.
Did the cursor move to position ,005?
Y N
1 - Use MPU MAP 5-1.
Press CHAR BKSP.
I~
- Checks the character backspace function.
Did the cursor move to position 004?
Use MPU MAP 5-1.
Press REC BKSP.
Press DUP.
- Checks the duplicate function.
Does the cursor move to position 002?
I-
Y N
Use MPU MAP 5-l.
- Hold ALPHA SHI FT and press A.
- Checks the alpha shift function.
Is this other than a Katakana machine?
Y N
I
Is the error code position blank?
~ Use MPU MAP 5-l.
Press CHAR BKSP
Hold KANA SHIFT key and press Z
- Checks the Katakana shift function.
3742 ML
I
7-2.3
7-2.4
c~
Is the error code position blank?
YN
I-
Use MPU MAP 5-1.
- Press CHAR BKSP
- Hold KANA SYMB key and press Z
- Checks the Katakana symbol function.
Is the error code position blank?
YN
I-
Use MPU MAP 5-1.
- Press SKIP.
- Checks the skip function.
I
Did the cursor move to position 005?
YN
1-
Use MPU MAP 5·1.
- Unload the diskette.
- Power down.
- Wait 5 seconds.
-Power up. Wait 30 seconds.
- Set all keyboard switches down.
- Set PROG NUM SHIFT to ALL CHAR.
- Load the diskette.
- Be sure to use a data set with a record length
006 or greater (positions 25-27) and extent
of at least four records (BOE. positions 29-33
to EOE, positions 35-39 in the data set label).
- Press FUNCT SEL lower
DELETE REC
-
Resets all buffers.
Did the display data lines go blank?
YN
1-
Use MPU MAP 5·1.
Press U N Y - N D E
FUNCT SEL lower
PROG LOAD
1
SELPROG
1
FUNCT SEL lower
ENTER
- Checks the enter function.
Is the error code position blank?
YN
-Use Error Code Description under Symptom
Index, page 1-2.
I
Enter U23
Press RIGHT ADJ
Enter 45
~
- Checks the right adjust function.
Position counter shows 000 ind icati ng
between record s.
Is position 003 blank? Y N
I-
-
Use MPU MAP 5-1.
Press REC ADV.
Are the error code positions blank?
Y N
Use Error Code Description under Symptom
Index, page 1-2.
Set the AUTO DUP/SKIP up.
Enter 23
Press RIG HT ADJ
REC ADV
REC BKSP
Checks that the alternative method of record
advance does not function.
Could be any disk address.
Does the display look like this? Y N
Use MPU MAP 5·1.
I-
02
1
rI N
XXXXX/ U R
U2 3 5
Press REC ADV
FUNCT SEL lower
R
This changes record advance to the alternative method.
Does a dash (-) appear in position 039 of the
status line?
Y N
Use MPU MAP 5-1.
I-
Enter 23
Press RIG HT ADJ
REC ADV
REC BKSP
-
cursor position 002
for 128 feature
Does the display look like this? Y N
Use MPU MAP 5·1.
I-
Press FUNCT SEL lower
K
Checks the alternative method of record
advance.
02
1
Could be any disk address.
N N XXXXX~U-R
U2 3
-r
i
Set AUTO DUP/SKIP down.
'- - - -
Changes the machine back to regular method
of record advance.
Is position 039 of the status line blank?
Y N
Use MPU MAP 5-1.
F
3742 ML
7 -2.5
7-2.6
Press F U NCT SE L lower
RETURN TO INDEX
Are the error code positions blank? Y N
Use Error Code Description under Symptom
Index, page 1-2.
Press F U NCT SE L lower
UPDATE
Are the error code positions blank?
Y N
Use Error Code Description under Symptom
Index, page 1-2.
Does the display look like this? Y' N
Use disk MAP 2-4.
I-
- The 'function select lower-return to index
sequence is always required to complete the
job.
A normal job error could be caused by
exceed ing the end of extent.
- Checks the update function.
Cursor position
001 for 128
feature.
01
1-
Use MPU MAP 5-1.
Press SE L PROG
1
FUNCTSEL lower
DISPLAY PROG
Is the program UNY - NDE displayed?
Y N
. - Use MPU MAP 5-1.
IG
AA
XXXXX
U R
U2 345
This checks the disk drive.
This function select lower-return to index
sequence is always required to complete the
job.
Checks the search EOD function.
Press FUNCT SEL lower
RETURN TO INDEX
FUNCT SEL lower
SEARCH EOD
Does the display look like this? Y N
0
Could be any d7ress.
Cursor position
001 for 128
feature.
01
0
Cou Id be any disk add ress.
AA
XXXX./ U R
U2 3
-
Checks the program display function.
Press FUNCT SEL lower
DISPLAY DATA
-
Checks the data display function.
Cursor position
001 for 128
feature.
Does the display look like
Y N
I-
-
~his?
Could be any disk address.
-
Use MPU MAP 5·1.
Press FUNCT SE L lower.
Hold NUM SHIFT and press DISPLAY
PROG
Press 1
REC ADV
FUNCT SEL lower
RETURN TO INDEX
Observe EOD address in positions 075-079.
Press FUNCT SEL lower
SEARCH ADDRESS
Keys for address of EOD minus 1
RECADV
01
1
U A
XXXXX) U R
U2 3
Checks writing a program on the disk from
a program buffer.
EOD minus 1 is 1 record less than the end of
data address. It isn't necessary to use the
NUM SHIFT key.
Do positions 001 and 002 contain UN?
Y N
I-
Use MPU MAP 5·1.
Press FUNCT SEL lower
DELETE REC
REC ADV
REC BKSP
Is there a 6 error?
Y N
I-
Use MPU MAP 5-1.
Hold NUM SHIFT and press RESET
Press 1
REC ADV
Remove the diskette. -
-
Checks the delete record function.
Cursor position
001 for 128
feature.
01
6
Could be any disk address.
o
A A XXXXX/ U R
D2 345
- Change D to 1 to correct the deleted record.
- Checks the error function.
H
3742 ML
7-2.7
7-2.8
Does the audio feedback device buzz?
Y N
I-
Use MPU MAP 5-1.
Load the diskette.
Hold NUM SHIFT and press RESET
Unload the diskette.
Power down.
Wait 5 seconds.
Power up (wait 30 seconds). Set all keyboard switches down.
Set PROG NUM SHIFT to ALL CHAR.
Load the diskette (a diskette with no known
history of errors).
Press CHAR ADV five times.
-
Resets all buffers.
-
Checks the modify index function.
-
Enters a record on the disk to be verified.
Did the cursor move to position 006?
Y N
I-
Use MPU MAP 5-1.
Enter TEST from keyboard.
Press FUNCT SEL lower
M
REC ADV
REC BKSP
REC ADV
Does TEST appear in positions 006-009?
Y N
I -:-
Use MPU MAP 5-1.
Press FUNCT SEL lower
ENTER.
Enter ABCD
Press REC ADV
FUNCT SEL lower
RETURN TO INDEX
F U NCT SE L lower
VERIFY
Are the error code positions blank?
Y N
Use Error Code Description under Symptom
Index, page 1-2.
J
An error may indicate the wrong key
pressed or the feature not installed.
This page intentionally left blank.
DIAGNOSTIC AI OS
CE display mode
Diagnostic programs
Display disk speed
Display disk track IDs
Display registers
CE pins for raster display
CE voltmeter accuracy check
CE general logic probe
CE alignment check diskette
Head al ignment service check tracks
Display data head alignment service checks
Display disk track IDs head alignment
service check
Offl ine field totals test procedure
CE Tools
8-1
CE Display Mode
Terminating CE Display Mode
8-2
INTRODUCTION
Pressing RESET terminates CE display mode. The
machine automatically causes a seek to the index
track (track 00) of the disk; and mode/status will
go to X R, or X N if the diskette has been removed.
8-3
8-9
8-13
8-13
8-14
8-15
8-15
8-16
8-16
8-18
8-20
The diagnostic programs for CE display mode reside in a special section of ROS that can be used
independently of the machine functional ROS.
These diagnostic programs can be used separately
to cause the display of:
Disk speed
Disk track IDs
Display registers contents
Selecting the CE display mode cancels the previous
operator mode and all data in memory, such as
stored programs, production statistics, field totals,
and duplication data. CE display mode can be
selected from the following machine modes:
Read index
Update
Enter
- Search
- Verify and field correct
Selecting a Diagnostic Program
Select CE display mode (CER is displayed on the
status line) then press one of the keys shown in
the table below to select the desired diagnostic
program. CER mode and status changes to CEW,
and the results of the diagnostic are displayed.
Note: When selecting a diagnostic program for
disk 2, the NUM SHI FT must be pressed with
the proper program select key.
Diagnostic Program
Display disk speed
Display disk track IDs
Display registers
Program Select Key
0
J
U
A diskette must be installed only in the disk drive
to be selected for CE display mode.
Terminating a Diagnostic Program
Selecting CE Display Mode
To select CE display mode, use the following
keying sequence:
FUNCT SEL lower.
NUM SHIFT (or ALPHA SHI FT) and the C
key.
The characters CE R, indicating CE display mode
ready will appear at the right end of the status
line. (The status line is the first line of the display.) The remainder of the display will not
change.
To terminate a diagnostic program, press
RESET:
Note: RESET may have to be pressed more than
once to terminate the display registers diagnostic,
because the reset key code can be accepted in the
KBDA T A register only at ti mes other than when
that register is being periodically set to zero.
Termination of a diagnostic program is indicated
by a mode/status change from CEW to CER.
Now another diagnostic can be selected or CE
display mode can be terminated.
The diagnostic program desired can now be
selected.
3742 ML
8~1
8-2
DIAGNOSTIC PROGRAMS
Display Disk Speed
This diagnostic causes a line of digits to be displayed which can be used to calculate disk speed
in terms of milliseconds per revolution~ The diagnostic can be selected while at any track on the
disk as Ion!! as the first record of that track is
good (it can be a deleted record).
The display to cursor operation of the display
attachment is used, which means that no digits
are displayed at or beyond the cursor position.
The cursor moves as the disk speed varies. It
is normal that other data may appear lightly, at
short intervals, on the display.
To use the display disk speed diagnostic, select
CE display mode, and press the 0 key. The
display will look similar to this:
CEW
Status Line
Note: This diagnostic depends on the disk drive
being able to read the first record of any track on
a disk. A write check to record one command is
issued repeatedly. Write check causes the record
to be read each revolution. Rotational disk
speed computation is based on the frequency at
which record one is read.
A missing or unstable record one 10 results in a
blank or unstable disk speed display. In this case,
press the space bar (or any key except RESET,
SHIFT, or REPEAT) to advance to the next
track up on the disk and observe the IDs. If
record one 1.0 looks OK, use this track to display
disk speed by pressing RESET to get to CER
mode, then press the 0 key. If record one does
not look good on this track, either try a different
diskette or, if there is a problem with all diskettes, go to disk diagnostic MAPs.
If, after selection of this mode, disk speed is
not displayed, or disk speed displayed is unstable,
try the following:
Press RESET to terminate disk speed diagnostic.
Press J key to select display disk track lOs
diagnostic.
Look at the first three sets of four double
binary characters to determine if record one
ID (identifier) is present and stable. (The
first set of four double binary characters
should be the record one 10. Its characters may
have to be compared to the next two lOs in
order to identify it as record one.) The first
three IDs should look like this:
Service Applications
The display disk speed diagnostic can be used to:
Locate a failing machine.
Determine causes of changing or out of tolerance disk speed.
Verify display-to-cursor operation.
Adjust actuator bail.
Cause a repetitious read.
.012345678901234567
-41-- Limits -t-Speed
Speed ••
Too
Fast
I
Normal
Too
Slow
1st 10
2nd 10
----
3rd 10
,---------
WHtf H~ H
8 H~. H
!j H
o i;;>'
o
0
2:;:>" 0
~
The fir-st digit (0) displayed on the data line represents 150 milliseconds. Each digit in order to
. the right represents an increase of one millisecond.
To calculate disk rotational speed, count the digits
to the right of the first 0, up to the cursor, and
add 150. The example display shows 17 digits to
the right of the first 0 (1 through 0 = 10, 1 through
7 = 7). 150 + 17 = 167 milliseconds. This represents normal disk speed, which should be 167 ± 4
mi" iseconds.
To terminate the display disk speed diagnostic,
press RESET once to return to CER mode.
Another diagnostic can now be selected, or an
exit from CE display mode can be made by
pressing RESET a second time.
Always zero
Track Number
The track number is the first double binary
character of each group of four. There should
be 26 alike for each track. (See the description
of Display Disk Track IDs for explanation of
how to decode the double binary characters.)
"'-/
Always zero
Record number
Locate Failing Machine
Repetitious Read
This could be a machine which has a disk drive
running at a disk speed either higher or lower
than the normal Ii mits. Disks written on or initialized by the out-of-spec machine will work well
in that machine, and may work OK in some machines of the group. But, the out-of-spec disk may
not work well in other machines of the group
that are running in-spec at a speed (high or low)
opposite the out-of-spec machine.
Repeated reading record one of a particular track
allows the CE to look at the read amplifier or the
file data line with an oscilloscope.
Disk Speed
Too high
ac power out of specification.
~ Wrong drive motor pulley.
Too Low
ac power out of specification.
Wrong drive motor pulley.
Drive motor bearings binding.
Disk drive hub shaft bearings binding.
Disk drive belt slipping.
Disk drive belt idler pulley binding or sticking.
Collet not clamping disk to drive hub tightly
enough.
Pad on the bai I of the head load actuator
assembly puts too much pressure on the
diskette.
Pressure pad arm loads diskto head too tightly.
Disk sticks in diskette.
Adjust Actuator Bail
Use the display disk speed diagnostic to keep the
disk drive head load actuator magnet energized
while adjusting the actuator bail.
-
The total display length increases if more IDs
are read during a disk revolution than were read
on any previous revolution, but the length does
not decrease due to a lesser nu mber of IDs read
on a subsequent revolution. Individual double
binary characters will look unstable if all track
IDs do not read correctly for each revolution of
the disk due to an I D shift to the left to replace
missing IDs. The total display will not shorten.
Display Disk Track IDs
This diagnostic causes the track and record IDs
(identifiers) to be displayed for the track in use
at the time the diagnostic is selected. The diagnostic can be selected while at any track on the
disk and does not depend on any of the IDs
either being present or good. This diagnostic can
also be used to cause the disk drive to seek up
or down one track at a time to cause display of
the I Ds of any track on the disk.
The head load magnet stays energized for continuous read mode while the display IDs diagnostic is operating.
To use the display track IDs diagnostic, install
an initialized diskette, select CE display mode,
and press the J key. The display will look simi-
The display can be blanked and refreshed by
pressing the RESET key followed by the J key.
lar to this:
A new display length will be shown for the disk
revolution following the J key.
Last 6 IDs
CEW
1st 10 IDs
HH HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH
2nd 10 IDs
HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH
Display to Cursor Operation
Digits should be displayed only up to the cursor
·position. A fault in the display-to-cursor operation would allow all 40 digits to appear on the
first data line with the cursor under one of the
digits.
IDs in the same order, it is possible to compare
a good track (one that displays all 26 IDs) to
the faulty track as a means of determining which
IDs are missing on the faulty track.
The cursor will show on the display in position
three. Its position is determined by the contents
of the sense register.
Each r~cord ID displayed contains four double
binary characters. Each track has 26 record locations, thus 104 (26 X 4) of the double binary
characters should be displayed. If an I D is
missing in a track, or cannot be read, the next
ID read will be displayed in its place, followed
by the rest of the IDs read. The result will be
a shortened total display length. For example,
if six IDs are missing in a track, only two lines
of double binary characters are displayed. To
determine the order in which the IDs were
placed on the track during disk initialization
one can decode the individual record I Ds. Since
all tracks on a particular disk will have their
Pressing the reset key retracks the read head and
the ID display goes blank. Pressing the J key
causes the read head to rescan the same track,
and the display to show the I Ds as they are read
on the first full read revolution.
On some machines, CE mode causes the display
to change as the number of IDs read changes.
If less than 26 are read on some revolutions, the
display seems to flash. If 26 IDs are read everytime, the display is stable. This dynamic mode of
operation allows observation of the number of IDs
read each disk revolution.
Disk I Ds may be displayed track by track while
this CE diagnostic mode is in control. To advance
up, away from the index track, press the space
bar (or any other key except RESET, SHI FT, or
REPEAT). To step down one track, press
ALPHA SH I FT and the space bar (or any other
key except RESET or REPEAT). The display
goes blank, and new IDs are displayed for each new
track selected.
Note: When using disk drive 2, NUM SHI FT
must be used with the keys specified above to
step up or down.
3742 ML
8-3
8-4
One ID is represented by four double binary
characters in a row. The basic frame of each
double binary character looks something like
an extended football goal post. It alone represents a double binary character of zero over
zero. 0
EXAMPLES:
~H
HHH
'
L
l
Always Zero
(~)
Record Number mtodo)
Always Zero (~)
Track Number
«
).
Each goal post has a binary decimal value above
the cross bar and a binary decimal value below
the cross bar, therefore, the name double binary
character. Each binary decimal value can be determined by observing the location of lines parallel
to the cross bar as shown here:
8
4
2.
8
4
2
I
\
I
\
1)3
I
~
~
Double
Decimal
11 Notation
0
The Q. character should occupy one half of the charD
acter positions (all even numbered positions) in
the ID display. Its presence in the display lines
help to locate the cross bar for decoding multiple line characters like the ~ example above.
11
~~10 ~~iY
. (1~) is displayed as
t
)~
(
o
OnelD
I
Upper binary
decimal value
line locations
Lower binary
decimal value
line locations
l
For track numbers, this
decimal value can be 0,
1, 2, 3, or 4. For record
number, this decimal value
will be either 0 or 1 .
For track or record number,
this decimal value can be
any number 0 through 15.
{
Table 1 shows the double decimal notation for all
77 track numbers that will appear in I Ds. Note
that the double decimal I D notation goes from 0
for track 00 through.! for track 73, also note
9
that the I D for track 64 is a blank, 74 is a ri,
75 is a . (period),
76 is a <.
The top line of Table 2 shows the double decimal
ID notation for the 26 records in a track, arranged
serially 1 through 26. The notation goes from Q
for record 01 through l.for record 26.
1
10
The rest of Table 2 shows the other record sequences that can occur in a track depending on the
digits written in positions 77 and 78 of record 07
of track 00 during initialization of a disk. All
tracks on any particular disk will have the same
record sequence.
To terminate the display disk track I Ds, press
RESET once to return to CER mode. Another
diagnostic can now be selected, or an exit from
CE display mode can be made by pressing RESET
a second time.
Note: Terminating CE display mode will cause
the machine to seek to track 00 of disk 1. If
disk 2 has been selected and it is desired to return
to track 00 of disk 2, first terminate CE display
mode by pressing RESET, then press FUNCT SEL
upper and disk 2 RET TO INDEX.
Service Applications
The display disk track IDs diagnostic can be used
to:
During disk initialization, the machine writes
the sequence digits in positions 77 and 78 of
sector 07, track 00. Display of sector 07, track
00, will show the sequence digits in 77 and 78.
be found in Table 1 with its corresponding track
number. If the machine finds a faulty track during disk initialization, it will identify that track
by writing 'bad-track' IDs 15 in all 10 positions
Record order on the disk will be transparent to
the operator of the machine. One of the 13 record
order sequences other than 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, etc., may
provide best disk access times for a certain job.
that will accept the writing.
15
Determine disk track record order.
Verify head location.
Determine missing IDs.
Determine or verify faulty tracks.
Adjust actuator bail.
Cause a continuous read.
Verify operation of sense register.
Discover intermittent problems in the disk
drive attachment.
Locate disk problems.
Check track accessing.
Check head track alignment.
This diagnostic will keep the disk drive head load
actuator magnet energized while making an adjustment of the actuator bail. (Display disk
speed CE mode can also be used for the same
purpose.)
Head Location
This diagnostic verifies actual head location by
reading the track number found in the IDs
displayed after a track selection has been made
from the index track, or a search has been keyed.
Table 1 shows track numbers. All track numbers
in a particular track must be identical.
Continuous Read
A continuous read of a particular track on a disk
allows the CE to look at the read amplifier on the
'file data' line with an oscilloscope.
Disk Track Record Order
All tracks on anyone disk, including the index
track (track 00), should have their records arranged in the same order. The order is determined
at the time of disk initialization by control digits
that are keyed by the operator in positions 7
and 8 of track 00. If positions 7 and 8 of the record are left blank, or if 01 is entered in those
positions, atl records in each track on that disk are
arranged in sequence 1, 2, 3, 4, through 26, as
shown by line 1 of Table 2. I.f 02 is entered in
positions 7 and 8, then all records in each track
on that disk are arranged, at ti me of in itialization, in the sequence shown by line two of Table
2. 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11, 13, 15, 17, 19, 21, 23, 25,
2,4,6,8, 10, 12, 14, 16, 18,20,22,24,26.
Note that:
All record sequences start with record 01.
There are 13 different sequences possible.
When the next number in a sequence will
exceed 26 if the sequence is allowed to continue naturally, the machine will choose the
next unused number after 1 for that record
number and then continue the sequence
naturally. Example, line 07 of Table 2.
1, 8, 15, 22, 2, 9, 16, 23, 3, 10, etc.
Actuator Bail Adjustment
Missing IDs
If the display of IDs shows a lesser number than
26 (as shown to the right), the missing IDs can
be due to:
Accidental erasure.
Faulty track on the disk.
Uninitialized disk.
Weak read amplifier (faulty FC card).
Faulty VFO card.
6 IDs
CEW
1st 10 IDs
HH HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH
2nd 10 IDs
HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH
Last
Accidental erase and faulty tracks can be resolved
by reinitialization olthe disk. If at the end of
initialization, the number of bad tracks identified exceeds two, the disk should be discarded,
otherwise, it can be used only if a special operator procedure is used. An uninitialized disk would
display no IDs. Initialize that disk for use in the
machine.
Faulty Tracks
IDs that are present in the display of a faulty
track (fault has developed since last disk initialization), or IDs of an adjacent good track, can
be decoded for their track number double decimal value. The double decimal value can then
3742 ML
8-5
8-6
Sense Register Operation
Sense Bit Definitions
The operation of the sense register is verified by
noting the position of the cursor in the ID display. During the display IDs diagnostic, the binary value of sense information stored in the sense
register each disk revolution controls the position
of the cursor in the display. For example, if
the track is good* and all IDs present are proper
length and have correct eRe (cycle redundancy
check) bytes, the cursor will display steadily under
the third double binary character from the left.
This is the normal cursor position for the display
ID diagnostic. If the track being read has no IDs,
the cursor will display under the first double binary
character position; or if a wrong eRe byte is
present in the track for any ID, the cursor will
display under the seventh double binary character.
*A good track is one that has no 15 double
15
decimal
10 characters written on it.
ii
An intermittent condition of reading no IDs or a
wrong eRe would cause the cursor to shift from
the third position in the display to the first or
seventh position intermittently.
The position of the cursor is determined by the
sum of the binary values of the sense bits set in
the sense register each disk revolution, according
to this table:
An '10 matched sense bit' (binary value 2)
is set each disk revolution that one or more
double binary I D characters is read from a
track. The 10 character may be any double
decimal value notation from Q. through !E..
o
15
A 'eRe error sense bit' (binary value 4) is
set if the eRC read in an I D field does not
match the CRC computed for that ID field.
A 'length error sense bit' (binary value 8)
is set if the number of double binary characters in an 10 exceeds 4.
ID matched
2
eRe error
Length error
Special address mark
Bad track
Index
4
8
A 'bad track sense bit' (binary value 32)
is set if one or more 10 double binary char·
acters are read which have a double decimal
ID notation of ~ During disk initialization,
15
if the machine finds a track that produces un·
acceptable output of read back (write check or
read check error) it tries to write all 26 IDs
with the bad track double binary character.
Binary Value
Sum Location
1 2
The disk drive attachment control electronics
are exercised continuously during display disk
track IDs diagnostic mode. A read ID command has
to be issued every 6.41 milliseconds to read each
of the 26 IDs on the track every revolution of the
disk. Intermittently missing read 10 commands
would cause some of the displayed double binary
characters to look unstable in the same manner as
descri bed for missi ng IDs, page 8-4.
Try more than one diskette in this machine;
diskettes that read IDs OK in another machine.
Reinitialize one of the disks in another machine
and try it again in this machine.
Check voltages at the MPU and at the disk
drive Fe card.
Make sure the disk drive signal cable is well
seated in its socket at both ends.
Try a different Fe card.
Try a different VFO card.
A eRe error can not normally
occur without also having ID
matched, see missing cursor,
positions (binary sum 4, 12,
20, etc. below).
16
32
Check read/write head adjustment.
Replace head and carriage assembly.
64
Locate Disk Problems
The possible cursor positions are displayed as follows:
Display
Position
Disk Drive Attachment Troubleshooting
Intermittent Problems
If IDs are still read intermittently after performing
the following measurements, adjustments, and
replacements, then the attachment circuitry on
the MPU planar board is at fault and the MPU
planar board must be replaced.
A 'special address mark sense bit' (binary
value 16) is set if such mark is read. The
special address mark is used to indicate a
deleted record.
Binary
Value
Sense Bit
An 'index sense bit' (binary value 64) is set
if the index pulse does not follow before the
first lOis read on any revolution.
3 4
5
6
7 8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
~»*HHHHHHH**ffHHHHrtffffH
o
'2
6
8
10
14
16
18
i
The illustration shows the normal cursor position for '10 matched sense bit' and no errors;
binary value 2, display position 3. It is normal
for the cursor to flash faintly once each disk revolution in the binary value sum location 66.
t
t
etc.
through
97
H
96
The display disk track IDs diagnostic can show
the frequency of failure of the IDs in each track
of disk, and thus provide a relative guide to the
number of soft error machine retries to expect
for any given track. Reinitialize a suspect disk
and then display track IDs again. Don't forget
to try other diskettes in the same disk drive as a
comparison. Try the suspect disk in another
machine if available. The object here is to establish whether the machine or the disk is the
marginal or faulty one.
Check Track Accessing
See page 8-2 for how to move the head up or
down. Access to the upper or lower stop can be
caused by this method.
While accessing, mechanical action of the
stepper motor and the stepper motor and
leadscrew wheels can be observed.
TABLE 1
Track
Number
10
0"
32
0"
17
1
1
33
18
2'
34
19
-31
Track IDs can be observed to determine if the
head is being accessed the proper amount each
time.
4"
20
On the last seek up or the last seek down, when
the head carriage is stopped by the upper or
lower stop, some IDs from track 76 or track 00
should still be displayed. If no IDs are displayed, the appropriate limit stop is out of adjustment. This is true only if the head carriage
is properly adjusted for track 00.
05
0
5
06
48
*10
'0
64
(Blank)
(Blank)
49
3
1
65
4
1
•
"2
50
"2
66
"2
r
35
-32
51
-33
67
-43
J
1
4
36
-42
52
-43
68
4
4
'\
21
1
5
37
2
5
53
3
5
69
-06
22
-61
38
-2
·6
54
6
70
07
-07
23
1
7
39
-27
55
-37
71
08
-08
24
1
8
40
2
8
56
09
0
9
25
9
41
9
10
-010
26
1
10
42
11
0
11
27
-111
12
0
12
28
13
-13
0
16
01
-01
02
2"
03
3"
04
00
1
0
0
15
-
11
3
2
3
1-
l.
4
4
5
i
•
6
3
-47
'II
i.
8
72
8
-{
57
-39
73
-94
?
-210
58
-310
74
d
43
-211
59
-311
75
1
12
44
2
12
60
3
12
76
29
1
13
45
2
13
61
13
14
30
-114
46
-214
62
-314
-015
31
15
47
-215
63
15
-0
2
1
0
14
2
1
0
Note: During accessing, the display is blanked.
Therefore, a new display is provided for each
track and also for the above and below limit
stop positions. This allows a new length to be
displayed shorter than the previous if not all IDs
are read for the new location. See length explanation under Display Track IDs, page 8-3.
10
10
10
10
0
Test points on the FC card can be probed during accessing.
Track
Number
Track
Number
Track
Number
Track
Number
1
rI-
.
<
<
3
3
*Katakana machines only.
3742 ML
8-7
8-8
TABLE 2
Selected Sequence
*Displayed in Pos.
77 and 78, Record
07, Track 00.
Blank or 01
PHYSICAL SEQUENCE OF RECORDS IN A TRACK
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
Q.
0
2
Q
.Q
Q
Q
.Q
Q
Q
Q.
Q.
Q..
Q..
Q..
4
!L
3
!
!
!
1
.1
!
.1
6
1
L
9
19
11
!
7
8
!
5
12
13
14
15
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
-12 -14
1
-2
-4
6
0
0
0
0
1
1
RECORD NUMBERS - DOUBLE DECIMAL 10 NOTATION
1
3
-5
1
-17
-31
-02
-05
a-
0
0
0
1
6"
TO 14 2"
1
1
0
,-1
1
1
4
7"
10 3"
1
1
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
10 3"
"1
0
T1
0
"6
15
3"
T
"4
"8
12
0"
'4
8'
1
0
0
1
1
-05
0
0
1
10 15 4"
0
10
0
1
13 0
0
0
0
9
0
13
1
5"
"1 5"
9
"2
-011
1
0
1
1
0
0
5"
10 "2
-012
-07
-013 3"1
1
9
0
0
"2
"8
-014 4"1
0
8
0
15
1
0
0
6" "2
9
1
0
-71
1
0
-110 3"
-011 3"1 -04
12 -4
0
04
0
1
05
-01 -60
06
-01
0
1
-
-
1
1
1"
0
3"
0
1
0
0
0
6"
"3
8"
13 2"
0
15
1
0
0
5
4"
To 0
6" 5
-010 -11
-81
-04
-011
1
"2
-91
-05
-012
1
3
-110 -06
0
1
1
5
-06
-014
1
6
-07
0
15
-81
0
7
1
1
0- S
1
1
0
0
9
"2
To "2
0
1
0
1
0
09
To "3
2"
-011 -41
3"
-012
5
-40
13 "6 -5
10
-01
-01
11
-51
-02
-012
1
6
-03
-013
1
7
-40
-014
.Q.
.Q.
1..
.Q.
13
.L
8
.!L .Q..
3
9
4
15
1
10
.Q..
7
L
Q..
12
.Q.
2
.Q.
1
.!L
l
.Q
L
1
13
9
Q..
2
13
-01
-0
-02
0
-015 "3
-01
14
14
10
* The sequence numbers that are entered by the operator
in positions 7 and 8 of record 07, track 00, prior to disk
initialization, are machine written in positions 77 and 78
of that record during initialization.
0
..Q..
3
.!!.
Q...
.L .!L
15
4
0
0
..,-1
0
1
"5 "2
"4
8"
0
1
.Q
14 3"
9
0
12
0
9
0
"6 9
0
"9
14
1
0
3"
0
11
7" 4"
0
10
1
T
1
1
0
a
10
08
0
5
0
6
1
-05 -013
1
1
0
1
g-
1
0
0
1
1
7
6"
12
"2
8'
-013 -41
-07
0
14 -5
-015 -71
0
1
1
8"
'0
"8
1
-11
1
0
1
8"
10
9
2"
-80
1
2
0
9
1
3
0
19
-41
1
3
0
9
-41
.Q..
1
5
-011 61
.Q..
1
.Q
1
5
1
6
Q..
9
11
7
-012
0
1
1
8
L
1
9
-013 -110
1
0
1
10
-07
1
1
5
1
0
0
6
1
1
0
7
1
2
0
8
1-
.Q.
l
.Q
..!..
..Q.
6
2
7
3
8
..1.
1
4
1
3
-70
-41
-80
1
5
9
-61
1
1
0
6
0
1
S- 8"
T
1
9
/
-10
0
-015
0
5
12 15 "2
-8
11
7" 6"
1
0
1
0
14
8
1
14
-07
1
1
0
0
"4
9
1
il
0
T
1
1
0
S-
-011
6
1
0
4"
-09
03
0
0
'2
-07
3
0
1
9
-05
-01
07
-013 -015 -11
-0
02
10 7
10
0
11
0
10
12
1
8
Keyboard Fourth Switch Test - Katakana
Machines
Display Registers
The diagnostic causes the contents of thirty
of the 8-bit registers to be displayed. Each
register will be represented by two alphameric
characters out of the group: 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6,
7,8,9, A, B, C, 0, E, and F. If all keyboard
toggle switches are in a down (off) position
and the machine is in the XR mode (initialized
diskette installed) when the CE mode is selected, then when the display register diagnostic is
selected, the display should look similar to
Figure 1.
The KAT AKANA SH IFT switch can be tested
by following the procedure outlined for Keyboard Switch Test, with these differences:
-_ The indication characters will be displayed
in register group 24 (fourth group from the
left in the top line for the 3742).
The switch off characters should be 00.
The switch on characters should be 20.
- A data key must be pressed several times to
test the switch function.
(The six highlighted registers should always be 00
for a properly operating machine. The other
registers will show their contents when the 1/U
key is pressed and may be different than shown
in Figure 1.)
\11
66
00
08
00
11\
00
50
00
04
00
\11
00
11\
02
00
QO
07
00
00
00
00
00
01
01
Key
Group
,II
00
00
00
02
/1\
11\
00
HO
00
11-20
11\
, II
\11
00
\11
00
00
11\
21-30
FIGURE 1
The cursor will be displayed in the same position
that it was in when the CE display mode was
selected-CER mode.
The six highlighted registers in Figure 1 will
always be 00 at first selection of the diagnostic
if the machi ne is operating properly.
, The display registers diagnostic car. be used to:
- Test keyboard switches.
- Test keyboard keys.
- Test shift keys.
Test repeat keys.
- Test system error indicator.
-
- Observe the character displayed directly
above the cursor. It should be a O. If it is
not a 0, then a reason could be, (see below);
Not all of the switches were turned 'off'
before the CE Display Mode was selected.
Press the RESET key two or more times
until XR mode is displayed again and start
the test over.
One or more switches are stuck "ON"
electrically or are wired backwards.
- Switch wiring is shorted or PC board
land pattern lines are shorted.
- The register has one or more 'stuck' bits.
Keyboard Switch Test
Flip all keyboard toggle switches down (off).
Insert an initialized diskette in the disk drive
and close the drive cover. The machine should
go from XN to XR mode and display record
08 of track 00.
Use CHAR ADV to move the cursor out to
position 17 as shown by the position indicator.
2
4
8
6
A
C
E
indicates AUTO REC ADV (ARA) is on
indicates PROG NUM SHIFT (PNS) is on
indicates AUTO DUP/SKIP (AD/S) is on
indicates ARA and PNS are on
indicates AD/S and ARA are on
indicates AD/S and PNS are on
indicates that all three switches are on
TABLE 3
Press FUNCT SEL lower key (the rightmost FUNCT SEL key).
Hold down the NUM SHIFT key and press the
The machine mode and status should
change to CER.
'c' key.
- Press the U key. The machine mode and
status should change to CEW and the display
should look similar to Figure 1. (The six highlighted registers should always be 00 for a
properly operating machine. The other registers will show their contents when the U key
is pressed and may be different than shown
, in Figure 1.)
3742 ML
8-9
8-10
If the character in position 17 above the cursor
is a 0, proceed with the switch test. Each
switch has a value of 2, 4, or 8 as shown in
Table 3. As the switches are turned on in sequence, their values will be additive in the
register and the display character will change
accordingly (for each good switch).
Note that the character:
A is the numeric
equivalent of 10.
C is the numeric
equivalent of 12.
E is the numeric
equivalent of 14.
Keyboard Key Test
- Insert an initialized diskette in the disk drive
and close the drive cover. The machine should
go from XN to XR mode and display record
08 of track 00.
Use CHAR ADV to move the cursor out to
position 14 as shown by the position indicator.
Both register positions 13 and 14 (register
group four) will be used in this test.
- Press FUNCT SE L lower (the right hand function select key).
Hold down NUM SH I FT and press the C key.
The machine mode and status should change
to CER.
The switches may be turned on in any sequence.
Turning a switch off while in the CEW or CER
modes should have no effect on the display
once the register has been set.
Press the U key. The machine mode and
status should change to CEW and the display
appear similar to the one below. (The six
highlighted registers should always be 00 for
a properly operating machine. The other registers will show their contents when the U key
is pressed and may be different than shown
below.)
An easy sequence to follow is to turn the
switches on (flip up) one at a time from left
to right. The character above the cursor in
position 17 should change from 0 to 8 to
A to E as each good switch is turned on.
For a sequence from right to I'eft, the character
above the cursor in position 17 should change
from 0 to 4 to 6 to E.
Anyone switch can be tested repeatedly by
terminating the CE display mode and then
starting the test over again. (Use Table 3 as
a reference.) The cursor doesn't have to be
moved to position 17 each time, but it does
help to spot the active register position.
RESET may have to be pressed more than
once to change from CEW to CE R mode because the keyboard data register is periodically reset by the diagnostic program and may
not accept the first RESET input.
Note: If the keyboard switch test indicates a bad
switch position the problem could be:
Switch fails to make or break. Check with
the CE ohmmeter.
Open or shorted wiring connections to the
keyboard PC board.
Broken, shorted, or open pin or land pattern on the keyboard PC board.
66
00
\ II
\11
00
00
00
04
II'
00
00
07
00
02
00
00
00
If'
\11
\11
00
'1\
00
00
02
\11
08
50
00
00
00
01
01
00
'1\
00
Reg
Group
00
1·10
00
11·20
11\
\11
00
11\
21·30
Observe the two characters displayed above
and to the left of the cursor. They should
be zero, (00). If they are not both 0, then
the reason could be:
A stuck key (fly plate, dirt on PC board,
etc.).
A faulty PC board.
The register has one or more stuck bits.
Test any key on the keyboard by pressing
it alone. Do not press RESET.
The shift keys and the repeat keys cannot
be tested alone.
A key may have to be pressed more than
once because the keyboard data register is
periodically reset by the diagnostic program
and may not accept the first key depression.
Observe the two characters that are displayed
for a particular key depression. They should
agree with the codes shown for that key in
the Key Codes Chart. If not, some possible
problems are:
Faulty key module.
Faulty keyboard PC board.
Faulty keyboard register.
KEY CODES CHART
ENTER
02
01
2E
38
DISK 2
RET TO
INDEX
DISK 2
REC
ADV
COpy
DISK 2
REC
BKSP
UPDATE
VERIFY
COMPUTE DISPLAY
FIELD
FIELD
TOTALS TOTALS
SEARCH
SEARCH SEARCH
SEa
ADDRESS
EOD
ONTEN
RETURN
TO
INDEX
PROG
LOAD
DISPLAY
DISPLAY
PROD
PROG
STAT
DELETE
REC
DISPLAY
DATA
rlJ
rlittb
trlIb
rltiJ
K
J
M
IF
I
~
r-
No Shift/Kana Shift.
Num Shift _
Alpha S h i f t _
Kana Symb~
02
42
82
C2
01
41
81
Cl
I
I
FUNCT
FUNCT
SEL
SEL
No Shift/Kana Shift~ 2E
NumShift_6E
Alpha Shift~ AE
KanaSymb_ EE
38
78
B8
F8
1
03
43
83
C3
OE
4E
8E
C.E
05
45
85
C5
1
1
I
HEX
@
J
.
¥
j>
%
2A
6A
AA
EA
30
70
BO
FO
I
,1
'"
x
07
47
87
C7
06
46
86
C6
J
10
50
90
DO
08
48
88
C8
I
?
I
:;~~
T
<
?
I
J
I
I
oUPI>
-1:1-
0
:I
~
1>
- 1
/
3
21
61
Al
El
13
53
93
03
2C
6C
AC
EC
OA
4A
8A
CA
;t
12
52
92
02
11
51
91
01
3E
7E
8E
FE
_.J
20
60
AO
EO
20
60
AD
ED
09
49
89
C9
I
22
l
00
40
80
CD
OC
4C
8C
CC
I
REC
AOV
CHR"
AOV')
I
I
FLO
AOV"
iii
14
54
94
04
23
63
A3
E3
62
A2.
E2
,
Alternate Layout for
Proof Keyboard
I
----
,
~
0
I
L
SEL
'PGM
1-
31
71
Bl
Fl
10
50
90
DO
KANA
SHIFT
No Shift/Kana Shift--_-l••
Num Shift
..
"Ipha Shift
,
Kana Symb
36
76
B6
F6
DO not
press
this
key
3A
7A
BA
FA
I
I
~
KANA'
SYMS
r
\
NEW
LINE
RESET
.1
No Shift/Kana Shift
Num Shift
Alpha Shift
Kana Symb
A
I
I
T
1
f
------!,,~
,
..
>
S
t-
18
58
98
08
1.
19
59
99
09
No Shift/Kana Shift
Num Shift
Alpha Shift
Kana Symb
O 'J
F
'!)
r
?
X 11
I'
G
lA
5A
9A
OA
I
r ..
C ')
1
I
~
I
l
H '}
.1
lC
5C
9C
DC
I
I
I
I
4
5
K .J
6
SKIP
J ~
3B
7B
BB
FB
L IJ
=
)..V
1
t1
I
!
B :J
1
J.
--------------t....
2S
68
A8
E8
I
27
67
A7
E7
I
18
58
98
DB
I
I
1
26
66
A6
E6
25
65
AS
E5
(
1
N
- J.
1
7
M 'E
.J
r8 ,
l' +
29
69
A9
E9
I
9
.
JIi
35
75
B5
F5
.i
39
79
B9
F9
I
RTJ"
AOJ
'I
I.J
J.
3C
7C
BC
FC
I
"
Z
;
24
64
A4
E4
17
57
97
07
16
56
96
06
.,
I
:
I
NUM
SHIFT
3F
7F
BF
FF
3D
7D
SO
FO
15
55
95
05
IE
5E
9E
DE
I
.
;).
1..1
34
74
84
F4
I
CHR
8KS 0
1
.1
ALPHA
SHIFT
~ 1F
•
•
5F
9F
DF
Alternate Layout For Katakana Keyboard
3742 ML
8-11
8-12
Repeat Key Test
System Error Indication Test
Shift Key Test
The repeat (REP) key by itself will cause no
change in the display of registers and will not produce a keyboard click. REP, held down with another key, should cause the other key to be repetitively sampled to the register. The register will
accept the input at a time when it is not being
reset as previously explained. The display will
change once when the register accepts the input.
The keyboard should click repetitively while
the two keys are held down.
The object of this test is to try to set the error
bit in the proper register and see if the bit sets
and also if the error alarm conditions are implemented by the machine.
The left hand character of the two characters
displayed for key codes (position 13 in the display) should always be a 0, 1, 2, or 3 as shown in
the Key Codes Chart.
Start in XR mode .•
Use CHAR ADV to move the cursor out to
position 18.
- Press a key and check that the characters
displayed agree with the key code shown in
the Key Codes Chart for that key.
Hold NUM SHI FT down and press the same
key as in the previous steps. The left hand
character should increase by 4. See Table 4.
Select CER mode as described for the previous
test.
Press the U key to select display registers
program.
Hold ALPHA SH I FT down and press the
same keys as in the two previous steps. The
left hand character should again increase by
4. In effect, ALPHA SHIFT causes an increase
of 8. See Table 4.
Observe the character above the cursor in
position 18; it should be a zero (0).
Use the heel of your hand and press down
several keys on the keyboard to cause an
overrun error.
-
Hold KANA SYMB down and press the same
key as in the previous steps. The left hand
character should increase by 12 over the no
shift character. See Table 4.
The display should start flashing.
- The keyboard should go dead - no more clicks.
- There should a one (1) displayed above the
cursor in position 18.
Hold KANA SHIFT down and press the
same key as in the previous steps. The
indication characters will be displayed in
register group 24 (fourth group from the
left in the top line). The no Kana shift
condition is 00. The Kana shift is 20.
FIRST (LEFT HAND) DIGIT
(POSITION 13)
First (left hand)
digit of key code
No shift
NUM SHIFT
ALPHA SHIFT
0
4
8
1
5
9
KANASYMB
C
D
TABLE 4
2
3
6
A
E
7
B
F
CE Pins' for Raster Display
The CE pins for raster display are located adjacent to the left side of the signal cable connec·
tor on the display PC board. One of the CE
pins is connected to the PC board ground. The
other CE pin is connected to the 'video signal'
line.
When the CE pins are connected together with
a jumper wire, the 'video signal' line is grounded,
thus preventing the display of characters on the
CRT.
~
Set the meter selector switch to the 15 volt
range and connect as shown in the diagram. The
meter should indicate 6 volts dc.
~
'.-
,u>
pins~.
To check the accuracy of the 15 volt dc range of
your voltmeter, measure the voltage drop across
the zener diode on the power supply PC board.
The zener diode has a closely controlled voltage
drop of 6 volts dc with power on.
7:-:-:-t
~U~ ~lJ~
CE
CE Voltmeter PIN 452796
Accuracy Check (15 Vdc
Range)
I. 11.
:
• 2
de
Power Suppy
PC Board
,"AC
-DC
VOlts(@
~h3
Display PC Board
l - . . - - - - f - - - - . J (_)
Original Power Supply
(with diode board)
It may be difficult to see the raster retrace pat·
tern on some display units when the brightness
control is turned all the way clockwise and characters are being displayed. For these cases, the
characters can be removed from the display by
connecting the CE pins together with a jumper
wire. The absence of the brilliant characters
will aUow the raster retrace lines to be more visible.
~6-:--:---,
de
~
'~'AC
....:..J..--.··~DC
VOlt's (@
Com
r-------..,....------------FE (+)
Pos
(6 vde)
Power Suppy
PC Board
FE (-)
Revised Power Supply
(no diode board)
-
3742 ML
8-13
8-14
The CE General Logic Probe'
Test Terminal
PIN 453212
The line being probed is connected to this terminal. (Various probes may be attached, other
than the one shown, to aid in probing.) Do not
The universal logic probe provides a visual indication of a line level. The probe can also be used
to detect pulses and as a babysitter. (Refer to
handbook that comes with probe.)
~ use tip longer than 3 inches.
Long Probe Lead (PIN 453605)
Ignore the flashing UP and DOWN lights during
POWER ON while the probe is connected to its
machine power source.
Indicator Lights
--===:::::===----------..u
UP indicates an up level (+).
DOWN indicates a down level (-).
A pulsing line is indicated by
both lights being on.
Both lights are off if the line level
is from +1.0 to +2,.0 Vdc for MULTI
logic setting.
Ground Lead
Connect this lead to any signal ground near the
probe point. Do not use frame ground.
CAUTION:
MULTI
MST 2/4 MST 1
Logic Selector (TECHNOLOGY)
UP
NONE DOWN
-1.3V
Logic
selector
MULTI
MST 2/4
MST 1
+60.0V
+14.0V
+14.0V
+
Voltages greater than the above ranges
will damage the probe.
Selects the type of logic to be probed. Circuits
probed in the 3742 require the MULTI setting.
GATE REF
+1.4V
GND -
Safe Operating Ranges:
Improper indications r-esult
if the lead is not connected
to signal ground. A maximum length of 4" can be used.
LATCH Switch
Allows the probe to be used as a babysitter.
The up position allows latching the UP light on
a positive pulse. The down position allows
latching the DOWN light on a negative pulse.
NONE position resets the lights and,prevents any
latching action. This po~ition is used for most
probing in the 3742.
Power Leads
GATE REF Volts Switch
Connect the black (-) lead to planar M. 013
(gnd). Connect the other (+) lead to planar M,
B05 (+8.5V). A voltage difference of 4 to 12
volts is needed to power the probe, with the black
lead alWays the most negative. Do Not power
the probe with the -5 Vdc supply it can not
furnish the power required"
The use of this switch is not required for prob·
ing in the 3742. It affects only the gating ter·
minals.
GATING
The use of these terminals is not required for
probing in the 3742.
CAUTION:
Improper connection of power
lead may cause the probe to
malfunction.
Do not probe FE'T signals with gate inputs.
Gate input limits are ±14 volts.
CE Alignment Check Diskette PIN 2455026
HEAD ALIGNMENT SERVICE CHECK
TRACKS
The CE diskette has special tracks written on
its disk that can be used by the CE for a fast
service check of a disk drive unit to determine
if the unit has acceptable R/W head-to-track
alignment. This service check can be used to
quickly determine which disk drive unit out
of several needs R/W head adjustment to make it
compatible with the rest of the units.
An identifier field, called a disk track 10, is
written at the beginning of each record location
in every track when a disk is initialized. There
are 26 ID fields per track. Each 10 field has a
track number 10 and one of the 26 record number ID's for that track.
Data set label 00009 defines tracks 06 through 09
as HO ALIGN
Also, data set label 00018 defines tracks 12
through 15 as HO ALIGN.
Records and IDs are written off-track centerline on all twelve tracks, either OUT away from
the disk center hole, or. IN toward the disk
center hole. Tracks 11 through 16 are written
farther off-track than are tracks 05 through 10.
A.
The special tracks on the CE diskette disk are precision written in a manner that alternately offsets the 10 fields of each track a certain distance
from the track centerline. Special messages to the
CE are written in the 26 record areas of each track
(see Display Data Head Alignment Service
Check). Each record is off-set on the opposite
side of a track from its offset 10.
B.
Note that the phase zero position of the stepper
motor/leadscrew wheels corresponds to tracks 00,
04, oa, 12, etc.
C.
Typical Example for Successful Display of a Pair
of Matching Record Messages~'
1.
Odd numbered record IDs are written
OUT.
Even numbered record IDs are writtenl
IN.
2.
Odd numbered records are written
IN.
Even numbered records are written
OUT.
The total number of pairs of matching record
messages that can be read for anyone of the four
tracks gives an indication of two mechanical
condititons:
Tracks 06 through 09 (also tracks 12
through 15):
Tracks 05 and 11 (Guard Bands):
1.
Even numbered IDs are written
IN (toward track 06 or 12).
Odd numbered records are written
IN (toward track 06 or 12).
2.
No odd numbered IDs are written.
No even numbered records are written.
1.
Head location in reference to ~he track
centerline.
2.
How well the disk is centered while it
is clamped to the disk drive hub.
Tracks 10 and 16 (Guard Bands):
1.
Odd numbered IDs are written
OUT (toward track 09 or 15).
Even numbered records are written
OUT (toward track 09 or 15).
2.
No even numbered IDs are written.
No odd numbered records are written.
Track 00 through 04 and all tracks beyond track
16 are written with all 26 IDs on the centerline
of each track.
Data set label 00019 defines tracks 05 through 16
as HO ALIGN TRACKS. Actually, tracks 05,
10, 11, and 16 are head alignment guard band
tracks.
The guard ban tracks (05, 10, 11, and 16) have
only 1310's each. No record messages are displayable from the guard band tracks. 10's have
no corresponding records. (See Band C above.)
As explained above, each odd 10 is written OUT
and its corresponding odd record is written IN.
Each even 10 is written IN and its corresponding
even record is written OUT. Therefore, the cor·
rect display of a pair of matching record messages
results when the Read/Write head can read correctly an OUT 10 and its IN record, and then
180 0 away on the track can also read an IN
10 and its OUT record. (See figure 1)
Figure 1 shows the sequential order of the
IDs and records on the disk for anyone of
the above 8 tracks.
Since the disk drive stepper motor/leadscrew
wheels have four discrete stop positions each revolution, a set of four special tracks is provided so
that all wheel stop positions can be checked. These
tracks are located in track positions 06, 07,08,
and 09. A second set of four special tracks is
also provided. The IDs and records are written
more off-set than they are for the first set. Track
positions are 12, 13, 14; and 15.
Any two record messages of a matching pair (with
their corresponding IDs) are written on the disk
1800 from each other. (See Figure 1.)
Matching record messages refer to each other in
pairs, like record1 refers to record 2, and record
2 refers to record 1. Record 3 refers to record 4;
record 4 refers to record 3, and so on.
FIGURE 1
3742 ML
8-15
8-16
DISPLAY DATA HEAD ALIGNMENT
SERVICE CHECK
A correctly read and displayed record message
is one that:
Note: The machine must be operative enough to
be able to read and display track 00, and also to
1.
seek and to read other tracks on a disk. (This disk
does not detect a maladjusted lower-limit stop.)
Use the ML to troubleshoot machine malfunctions.
2.
3.
Remove the disk from the other disk unit.
Insert CE diskette in a disk drive and close the
drive cover.
Press REC ADV to get to data set tabel
00009, HDR1 HD ALIGN
Press FUNC SE llower
Press UPDATE
Can a pair of matching record messages be read
correctly from each of the four tracks?
Y N
Adjust the head (231).
Verify the adjustment with the test
diskette.
Dependent upon head alignment, the disk drive
mayor may not be able to read and match up
the first ID of track 06 with the first record
of track 06. If successful, the display will look
like this (cursor in position 001 for 128 feature
machines):
01
o
A A
U R
·06001
Is displayed immediately after REC ADV
or REC BKSP with no retries.
Has correct data contents.
Has track and record numbers in the record
that agree with the record counter in the
status line.
Head alignment is OK.
*To terminate the service check, press FUNC
SEllower followed by RETURN TO INDEX
key. The CE diskette may be removed from the
disk drive as soon as the data set label in track
00 is displayed.
4.
If the first direction is not successful, reselect (using the space bar) the same track
selected in step 1, and then manually turn
the disk drive stepper motor wheel a small
amount in a direction opposite to the first
direction to see if more ID's can be made to
display. You may have to try the above
steps more than once in order to find the
right setting of the stepper motor wheel.
Another way to refresh the display is to
press RESET once, then press the 4/J
key. The head carriage will not move in
this case.
Note: Some machines will have CE Mode
ROS that will cause the display to refresh
each disk revolution that 26 I D's are not
read. The display will seem to be flashing.
This is a dynamic mode of operation that
allows observation of the changing number
of ID's read as the head carriage is moved
manually. If all 26 I D's can be read cor·
rectly, the display will stop flashing.
If either step 3 or 4 is successful in displaying more
lO's correctly, (or all 26) the read/write head is
out of alignment. Do the read/write head adjustment outlined in service aid 231 of the Ml after
terminating this service check. (*)
I
TRACK 6,RECORD 1 CK STATUS LINE
06001
DISPLAY DISK TRACK IDs HEAD
HEAD ALlGNMT OK IF RECORD 2 CAN BE READ ALIGNMENT SERVICE CHECK
If not successful, there will be a pause while
the machine is retrying, then an error will be
displayed for no record found (2) or read (4).
RESET the error and press REC ADV.
The objective of the alignment check is to
find a pair of "matching" record messages in
each alignment check track that read and display correctly. The tracks are 06, 07, 08,
and 09.
Matching record messages refer to each other
in pairs, like record 1 refers to record 2,
and record 2 refers to record 1. Record 3
refers to record 4; record 4 to record 3, and
so on. (See example above.)
If the disk drive does not pass the read/write head
alignment service check using the matching record
messages on the CE diskette, you may do the
following as a further check on head alignment:
1.
With the CE diskette installed, put the
machine into CE mode display disk track
IDs, and move the R/W head to track 12,
13, 14, or 15 by successively pressing the
space bar. (See CE Mode, page 8-1, for
details of CE mode operation and how to
interpret disk track IDs.)
2.
Remove or move the display mirror assembly
so that you can watch the display from the
rear of the machine.
3.
Now manually turn the disk drive stepper
motor wheel a small amount in one direc·
tion to see if more IDs can be made to
display for that track. Be sure the track
IDs the first character of each group of four,
do ~ot change to indicate an adja'cent track.
If neither step 3 or 4 is successful in displaying
more ID's correctly, the trouble is other than
read/write head alignment. Terminate this
service check (*) and return to a MAP in the Ml
based on the error code displayed or other symptom. Remember that you have checked read/write
head alignment only. Thatshouldn't be necessary
again until you are ready to verify a fix.
Service Notes
The special tracks on a CE diskette can be verified
for adequate signal amplitude and presence of
I D's and records if the read/write al ignment service check can be performed successfully in
another disk drive unit.
During the display disk track ID's head alignment
service check, if the read/write head is moved so
that no ID's are displayed, it will be necessary
to manually move the stepper motor wheel to
a point where at least one I D is displayed in order
to be able to step track by track with the space
bar. It may become necessary to remove the
diskette and press the RESET key so that the
disk drive accessing mechanism gets recalibrated
with the access control counter. If after reinstalling the diskette record 08 of track 00 is
not displayed, power down and wait five seconds,
then power up to cause the recalibration procedure to be executed.
Diskette Special Handling
All diskettes undergo small reversible dimension changes with changes in ambient temperature and humidity. Allow the CE Diskette to
stabilize to a new environment before use.
This takes a few minutes up to a few hours
depending on the magnitude of change.
Storage in sunlight, or temperatures exceeding
1100 F, are apt to cause irreversible dimension
changes which degrade precision of the diskettes alignment tracks. The CE diskette is a
service aid only, consistant conflict between
it and the mechanical alignment tool is cause
to replace the CE diskette.
3742 ML
8-17
8-18
Offline Field Totals
Test Procedure
- Set AUTO REC ADV switch up.
- Load the CE Diskette, PN 2455026.
- REC ADV to data set label 00011. (The cursor is in position 001 in
128 feature machines.)
-
Press FUNC SE L lower
UPDATE
Execute, with the following procedure,
the displayed instruction to load four
programs.
Press REC ADV
FUNCT SEL lower
PROG LOAD
REC ADV
FUNCT SEL lower
PROG LOAD
2
REC ADV
FUNCT SEL lower
PROG LOAD
O:L
0
HDR1 OFF-LINE
A A
TOT PROG
P
01
0
A
00011
X R
080 39001 39026
39006
39001
A
U R
QFF-LINE TOT TEST
LOAD THE FOLLOWING
4 PROGRAMS IN PROGRAM STORAGE 1 THRU 4
O:L
o
A
N12------------E
A
39002
X R
o
A
O:L
N23------------E
A
39003
X R
01
0
N23-----------E
A
A
39004
X R
A
A
39005
X R
-
(12 dashes)
-
(12 dashes)
-
(11 dashes)
3
REC ADV
O:L
-
0
FUNCT SEL lower
PROG LOAD
4
~1001WS;2001NS,X;3001WX&002NA,B.
REC ADV-
The READ/WRITE head
returns to the index track
(label 00011) and the
display shows a 'G' error.
Press RESET
REC ADV to data set label 00012.-
O:L
HDR1
P
0
OFF~LINE
A
A
TOT DATA
00012
X R
080 40001 40026
40023
- Press FUNCT SEL upper
COMPUTE FI ELD TOTALS
Starts an automatic
computing routine. The
display shows, in rapid
succession, the following
22 records containing
test data:
01
o A
SA111111111111A
40002
40003
40004
40005
40006
40007
40008
40009
40010
40011
40012
40013
40014
40015
40016
40017
40018
40019
40020
40021
-
Wait for the computation to
be finished. ~
Press FUNCT SEL upper
DISPLAY FIELD TOTALS
Examine the display to confirm
correct field totals. - Press RESET.
The field totals test is complete;
the diskette can be removed.
40001
F R
VB222222222222B
SC333333333333C
V D444444444444 D
SE 555555555555 E
V F666666666666 F
SG 777777777777G
VH888888888888H
SI 9999999999991
VA111111111111J
SB 222222222222K
VC333333333333 L
SD 444444444444M
V E555555555555N
SF 6666666666660
VG777777777777P
SH 8888888888880
V I· 999999999999 R
XA 1111111111111
XB2222222222222
Xl1111111111111
01
0
A
X33333333333333
-
A
A
40022
F R
01
0
A A
00012
X R
HDR1 OFF·L1NE TOT DATA 080 40001 40026
40023
P
01
o
A A
9999999999999 +
1111111111111-
00012
X R
44444444444444+
3742 ML
8-19
8-20
CE TOOLS
Terminal Assembly Probe
PN 2594238
.@~UP
04
DOWN
TECHNOLOGY
~
MULTI
MST 2/4 MST 1
LATCH
UP~
Cable Extender
.' PN 5998763
NONE DOWN
CE Head Adjusting Tool
PN 2200698
GATE REF
~
, +.1.4V
GND -
6~.-.
~
".
.
-1.3V
de
-'AC
"DC
VOlts(@
GATING
+(9
-@
I~;,;,.iJ:
GENERAL LOGIC PROBE
CE General Logic Probe
PN 453212
* (long probe lead)
PN 453605
CE Voltmeter
(15 Vdc range) (PN 452796)
Voltmeter leads with
SMS connectors
PN 2124599
CE Diagnostic Diskette, PN 2455026
Function Control Feature
Diagnostic Diskette
Without Proof Keyboard, PN2446088
With Proof Keyboard, PN2446089
OPERATING PROCEDURES
Table of Contents .
Page
Procedure
9-3
9-4
9-5
Power On and Read Index
Modify Index
Delete Dataset Label
Enter
Update
Verify (with Field Correct)
Search Address
Search EOD
Production Statistics
Read Index Mode
Enter Mode
Search Content
Search Sequential Content
Field Totals (offline)
Self Check
Copy Dataset (to EOD)
Copy to a Specified Address
Copy Image (to EOE)
How to Make a Program
Program Load
Disk Initialization
Record Insert
9-6
9-8
9-10
9-12
9-13
9-14
9-15
9-16
9-16
9-18
9-22
9-24
9-26
9-30
9-32
9-33
9-34
9-38
FLOWCHARTING CONVENTIONS
The flowcharting symbols used in the operating
procedures flowcharts are:
(-)
Entry/Exit
Processing
Decision
Keying
Display
Document
Index
Page
Copy Data Set (to EOD)
Copy Image (to EOE)
Copy to Specified Address
Data Set Label
Delete Data Set Label
Disk Record Sequences
Enter
Initialize, Disk
Modify Index
Offline Field Totals
Operator Display
Productions Statistics (Enter Mode)
Productions Statistics (Read Index Mode)
Program, How to Make
Program, Load
Power On and Read Index
Read Index Mode
Record Insert
Search Address
Search Content
Search EOD
Search Masks
Search Sequential Content
Self Check
Update
Verify (With Field Correct)
9-24
9-30
9-26
9-2
9-5
9-37
9-6
9-34
9-4
9-18
9-2
9-15
9-14
9-32
9-33
9-3
9-3
9-38
9-12
9-16
9-13
9-16
9-16
9-22
9-8
9-10
Manual Operation
•
On-Page
Off-Page
Comment
Connectors
Most of the symbols are self-explanatory, but the
following symbols deserve comment:
Identifies specific keys to press
on the keyboard, or refers to
keyed data.
Identifies information displayed.
Refers to a specific MAP.
3742 ML
9-1
9-2
3742 DATA STATION
Operator Display
j--------------I
Program
Number
12
Cursor
Position
1-3*
Codes Displayed
Disk 2 I Machine
Address I Status
"
31-35 I 40
"
Program
Shift
Code 20
"
C
I
Disk 1
Address
25-29
001
K
0
A A
"
Machine
Mode
38-39
I
M
"
"
"
01008 02005 E R
.1:------------DATA LlNE ____________ 40
3
41-__________ DATA LlNE ____________ 80
Field Correct
Enter
Field Totals (offline only)
Initialize
Modify
Search
Update
Verify
Read Index
Customer Engineer
Record Insert
E
F
"
I
2
Mode of Operation
S
""
""
""
U
V
X
CE
N
"
Code Displayed
LThe Display Unit displays three lines of
information.
S18tus
Not Ready (disk not loaded)
Ready
Wait
N
R
W
* Cursor Position
Positions 2 and 3 only on 80-record-length
machines.
A dash (-), between mode and
status, indicates the alternative
method of record advance was
selected.
Data Set Label
Fields in heavy lines are required by the 3740 data
entry system.
1
4
I I I
HDR1
13
6
I I I I I I
J
Data Set Name
27
23
lJllllll
1I I I
Record
Length
29
33
I I I I
Beginning
of Extent
35
39
I I I I
End
of Extent
5
79
End of Data
Multivolume Indicator
' - - - - - File Protect
'------Data Set Accessibility
'-------Bypass Data Set
Verify Mark
I
Power On and Read Index
Read I ndex Mode
START
23-second delay
for power'on
diagnostics
30 second delay
-if 128 feature is
installed.
1.
Any operation can be selected from Read
Index mode.
2.
Press REC ADV or REC BKSP to read and
display any record on the index track (00).
3.
Data set records on the index track are 08
through 26.
4.
To select a data set, record,advance or
record backspace to the record (00008
through 00026) containing the desired
data set.
5.
Yes
No
Yes
All operations must be performed within the
limits of the selected data set.
Read Display Mode
Yes
No
Bad data
set label
Disk drive power
on reset (resets
drives to index
track)
No
Yes
Use MAP 2-1
Yes
No
Yes
Key in data set Iabel
Use MAP 5-1
Wait 5 seconds
FUNCT SEL lower
M
3742 ML
9-3
9-4
Modify Index
START
Key in label
mod if ications
REC ADV
No
Yes
Yes
FUNCT SEL lower
No
Buzz to indicate
end of data set
label modification
M
to required data set
label
STOP
No
Yes
The selected data
set label is deleted.
Label data can be
written after reset
No
Yes
RESET
Perform error recovery (see Data
Set Label ERP
Procedures), then
continue
Delete Data Set Label
DELETE REC
REC ADVor REC.
BKSP to required
data set label
Buzz to indicate
end-of-data set
label deletion
Index data set
label is deleted
STOP
RESET
3742 ML
9-5
9-6
Enter
START
When enter mode is selected, both the current
record buffer and the preceding record buffer
are filled with blanks. Keyed characters are then
accumulated in the current record buffer until an
entire record is entered. The record can be changed or corrected if record advancing hasn't occurred.
No
Yes
At the time record advancing occurs, the current
record is moved to the preceding record buffer.
and written to disk. The image of the last record
entered remains in the preceding record buffer
until record advancing occurs again.
Data set label
deleted. Go to
good label
RESET
Go to unprotected
data set
REC BKSP
T errors will not
occur if AUTO REC
ADV switch is on
Cursor returns to
first character
position of record
Allotted number of
records wi th i n data
set have been used.
>-------1 Machine enters
Read Index mode,
program zero
STOP
3742 ML
9-7
Update
START
FUNCT SEL lower
RETURN TO INDEX
FUNCT SEL lower
UPDATE
Bad data
set label
EOD = BOE No
data on selected
data set
RESET
Update record
RESET
AECADV
See Enter
procedure
REC ADV to first
unwritten record
to required record
No
Yes
Yes
See correct
operating
procedures
STOP
3742 ML
9·9
9-10
Verify (With Field Correct)
START
FUNCT SEL lower
Verify
Bad data
set label
EOD = BOE
No data on selected data set
RESET
REC ADVor REC
BKSP to unprotected
data set lab~1
REC ADV
or REC BKSP
to written data
Field correct
Cursor moves to
first position of
current field.
and writes a verify
mark on data set
label
DUP
Character being
displayed
Field data
STOP
Character causing
mismatch
Cursor returns to
first position of
current field,
machi ne retu rns to
Veri mode
3742 ML
9-11
9-12
Search Address .
START
No
FUNCT SEL lower
RETLJRN TO INDEX
Yes
A deleted record
has been addressed
. FUNCT SEL lower
Yes
Search address
Bad data
set label
EOD = BOE No
data on ,elected
data set.
Select a valid address between
BOE-l and EOD-l
that is not on the
index cylinder
Yes
See UPDATE
operating procedure to con-
No
Enter address
RECADV
Correct
label
Search EOD
START
EOD = BOE no
data on selected
data set
Machine returns to
home
index. Try
~';';;"'---r--""1
a different data
set
See UPDATE operating procedure
to continue
3742 ML
9-13
9·14
Production Statistics
Read I ndex Mode
START
Machine returns to
index track and displays data set label
Production Statistics
START
Enter Mode
~....:..;;..~_ _-;
Not program zero
or data has been
keyed.
Record length
less than 21
REC ADV
Statistics written
in first 21 positions
of current record.
See enter operating
procedures to continue.
3742 Ml
9-15
9-16
Search Content and Search Sequential Content
START
Search Masks
Search Content and Search Sequential Content
both require a search mask.
Search Content Mask
A Search Content mask contains part or all of
the data contained in the record being located.
Data selected for a search mask must appear in
identical positions in the mask and the corresponding record.
FUNCT SEL lower
SEARCH SEQ
CONTENT
Search Sequential Content Mask
A Search Sequential Content mask is the same as
a Search Content mask, but the records being
searched must be in ascending alpha numeric
order by search field. That is, the search field of
each succeeding record must have a higher value
than the search field of the preceding record.
FUNCT SEL Lower
SEARCH CONTENT
Yes
No
FUNCT SEL lower
DELETE REC
8,
Yes
No
No
The reoord has
not been found
RESET
FUNCT SE L lower
SEARCH SEa
CONTENT
FUNCT SEL lower
RETURN TO INDEX
FUNCT SEL lower
SEARCH CONTENT
Empty data set
New search mask
RECADV
Page 9-16
3742 ML
iii
9-17
9-18
Offline Field Totals
The offline field totals feature is used to obtain
totals from records that have already been entered,
updated, or verified. The offline field totals
feature uses the three 19-digit accumulators to add,
under program control, data in specific fields into
the assigned accumulator. A field total may include any number 0-9 and any of the 256 EBDCIC
codes. All codes with low order 4 bits equalling
0-9 are added with a value 0-9. All other codes
have the value of zero. All fields in which the
units position codes have the high order bits equal
to A, B, or 0, are negative fields.
The offline field totals feature allows the user to
read field totals from an accumulator into a
record with or without resetting the accumulator.
Selecting Offline Field Totals
Offline field totals feature can be selected from the
read index or update mode. When this feature is
selected, the mode changes to field totals and an
F is displayed on the status line. To perform offline field totals:
1.
Insert diskette and close cover.
2.
Load the program and mask statements needed to obtain the field totals.
3.
If in the update mode, position the disk to
the first record, to be used in the field
totals operation.
4.
Turn AUTO REC ADV switch on for automatic record advancing.
5.
Press FUNCT SEL upperand COMPUTE
FIELD TOTALS.
The accumulators are reset to zero, and the field
totals operation begins. Records are processed
under control of the program specified in the mask
statements. Field definition characters are ignored,
except those followed by a number. Field totals
fields are identified by following a field definition
character with a 1, 2, or 3 which specifies which of
the three accumulators is to be used. The second
and third positions after the field defin ition character can be used to cause the field to be accumulated into two or three accumulators.
The low order 14 digits of a field totals field are
added into the specified accumulators. Overflow
beyond 19 digits in an accumulator is not indicated. Deleted records are bypassed. Disk errors
and invalid mask statement errors stop the field
totals operations.
If AUTO REC ADV is turned off, the field totals
operation stops and the record following the last
record processed is displayed. Press REC ADV
to process the record displayed and advance to
the next record. Pressing RESET during a field
totals operation changes the mode to update mode_
At the end of a field total operation, the accumula.tors retain the field totals. If the end-of-data
address is reached, the data set label is di splayed
and the mode changed to read index mode_
START
Load field totals
program and mask
progra m (masks
are described on
the following page)
FUNCT SEL lower
RETURN TO INDEX
Machine automatica"v field computes
records; when EOD
reached, goes to
Read Index mode
RESET
R
R
*Negative Totals
The field totals are negative if the units position
contains one of the following characters:
ft- means
J
K
L
M
N
0
p
Q
R
means
means
means
means
means
means
means
means
means
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
3742 ML
9-19
9·20
Writing Field Totals Into Records on Disks
Mask Statements
After field totals are accumulated in the accumulators, the contents of the accumulators can be
written into a field in the record on disk. This
is done by programming the field in the record
into which the total is to be read with the field
definition character B followed by 4, 5, 6, 7, 8,
or 9. If 4, 5, or 6 is specified, the contents of the
accumulator does not change. If 7, 8, or 9 is
specified, the accumulator is reset to zero. (4
and 7 specify accumulator 1, 5 and 8 specify accumulator 2, and 6 and 9 specify accumulator 3.)
A mask statement can be used to cause a particular program to be selected to process a particular
type of record. The mask statement has the following formats:
If the field in the record that the accumulated
total is to be read into is shorter than the accumulated total, only the low order digits of the accumulator are read into the field in the current
record buffer. If the field in the record is larger
than the accumulated total (19 digits), the total
is right-adjusted in the field and the remainder of
the field is filled with zeroes.
&053Wb&:
Continued from program buffer 5
Program Buffer 7
<054Wb&055Wb;
-------------Continued from
program buffer 6
Selects program level 3 if
positions 50-55 are blank.
(The f> in the example represents a blank space.)
This mask statement is continued in program buffer 7.
4.
Selects program level 4 if
another program level has
not been selected.
3742 ML
9-21
9·22
Self·Check
Self Check
Modulus 10
Modulus 10 is designed to detect either incorrect
keying of a single digit or a single transposition.
The following arithmetic process is used to generate the check digit, regardless of the method of
generation employed (generator, computer, or
manual):
RESET
Load Progra m
(see Program Load
operating procedures)
1.
The units position and every alternate
position of the basic code number is multiplied by 2.
2.
The digits in the product and the digits in
the basic code number that are not multiplied by 2 are crossfooted.
3.
The crossfooted total is subtracted from the
next higher number ending in zero.
4.
The difference is the check digit.
Change data or
self-check character entered
NUM SHI FT/-(dash)
or
ALPHA SHIFT/-(dash)
Example:
Basic code number
6
2 4 8
Units and every alternate posi·
tion of basic code number
628
Multiply by 2
X2
Product
256
Digits not multiplied by 2
4
1+2+1+5+4+6
Cross add
Next higher number ending in zero
Subtract crossfooted total
Check digit
Self-checking number
6 1 2 4 8
NUM SHIFT/P
SEL PROG
Program number
(1-A)
;;:;19
20
-19
Other Examples:
Enter, update, or
verify data
Basic Code Number
45626
30759
73074
RESET
STOP
Self-Checking Number
Basic Code
Check Digit
45626
9
30759
5
73074
7
In Modulus 10 self-checking, the space and zero
have the same numeric value; therefore, spaces
can be substituted for nonsignificant leading zeros.
The use of spaces is valid only when they are keyed.
In Modulus 11 operatior., basic numbers that reo
quire a check digit of 10 cannot be used as self·
checking numbers. The accounting system must
be adjusted to eliminate such numbers from codes
that are to be self-checked. If an operator is
generating check digits and punches a basic number requiring a check digit of 10, the machine
indicates an error condition.
Modulus 11
Modulus 11 is designed to detect single digit
mispunches, single transpositions, and double
transpositions. The main feature of this system, distinguishing it from other self-checking
number systems, is that it is based on a weighted
checking factor for each digit in the basic number
being tested. Regardless of how the self-check
digit is generated, the following arithmetic process is used:
Self-check fields are specified in the program by
the use of one of the characters C, G, M or H,
F, L as the field identification character. The
field definition characters have the following
meanings:
Each digit position of any basic number is
assigned a weight (checking factor). These
factors are: 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 2, 3, 4, 5 . . .
starting with the units position of the num·
ber and progressing toward the high-order
digit.
Cor H
G or F
M or L
2.
In the following example, write the num·
ber as illustrated, leaving space between the
digits.
Blank fields (fields totally filled with the blank
character) will check correctly in the Enter mode,
but will cause an error in the Verify mode.
3.
Below each digit, starting at the right and
working left, place the corresponding
checking (weighting) factor.
4.
Multiply each digit by its checking factor
and add the products.
5.
Because this is a Modulus 11 operation.
divide the sum of the products by 11. and
subtract the remainder from 11. The reo
suit is the check digit.
1.
modulus 11 or 10-- Normal
modulus 11 or 10- Skip
modulus 11 or 10 -- Dup
Example
Basic number: 943457842
Write digits of basic number:
9
4
3
4
5
7
8
4
2
From right to left, write
checking factors:
4
3
2
7
6
5
4
3
2
Add the products:
36 + 12 + 6
+ 28 + 30 + 35 + 32 + 12 + 4
Total 195
Divide: 195 divided by 11 == 17 plus a remainder of 8
Subtract: 8 subtracted from 11
=3
The new self-checking number is:
(the check digit)
943457842~
3742 ML
9-23
9-24
Copy Data Set (to EOO)
FUNCT SE L lower
RETURN TO INDEX
The preceding
steps released
station 2; the remaining steps are
done at station 1
FUNCT SEL lower
SEARCH EOD
Setup was bad
for copy. Correct it.
FUNCT SEl upper
DISK 2 REC ADV
FUNCT SEl upper
Entel" the correct
data (see Enter Operating Procedures)
FUNCT SEllower
RETURN TO INDEX
STOP
3142ML
9-25
9-26
Copy to a Specified Address
START
FUNCT SEL lower
RETURN TO INDEX
. FUNCT SEL lower
A
(station 2)
The preceding
steps release~
station 2; the remaining steps are
done at station 1
FUNCT SEL lower
SEARCH EOD
FUNCT SEL lower
ENTER
FUNCT SEL upper
DISK 2 REC ADV
FUNCT SEL lower
NUM SHIFT and
SEARCH CONTENT
NUM SHIFT and
SEARCH CONTENT
Enter the correct
data (see Enter Operating Procedures)
Enter data for
content or address
search (see Enter
Operating Procedure)
B
Page 9·28
3742 ML
9-27
9-28
Copy to a Specified Address (Cont)
Yes
No
FUNCT SEL lower
UPDATE
REC BKSP
RECADV
REC ADV to the
address of the error
FUNCT SEL lower
DELETE REC
FUNCT SEL upper
DISK 2 REC ADV
Enter the correct data (see
Enter operating procedure)
Disk 2 is in
read index mode.
FUNCT SEL lower
RETURN TO INDEX
FUNCT SEL lower
A
STOP
This page intentionally left blank.
-
3742 ML
9·29
9-30
Copy Image (to EOE)
START
FUNCT SE L lower
A
(station 2)
The preceding
steps released
station 2; the remaining steps are
done at station 1
Enter the correct
data (see Enter
Operating Pro. cedure)
STOP
3742 ML
9-31
9-32
How to Make a Program
Sample Program
1.
Start each field with a Begin Field code.
2.
After the Begin Field code, put the number of Continue Field codes, (dash) for numeric shifts and. (period) for alpha shifts, you need to
complete the length of the field.
62
3.
o
N---------A.
A A
01001
E
R
.R---------O.
S----.----V.
.E
I
Put an E at the end of your program unless the program uses all the
:
I
I
I
I
record positions specified in the record length.
i
I
I
I
Begin Field COde-------...J:
I
I
Continue Field COde------..:..--- L ---------!
I
I
End Programming Code - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -----'
Program Code Chart
Program Record Length
Code
N
A
";/
Begin
Field
Codes
Verify Bypass
V
W
"
J
R
y
X
l'
'\
Z
I
B
D
U
'7
S
K
~
Continue
Field Codes
.
-
:J
End
Program Code
Feature
Begin
Field Codes
Shih
Numeric
Alpha
-Katakana
Numeric
Numeric
-Katakana
Alpha
Numeric
Alpha
-Katakana
Numeric
Alpha
-Katakana
Manual Fields
Manual Fields
Manual Fields
Right-Adjust, blank fill
Right-Adjust, zero fill
Right-Adjust, blank fill
Right-Adjust, blank fill
Bypass
Automatically Duplicates
Automatically Duplicates
Automatically Duplicates
Automatically Skips
Automatically Skips
Automatically Skips
Numeric
Alpha
-Katakana
Continues Field in Numeric Shift
Continues Field in Alpha Shift
Continues Field in Katakana Shift
E
H
C
F
G
L
M
Marks End of Program
Numeric
Numeric'
Numeric
Numeric
Numeric
Numeric
Any Begin Field character followed by 1, 2, or 3.
B Bypass Begin Field character
followed by 4, 5, or 6;
B followed by 7, 8, or 9.
*Katakana machines only.
Function
Self-Check, Modulus 10
Self-Check, Modulus 11
Auto Skip Self-Check, Modulus 10
Auto Skip Self-Check. Modulus 11
Auto Oup Self-Check, Modulus 10
Auto Oup Self-Check, Modulus 11
(See "Self-Check", page 9-15_.
Field Totals Entry
(See "'Field Totals", page 9-12 and
9-14J
Field Totals Read Out - Offline
Field Totals Read Out and Reset
- Online or Offline
(See "Writing Field Totals into
Records or Disks". page 9-13.1
Program records can be any length up to the maximum of 80 characters (128 characters if the 128·
record-length feature is installed), but all program
records on a data set must have the same logical
record length. Users can choose to make all program records 80 (or 128) characters long regardless
of program length and terminate programs with E.
Programs generated on the keyboard after the logical
record length has been established (a record has been
read in Update or Verify mode or written in Enter
mode) do not require the E.
Program Chaining
Program chaining provides automatic selection of
the program to be used with the next record. The
program to be selected, when record advancing,
is designated by the appropriate program number
in position 80 (position 128 if the 128-record-length
feature is installed) of the current program. The program to be selected, when record backspacing, is
designated by the appropriate program number in
position 79 (position 127 if the 128-record-length
feature is installed) of the current program.
Program Load
START
No
No
Yes
No
FUNGT SE L lower
DELETE REG
SEL PROG
Create program.
Nu mber chosen
for storing
program.
Yes
REG ADV or REG
B KSP to data set
label for program
STOP
FUNCT SEL lower
PROG LOAD
FUNCT SEL lower
DISPLAY PROG
Yes
Search on record
address (see Search
Address operating
procedure).
Allocate space for
program; choose
a number from 1-6.
(l-A, for 128
feature machine.)
FUNGT SE L lower
UPDATE
Number chosen for
storing program.
*Display Data
The display data function could be used. after
the display program function. to display the data
in the current record.
SEL PROG
3742 Ml
9-33
9-34
Disk I nitialization (Disk Check Portion)
START
Disk Check
No
Yes
If disk check is not
desired prior to
disk initialization
go to (9-22)
Djsk.lmtlallzatlon (UISK l,;neCK I"'onlonl - \,onunueo
FUNCT SEL lower
First bad track will appear in positions
41-42 its error in position 43, second
bad track will appear in positions 44-45_
Its error in position 46, etc_
First 10 tracks with errors will be dis. played. Only first error in track will
be shown_
Page 9-36
First bad track in
positions 9-10.
Second bad track
in positions 11-12.
Page 9-36
No
Disk is good
Page 9-36
3742 ML
9-35
9-36
Disk Initialization (Disk Check Portion) - Continued
Page 9-37
START
Disk Initialization
Page 9-35 (3)
B
Yes
Record 00007
Positions 77 & 78
DISK RECORD SEQUENCES
01
02
2
2
3
4
Volume 10 in positions 1-6.
3
Sector sequence code in positions 7-8 (normally left blank)., Valid entries (in addition
to the positions being left blank) are 01 and
02. Entering 01 causes the sector arrangement to be 1, 2, 3, 4, .... 25, 26. Entering
02 causes the sector arrangement to be 1, 3,
5, .... 25,2,4, .... 24,26.
5
6
3
4
5
5
7
9
6
11
7
8
9
13
15
17
19
21
23
7
10
13
16
19
blank
Key the following data (each of these fields
is optional and can be left blank):
•
•
•
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
First bad track in positions 9-10.
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20.
21
22
22
23
24
25
23
24
25
26
14
•
•
1
1
4
Blank in positions 13-14.
Blank for record length of 80 or L for .ecord
length of 128 in position 15.
26
03
04
05
1
1
5
9
6
7
13
17
21
11
16
21
'. 26
13
19
25
25
2
8
22
2
7
25
2
6
10
12
17
14
20
26
5
8
14
22
3
18
3
8
9
15
21
25
2
11
22
14
4
6
8
17
20
23
10
12
26
3
14
6
9
26
3
7
11
15
19
23
4
12
15
18
21
24
8
5
12
16
20
24
10
15
20
25
16
18
20
22
24
26
06
13
18
23
4
2
4
10
16
9
14
22
19
24
11
17
23
5
07
08
09
10
11
12
1
8
15
22
2
9
16
23
3
10
17
24
4
11
18
1
9
17
25
2
10
18
26
3
11
19
4
12
20
5
13
21
6
14
22
7·
15
23
1
10
19
2
11
20
11
21
2
12
22
12
23
1
13
25
2
2
25
5
12'
19
26
6
13
6
20
12
18
24
7
14
21
8
16
24
3
3
12
21
4
13
22
5
14
23
13
23
4
14
24
5
15
25
6
6
15
24
7
16
25
'16
26
7
17
8
18
9
19
10
20
8
17
26
9
18
13
14
2
15
13
14
3
24
26
16
334
14
15
17
25
4
5
4
16
18
15
5
6
26
17
19
567
16
18
20
678
17
19
21
789
18
20
22
8
9
10
19
21
23
9
10
11
20
22
24
10
11
12
21
23
25
11
12
13
22
24
26
FUNCT SEL lower
Yes
Disk is good
Try again. But list 77
as fi rst bad track
(position 9-10 of 00008)
after FUNCT SEL lower
and DELETE REC.
Tracks listed on
data line 2 have
one or more bad
records.
Notify customer
Page
(9-36)
3742 ML
9-37
9-38
Record Insert
Select
desired
mode
Record insert will
start at the displayed address
FUNCT SEL lower
Search address
Puts machine in
NUM SHIFT and
clears screen
NUM SHIFT and
RESET Key in new
record REC
ADV
Yes
FUNCT SEL lower
ALPHA SHIFT
RIGHT ADJ
00, or only one
digit or Data set
too small
NUM SHIFT
RESET
STOP
INTRODUCTION - How to use
The IBM 3740 Data Entry System is a family of
devices that provides a key-to-disk-to-tape data
handling capability. This is performed in two
stages. During the first stage, the data is keyed
onto a small flexible magnetic disk via one of the
data stations. During the second stage, the data
on the disk is transferred to 112-inch computer
tape by the data converter.
The two data entry stations are the IBM 3741
and the IBM 3742. The IBM 3742 Dual Data
Station has two keying stations in 1 machine
frame. The IBM 3741 Data Station has one
keying station. The 3742 provides basic functions similar to the IBM 029, 059, and 129. The
3741 provides these basic functions along with
additional features such as a printer and a
BSCA (Binary Synchronous Communications
Adapter) unit.
The IBM 3747 Data Converter feeds, reads and
stacks the diskettes. The data it reads is transferred to 9-track computer compatible magnetic
tape. The 3747 can also be equipped with a
BSCAunit.
The BSCA unit installed on a 3741 or 3747
allows data transfer between these units or between these units and a CPU equipped with
BSCA. A BSCA equipped 3741 or 3747 can
communicate with another BSCA equipped
3741 or 3747.
3740 Data Entry System
I
I
3l 13 Pri nter
IBM 3741
Data Station
~~
Teleprocessing
(BSCA)
Diskette
------.I>®<=~>
Magnetic Tape
IBM 3747
Data Converter
System Tape Drive
3742 ML
10-1
10-2
IBM 3742 Functional Units
Display
Ii1
Provides visual display of machine status
and data to both operators.
Diskette
Keyboard
B
Recording medium for the disk drive (customer
pu rchase d) .
Provides the operator an interface to the machine.
Disk Drive
B
Reads and writes data and control
information in the diskettes.
II
IBM 3742 Functional Characteristics
and Features
MPU
Functional Characteristics
Provides control and monitoring circuitry for
the keyboards, disk drives, and the display.
Six program storage areas
Standard
Enter
Standard
Program chaining
Standard
Update
Standard
80 character record length
Standard
Search EOD
Standard
Search data address
Standard
Verify
Standard
Production statistics
Standard
Katakana
Optional
Feature grou p A
Search content
Search sequential content
Self-check (modulus 10
and modulus 11)
Field totals (offline)
Disk initialization
Disk copy
Record Insert
Proof Keyboard
Optional
128-character-record length
. Ten program-storage
areas.
1 to 128 character
record length.
Power Supply
II
Provides the required voltages for the 3742.
Optional
Optional
Optional
IT]
(-)--+--------.
6 Vdc
Meter Test
(+)
--.----___e
TPl2
• -5 Vdc
C[J
IT]
TP13
~I ~.
:: I
.::
.=.
••
13
"W", Tn
I[
TP5
Fl
]
+12 Vdc
F3
[
]
TPIO
~ [:
RPOs with or without other
features
; ] 24 Vd<
[QJ
[IJ
CD
[TP6J
T~ if:
6
tP4i7!
F4
+8.5Vdc
F2
]-12Vdc
[QJ
m
m
[IJ
[0
Optional
3742 ML
10-3
10-4
This page intentionally left blank.
How to Use This Manual
The Manual contains all documents necessary to
maintain the 3742 Data Station. The material is
arranged as shown.
Page 1-1, Start of Call, leads you into a failure-analysis procedure based on the guideline: Start with the
highest order symptom that appears after power
on. Begin every repair action at Start of Call. Answering the questions asked, following the paths indicated by Yes and No answers, and performing
the actions required, leac;ts yOll, in most cases, to
the cause of machine failure.
Start of Call guides you either to the correct MAP
(maintainance analysis procedure) via the Symptom
Index, or to the Machine Checkout Procedure.
D
START OF CALL
Is there an RPO Special feature installed? - - - - - -
Y
A list of machine failure symptoms is divided
into four categories:
1.
o
N
0
Symptoms observed on the display
3.
Failure of keyboard-initiated operations
4.
Others
Note ,: - 128 featured Machine Only
Ignore dIsplayed information until
JO seconds afte, power up. (The
I
Error codes
2.
A check mark in the Y or N box
indicates the MAP path to follow.
If neither box is check marked.
I
{use last o,!el
Y
N
Error Code?
(use last onel
Y
N
Do you have any other symptom?
Y
N
_ Use Machine Checkout MAP 7-1.
The order of listing the categories indicates
the importance level of symptoms. The index, indeed the whole maintainance philosophy, is based on this arrangement of
symptoms.
3742ML
10-5
10-6
Error Codes
Error codes are in alphabetical, numeric, and
special-character order along the left edge of the
Index pages. In the space to the right of each
code are the MAP-page reference, failure description, probable cause, and how-to-fix information.
If multiple codes are displayed, use the most consistent and stable one, or the last one displayed.
Some disk-drive failures are cha~eable and slow
to stabilize due to automatic retry procedures.
SYMPTOM INDEX
ERROR CODE DESCRIPTION
Code
Display PosItIon
8
9
. Olagnosttc
MAP
10
Description
---.- - - - - _ .. - - . _ - - - - -
A
Data set non-acces.s.lhle
21
f--f---f--+----f---------B
Bad data set label
21
Operating Procedure
Cause
--"--.-=--:-'-------~
The data set accessibIlity code field In the data set lahef or
volume label has a non blank character.
In
the
Remove the disk.
One of the followIng conditIons exostedwhen you tried to select
a mode from track 00:
1. The last record read and currently displayed is from track 00.
records 01 Inrough 07.
- Press RESET and REC ADV.
2. Position 4 of the header field in the oata sel label doesn't
contain a 1.
- Press RESET and enter a 1 in position 04, press FUNCT SEL
lower, M, and REC ADV.
3. The data set label is flagged with a control address mark
(such as is required for a deleted recordi.
- Enter H in position I, press FUNCT SEL, M, andREC ADV.
- BOE is less than track 01, record 01.
- Press RESET and enler the correct BOE, press FUNCT SEL
lower, M, and REC ADV.
- EOE is greater than track 74, record 26.
- Press RESET and enter the correct EOE, press FUNCT SEL
Symptoms Observed on the Display
Symptoms observed on the display are shown
either as pictures of the display, or described and
listed alphabetically. Each Symptom has associated MAP-reference and descriptive information.
DISPLAY AND DISPLAY UNIT SYMPTOMS
Look for a picture or descriptive symptom
similar to what you see on the display
Display:
Spot
Display:
No characters
Viewer:
Removed
Viewer:
Removed
Brightness
Control:
Turned up
MAP:
3·2
Display:
No horolontal
sweep
Viewer:
Removed
Brightness
Control·
Note: Some of the pictured symptoms are with
a diskette installed. A less number of characters
may be displayed when a diskette is not installed,
but the symptom will be the same. Examples:
lines on top of each olher.
Missing characters_
All characters resemble cursors/dashes.
Skewed-yoke adjustment.
MAP:
Turned up
(caution)
6·1
a«\~\e
For some symptoms. it may be necessary to
turn the brightness control up to observe
the display symptoms,
CAUTION:
Displav:
Spot
Viewer:
Removed
Turned up
O(\\~·
Sa(\\~
'ley.;
eces
fo«(\a
(\O't ~
:'le(\'t
CO(\
... aW~·
DISPLAY AND DISPLAY UNIT SYMPTOMS
DIsplay:
Failure to blank
on wiggle sweep
Viewer:
Removed
Turned up
MAP:
3-1
---
,_\
.--
Broghtness
Control:
Briw-tness
,,-
Display:
Failure to
WIggle ,weep
4
.:~
-
-
If none of the above symptoms are Similar
to what you see on the dIsplay:
- Power down.
- Disconnect the keyboard signal cables
(407H) at planar P and R. (505)
- Power up. (Wait at least 30 ,econds.)
Characters
Does the machone still fail?
YN
retraces
t
--;...,.,
Blank display
Brightness fades out ,lowly
Broghtness faIlure
Inter mIt tent/unadju, table
Broghtness increases slowly
31
31
31
"\
.-
l
32
32
DISPLAY·GENERAL
~
.
..
-.
-
.
3·11
Distorted
5-1
Dot ml!i.smg
- Power down.
- Reconnect the keyboard cable, (407HI
at planar P and R (5051.
- Use keyboard MAP 4-4.
Cursor (PositIon Indicatorl
- Power down.
5-1
5-1
(At Power Up in XN modelstatus
the 3742 wi,h 1 ~~ •
MISSing
Wrong position
~bl!illl'--..L:::::::=:;::;::;::;:;;;;====:::::::::::::;::;:::::===::::=::!-_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _-
--
Failure of Keyboard-Initiated Operations
Symptoms of keyboard-initiated operational failures are listed alphabetically by the names of all
the keys and switche,;. Each index entry has failure
descriptive matter and associated MAP-page reference.
KEYBOARD AND OPERATIONAL SYMPTOMS
Copy
Alphabetic Shift
4·5
4·4
4·2
4·2
4·2
4·2
Fails to override proglam control
Program fails
Will not alpha shIft from keyboard
Display Fiel d Program
4-4
42
Conttnual copy
Cople, wrong data
Fa.l, to copy
Display ProductIon Statistics
Dash (-)
42
Audio Feedback Device
4·6
4-6
4·6
Displays wrong program
Faols to display program
42
Fall, to d,splay
4L
Fclil~
DISplays production statistiCS always
4.~4____----_D~i~sml~~~~~~~~~-----
to e!1ter he'\( D
Always a tone
No tone at end of funcllon
Tone or click at wr
Others
Other (miscellaneous) symptoms include any that
do not conform to categories 1, 2, and 3.
\
MISCEllANEOUS SYMPTOMS
Disk Unit Symptoms
21
2·6
22
29
2·4
2·10
2·6
2·6
22
Notice how Start of Call (Page 1-1) guides you to
the correct symptom category, and the Symptom
Index directs you to a MAP.
DIskette problems
Not ready
Read check
Seek errors I no data errorsl
W"te check
D,skette not interchangeable WIth other disk unIts
Machine status or disk address mISSIng
Machine
~tatus
wronq
DIsk address 1 or 2 wrong
Features
7·3
Feature A checkout procedure
7-4
128 Record length feature checkout procedure
Keyboard
4·1
Aud,o feedback deVIce works WIth an error
42
BIDd'DO key
------------------
/
I
3742 ML
10-7
10-8
II
MAPs (Maintainance Analysis Procedures)
This is the step-by-step MAP that guides you to the
cause of failure.
through
Prompting Message - This column contains bits of
helpful information, hints, cautions, etc.
MAP Number .,....------______________+-\
-
This MAP will help find not ready problems;
also disk address missing. or machine status
2 == Disk MAP
6 == The sixth in a series of eleven disk MAPs
-
Check to see if you can f ,nd anyone of the fol·
missing or wrong.
lowing defects in the problem/suspect disk drive
unit:
This number refers to the Drive Motor Removal!
Replacement Procedure. See section 2 in service
information.
1.
Belt - off or damaged. (223K)
2.
Pulley (2) .' loose. (223D and 223GI
3.
Idler assembly - defective mechanical
operation. (223E)
-------1r-----------....
4.
Drive motor - binding or stidon
II
This number refers to the pivot screw labeled
on the Disk-Cover-Iocations graphic number 221.
See section 2 in service information.
No
Select the. proper I A code and cause code
for the faulty part from the charts.
Fo"ow this line after a Yes answer.
-
When the failure IS Intermittent, perform the
following steps, one on each call, until the
problem IS solved.
Aecord the date of each action.
The next action is indicated with a dash.
-
Vibrate the machine to try to cause the failure. Check room temperature and humidity
and compare It to the installation procedure,
page 16·1. Check dc voltages at disk FC card
(204A) with respecl to frame ground.
Off-page connector refers you to the same indica- - - - - - - i H A
tor on the next page.
Vdc
Te,t Point
Limits
+24
+5
-5
1
23
22.0 to 26.5
4.7 to 5.5
4.6 to 5.4
ground
17
0
B
3742 Ml
The disk MAPs have a 2 tab. This is also indicated - _ _ _ _+-___,.,
on page 1-1; both in the diagram and at the bottom edge of the page.
MAP 2-6.1
2·6.2
The on-page connectors indicate you get here from
the A and B connectors on the previous page.
Power down.
Notice the A connector at both the top and bottom of this page. The line continues over as many
pages as have no action in that path. An action
changes the next off-page connector in that path
to another character.
-
Re>eat both end> of the disk signal cable.
-
(204B)
Reseat the disk file cable at the FC card
(204C)
-
Verify t.rchP.'-C.f~lx;.:.-,_~~
-
DATE L[_L[_'-----'
Power down.
Swap the dISk units
Verify the fix.
DA TE:
r [- . . - - - . - -
These blocks are for recording the date the preced·
(21B)
ing action was performed.
Repl."" the phototranSIStor assemhly. (243)
Verify the fiX
DATE:
rl-'-1-,---
Power down
R"piace the disk FC card. (204A)
V""fy t';.:.h::.-ef:.:,:lxr-",-_
UATE: L[
P()w~:r down
_[L----'---_
R""la"I: the dISk file cable
the fiX.
V~:nfy
DA TE
(2D4C)
-1'--"'--
r[
POW;( down
RI:"I.r.•, thl: disk signal cable. (204B)
Vf: p
t y t,-t",-,f-cIX;..-.,.---,
DA TE!~_I,---,-~
Rp.pldr.l~ '~l'~
V~rlf'l T\''''I~'
d( I,m: hlter
f ,
DATE'~~
A dash after an action statement indicates there is
a prompting message in the column to the right.
Does the disk drive shaft bind now?
Y N
See (2371. A malfunction can be caused by a
broken piVOt. Check the collet for spring deflec·
tlOn With cover closed.
If the original symptom still exists when this question is asked, then the machine is still failing.
-------+--++4\
~"I--------
This word assists you in determining the correct
cause code. In this case, use code 01. Refer to the
listing on the first page of each section of service
information.
3742 Ml
10-9
10-10
Service Information
Service aids, graphics, procedures, adjustments,
etc., on these pages are presented in six groups,
each associated with a set of MAPs. For example,
the group from which these illustration pages were
chosen bears numbers between 201 and 299. It
supplements disk MAPs, section 2. The service and
group numbered between 301 and 399 is for use
with Display MAPs, section 3, and so on through
the group numbered between 701 and 799.
213
Disk Drive Pulley and Belt
Removal
- Power down.
- Unplug motor cable. (222F)
- Remove fan guard assembly (222M) by loosen·
ing screws at opposite corners (top screw must
be loosened through grillwork of fan guard
assembly).
- loosen screw, mark, and remove fan blade
(222l) (note blade curvature).
- Remove drive belt. (222K)
- loosen setscrew and remove pulley. (222G)
216
219
Disk Drive Cover
Removal and Replacement
CAUTION:
- Rem ...•·
-
Avo;'"
~e 0
~\'"
Removal and Replacement
-
-
.~","
?J.\\O.
j..?J.«\'Q e-T_P_B_8_ _-t
Phase 0
+ Access 1
(White)
D03
TPB;Z
1
I
I
1
o
1 I
~~::i'~'T~"~"..--1--1-,1
003
White
~
::=:
I \ I
Stepper Motor
I I
T
Phase 1
TPA1
B02
TPB10~~(-Re-d-)----~>----~----~~-r~i~~r~~~r~~
~
Red
+ Access 2
004
JA I
TPB9
Disk
Drive
Cable
YI
-l
~
I
~
;=:A Phase 2
TPB3
604
TPB 11 ~ A ~~-------__--------f-'::-:':":-------.....J
+ Access 3
Yellow
005 ~"---------1---"l--LN~.--..J1 (Yellow)
A ~P_h_as_e_3______~T~PB~1_ _--f~D~0=2-=B~la~Ck~_ _~~
~--:-----t-.~..JI (Black)
B05 Blue
To Ac Olstrobutlqn I
1 804 Yellow Head Load Magnet
rT----------~====~~~~4r~~d
I
I
TPA 11
__________________
J
Head Load
~"-----'----~-----;I Magnet
Driver
TPB4
~+--~-----t->-----"-'----+5 Vdc
AhA
TPA2
'----------..,TPA10L-
I
....------,
/Indel<
1
Erase
Drover
B02
- Write Data
+ Low Current
TPA6 J
TPA9
l
I
h
YeliowBO!r-----, LED
Black.BQ§J
1- -
~
Black
250K TPB5
1-+--+-------------11Amplifier I~l
155K
~"
Yellow
';. 1....
9.3K
Inter~itch ~
-
_..J
-
/LJumpt)r D12 Black!:-J
J
ReadlWrote
~
~
I '----------tr--.-4I~
B06~1_-+-W-rit-e-G-a-te_~~T-P-A~Bt1J-D-r-'v-er-..JJ~--'--~--~I
Dl0Red
~
D I 3 Wh i tt-
u
dc sync
(+)
E
...
E
~
:>E
'+ Std data'
fl!
Portion of 1 Record
Continuous - free running
20 ms/cm
10 lis/em
'+ Std clock' and '+ std data' signals are not always
present at all locations shown due to the scope sync,
Note: Use X10 probe for all displays.
Int (+) dc
Planar socket B - cross connector 002 Pin
1p.s/di>l
See above
0.5 V/div
Sync trig
Sync point
Sweep speed
Probe point
Vert amp
'+ Std data'
2
'+4F clock'
In planar socket B
cross connector for
VFO card,
..
Disk
0.,
Cable
Dill< FC ConI X
TPIS
TPl
.. Access 0
CO2
,-""
DOl
• Acceu 2
004
TP4
TP6
.. Access 3
005
Ph~seO
lA
A
2
010
MPU
811
803
B02
Red
TP20
004
TP19
002 Block
Pbase3
(Block I
~
Mop'
I
+ Inde. Pulse
TP2
____________
....I!~LL..I~~~~He.d
LOKI rognet
~----
D05 Black
velioWBOh~E~
__
MPU
B09~ Photo.ra
Black
Vellow
H----=-~~
Head Load
Vellow
TP16
TPB
Index
Amptifier
B04
TP22
Drtvet'
+50 Vdc::::AA:
.{l
013
'v
~
B05 Blue
TPI
-~-sv-~
St'PperMotQr..
Stepper Motor,
Yellow
~{vellOWI
• Head Engogo TP10
~
v.
TP21
(Red'
.. 24 Vdc
810
003
Whole
LQ . . . . ,
LQ . . . .
A
1
TP18
{Whitel
1-;;;;;;u,L.J- --
L£lr--
Interlock Switch •
804
-
802
806
, 1101
E....
• Erase Gate
TP24
-Write 0.1.
+ Low Current
+WriuGate
TP9
TP1I
TP12
W,,'e [
Onver
Pte-amp
.'ferentllito
......
'1 21 ~ ·1
, ,
11
;r
DIM DII2 IIOJ .,2 013 0'0
I
I
I
+SI-l
BOB
I
D07HI---'':''::::''::::':::'''''''''>-l
L.::=:J---r-:;:~
WrIte
50100'
012 Black
CE Tnt Poirns TP13 ond TP14
20<400 mY loll D's'
10-300 mY loll 1'$\
I
.................... ca..n--.,--.J
VFO CIrd Soc:bt B
B021-1-=--!!W'~ite~DO!!.!!.,._.:..:..::::::.......j
009
.~-,..,,"- .~- ~
Amphfler
r _J
Re•• !W",• • ~
He. .
l
I
TP14
LIne
012BIKk
I I
Om/ll!!'
1 This diagram shows how +5 Vdc is supplied to
disk 2 only. Disk 1 gets +5 Vdc via a direct
wire from power supply terminal TP4 to di sk
FCcard B03.
CE Test Points TPM ..... TPA5
Line 1
20-400 mY loll D's)
Planar B
D04 002 003 B12 013 010
I
I
+StdDeto-.J
I
+ Sid Clock--.J
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
+4F C{ock-- __ ...J
+4FPhase2------J
+YFQD.\aSvnc------J
+ 19n000e Window High Ga.n - - - -
VFO Card Socket B
I
I
I
.J
10-300 mY 10111',)
1 This diagram shows how +5 Vdc is supplied to
disk 2 only, Disk 1 gets +5 Vdc via a direct
wire from power supply terminal TP4 to disk
FC card 803,
Disk FC Card X
Disk FC card Y
T7~;;3
!O:O 0::
0::
0 0
' ' ' ,
I
t~ TP,3--ru: 0 0:
:
I
TPl1 oe..JTP12
: c:::J
TP}2:0
I
I
TPlo'
I
--_
I
I
, 0
.\
.
[J
00 'b. Tr
, c::::J
l
T191_.
I
I
I
:
4TP7!
6
\
'..
hp21
JTP20
10
I
I
T~;
I
I
TP9
Q
1;P2
I
I
,I
14
TP1B
cJ 0
.6TP170
(TP5
I. I
,
_ .... TP1SI__ !._-4
TP3 .... -
TP4
TP16
'+ Index'
The two pulses show the
disk speed time period;
should be approximately
167 ms.
The signal is always
present with the diskette
in the drive, the cover
closed, and the power on.
Sync trig
Sweep speed
Vert amp
Probe point
Int (+) dc
20 ms/div
02. V/div
Card X, TP2
{ Card Y, TPB14
The index pulse duration
is approximately 5 ms.
'+ File data'
Clock pulses are always
present when the machine
has power on.
Data pulses are present
when the disk drive is
reading a track on the
disk.
Sync trig
Sweep speed
Vert amp
Probe point
Int (+) dc
0.5 lis/div
0.2 V/div
Card X, TP3
{ Card Y, TPB12
CE
mode and display IDs
were used for this picture
(see Chapter 8).
~1~:;;~~:~~:,
- sco\5e trtggering
Alonger time basewill
show a '+ file data'
envelope but no
individual clock
or data pulses.
.
I
' - - - - - - - - - 4 liS - - - - - - - - '
Note: Use X 10 probe for all displays.
3742 ML
III
11-15
11-16
Disk Fe card X
TP8 - Photo transistor
TPZ -'+ lodex'
j
I;'
:
;
I;:
I
I
I
"
i
The signal is always present with
. the d~kette in the drive, the cover
closed, and the power on~
The two-pul-ses show the disk
speed time period; shouEd be
approximatety 161 ms.
Sync trig
Sync point
Sweep speed
Probe point
Verramp-
Int (+) de
TP2
20 ms!div
See- trace drawing
O~2 V/div
Sync trig
Sync point
Sweep speed
Probe point
Int (+) dc
TP814
20 ms/div
See trace drawing
0.2 V/div for TPB14
{ 0.5 V /div for TP85
Sync scope Int (+~ on '+ Index'
to took crt the complete
phototransrster.
Chopped sweeps
Disk Fe Card X
Disk FC Card Y
TP~40
f TP23
:0::00':
'.1
0:•
,I
•1
I
I
I
I
,
I
•
II
o <>,
I
I
TPl
i
. •: c::J
TPll <. -
: c::J
· 0
I
[=:::J
T;P2
r;-l
4-J
'DO
TP22 :
0 0,:
'I
_
TPlo'
l
10
I
1
TP8;
1
,
I.
I'
t
qTP9 •1
'0
1
.. --'I - I
TP13
..JTP12::
hp21
I TP20
T19 J_
-i-·P18
I
I
TPe-4TP7 t
(J 0
T;14:
0
\
{TP5
I
:
HP17
TPJ,,---..ATP4TP1SJ-- - - -~P16
lb.
b
- D~
~~~B, °,2~J""
o
. 0 0 . 0 0 0 . 0 0 • • • • 00.00.000.000 • • 0 . .
B~w
i oo.ooooi ' 0 oof[ge
A Row
oo~ ~o o~o'o, .~,
0
' - -_ _ _ _ _ _-.J
L ___
-.-------J~
TPAt
Note: Use X10 probe for all displays.
Disk Fe card Y
TPB14 - '+ Index'
TPB5 - Phototransistor
The signal is always present
with the diskette in the
drive, the cover closed,
and the power on.
Vert amp
The two pulses show the disk
speed time period; should be
approximately 167 ms.
Sync scope Int (+) on"+
index pulse' to look at the
complete phototransister.
Ch~pped
sweeps
iiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiii
;::;
ii
iiiiiiiiii
~
+·Write
gate
II:
Write
data
II
Ii
i
I
I
..,...
III ,....
l1""li
II
I
1'1
+ Erase
gate
+ Erase
current
!!!!!
----+I
,..
I
I
I
Sync for these pictures in Int (+)
with rise of '+ write gate'.
Pictures taken in enter mode
(diskette in the machine) while
holding down REP with
REC ADV,
I
•
Sync trig
Sweep speed
Vert amp
Sync point
+Write gate
+ Write gate
+ Write
gate
Int (+) dc
.5 ms/div
0.2 V/div
{ Card X, TP12
Card Y, TPA8
Probe point
Write data
Particularly note that the 'write
data' signal can end either plus
or ground, depending on the
transition in progress at the end
of 'write gate',
{Card X, TP9
Card Y, TPA6
{
{
+Erase gate
+Erase current
Set up as above except:
Sweep speed
This picture is a different time
scale to show more clearly the
trun-on and trun-off lag of '+
erase gate' and 'erase current' with
respect to '+ write gate' and 'write
data.'
Card X, 604
Card Y, TPA7
Card X, TP24
Card Y, None
1 ms/div
Write
data
+ Erase
gate
:.=~.:;...:~~===::;:::::::=~.
+ Erase
current
0, .. 10.
r-____
r-_ _ _ _ _.....::.;Oosk=...:..F.::.C.::c..::.:d:...:X:.-._ _ _ _ _ ~:~~.
007
002
.....-.-:...~'uc:!'\\ ~
• AI ••'" 1
003
______
.;......;o;:::·.::.:F!:.;C.I:.d~~y
0.,.
!:::
__~-I-0~O'.L3_ _~
. • TP~ _ _L!B!!!02L...""""""'~,,,,",
004
[)04
005
DO;
RoO
004
002 81.1'10.
"'0
DIO
""
"03
MPU
MPU
013
804
A02
"06I-t-'.'-==""+-~~
Line 1
PI_ 8
D04 CO2 D03 812 bl3 010
I
I
I
I
I
I
• SId Dol. _..J
I
+ SId CIock--.J
I
I
+ 4F Clock - - - - ...J
I
I
I
I
I
I
+4FPho .. 1 - - - - - - J
I
+VFODtI.Sync------.J
+ Itno- -
2
C';J(
f - - - --(
r~
<>
~~
C\
(."(
c·
3
I - - - --'
5
~-----
D12
D13
-
Circuit Ground
D06
D07
D08
+12 volts dc
B08
B09
-
L
T
~
"'>-,
~
r- T
(12,000 volts)
-
,+,
___ .J
..L.
I
I
I
L. - ~
<.'" Feed Back
- -' (oscillator)
400 volts dc
I
L. -
-
h
-
6
'
I
.
7
[
Brightness
Control
8
400 volts dc
9
I
;
11
O1aracter Yoke
II
B05-
ggrnr9.!. '-
/
_----_I
6.3 volts de
f-~m..el!.!!e2:..'
=
B12
:
1~
:
~
*"
Yoke
•
17
Video
~~:e
r-----------------------+J
Heater +6.3 volts dc
18
4
+
+
+
-
5
-
+
-
+
+
+
Polarity is (-) for an
active signal.
Maximum Deflection
Station
1
1
2
3
CRT
4
StatiOn\ 5
2
~6
J
________~~________- J
Center of CRT face
f- _ _ _ _ _
Vertical Inputs B13
1 2
• B02
3
Vd- -D - I eo
ot
B07 _
-
-
'0000
I
~-~r.~-:-~-----+~~I~ ~
Video
-
Ho!onta
~
~
14
+
Note:
+~12~vO_I_ts_d_c~~~ ~~~;=~~\~~lJr~gave
(wiggle
Character Yoke
characterr_1_2
____
____
sweep)
13
Wiggle Sweep Pulses
Wiggle Control
-
-
Horizontal
Master
Brightness
Control
Po ten tiome ter
10
.-t----+------/,
+
2
3
1
6
II
I
I
L_ --I--:t--I--
~
Vertical Input Lines
(Signal Polarity)
PinB04
Pin 803
Pin 802
I
~--I_:r
f - - - -,
-
High Voltage
Ground
- .-
.r.>
4
II
CRT Line
Number and
Sequence
High Voltage Anode Lead
1
Vertical Line
~C2".E"~ ~.
• B03 B04
Hori zontal
r-A_____V_e_ft_ic_a_I_D_e_fl_ec_t_io_n__________----'
t-B_____
H_o_fi_zo_n_t_a_1_D_ef_le_c_ti_o_n__________________~
Horizontal Input
B10 Deflection
C
Horizontal Deflection
Control
r---..,..----------------------------------J.~a,.J
D09 _ I - - - - - -12volt·s-d-c----~D10
t-D
_____+_1_2_v_o_lts__
dc________________________-J.~
iii
+ 12 vol ts dc
----D02-
E
+12 volts dc
F
+12 volts dc
B l u - - - -.....
PIN and EC (back side)
I ' I I I I I I I II I
... 1 LJ LJ L.J LJ L..I
Q"0'
Display PC board
~
ABCDEF
€-c:::J-~PROBE POINT
.,,'
---.'
2'
BR
GRAY
BLK
CJ W/BR
BR
EPins
1
B
BR
18 .".
D
2
I
13
Character Yoke
Brightness Control
Converter
-
3742ML
12-5
12-6
Note: Use X10 Probe for all displays.
Video (CRT dot input)
Sync trig
Int (..,..) dc
. Sync point/
None
Sweep Speed
0.5msldiv
Connector 807
Probe point
0.5V/div
Video (dot amplifier)
Sync trig
Int (-) dc
Sync point
None
. Sweep speed
0.5 ms/div
Probe point
CRT PC board Pin 17
Vert amp
2V /div
intensity control. Lowestposition with
maximum intensity.
I
Wiggle Control
Sync trig
Sync point
Sweep speed
PrQlJe point
Vert amp
I
!
r~
•
D
:-j
Int (-) dc
None
JlAs/div
Connector 805
0.5V/div
I
,==
~=
0
"
0
r:;
~
!11
l..'
I
...I ~~
I
I
•
.
..
Sync trig
Sync point
Sweep speed· .
... ..
Int (+) de
None
llAs/div
CRT PC board Pin 13
1V/div .
Ii II
I!!!!
II
II
II-
II
11.-
II
II
==11
==
::::::l
-===
c::
1=
!!!
11::::1
....
-
iiii
Vertical Input 1
Ext (+) dc
Sync trig
Con nectar 804
Sync point
5 ms/div
Sweep speed
Connector 802
Probe point
.
0.5V/div
.
I
- iii
;;;;;;
!!!!!!!!!
II
==
JI
Ii:
-
C :::II
::::::J I : ::::::I
,
Circuit Board
=
I.-...-.
E;;
.~
iii
•
Pins
Converter
High
Voltage
Oscillator
Vertical Input 2
Sync trig
Sync point
Sweep speed
Probe point
Vert amp
:>- - - , - -ll- T .L
,+,
.:>
~~
oc>
T...
It>-,
...L.
-
High Voltage Anode Lead
(12,000 volts)
___ ..JI
~ __ I_~
Ext (+) dc
Connector B04
5 ms/div
Can nectar B03
0.5V/div
II
~_'\
...
5
I
I
I
II
~_L.':..J __.t-_~ltSdC
Feed Back
e--- --' (oscillator!
I
•
L_ - -
-h
I
012
f------ 6
'
013 ---+-r------~~--------------------~
006007
008
•
g
I
400 volts de
III
....---11
Horizontal
Master
Brightness
Control
Potentiometer
11
\
character 12
+12 volts dc
t----C~h~a==:-ra~c=te~r7.Y;::o-;-ke-------------4-----\---....,
(wiggle
Vertical Input 3
Ext (+) dc
Sync trig
Sync point
Connector B04
Sweep speed
5 ms/div
Connector B04
Probe point
0.5V/div
sweep)
II
I
I
B07 _
r-
C:::I
-
~
- ...
c:;;;
::::I
~.l
JJ
if
Vertical
Yoke
V;d-;oDcrt -t-1_7___V:-i;...de_-o____________~
~~m21~e.!..'
=
18
j
r
16
Heater +6.3 volts de
•
CRT
~
1-----Vertical Line I-A
____V_e_r_ti_ca_1_D_ef_le_c_ti_on__________-.J
-I-
~n..!.'~
JQ
Horizontal r-B____H_o_r_iz_on_t_al_D_e_f_le_ct_io_n________________+"
Deflection
Control
002---
C
Horizontal Deflection
0
+12voltsdc
E
+12 volts de
F
+12 volts dc
iii t-----------------------------------+--I-l
~~~-~-----
Ie :::I
:
I~
15
B10 -
-
Wiggle Sweep Pulses
II
Horizontal
Qp~~-~1-4-------------------r~~=;i~~~~~~~~
B05 -
B 12
B13
B02
03
BB 04
Vertical Deflection
-Sync trig
(Ext (+) dc
Sync point
Connector B04
Sweep speed
5 ms/div
Probe point
CRT PC board
Pin A
0.5V/div
13
II
Character Yoke
r---------------------------------~
** Line 6 is top line of this pattern.
Line 1 is bottom.
Note: Large voltage spikes may appear at
start of each step.
3742 ML
12-7
12-8
u,
II
iMiiiiii
-+-1'1
t
==-
...
I,
~
•
HI
'.
II
I
++-+
II I
rI
III
Horizontal Input
Sync trig
Sync point
Sweep speed
Probe point
Vert amp
(Return)
Int (+) dc
None
0.5 ms/div
Connector B10
0.5V/div
Circuit Board
Converter
Pins
High
Voltage
Oscillator
1
r-T
t:>
1.
,+,- @
..>_, -: ___ J
~>--
~--
2
~~
01
~--(
I
c;~
3
<_....
c.... ':.~ __ I -
---'
I
4
Horizontal Deflection
Sync trig
Ext (+) de
Sync point
Connector B10
Sweep speed
0.5 ms/div
Probe point
CRT PC board
Test Point B
Vert amp
0.5V/div
006
007
008
-
B05-
-
~ ,~
~
~
~I
~
-a - ~
~
~!4
••
~
i~
l!
~
....L..
:r
I
I
I
I
13
L_L.::.J __ ,t-_~ltsdc
Feed Back
~6 --' (oscillator)
I
•
L_ - -
-h
'
I
7
I
8
400 volts dc
Brightness
9
Control
1 - - - - - - - - - , ..---
I
1m
D
Horizontal
10
Brightness
Control
11
Potentiometer
~~
Master
L -_
_ _ _dc
____________
character,12 _ +12 _
volts
(wiggle
Character Yoke
sweep)
13
Wiggle Sweep Pulses
II
II
Y k
II
H'
t
~~C_h_a_ra~_c:t\e_,rU'~'\lO J0SI::~ona
e
II
~lJ.!.r2.!. -
14
rl
I
:
f? ""
:
Yoke
B07 _
B12
B13
B02
B03
B04
009
010
002
rJ~
g
High Voltage Anode Lead
(12.000 volts)
CRT
r-----+-:-:--------------~H_~I ~ ~
B10
~I
~ I
5
--l
f------
012
013
B08
B09
Horizontal Deflection
Sync trig
Ext (+) dc
Sync point
Connector Bl0
Sweep speed
0.5 ms/div
Probe point
CRT PC board
Test Point C
Vert amp
0.5V/div
~-~
III
UI
- ,-
--
-
Converter Oscillator
Sync trig
Int (+) dc
Sync point
None
Sweep speed
20ps/div
Probe point
CRT PC board Pin 1
Vert amp
1V/div
Video-Dot
Amplifier
-~1-7---V;..;i.:...de-o------------+___'
II
~-----
18
Heater +6.3 volts dc
-.----Vertical Line
A
Vertical Deflection
m
-----=Horizontal
Control
Deflection
Control
II
1------
B
Horizontal Deflection
C
Horizontal Deflection
0
+12 volts dc
E
+12 volts dc
F
+12 volts dc
iii
KEYBOARD THEORY
The keyboard provides operator interface to the
MPU. Keyboard interface is provided by way of
toggle switches and key modules. Toggle switches
control Auto Dup/Skip, Auto Record Advance,
Program Numeric Shift, and either Katakana
shift or speed select.
Key Modules
Each keyboard contains up to 64 key modules
(buttons) mounted into an all keys assembly.
Each key module contains a flyplate that normally
rests on two etched pads on the keyboard circuit
board. When the key is pressed, the fly plate moves
away from the circuit board. Releasing the key returns the flyplate to its normal position. The
keyboard circuit board contains logic to perform
the following functions.
Toggle Switches
The toggle switches are mounted on a bracket
which is attached to the bottom of the keyboard.
The switches indicate the following.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Audio feedback control.
Key detecti on and decode con tro I.
Character storage control.
Keyboard character transfer control.
Alpha and numeric shift functions.
Character repeat function.
AUTO DUP/SKIP (ADS)
When the switch is on and the field is a programmed duplicate field, the MPU automatically
duplicates (enters) data from the corresponding
field of the previous record into the current record. When the switch is off, it signals the MPU that
all fields are manual fields.
AUTO REC ADV (ARA)
This signals the MPU that, when a complete
record is entered, the MPU can automatically
store the record on disk, and prepare for the
next record entry.
PROG NUM SHIFT (PNS)
In the ALL CHAR position, under program control, the switch indicates to the MPU that all
the character keys are active. In the NUMBERS
ONLY position, the switch indicates to the MPU
that only the characters 0-9, dash, space and plus
are valid. When the machine is in alpha shift,
all characters are active regardless of the position
of the switch.
Audio Feedback Control (Clicker)
This device is an electromechanical device which
causes a click to be emitted each time a key code
enters the character buffer.
An MPU detected error, such as an operator error
or a keyboard overrun error activates the error
line between the keyboard and the MPU. This
error line prevents the clicker operation. The
RESET key is used to reset the error. The R ESET key is the only key that will give a click
every time it is pressed, even though there is an
error.
A busy tone, or buzz, signifies that the MPU is busy
and cannot accept characters from the keyboard.
The MPU becomes momentarily busy each time a
record is written on disk. A busy signal (50-Hz
square wave) is placed on the interface line from
the MPU to the keyboard each time the MPU
wishes to signal the operator that it is busy. When
the busy tone stops, the MPU is no longer busy.
KATAKANA SHIFT (KSW)
When this switch is ON, the station is placed in
the KATAKANA SH IFT state for all keying. If
the station is under program control, this switch
will override other programmed shifts. ALPHA
SHIFT, NUM SHIFT, and KANA SYMB will
each override the KATAKANA SHIFT switch.
3742 ML
13-1
13-2
B2
fi
LLCHAA
ON
U.
NUMBEAS'ft OFF
ONLY
AUTO DUP
SKIP
Al!TO AEC
ADV'
PAOG NUM
SHIFT
KATAKANA
SHIFT
SPEED
SELECT
55-
PNS-4
ADS ...
ARA~
BIT 2.
BIT4.
BIT 6 •
+5 Vdc •
OSC' •
paR'
10.8 CPS.
02 ......
,
-
• +3.5.... Vdc __ARAAOS
PNS
Cable to MPU-P or R
BIT 1
..........
BIT 3 \
'I -5 Vdc \
..........
BIT 7
• Ground \
R Time
Busy Tone \
Keyboard Data Gate Out
• Katakana Shift Bit
• BIT 5
~r
,--L
\
\-
.
\
\
\
\
\
\
\
\
Load Input
\
\
\
\
\
\
\
\
32 (scan cou nter)
Key Module
\
\
\
\
\
\
\
PNS
Keyboard Cable
Audio Feedback Device
/
Keyboard Printed Circuit Board
Bottom Cover Assembly
This page intentionally left blank.
3742 ML
1m
13-3
13-4
Key Detection and Decode Control
The unique design of the keyboard is based upon
key detection through capacitive coupling. The
detection of a pressed key (flyplate up) is the
same for all keys on the keyboard. An address is
developed by a scan counter and is used to sample
each key position one at a time until all 64 positions have been sampled. This sampling process
takes place continuously as long as power is on.
The sampling of the 64 key positions takes 16 ms.
The keyboard circuitry, therefore, takes 250 fJ.S
to process each key position.
The above addressing and sampling schemes are
accomplished in the following manner. The display sends oscillator pulses via the MPU at the
rate of 140.6 kHz/s, to the keyboard. This signal
is fed to a key cycle control circuit.' The key cycle
control circuit generates a load input pulse every
250 fJ.sec which is used to develop matrix drive
pulses and to advance a scan counter.
The 6-bit position binary scan counter counts from
00 to 63 continuously. At any given point in time,
the contents of this counter is the address of the
key pad that the keyboard circuitry is probing. If
the flyplate is in the up position, the contents of
the scan counter is encoded to be sent to the MPU.
The first four bit positions of the scan counter,
positions 1, 2, 4, and 8, are sent to a 4 to 16bit encode driver. Only one of the 16 output
lines of the encode driver will be active at a
time. Each of the 16 output lines is ANDed
with matrix drive pulses and then sent to
four etched key pads.
Matrix drive pulses are capacitively coupled
through each key pad to AND gates of the appropriate sense amplifiers as long as the key
module flyplate is in the down position.
The scan counter positions 16 and 32 are sent to
a circuit which encodes the two bit lines into
four select lines. The select lines are ANDed with
the capacitively coupled matrix drive lines from
the key pads.
Sense amplifiers produce a sense amplifier closed
pulse when the followi ng conditions are satisfied:
1.
A sense amplifier is selected by active
select line.
2.
A matrix drive pulse is not present. This
means the associated flyplate is more than
0.006" above its etched pad.
This combination of matrix drive pulses and
select line pulses, allows the keyboard circuitry
to sample each of the 64 key positions one at
a time.
Shift Key Functions
The shift keys are processed somewhat differently than the rest of the keys on the keyboard.
However, detection of these keys being pressed
is exactly the same as all other keys. The shift
keys are used only to modify the character code
that is sent to the MPU. Each time a shift key is
pressed, the appropriate shift bit latch is set on. It
will remain on for 16 ms (one keyboard cycle).
At the end of this cycle, the shift latches are reset.
If the key is still pressed at the start of the next
cycle, the shift latch is again turned on. If a character key is pressed while the shift latch is on, the
shift bit and the appropriate character codes are
transferred to the keyboard character buffer. Any
shift key can override a programmed shift function in the MPU.
Anytime the station is in Katakana shift (programmed for Katakana shift, the KA TAKANA
SH I FT switch ON, or the KANA SH I FT key
pressed), the Katakana shift can be overridden
with ALPHA SHIFT, NUM SHIFT, or KANA
SYMB. The overriding shift key will define the
character or function that will be entered into
the station when a character key or function key
is pressed.
When the station is in Katakana shift, the
following function keys require that ALPHA
SHIFT or NUM SHIFT be used with that key to
activate the function, otherwise the corresponding Katakana character will be entered into the
station:
HEX, FLO COR, DUP, CHAR ADV, REC
ADV. FLO ADV, SEL PRG, SKIP, RT ADJ,
and CHR BKS.
Character Repeat Function
This function provides the operator with a quick
method of repetively entering the same character.
Pressing REP is sensed the same as all other keys.
However, the bit code for REP is never sent to
the MPU.
Using this function, key codes can be sent to
the keyboard character buffer at a 10.8 character per second rate.
Normally, the three character compare register
would inhibit a character from being transferred
to the keyboard character buffer more than once
unless the key is released and pressed again.
With the repeat function, the compare register
is reset at the 1 0.8-Hz rate allowing the key code
to be accepted the next time it is scanned.
Tt,e MPU provides the 1 0.8-Hz square wave signal
to the keyboard where it is used only with the
repeat function. The repeat key latch is set on
when the keyboard circuitry detects that REP
is pressed and when the 10.8-Hz square wave is
at its most positive level. This latch resets the
scan counter and holds the scan counter at 0
with a load input pulse. The keyboard is,
therefore, inactive while this latch is on. When
the 1 D.8-Hz signal changes to its negative level,
the repeat key latch is reset and the three character compare register is reset. The scan counter
resumes normal operation at the occurrence
of the next load input pulse.
During the negative level of the 10.8-Hz
signal, the repeat key latch cannot be set on,
and the scan counter can complete approximately
three complete keyboard scan cycles. Therefore,
during this time, codes for pressed keys can be
sent to the keyboard character register buffer one
at a time under normal control of the three character compare register.
When the lD.8-Hz signal returns to its most positive level, the repeat key latch is set on and the
function repeats. The code for any key, held
down in conjunction with REP, will therefore
be sent to the MPU at a 10.8 character per second
rate.
Binary
Scan
Counter
4 to 16-Bit
Encode
4 Key Pads/Drive Line
Load
Input
2
2
(Not) Matrix Drive
4
3
8
4
16
5
Sense
Amp
Sense
Amp
Closed
1
250l1s
Osc
Key
Cycle
Control
2
32
3
4
ss
Matrix Drive
2
3
4
Select
Lines
3742 ML
13-5
13-6
Character Storage Control
Keyboard Character Transfer Control
A three-character compare register is used to
prevent multiple entries by a single key being
pressed. If a key is pressed and held, th is compare
register blocks the same key code from being
sent to the character buffer more than one time.
Blocking continues until the character is erased
from the compare register. Erasing is accomplished by releasing the keyboard key.
The keyboard character buffer is a temporary
storage device. It contains eight bit positions of
storage. Bit positions 128 and 64 are alpha and
numeric shift bits respectively and bit positions
1,2,4,8, 16, qnd 32 are the codes associated with
all other keys.
When the MPU processes the previous character,
the bit lines to the keyboard will go to a positive
state. Now the keyboard activates an interface
line to the MPU called data gate out and gates
the contents in the keYboard character buffer
to the MPU keyboard register by changing one
or more bit lines to a negative level. The MPU
then processes this character and clears the content of the MPU keyboard register. All bit lines
will then be at a positive level and the next char·
acter transfer can take place.
The keyboard circuitry stores a character in its
character buffer. It then turns on the buffer
control latch and looks at all bit lines to the MPU
to see if the MPU keyboard register is empty. If
anyone of these bit lines is at a negative level
(active bit) the character stored in the character
buffer does not get transferred to the MPU. The
bit lines can be controlled by either the MPU or
the keyboard.
As the name implies, the three-character compare
register can store up to three characters. Therefore, three keys could be pressed and held. The
first complete keyboard scan made on these keys
would result in sending each of the characters
to the character buffer one at a ti me. A fOllrth
character cannot be sent to the character buffer
until at least one of the three previously pressed
keys has been released.
SC,lfl CO""T
K"yhodrd
32
LOdd Input
(T"st
\
Anytime the MPU keyboard register is reset to
zero (during -R time) the Bus Empty gate allows
the buffer control to issue a keyboard data gate
out signal, which in turn allows data in the character buffer to be transferred to the MPU keyboard
register. (Data transfer is inhibited during -R
time.) If a new data key is sensed (one that is not
stored in the three character compare register)
before the character buffer contents has been
transferred, a keyboard overrun error occurs.
COfl,wctOI
Mf'LJ
PUIS4! (Test Po",t)
r----,
-Katakana * *
. Shift Bit
-B'T 2
-Bit 3
-B,t 4
-Bit 5
-BIT 6
-Bit 7
t
K"yhOdflj
-------+-----1
Ddtd G"t!'
Out
Aud,o
Alpha
Fe,'dhdck
Sh'fT
DpvlcP
Co"
"Kana
Shift
+ Bu\y
Repeat
T(Hlf'
Error
Key
Repeat
Keys
---~---I
------
r;---r----------------------------------~
Control
Latch
108 HI
-R11"'"
• ON
t---~.- OF F
--_.--
, . Katakana
Shift Switch
See chart on Page 13-7
for cable pins.
R
'One of the four
Sense Amps
+8.5 V
KI'yl)(J"III
Hpql\h"
-Bit 0
-Bit 1
KEYBOARD CABLE PIN DEFINITIONS
B02
SPEED SELECT
Speed Select installed on 3741 Model 2, World Trade only. This line signals the MPU
that the attached Binary Synchronous Channel Adapter (BSCA) is running at
1200 bits per second (switch on) or 600 bits per second (switch off).
B03
PROG NUM SHIFT
Switch
B04
AUTO/DUP/SKIP
Switch
B05
AUTO REC ADV
Switch
B06
B07
BOS
B09
Bl0
Bl1
-Bit 2
-Bit 4
-Bit 6
+5 Vdc
+5V 7fJ.s oscillator
-Power on reset .
(POR)
In the ALL CHAR position, the switch, under program control, indicates to the MPU
that all the character keys are active. In the NUMB E RS ON LY position the switch
indicates to the MPU that only the characters 0 through 9, dash, space, and plus are
valid. But when the machine is in alpha shift, all characters are active regardless of
the position of the switch.
When on for duplicate fields, this switch, under program control, signals the MPU
to automatically dupl icate (enter) data from the corresponding field or positions of
the previous record into the current record. When the switch is off, it signals the
MPU all fields are manual fields.
Signals the MPU that, when a complete record is entered, the MPU can automatically
store the record on the disk, and prepare for the next record entry.
Data line to MPU.
Data line to MPU.
Data line to MPU.
Power from MPU to keyboard 2; from power supply TP4 for keyboard 1.
Develops keyboard scan pulses and keyboard timing pulses.
B12
B13
002
003
D04
D05
006
D07
008
009
010
10.S Hz
-Error
-Bit 0 (Alpha Shift)
+S.5 Vdc
-Bit 1 (Num Shift)
-Bit 3
-5 Vdc
-Bit 7
Ground
-R time
+Busy tone
011 +Kbd data gate out
012 -Katakana shift bit
013 -Bit 5
.
~~_r.
-~
Down level for 550ms. Wait 5 seconds between power down and power up. This 5
seconds allows the capacitor in the power on circuit to discharge.
Used with REP key.
Inh ibits audio feedback device (clicker).
Data line to MPU.
Power from MPU.
Data line to MPU.
Data line to MPU.
Power from MPU.
Data line to MPU.
MPU is busy, therefore, cannot accept a character from the keyboard.
Indicates to operator the MPU is busy.
Gates data which is on the data lines to the MPU.
Oata line to MPU.
Data line to MPU.
3742 ML
13-7
13-8
Keyboard Operation
B
7 jJS Osc Pulses
I
4 x 16 Decode
KBD Clock (250,us
character time)
Probe
Point
Matrix Drive Pulse
No
Key Pads (four
at a time)
Yes
Advance Scan
Counter
Sense Amp
Reset the scan
cou nter to 00
Reset alpha and
numeric bit
latches
/ " Probe Point
Yes
Reset alpha and
numeric bit latches
when scan counter
goes to zero.
Indicates a Key
is pressed
Yes
Reset the Repeat
Key FL
Erase this character
from the threecharacter compare
register
Reset the three
character compare
to blank
\
A
Store the character
in the three character compare
register
produced the sense
amp closed pulse
Yes
Yes
Set alpha shift
or num shift
bit latches
No
Reset the character
buffer full F L
No
Keyboard sends
'Data Gate' signal
to MPU and gates
the contents of the
character buffer to
the MPU-keyboard
register
Yes
Activate the KBD
error line to the
MPU(KBD
overrun)
Key other than
ALPHA SHIFT
NUM SHIFT
REP
Transfer the scan
cou nter to the
character buffer.
Energize the
clicker.
Set buffer full F L
Scan for
next key
pressed
Process
character
to MPU
Reset the character
buffer full latch
MPU processes and'
clears contents of
the MPU-keyboard
register
Bus to MPU is now
empty
No
No
No
Block the character
from entering the
character buffer
Block the gati ng of
the character buffer
to the MPU
No
Yes
B
3742 Ml
13-9
13-10
Keyboard I nterface Decode
Objective: Decode the character 7/M and transfer
it across the data lines to the MPU.
Layout for
Proof Keyboard
Key Codes
N o S h l f t _ 02
NurnShift_ 42
Alpha Shift _
82
01
03
OE
41
43
4E
81
83
8E
07
47
87
06
46
86
08
48
09
49.
20
60
B8
89
AD
20
60
AO
4A
2C
6C
8A
AC
OA
oc
00
20
fiO
4C
8C
4D
1\0
8D
[J
:)1
NoShift_2E
NumShilt_SE
Alpha S h i h _ AE
38
30
78
88
70
80
2A
6A
10
50
AA
90
3E
7E
BE
12
52
92
11
61
91
21
61
Al
13
53
93
22
23
14
lD
35
62
A2
63
54
94
50
90
75
E!l
A3
:>3
liT
;>;>
67
63
<\1
A]
<\3
CI!t]
No Shih - - - - - . . 36
Num Shltr
,
"'~ ~,h
76
[~~~]
No Shift --------i,.~ 18
Num Shift
,. 58
AI ph. Shift
,. 98
);
JS
~9
Ii:
68
~9
rt1R:f:1D
r--
Alternate Keyboard Layout for Katakana Machines.
The 7/M key is pressed.
-~
There is a scan number associated wi1h each key_
The scan number for 1he M key is 39 (hex 27)_ , -
BEll
'.1'
.,,'
III
' • .'
II
1\1
'I'
.--~~'~
~~~~
....
..
...
--
---'-'--
,.
'.
E1lO.;.~-====:
''''''~
'"
..
f,"
A
B
'.'
j,
'--,
".
:".
"
::
-
",_.-
:::
'"
:::
'.1.
'.'
'"
,,'
''
___ •_ _ _ _ _ _ _
, . " . , _ ._ _ _ _ • _ _ _ _ _
:1.
.."
,.,
::::
".
~',
".
~:,
,
,.,
'"
~'.',
:;:
At 7/M key scan time. the scan counter contains
1he binary value 39 (bits 32,4, 2, and 1) .
~
"'
M
The character seen on the display during CE
mode is the hex representation of 1he key
address. To convert to hex, the character buffer
code is divided into two segments; the upper
four bits (128. 64.32. and 16) are COIlSidered
one binary number (with weight of 8.4.2. and 1).
The lower four bits are considered a second number.
I
_L
'I
"
C
o
A
C
I
I
The scan counter transfers data bits
32, 4, 2, and 1 to the character buffer
for the 7/M key.
I
I
I
I
o
I
I
I
I
I
-----1--
Alpha
Shift
Bit
Latch
I
I
I
-+
_....J
I
Character
Buffer
A
Numeric
Shift
Bit
Latch
128
Cable to MPU-P
R
Bit Lines
1-----,.-----4
A
A
or
I
64
A
A
o
(002)
1 (004)
2 (B06)
A
16
A
16
3 (005)
A
8
8
A
Load Input-Ir---.....
A
A
A
A
.-
4 (B07)
5 (013)
6 (B08)
A
Katakana
Shift Bit
Latch
A
Scan
Counter
A
I-------t--i
K
A
AN r---~--~
L - _ " ' -___A~
Load Character
7 (007)
These test points are connected to
this connector.
-Katakana Shift Bit (012)
,
I
(Not) R Time
Special Keys
Key
ALPHA
SHIFT
Scan Number
0
Hex Value
00
NUM
SHIFT
4
04
RESET
50
32
REP
(left)
11
OB
REP
(right)
15
OF
KANA
SHIFT
51
33
KANA
SYMB
43
28
For the 7/M key, bit lines 2, 5, 6, and 7
(pins B06, 013, B08, and 007 respectively) should be down (-). Bit lines 0,
1, 3, and 4 (pins 002, 004, 005, and
B07 respectively) should be up (+).
3742 ML
m
13-11
13-12
Keyboard Test Points
•
- - - 32 ('Scan counter')
•
- III II
•
- - - 'Matrix drive'
IIJ
·111.
•
NOTE: Use X10 Probe for all displays.
"
r."!
n
, 11111
- - - 'SA closed'
•
•
Cable to MPU-P or R
Scan Counter
Time
ALPHA SHIFT
key held down.
0
Int (-) de
32 (Scan counter)
50,us/div
See above
O.5V/div
Sync ·trig
Sync poi nt
Sweep speed
Probe point
Vertical amp
:
-
III
Load Input
- - - 32 ('Scan counter')
•
-.-
-~ -=~
!L
-~.
'III
•
===
:I
- I11III:;
-
I1I11
I
=====
Scan Counter
Time
FUNCT SEL
lower key held
down
- - - 'Matrix drive'
I
11111
- - - 'SA closed'
•
Sync trig
Sync point
Sweep speed
Probe point
Vertical amp
Int (-) de
32 (Scan counter)
50,us/div
See above
O.5V/div
32 (scan counter)
Scan
Counter Time
Transitions at 0, 32, 48
and O. 0 transition used
for INT SYNC (-).
A-m :!.
o
F key held down.
ALPHA SHIFT
key held down.
63
- - 32 ('Scan counter')
o
Sync trig
Sync poi nt
Sweep speed
Probe poi nt
Vertical amp
Int (-) de
32 (Scan counter)
2 ms/div
See above
O.5V/div
Sync trig
Sync point
Sweep speed
Probe point
Vertica I amp
Int (-) de
32 (Scan counter)
200lls/div
See above
O.5V/div
1
- - 'Matrix drive'
- - 'SA closed'
-t-t
[I
I
I
+~
I
,
I
Scan Ctr
Time
+
+
+
t
t
o
I
- - 32 ('Scan counter')
- - - - 'Matrix Drive'
(MTX DR)
ALPHA SHIFT
key held down
'load Input'
(lD INPUT)
'SA Closed'
Same as 4 above
except that sweep
speed'" 50/.ls.
-
3742 ML
13-13
13-14
Keyboard Test Points
Free running signals
(-) sync on either one
(not synchronized)
- - - 009, '-R Time' from MPU
NOTE: Use X10 Probe for all displays
- - - B10, 'Data Key Drive'
7.5 MS osc from display
Cable to MPU-P or R
Int (-) de
None
Sync trig
Sync point
Sweep speed
Probe point
Vert amp
..
-~
::.-
5Ms/div
See above
0.5V/div
Load Input
·1-11 ,;;;;;;;;;;
I
I,
I·
,
•
./
•
lilt II Hold down 'F' key and
'REP' key
••
1"'1"'1""'"
••
"
007, '-Bit 7', (-) INT SYNC
(could be any bit line)
•
32 (scan counter)
...
rj
..." """"
~
II
r.
rY'rI
I
~
Sync trig
Sync point
Sweep speed
Probe point
Vert amp
•
no-- - - - 011, 'Keyboard Data
rj~
Gate Out'
- - 009, '-R Time'
Int (-) de
007 (-bit 7)
10Ms/div
See above
0.5V/div
Keyboard Test Points
D10, '+8usy Tone' - - (+) INT SYNC
Sync trig
Sync point
Sweep speed
Probe point
Vert amp
Int (+) dc
D10 '+busy tone'
10 ms/div
D10 '+busy tone'
0.5V/div
Sync trig
Sync point
Sweep speed
Probe point
Vert amp
int (+) dc
paR power supply PC board
200 ms/div
See above
0.5V/div
With diskette in disk drive
and read/write head not in
track 00, open disk drive
cover.
811, '-Power on Reset' --'-.-
At power supply PC board,
POR (+power on reset).
(+) int sync on POR.
Turn POWE R ON switch 'on'. - -
Sync trig
Sync point
Sweep speed
Probe point
Vert amp
810 'Input Oscillator' --.-
Ext (+) dc
Load input
50ps/div
See above
0.5V/div
0.2V/div
'Load input'
'Matri x drive'
'Input oscillator'
'Load Input'
'Matri x Drive'
3742 ML
13-15
13-16
Keyboard Test Points
- - . 32 (scan counter)
- - 'Mtxdr'
NOTE: Use Xl0 Probe for all displays.
r--,----.-..-.------~---------J
Scan Counter
Time
'FUNCTSEL'---lower held down.
I
!
I
II
i
!
'SA closed'
Cable to MPU-P or R
B12, '10.8 Hz asc',
(+) INT SYNC
Load Input
I
I
j
---
I
'II
I
III
'MTX DR'
I
I
n
I
I
+
i
I
I
I
i
III
I
I
I
ml
III
'Threshold' (THRSHLD)
Int (-) de
32 (Scan counter)
200ps/div
See above
';O.5V/div
Sync trig
Sync point
Sweep speed
Probe point
Vert amp
I
II
_.-
-+-
I
The 'N' held down
with 'REP'
~
'nlm I
- - 007 '-Bit 7'
i
i
II
III
II'
- - 'THRSHLD'
I!
Sync trig
Sync point
Sweep speed
Probe point
Vert amp
•
II
Int (+) dc
B12 (10.8 Hz osc)
10 ms/div
See above
0.5V/div
Or
32 (scan counter)
Keyboard Test Points
I,
•
0
(+) INT SYNC on B12 Test Point - -
"10.8 Hz
asc" (repeat key
II
gate)
!II
'Mtx dr' Shown being started
and stopped by repeat key gate.
'Threshold' - -
007, 'Bit 7' - The 'U', 'B', 'N',
and 'REP' keys held
down simultaneously.
'10.8 Hz asc', B12
(+) int sync
D02 '-Bit 0' (not present)
. II
•
I
•
i
•
t
••
•
r:
:'B
The 'u' held down
with 'REP'
Int (+) de
B12 test point
5 ms/div
See above
0.5V/div
•
UU
•
:""""
D
:II
I.
• • ••
.
.
• =
•
II
•
•
• •• •
• ••
=
-- . .
•
•
•
•
•
••
•
•
~
Matrix Drive _ __
Sync trig
Sync point
Sweep speed
Probe point
Vert amp
I
I.
I
~
007 '-Bit 7' - -
Int (+) de
B12test point
10 ms/div
See above
0.5V/div
I
•
B06 '-Bit2' - -
Sync trig .
Sync point
Sweep speed
Probe point
Vert amp
•
II
-n:J ! It t
.-..:-
I
•
•
!!II!!
-
;11
=
Sync trig
Sync point
Sweep speed
Probe point
Vert amp
Int (-) de
Threshold control
20Ms/div
See above
0.5V /div - 'Threshold control'
0.2V /div - 'Matrix drive'
Sense Amp Closed
Threshold Control
L held down.
3742 Ml
13-17
13-18
This page intentionally left blank.
MPU THEORY
Introduction
Microcontroller
Microcontroller/buffer interface
Keyboard attachment
Disk unit controller
Display unit controller
Data flow
3742 functional characteristics
3742 features
128 record length feature
14-1
14-2
14-2
14-2
14-2
14-2
14-3
14-5
14-7
Introduction
The MPU (Microprocessing Unit) is the control
center of the 3742. The MPU receives data from
the keyboard, controls the displaying of the data
on the display unit, and manages the flow of information to and from the disk units.
The keyboard, display unit, disk unit, and power
supply are external to the MPU. The MPU consists of five functional units in its largest configuration:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Microcontroller
Microcontroller/buffer interface
Keyboard attachment
Disk unit controller
Display unit controller
3742 Ml
14-1
14-2
Microcontroller
II
Memory Card
The microcontroller is a small ROS controlled
processor. The microcontroller supervises the
entire 3742 system and manages the data into and
out of the MPU. The microcontroller contains the
system clock which is the master timing unit of
the MPU. The clock insures correct synchronization of data flow within the MPU.
Microcontroller/Buffer I nterface
Buffer
Data ____
Full Planar
flow
II
I
Previous
I
Hold
1---
Disk unit
controller
mr-;--~----J
' - - - - - - -.....
Display
unit
controller
Clock
II
II
During seek operations, the disk unit controller
sends "seeks" for the nu mber of tracks the microcontroller specifies and automatically verifies
that the proper track is arrived at. If an error
occurs, the microcontroller takes appropriate
steps to get the track desired.
Current
Keyboard
attachment
II
The disk unit controller controls all disk unit
operations. It interacts with the microcontrollerl
buffer interface to manage data transfers between
the disk unit and the buffer. It maintains status
information which can be sampled by the microcontroller. Disk unit operations are initiated
by the microcontroller issuing the disk unit
controller a command (such as read, write, seek
high, seek low). The disk unit controller then
goes into a busy state and controls the sequence
of operations necessary to execute the command.
Upon completion of the command, the disk unit
controller drops the busy status condition. This
condition, along with other appropriate status
conditions, can be sampled by the microcontroller.
I
Clock
control
The keyboard attachment interfaces the keyboard
to the microcontroller. It stores decoded key
stroke information for use by the microcontroller.
Disk Unit Controller
,---
iii
The microcontroller/buffer interface controls the
transfer of data between the buffer (a random
access memory) and the microcontroller, the disk
unit, or the display unit. The transfer of data is
performed upon request of any of these devices.
Keyboard Attachment
r---
Microcontroiler/
buffer
interface
Microcontroler
-- - -, B
Feature
ROS
ROS
unit
I
During read and write operations all resynchronization is controlled automatically by the disk unit
controller. On the 3742 the disk unit controller
manages both disk drives for standard two-station
operation, and when the disk copy feature is used.
Only one disk unit is activated at anyone time.
Display U nit Controller
II
The display unit controller accesses the buffer,
under the control of the microcontroller/buffer
interface. An RDS character generator converts
the character code into the correct bit pattern to
generate video signals which control blanking of
the electron beam~ The blanking and unblanking
of the electron beam forms the 7 x 9 character
matrix on the face of the display unit as the beam
is swept across the CRT. The microcontroller
supplies control signals to the display unit, which
are used by that unit to position the data on the
CRT.
DATA FLOW
Keyboard to Buffer
Keyboard to keyboard attachment
- Keyboard attachment to microcontroller
- Microcontroller to buffer (under control of
the microcontroller/buffer interface)
Write From Buffer to Disk*
Buffer to disk unit controller under control of
microcontroller/buffer i nterfa ce
Disk unit controller to disk unit. All records
written on the disk are write checked under
control of the microcontroller. The check consists of reading the record and checking the
CRC that was written by the disk unit with
the CRC calculated by the microcontroller
as the record was read. The buffer is not involved in the check.
For check operation data flow is disk unit to
disk unit controller where the CRC is verified.
This takes place one revolution following the
write operation ..
Read From Disk Unit to Buffer*
Disk unit to disk unit controller
Disk .unit controller to buffer under control of
the microcontroller/buffer interface
Buffer to Display Unit
Buffer to display unit controller
Display unit controller to character generator
Character generator to display unit controller
Display unit controller to display unit
* All data flow between the disk unitand buffer
occurs in blocks of 1 record at a time. The actual
transfer is accomplished 1 byte ata time.
3742 ML
In
14-3
14-4
,.•
iiiiiiiiiiiiO
•
:
ri ~ r.. ~
fj -,• - Ij _rJ
~
•
I
..
•
l1li
r~
rr
•
r.
,~
•
Jj
Planar Socket
D
003 - Reg Gate Ctrl 1
003 - Reg Gate Ctrl 1 --t--+-4~.D
006 - Reg Gate Ctrl 0
006 - Reg Gate Ctrl 0-....J.--+4~-·
Sync Int (-)
IJ
"
Clock pulses
continuous while power is on.
Sync Trig
Sync Point
Sweep Speed
Probe Point
Vert Amp
Int (-) dc
006 ('-Reg gate ctrl 0')
5ps/div
See above
0.5V/div
m
PIli =
~:
•
It
+ Charge Array - B07
(+) Int Sync
~=
,~
r~
-
~
......Jj
-Reset ROS - 008
+ Flush Array - B02
•
'. -:::.- Free running while power is on.
Sync Trig
Sync Point
Sweep Speed
Probe Point
Vert Amp
Int (-) dc
'+ charge array'
2 J,ls/div
See above
0.5 V/div
r--Ml
B
In Planar Socket II
Cross Connector
In Planar Socket
Cross Connector
13
ID
...
...
'
13
.. 2
" '1 . .
+ Charge array
(B07)
+ Flush array
(B02)
3742 FUNCTIONAL CHARACTER ISTICS
Program Storage Area
The 3742 contains six program buffers (ten program buffers if the 128-record-length feature is
installed)_ Programs to control record format,
similar to those used in the IBM 029 Card Punch,
can be written and loaded into those buffers from
the current record buffer. These programs can
be entered from the keyboard or from a disk_ An
additional program (program level 0) is provided
which has a fixed program of 80 (128 if the 128record-length feature is installed), single character alpha fields. When operating under manual
control, this program is selected. Any program
can be selected from the keyboard by way of
the program select routine and the program level
number will be displayed on the status line.
Enter
Enter mode is used for writing records on a disk.
As an operator keys a record, the data is stored in
the current record buffer. In this mode, this buffer is displayed. When a record advance occurs,
the MPU transfers the data from the current
record buffer to the previous record buffer. The
record in the previous record buffer is then written
on the disk.
Program Chaining
Program chaining provides automatic selection of
the program to be used with the next record. The
program to be selected when record advancing is
designated by the appropriate program number in
position 80 (position 128 if the 128-record-length
feature is installed). of the current program. The
program to be selected when record backspacing
is designated by the appropriate program number
in position 79 (position 127 if the 128-recordlength feature is installed), of the current program.
character in the record in the current record buffer.
If characters do not compare, a V error occurs.
After the error is reset, the first character keyed
is accepted if it agrees with either the character in
the current record buffer or the character which
caused the error. The next record to be verified is
stored in the hold buffer. When record advancing
occurs in verify mode, the MPU moves the contents of the current record buffer to the previous
record buffer and the contents of the hold buffer
to the current record buffer. The contents of the
previous record buffer will then be written on
disk only if a change had been made to the record.
After the last record of the data set has been verified, a verify mark (V) will be automatically inserted in the data set label.
Update
The update mode is used to read records from the
disk for review, modification or use as program records. In this mode, the record located at the current disk address is displayed from the current
record buffer. Any changes will be keyed into this
buffer. When a record advance is performed, the
MPU moves the contents of the current record buffer to the previous record buffer and reads the
next record from the disk into the current record
buffer. Then only if a change has been made to
the record now in the previous record buffer, the
contents of the previous record buffer wi II be
written onto disk. When a record is written in
update mode, it is always written at the disk address at which the record was located before it
was changed.
Record Length
The capacity of the space on a disk, allotted to a
record, is 80 (128 if the 128-record-length feature
is installed) characters. When writing a record of
less than 80 characters, the 80-record-length 3742
writes blank characters from the end-of-record
through position 80. With the 128-record-length
feature installed, the record length for anyone
data set can be any value from 1 to 128 characters.
Verify
Verify mode is used to check the accuracy of records already on disk and to make corrections to
records when errors are found. As data for a record is rekeyed from the source document, each
character is compared with the corresponding
Production Statistics
The production statistics feature provides statistics
on data production for use in measurement of
work load, analysis of error, and job accounting.
Three counters are used to count:
1.
Number of key strokes.
2.
Number of records processed.
3.
Number of characters corrected during
verify mode, including all characters keyed
in field correct mode.
These counters are reset wh-en power is turned on
or when the R key is pressed while production
statistics are being displayed.
.
Search EOD
The search EOD (end of data) function causes the
machine to search the disk for the last record of a
data set. When this function is completed, the last
record of the data set will be displayed, and stored
in both the current record and previous record
buffers.
Search Data Address
The search data address function allows searching
for a record in a data set by specifying its disk address. When this function is completed, the record
at the specified address will be displayed, and stored
in both the current and previous record buffers.
Search Content
The search content function provides a search for
the record in a data set which contains specific
data. The data being searched for is called a mask.
The mask can be part or all of the record. A blank
in any position means that position will not be
compared during a search operation. When the
search content function is selected, the MPU moves
the contents of the hold buffer into the current
record buffer. Here it can be reviewed and if necessary, modified before use as a mask. When the
search operation is completed, the mask will be
stored in the hold buffer; and the record found
will be in both the current record buffer and the
previous record buffer. The current record buffer
is displayed. The search can be continued with the
same mask since the mask will be recalled from the
hold buffer when the search content function is
again selected.
3742 ML
14-5
14-6
FUNCTIONAL CHARACTERISTICS (cont'd)
Search Sequential Content
Disk Copy
Field Totals (Offline)
Search sequential content is a faster form of search
content. To find the record with the selected
mask, the records in the data set must be arranged
so that the search fields of each succeeding record
have a higher value than in the preceding record.
If one or more records do not meet this requirement, the search may fail_
The disk copy feature is provided by the 3742
to permit:
The offline field totals feature provides the ability
to add fields within a record or within several records and to enter that total into the same or the
following records. All addition and enter operations are under program control. The feature is
used to obtain totals from records already written
on the disk.
1.
Duplication of a disk to have more than
one copy or salvage data from a disk
that has developed a defect.
2.
Merging of records from a disk with
records from the keyboard.
Disk Initialization
The purpose of the disk initialization feature is:
1.
To write identification fields in each sector
of all active tracks on the disk.
2.
To write the bad track code in all defective
tracks.
3.
To write a record in each sector of each
active track (blank characters are written in
all tracks except track 00).
4.
5.
To write aO-character records in track 00 as
described in the Disk Theory section of this
manual.
To check a disk for tracks marked with the
bad track code and for tracks exhibiting
errors.
All disks are initialized before they are shipped to
a customer. They should be reinitialized only if:
1.
The disk was exposed to a strong magnetic
field.
2.
A defect occurred in one or more tracks.
3.
A sector sequence other than the existing
sequence is needed.
3.
Pooling data from several disks onto
one disk.
4.
Extended storage for programs since
programs can be loaded into the
program buffers from the second disk
without removing the primary disk.
On the 3742, dual disk operation is obtained
by disabling the secondary station and controlling its disk from the primary station. During
dual disk operation, write functions cannot be
performed on the secondary disk.
A 5-digit secondary disk address is displayed on
the display status line after completing any
second disk operation, indicating the address of
the last record read from the secondary disk.
When duplicating a disk, seven records are read
from disk 2 in one revolution. These records are
temporarily stored in the buffer, from where they
are written on disk 1. All seven records are written on one disk revolution. Program buffers are
used for this operation.
Three 19-digit accumulators are provided with
this feature. Data can be algebraically added into
one or more of these accumulators from a specified
field or fields in any or all records of a data set.
Data in these accumulators can be entered into a
field of a record with or without resetting the
accumulator, depending on the control program.
All accumulators are reset when power is turned
on, when offline field totals is initiated or when
field totals are displayed and the R key is pressed.
Detailed programming information is contained in
section 9 of this manual.
Self-Check (Modulus 10 and Modulus 11)
The self-check feature provides a method for checking the entry of the numeric fields that contain a
precomputed self-check digit. The self-check digit
is the last digit in the field and is precomputed
using a modulus 10 or 11 algorithm. The 3742 recomputes the self-check digit according to the
algorithm, and when the last digit is entered or
verified, it is compared for identity with the computer value.
Record Insert
The record insert feature provides the ability to
open a space within an existing data set into
which records can be added. This is achieved
by moving all records starting with the record
at the currently displayed disk address through
the EOD, minus 1, record. The new disk
address for the records is determined by the previous disk address of the record plus the number
of records to be inserted. The space that is
opened, from 01 to 99 sectors, is filled with
deleted records that then can be modified. Two
methods of record insertion are available: continuous service on the other station during the
record insert function or lockout of the other
station during the record insert function. After
completion of record insert, the second station
automatically gets control back.
Katakana
128 Record Length Feature Display
Modes
The capacity of the three-line display is inadequate
for showing a 128 character record (plus status line)
when the 128 record length feature is installed. Part
of the feature is a method, called scrolling; displaying the long record_ It performs the function in
three steps;
Step 1
40
41
80
to step 1 of the next record. If the AUTO REC
ADV switch is OFF, the display cannot scroll
past Step 3. Instead, the cursor advances beyond
position 128 to 000. The scroll forward key, if
pressed while the cursor is at 000, causes the T operational error.
All auto fields are executed as auto by-pass fields
while the Auto DUP/SKIP switch is ON. It is thus
possible, with one depression of the SCRL FWD key,
to advance from step 1 directly to step 3 if positions
81 through 120 are in DUP or SKIP fields.
Step 2
41
81
- - - - - - - - - - 80
- - - - - - - - - - 120
In verify mode, depressing the SCRL FWD key results in the L incorrect function error.
Scroll Backward (SCRL BKWD) Key
Step 3
81
121
- - - - - - - - - - 120
- - - - - - - - - - 128
The display scrolls forward automatically when
cursor control advances beyond the limits of steps
1 or 2. If the AUTO REC ADV switch is OFF, and
the cursor control advances past 128 to 000 (control is between records), any key depression which
causes the cursor to advance, results in the T operational error. Resetting the error and advancing to
a new record sets the display at step 1 for the new
record. The display also scrolls backward automatically when cursor control passes from position
121 to 120, or from 81 to 80.
This key, when depressed, causes the display to
scroll backward, step 3 to step 2, or step 2 to step 1,
If the AUTO DUP/SKIP switch is OFF during display
step 1, pressing the SCR L B KWD key causes the
cursor to move to position 001.
With the AUTO DUP/SKIP switch ON, the cursor
moves backward, from its position at key depression
time, to:
1.
2.
Note: When in ENTER mode with the AUTO
OUP/SKI P and AUTO REC AOV switches ON,
the display remains blank if a record consists
entirely of auto fields. Also if the last field of
a record is an auto field, that portion of the
record display remains blank.
Two data-station keyboard keys; SCR L FWD and
SCRL BKWO, provide manual control of scrolling
forward and scrolling backward.
Scroll Forward (SCRL FWO) Key
The first manual position of step 1, if back
scrolling from step 1 or step 2, or if back
scrolling from step 3 and positions 81 through
120 contain no first position of a manual field.
The first manual position of the first manual
field of step 2, if back scrolling from step 3,
or if back scrolling from step 2 and positions
1 through 80 contain no first position of a
manual field.
The Katakana feature provides the ability of
entering the Katakana EBCOIC code onto the
disk. It has a keyboard containing 64 Katakana
characters plus 63 domestic characters. The
Katakana characters are generated by the Katakana shift and the Kana symbol functions.
Anytime the station is in Katakana shift (programmed for Katakana shift, the KATAKANA
SHIFT switch ON, or the KANA SHIFT key
pressed) the Katakana shift can be ollerridden
with ALPHA SHIFT, NUM SHIFT, or KANA
SYMB. The overriding shift key will define the
character or function that will be entered into
the station when a character key or function
key is pressed.
When the station is in Katakana shift, the following function keys require that ALPHA SHIFT
or NUM SHIFT be used with that key to activate
the function, otherwise the corresponding Katakana character will be entered into the station:
HEX, FLO COR, OUP, CHAR ADV, REC
AOV, FLO ADV, SEL PRG, SKIP, RT ADJ,
and CHR BKS.
Pressing KANA SYMB activates both the alpha
shift bit line (-bit 0) and the numeric shift bit
line (-bit 1) of the keyboard character buffer.
Any machine function, other than data entry,
that requires ALPHA SHIFT or NUM SHIFT
to be used in selection of that function can also
be selected by using KANA SYMB in place of
the prescribed shift key. Likewise, any reset
operation that requires the use of ALPHA SH 1FT
and/or NUM SHIFT with RESET can be performed by using KANA SYMB with RESET.
Scroll backward, while in verify mode, is a valid
function. However, the fields backed over must be
reverified.
To press either manual scroll key, while the cursor
is in a self-check or right-adjust field (except in the
first column of each field), causes an error condition.
This key, when depressed, causes the display to
scroll forward, step 1 to step 2, step 2 to step 3,
and if the AUTO REC ADV switch is ON, step 3
3742 ML
m
14-7
14-8
Proof Keyboard Feature
The proof keyboard feature which can be installed
on a 3742 differs from a standard data entry keyboard by a rearrangement of the numeric keys.
Under alpha shift, there is no change in keyboard
function. Under numeric shift, the slash key functions as the space bar, and the space bar functions
as the 0 (zero) key. Also, the 1,2, and 3 keys on
the data entry keyboard are interchanged with
the 7, 8, and 9 keys on the proof keyboard, respectively. The 4,5, and 6 keys remain unchanged.
The outputs of these keys in numeric shift mode
are translated by the MPU under ROS feature control. If a machine with this feature is operated with
the ROS Feature card removed from sockets, the
keyboard function will revert to that of the standard data entry configuration.
POWER THEORY
Power Supply Field Replaceable
Units (FRUs)
Disk Drive Motor
Capacitor (ac) (C-1)
Turn the disks within the disk drive units. The
disks turn in order to read or write on the disks.
Transformer
11*
If installed, protects the +5 Vdc output from
overloads.
13
Transforms high voltage input ac to low voltage
output, which supplies the input to the dc
voltage supply.
II
Distributes input ac voltage from POWER ON
switch through the primary fuse, to TB-1, to
disks 1 and 2. Also connects frame ground to
POWER ON.
Power On Switch
Circuit Breaker (CB1)
Keeps ae output from the transformer at a
constant level.
It D
Power Supply (ac) Cable
IJ
Attachment Cord.
Supplies customer ae input voltage to POWER ON.
II
Switches ac input from the attachment cord to
the pri mary of the transformer.
Primary Fuse (ae) Holder
m
~......=..._ _~""::"",,,---II
~~----~/~~~~-------II*
Holds fuse for the ae input.
Fuses (dc)
/>
II
~--~-+~~~#-----------------JD
.~~~--------------JI
Protects +24 Vdc, +8.5 Vde, +12 Vde, and
-12 Vde output from the overload.
Power Supply (dc) Cable
..
II
~~-r-r~~~--L--------~m
n;;------IJ
Connects the power supply PC board de
voltages to the MPU.
I
Power Supply PC Board
i
II
II
~~~~~----_--------------JI
Develops and distributes de voltage to the machine.
Line Filter (ac)
a
~~-4~+--~r-~~------------g
II
•
Feed-through capacitor filters line noise to
frame ground.
ID
*l\Iot Installed on all machines
3742 ML
15-1
15-2
AC Voltage Distribution (with diode board)
This distribution is for the original power supply
with a diode board
See pages 15-4 and 15-5
for the revised power supply.
a.
POWER ON
Plug the attachment cord into the properly
rated ae outlet. II
AC Voltage
Range
Frequency
115
10%
60 Hz
204
12%
60 Hz
200/220/235
100/110/123.5
10%
50 Hz
100/110/123.5
200/220/235
10%
60 Hz
m
- Close the power on switch.
- Alternating current is sent through the primary
fuse to the transformer.
TB distributes ac through cables to disk
1 and
B
The capacitor C1 III makes the transformer
provide regulated ac input voltage to the dc
supplies.
- The power supply PC board II along with
capacitors 2·7 and the rectifier board,
develops all de voltages.
18
2.11
*Not installed on all machines.
m
Jir-.
. , Att"dlllWIII
'-
T8110
SWitch
(~AH
r.'II () .,.
l
"Dr·.t'
TBI H
:l--+-_______
E
50'\..,
TB 1 TO
H:ll 1 Common
TH
TB I ;> 110
.41~
T fll 11
.~
,
L·".
")
.
_~
T
H
• •
II
Tr,msformer
TH131235
TBI 4
no
TB15235
TBI
13100
__
- - - - C I I } JAPAN'
TB 1 I
I
T8114200
TB 1 I;>
---I
I
Power on reset is a down level for 550 ms.
Note: Wait 5 seconds between power down and
power up. This 5 seconds allows the capacitor
in the power on circuit to discharge. If the
capacitor is not allowed to discharge, the 'power
on reset' may not complete.
The -5 Vdc supply is the source for the -4 Vdc
supply. The -5 Vdc drops 1 Vdc across a silicone
diode which provides the -4 Vdc.
D,sk
01
~~PU
+5 Vdc to Disk 1 (Yellow TP4)
L-_~-----------
II
II
The 6.3 Vdc provides CRT heater voltage. 8.5
Vdc is dropped through resistors to provide the
6.3 Vdc. The 6.3 Vdc is a constant current after
a power on surge. Power is on about 23 seconds
before the CRT heater warms up.
The -12 Vdc supply is the input for the -5 Vdc
closed loop series supply. A -5 Vdc overvoltage
blows the F2 fuse. A ~5 Vdc undervoltage blows,
the 8.5 Vdc fuse. A differential amplifier detects
an overvoltage between -5.6 Vdc to 6.0 Vdc, or
an undervoltage of -3 Vdc.
III
[
[
F4
] ] 24 Vdc
F3
J) 8.5 Vdc
Fl
The output of the dc power supplies are fused to limit
steady current to 200% or less of the rated load.
*Not installed on all machines.
3742 ML
15~3
15-4
AC Voltage Distribution (without diode board)
This distribution is for the revised power supply
with no diode board. See pages 15-2 and 15·3 for
the original power supply.
POWER ON
Plug the attachment cord into the properly
rated ac outlet. g
AC Voltage
Range
Frequency
115
10%
60 Hz
204
12%
60 Hz
200/220/235
100/110/123.5
10%
50 Hz
100/110/123.5
200/220/235
10%
60 Hz
,,~ ........
-"-
"-
'~
:
!
i
ID
Close the power on switch.
Alternating current is sent through the primary
fuse to the transformer . . .
TB distributes ac through cables to disk
1 and 2.
The capacitor cll11 makes the transformer
provide regulated ac input voltage to the dc
supplies.
- The power supply PC board II along with
capacitors 2·7 and the rectifier board,
develops all dc voltages.
liB
<
"'1--:-:'" '_
--"""",-'-
J+-----------------II
./
~~\\~~~--------------------~~
II
..:ill
--~~~'~~~·-------------------------GI
/ 1?------m
*Not installed on all machines.
See notes 1 and 2
Ii'
POWER
~ SWitch
. , Attachment
Cord
. . TB 1 1 Co~~m~o-n---~/
TBI 10
~-......j..--"'/
I
IlIII AC
. . Capacitor
AC Line Filter
n
iii
D '.Skl
Drive
Moto'
II
Notes:
1. Numbers in parentheses are for WTC 60 Hz
machines only.
2. Various transformers are used; check part
numbers (601) before changing taps.
TB1·10
.4 1
.5 L
TB1·11
TB1·8
.6 3
50""
D,sk 2
TB1·1O
Dr,vp
Ttl,., 1
Moto'
TB 1·8
~W-TC On~ -~:
I D,sk
I
..
t
TBI 1 Common
TBI 2 110
Transformer
-- - - -,
TBI 31235
T.B1'~:
Dllv!.'
fB 1·1 I
Fdn 1
TB 1017:
TB 1-5235
~:~~e G=iliiT:~~ i
TB1·13100
-----<1>-------0(
}
JAPAN
TBI-14200
I
T81 12,
L ____________
11*
TBI 4 220
I
Fdn 2
,..---==---....,
J
Disk
01
Ground to Disk 1 (Black TP3)
+5 Vdc to Disk 1 (Yellow TP4)
~
KBO
Kl
+5Vdcto
."bo,",'
8',.,.
t::=::[J ~PU
The 6.3 Vdc provides CRT heater voltage. 8.5
Vdc is dropped through resistors to provide the
6.3 Vdc. The 6.3 Vdc is a constant current after
a power on surge. Power is on about 23 seconds
before the CRT heater warms up.
AC
Test
Points
Test
Points
Power Supply PC Board
~~~
(+)
The -12 Vdc supply is the input for the -5 Vdc
closed loop series supply. A -5 Vdc undervoltage blows the 8.5 Vdc fuse. A differential amplifier detects an undervoltage of -3 Vdc. Overvoltage protection is provided by a clam p wh ich
limits overvoltage to 6.5 Vdc.
II
TP13
•
~-5-V- dc ~I +J~~;~~
°1'
--+-T-P-l
::
••
T3
:'. ;]
13
m
IT]
24 Vd'
CD
[]+12VdC
TP4/7 TP5 F3
~
;S,'5Vdc
TP10 F2
I TP9i [
]-12 Vdc
[
IT]
IT]
[I]
JI
m
[EJ
[l]
m
IT]
'Power on reset' is at down level for 550 ms.
*Not installed on all machines.
Note: Wait 5 seconds between power down
and power up. This 5 seconds allows the capacitor in the power on circuit to discharge. If
the capacitor is not allowed to discharge, the
'power on reset' may not complete.
...
3742 ML
15-5
15-6
Printed Circuit Board Diagram
This diagram is for the original power supply with
diode board.
limits
Transf()rmer
Diode
Board
A
5
7
9
8
Printed Circuit Board
F1
8
Voltage
(DC)
+12 Vdc
11.4-14.0
11.4-14.0
voltage
I
I
I
8.0-10.5
5
0
F3
5
4
11.0-13.2
0.50
Bll
----
11.0-13.2
0.50
4.6-5.4
0.03
----- ~8.0-9.4
0.35
-5TP
-4 CE Probe
CE Probe
- Over voitage- - - -
r--
C
-----
Bl0
-5
4
B12
B13
-12 Vdc
Under
--------
(ac)
Voltages
Ripple Voltage
(peak to peak)
+8.5 Vdc
6
B05
B06
B09
8.0-10.5
+6.3 TP---
5.7-9.4
0.35
DOS
22.0-26.5
1.00
10
F4
+24 Vdc
3
22.5-26.5
C5T
Disk 1
(3742)
22.5-26.5
2
7
13
4.75-6.5
Keyboard 1
+5 Vdc
11
..LC7
-
4.75-6.5
12
B06-~-- -- 4.7-5.5
B07 I
007 I
I
008 I
009 ....I
010 _
011
012
013
002
003
004
B02
B03
B04
_
3
.L
-Note: See Ripple Measurement later this section.
2
)
6
»---7
11
0.30
Printed Circuit Board Diagram
This diagram is for the revised power supply with
no diode board.
Limits
Transformer
.---
1
--
~2
11.4-14.0
P3
--
"
",
11.4-14.0
--
,
A
~
o
~
.- ~>--=L-"
B
~
....... ...
--
Printed Circuit Board
TP8
,...
L...oII
--L
.LC2
--
F-
~'r~
"
TP10
F1
r..
.L C3
-
L
F2
-12 Vdc
L _I-
-5
- -- - -----Over voltage
I
(ac)
Voltages
--
//
~5
---
22.S-26.5
--
~
E
F
4.75-6.5
L--
--
H
"
./
ro
P
12
"'
--=-
~'>-@TI
4.6-5.4
0.03
8.0-9.4
0.35
f-e +6.3 TP--- 5.7-9.4
0.35
Bl0
t-e -5TP
~ -4 CE Probe
~ CE Probe
-
+6.3
F4
B05
+24 Vdc
B09
2
" .......
//
-L
~
C5T
3713
005
22.(}26.5
1.00
-=-
......
...-t
J
10
-- ~11
\
....,
0.50
L r- 006
L
TPl
~~
~9
--
4.75-6.S
.....1
r1
G
22.5-26.5
+8.5 Vdc
-
~
"/
~8
v-..
lri=-r
-
-;>--
7
--
>--:L
-
11.0-13.2
B 11
-
F3
-LC4
-
0.50
9
~>- t-- 3713
...L
D
R>
P6
--
...
I
I
~
......
/
8.0-10.5
8.0-10.5
TP5
-----
11.(}13.2
Under voltage
r--
C
-
B12
t-- B13
Ripple Voltage
(peak to peak)
\----------
L-.
4
(DC)
+12 Vdc
--L ~
,
~
Voltage
~~I :
ICB11
I
I
--L
-
J
+5 Vdc
.
3713
806--;- - - - 4.7-S.S
C7
-
~
3
I--
4/7
/,
»
11
6
»~'
~
B07
007
0.30
I
I
008 :
D09_J
OlD
011
D12
D13
D02
D03
D04
B02
B03
B04
Note: See Ripple Measurement later this section.
3742 ML
15-7
15-8
...................
Ground
(B.O to 9.4) +B.5 Vdc
(4.7 to 5.5) +5 Vdc
_-- - . ....- ----
Ground
+24 Vdc (22.0 to 26.5)
+B.5 Vdc (B.O to 9.4)
POR
+5 Vdc (4.7 to 5.5)
(5.7 to 9.4) +6.3 Vdc
(4.6 to 5.4) -5 Vdc
(11.0 to 13.2) -12 Vdc
Ground
(11.0to 13.2) +12 Vdc
.................
---- --- ---- --
Dc Voltage Distribution
Power Supply de Cable
The power supply dc cable. carries dc voltages
to the connector. on the MPU.
MPU
The MPU sends signals and dc voltages from:
Connector II to disk 1.
Connector II to disk 2.
Connector" to the display unit.
Connector II to Keyboard 1.
Connector II to Keyboard 2.
Voltages and Pin Numbers To and From MPU
Voltages
-5
+5
Disk 1 & 2
CRT
Bll
*B03
+6.3
Keyboard
006
*B09
B12
B13
+6.B
-7.5
+B.5
003
-12
+12
002
009
010
BOB
B09
+24
Bl0
-
* +5 for disk 1 and keyboard 1 goes directly
to power PC board TP4 rather than to
the MPU.
•••
•••
••
••
•
••
•••
•
CRT
~
Keyboard 1
Keyboard 2
The
" un"t
" disk d rive
I s are not
side by sid"
e In the 3
shown he
742 as
reo
3742 Ml
15-9
15-10
Ripple Measurement
Use an oscilloscope, ifavailable, to measure ripple
voltage.
The CE meter, used as described below, affords an
alternate way to get an indication of ripple voltage:
1.
Connect a capacitor (0.22 mfd or larger,
50 Vdc or higher) in series with. one meter
lead. The capacitor is not furnished.
2.
Set the meter range to 15 Vac.
3.
Connect one meter lead to the dc voltage in
question; the other lead to frame ground.
(Remember the capacitor in series with one
lead.)
Capacitor
~
IH-------+-.-
-
DC Voltage
4.
CE
Meter
PIN 452796
The meter needle should not leave zero on
the scale if ripple voltage is within limits.
Note: A loose power supply capacitor
terminal screw can cause ripple.
INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
CRT Safety
Cover Removal
Completion of Installation
See the CRT safety notice on the inside of the
front cover of the maintenance library (page 0-2).
If the cover will not come off by lifting it upward
at the lower corners, remove the cover by lifting
the latch upward with a small screwdriver and
swinging the bottom of the cover out.
The machine serial number is inside the cover, on
the frame, below the disk unit, of the primary
station 11.
Mirror Installation
Be sure that all safety shields are installed that
were removed during this installation.
Place the MLM in the folder and then put the
label on the folder. Put the parts catalog in the
same folder. Then put the folder in the storage
area of the machine.
Fill out the IR and report the installation
according to local procedures.
The disk and operations manuals belong to the
customer.
Unpack the mirror assembly (PIN 2456420) from
its container and install as follows:
-
Install the seal (PIN 2456427) making sure
that the seal does not obstruct the area being
displayed on the CRT face.
Install the filter (PIN 2456424) on top of
the seal.
Align the mirror assembly (PIN 2456420)
with the holes in the tabletop and push down
until the assembly is latched.
Mirror Assembly (PIN 2456420).,
V
Specifications
!
Filter (PIN 2456424)----.......
Seal (PIN 2456427) _ _ _ _-...:/J'y
Dimensions:
Inches
Centimeters
F
65
165
S
H
29-1/2
33
75
84
Power On Check
Weight: 300 Ib (136 kg)
Pre-Power Check
Check that all cable connectors and cross
connectors ate plugged and seated properly.
Check the customer's power system for proper
grounding.
Make sure the customer's voltage matches the
voltage specified on the machine voltage tag.
This tag is inside the cover, on the frame, below the disk unit, of the primary station
a.
Note: If changes are made, DP Orders and
Movements must submit a Records Purpose
Only MES for the machine to update MLC
records. It is essential that you inform DP
Orders and Movements of this change. Excessive installation time can occur on sales
features and engineering changes if MLC
records are incorrect.
Make sure the MAINLINE switch is off.
Be sure the mainline cord is not under the
mach ine legs.
Check RPO Section 31 for any procedure reo
quired before turning power on. Refer to the
machine history card to find out if any RPQ
features are installed.
Connect the mainline cord to the customer's
outlet.
Turn on the MAINLINE switch.
Observe the machine for signs of overheating
or smoke. Turn off the MAINLINE switch
immediately, if any abnormal conditions are
noted.
Check that the disk drive hub and drive belt
are turning.
Use the Machine Checkout Procedure to check
the machine operation and performance:
Base machine - MAPs 7·1 and 7-2.
Feature group A - MAP 7-3.
128 record length feature - MAP 7·4.
RPQ - Sectinn 31. (Refer to the machine
history card to determine if an RPQ is
installed.)
Heat Output: 850 Btulhr (215 kcal/hr)
Power Requirements:
0.4
kVA
Phases
Voltage
115,208,or230(±loa~)
Environment Operating:
Temperature
60° to gO°F (16° to 32°C)
Relative humidity 8 to 80%
Maximum wet bulb 73°F (23°C)
Cleaning
CAUTION
Do not use sprays on the keys or near the keyboard. Do not use IBM cleaning fluid (methyl
chloroform) or isopropyl alcohol for cleaning.
Use a cloth dampened with mild soap and water on
covers, CRT face, CRT filter, CRT mirror, and
keyboard.
3742 ML
16-1
16-2
Packing Instructions
CAUTION:
The 3742 weighs 300 pounds.
Tape the following with nylon filament tape:
Disk file covers in closed position.
Display unit mirror to the table top.
Keyboard covers in closed position.
Base covers to 'base and legs.
Power cord to table tops.
Place the 3742 on the shipping pallet and
locate the 3742 glides in the shipping pallet
receSses.
Using the corner protectors, tape the 3742
to the shipping pallet with three wraps of
nylon filament tape ..
Cover the 3742 with the polyethylene bag
and apply the labels.
5.
Remove the access cover. Slide the three
mounting clamps (2456235) in the table
top lip with the bend in the clamps toward
the front (toward you).
Slide the reading board (PN 2456234) into
position and fasten two screws (PN 1202029)
and two washers (PN 600395) through the
back holes (furthest away) in the middle
mounting brace.
Use an 1/8 inch allen wrench for the screws,
but do not tighten them completely.
Fasten two screws to each mounting clamp
through the front holes in the board mounting
brace. Ensure that the clamp is positioned on
the table top lip.
Align the reading board with the end of the tablE
top and tighten all the screws.
Do the other side by repeating this procedure.
Reinstall the access cover.
Fasten two screws and two washers in the
baf;k holes of the right hand (keyboard end)
mounting brace of the board. Do not tighten
them completely.
Fasten two screws and two washer in the back
holes of the left hand mounting brace of the
board. Do not tight~n them completely.
Plug in the mainline cord and power up the
machine.
Extended Reading Board Installation
Remove all electrical power from the machine
by unplugging the mainline cord.
These instructions apply to installing an extended reading board on either side of the
machine.
2456234
Reading Board
600395 Washer - - - .
Remove the curved access cover.
Access Cover Adjustment:
1.
Lower the two cover hanger brackets
(loosen two screws) to the maximum of
the slots (tighten the two screws).
2.
On the logic gate side, ensure that the
cover hanger bracket does not interfere
with opening the logic gate; adjust the
brackets as low as possible accordingly.
3.
Adjust the cover latch assembly (on the
access cover) to match.the adjustment
made to the cover hanger brackets.
4.
Reinstall the access cover and check
the cover fit and position; readjust the
hanger brackets andlor latch if necessary.
Table
Top
2180701 Screw
2180701 Screw
Optional Screw
1202029
Clamp
GLOSSARY
All Keys Mechanical Assembly-A keyboard frame,
which includes all the data and function key modules, and fastens to the keyboard printed circuit
board.
Crossfoot Total-Add a group of numbers in
several different orders to make sure the total
is correct.
Hash Total-A sum of fields used only for checking of one or more other fields. The 3742 field
totals feature provides the ability to create a
hash total for a group of records.
CRT-Cathode Ray Tube.
Hex-Hexidecimal Code.
Data-Information; Records.
I D-Identification.
AM-Address Mark: A byte of data on the disk,
used to identify the 10 field and data field in the
record on the disk.
Audio Response-The sound produced by the
clicker.
Audio Feedback Device-A mechanical and electrical device producing an audible signal to the operator that a key entry was accepted by the machine.
Data Link Control Characters-A transmission control character used by the BSCA feature. Th is
character is for control only, not to be transmitted.
Data Set-A block or group of records assigned
for a particular use.
Data Set Label-Any record (disk address
00008 through 00026) which contains stored
information defining a data set.
lOR-Identification Reader.
Jittery-The display unit information is hard to
read because it moves up and down and side to
side.
LED-Light Emitting Diode: Activates the phototransistor which detects index pulses on the disk
unit.
BOE-Beginning of Extent: A 5-character field
(positions 29 through 33) which identifies the
position of the first record of the data set.
Deserialized-Signals received one after another
are made into characters.
MAP-Maintenance Analysis Procedure: Provides
the step by step procedure which locates a failing part.
BPS-Baud Per Second: Communication line
Transmission rate.
Display Viewer-The display viewer reflects the
display unit information to the operator.
Master Coil-A horizontal deflection coil in the
display unit.
BSCA-Binary Synchronous Communications
Adapter: A feature that allows the 3741 to
communicate with other machines via telephone
equipment.
EOD-End of Data: A 5-character field (positions 75 through 79) wh ich is the address of the
last record of the data set plus 1, or next available record on the disk. If a data set is defined
by BOE and EOE but no data is entered, then
EOD equals BOE.
Medium-The disk.
Byte-A byte is composed of 8 binary bits that
define a character.
Clicker-A mechanical and electrical device producing an audible signal to the operator that a
key.entry was accepted by the machine.
Collet-A device which centers and clamps the
disk to the disk drive hub when the disk drive
cover is closed.
Control Address Mark-A character, 0, in the
first byte of the data field of a record, denoting
a deleted record.
Converter-Converts 12 Vdc to 12,000 Vdc to accelerate the electron beam to the face of the CRT.
It also provides the 400 Vdc for the brightnesss
control.
EOE-End of Extent: A 5-character field (positions 35 through 39) for the address of the last
record of a data set.
Memory-A high density field effect transistor
(FET) memory, used by the microprocessor
unit (MPU).
MPU-A Microprocessing Unit which receives,
controls, and manages the flow of information
for ,the machi ne.
EOF-End of File: A code which signals that
the last record of a fi Ie has been read.
PC Board-A printed circuit board is an electrical
circuit mounted on a board to distribute signals
and Voltages.
Extent-The Ii mit, one end or the other of a data
set.
Planar Board-The microprocessing unit electronic
board.
FET -Field Effect Transistor logic.
POR-Power On Reset: A signal occurring
during power on, used to reset all circuits to
an operational starting point.
Flyplate-The pad on the bottom of a keyboard
key module. When a key is pressed, the flyplate
raises and the capacitive change indicates to the
keyboard printed circuit that the key is pressed.
FRU-Field Replaceable Unit.
CRC-Cyclic Redundancy Check: An error check,
counting of the bits on a record.
-
Protected Data Set-A protected data set cannot
be written to, and an attempt to go into enter
or verify mode will result in a file protect
error. If you are in update mode and attempt to
modi fy a record, you wi II also get the fi Ie protect
error.
3742 Ml
17-'
17-2
Raster-The path of the electron beam which produces the image on the display unit.
Record-A consecutive string of 80 (128 with
128-record-length feature installed) or less bytes
(characters) on the disk. Some or all of the
characters may be blank.
Reseat-To remove, unplug, unfasten, or detach
an object from its position or mounting and put
the same object back in place again. Example: to
remove a cable from its connector, and put it
back again.
RI-Record Insert.
ROS-Read-Only Storage: A storage whose contents are not changed by computer instructions.
RPQ-Request for Price Quotation: Used by
IBM to answer specific needs of customers
for equipment and special features not available in the sales manual.
Scrolling-·-The action of the two line 80character display as it progresses or regresses
through the three steps of displaying a 128
character record.
Search-The act·of locating a desired record on
the disk. Search functions can be performed by:
Search EOD
Search data address
Search content
Search sequential content
Seek-The. movement of the read/write head from
one track to another one on the disk.
Self-Check-A method for checking the entry of
numeric fields that contain a precomputed selfcheck digit, which is the last digit in the field.
Slave Coil-A horizontal deflection coil in the
display unit.
Swap-To exchange one for another.
Sweep-To deflect, or produce vertical, horizontal, and oscillating motion to the CRT electron
beam, in order to exhibit a constant image.
TTL-Transistor-Transistor Logic.
Unprotected Data Sets-An unprotected data
set can be written to or read from. The data
set label for an unprotected data set contains
a blank in position 43.
Video-Information relating to or used in receiving the image on the face of the display
unit.
Wiggle Sweep-Deflects the electron beam in
the displa'y unit, in an oscillating motion, to
produce character height.
Write Protected Data Set-A write protected data
set cannot be written to, and an attempt to go
into enter or verify mode will result in a write
protect error. If you are in update mode and
attempt to modify a record, you will also get the
write protect error.
INDEX
ac voltage distribution 15-2
accuracy check, CE voltmeter
actuator bail, adjust 8-3
actuator, head load 11-6
address, search 9-12
addresses, track 706
adjust actuator bail 8-3
adjustments
.
disk cover interlock 220
disk drive (vertical) 238
disk top cover alignment 237
head· 2-7
head (for track 00)· 231
head load actuator 207
idler assembly 215
lower limit stop 232
lower mounting bracket (disk top cover
alignment) 237
phototransistor assembly 243
stepper motor 230
upper limit stop 234
yoke 305
applications, service 8-2
attachment cord 15-1
attachment, keyboard 14-2
audio feedback control 13-1
audio feedback device service check 410
AUTO OUP/SKIP 13-1
AUTO REC ADV 13-1
II
bail, adjust actuator 8-3
buffer to display unit, data flow
cable extender 307, 8-20
cable, power supply 15-1
capacitor 15-1
card assembly, file control 11-6
carriage assembly, head 11-8
cause codes and part numbers
cards and planars 501
CRT 301
disk drive 201
keyboard 401
power supply 601
14-3
copy
data set 9-24
disk 14-6
image 9-30
to a specified address 9-26
cord attachment 15-1
cover cleaning
16-1
cover removal
16-1
cover, disk drive
11-6 .
CRT
locations 304, 607
saftey 16-1
cursor operation, display to 8-3
CE
diagnostic diskette 8-15,8-20
display mode 8-1
general logic probe 8-14,8-20
head adjusting tool 8-20
mode 415
pi ns for raster display 8-13
tools 8-20
voltmeter 8-20
. voltmeter accuracy check 8-13
chaining, program 14-5,9-32
character repeat, function 13-4
character storage control 13-6
character transfer control, keyboard 13-6
characters, formation of 12-2
chart
key codes 8-11
program code 9-32
check
CE voltmeter accuracy 8-13
power on 16-1
pre-power 16-1
self 9-22
track accessing 8-7
circuit description 12-4
circuit diagram (CRT) . 306
circuits
display unit functional 12-2
keyboard switch 411
cleaning procedure
covers 16-1
head and pressure pad 209
clicker (audio feedback device) service check
code chart, program 9-32
codes chart, key 8-11
codes, key 13-10
collating sequence (EBCDIC) 421
collet assembly
disk 11-6
removal and replacement 222
completion of installation 16-1
content, search 14-5, 9-16
control
audio feedback 13-1
card, file 204
key detection and decode 13-4
controller
disk unit 14-2
display unit 14-2
conventions, flowcharting 9-1
410
data address, search 14-5
data.flow
buffer to display unit 14-3
keyboard to buffer 14-3
read from disk unit to buffer 14-3
write from buffer to disk 14-3
data set
copy 9-24
label 11-4, 9-2
label, delete 9-5
label, format 239
data, head alignment service check display 8-16
dc voltage distribution 15-8,610
decode
control key detection 13-4
keyboard interface 13-10
definitions, sense bit 8-6
delete data set label 9-5
description, circuit 12-4
diagnostic diskette 8-15
diagnostic program
display disk speed 8-1
selecting a 8-1
terminating a 8-1
dimensions, machine 16-1
diode assembly, phototransistor light
emitting 11-6
disassembly/assembly procedure, keyboard 407
disk 11-20, 2-35
collet assembly 11-6
copy 14-6
cover locations 224
cover interlock adjustment 220
FC card 420
format description 11-2
3742 ML
18-1
18-2
disk (continued)
handling 11-20, 11-3
initialization 14-6,9-34
long term storage 11-20
problems, iocate 8-6
record sequences 9-37
shipping and receiving 11-20
speed 8-3
speed, diagnostic programs display 8-1
top cover alignment checks 237
track IDs display 8-3
track record order 8-5
unit controller 14-2
unit field replaceable units 11-6
unit operating sequence 11-11
disk drive 11-6
cover 11-6
, cover removal and replacement 221
locations 216,608
motor 15-1
pulley and belt 213
service position 206
vertical adjustment 238
disk FC card X 204-2
disk FC card Y 204-3
diskette 11-20
diagnostic 8-15
display
disk speed diagnostic programs 8-2
disk track IDs 8-3
format 701
mode
selecting CE 8-1
terminating CE 8-1
operator 7-1,9-2
registers 8-9
to cursor operation 8-3
unit controller 14-2
unit functional circuits 12-2
display data, head alignment service check
distribution
ac voltage 15-2
de voltage 15-8
drive
disk 11-6
motor 11-8, 15-1
motor removal and replacement 214
II
EBCDIC collating sequence 421
enter 14-5, 9-6
enter mode 9-15
EOD, search 14-3,9-13
error indication test, system 8-12
II
failing machine, locate 8-3
faulty tracks 8-5
field replaceable units
disk unit 11-6
power supply 15-1
field totals 9-18/14-6
procedure 9-20
writing 9-20
file control card assembly 11-6, 204
filter line 15-1
flowcharting conventions 9-1
flyplate replacement 414
format
data set label 239
description, disk 11-2
display 701
formation of characters 12-2
frequency oscillator card, variable 11-6
FRU, disk units 11-6
function, character repeat 13-4
functional circuits, display unit 12-2
functional sequence 12-2
functional units 10-2
fuse holder, primary 15-1
fuses 15-1
III
8-16
handling, disk 11-3, 11-20
head
adjustment service check 208
, adjustment (for track 00) 231
alignment service check tracks 8-15
and carriage assembly 11-8
and pressure pad 209
load actuator 11-6, 207
location 8-5, 226
how to make a program 9-32
hub and shaft assembly 217
installation
completion of 16-1
key module 407
space bar 407
instructions, packing 16-2
interface decode, keyboard 13-10
interface microcontroller/buffer 14-2
introduction 10-1
13
Katakana
CE mode 416
keyboard 'layout 704
key
codes 13-10
chart 8-11
key detection and decode control 13-4
key modules 13-1
installation 407
. removal 407
key test
keyboard 8-11
repeat 8-12
shift 8-12
keyboard
attachment 14-2
cable pin definitions 13-7
character transfer control 13-6
data entry ·705
disassembly/assembly procedure 4-2, 407
interface decode 13-10
Katakana 704
key test 8-10
locations 407.609
proof 705
switch circuits 411
switch test 8-9
test points 13-12
to buffer, data flow 14-3
keyboard layout
(data entry) CE mode 415
Katakana CE mode 416
keys, special 13-11
o
idler assembly
adjustment 215
belt tracking 215
removal 215
IDs, missing 8-5
image, copy 9-30
index ampl ifier adjustment
index mode, read 9-3
index modify 9-4
II
205
label
data set 9-2, 11-4
delete data set 9-5
leadscrew
nut and spring 11-8
service check 242
LED 11-6
LED assembly removal and replacement 223
light emitting diode assembly phototransistor 11-4
limit stops 11-8
line filter 15-1
load actuator, head 11-6
load program 9-33
locate disk problems 8-6
locate failing machine 8-3
locations
CRT 304,607
disk cover 224
disk drive 216, 608
head 226,8-5
keyboard 407, 609
machine 244, 309
MPU 505,308
power supply 604, 419
socket 509
logic probe, CE 8-13
long term storage, disk 11-20
lower limit stop adjustment 232
lower mounting bracket
lateral adjustment 237
machine
dimensions 16-1
locate failing 8-3
locations 244,309
power requirements 16-1
weight 16-1
mask statements 9-20
ma'Sks search 9-16
microcontroller 14-2
microcontroller/buffer interface 14-2
microprocessing unit 14-2
missing IDs 8-5
mode
enter 9-15
read index 9-3
modify index 9-4
modules, key 13-1
motor and drive 11-8
motor assembly, stepper 11-8
motor, disk drive 15-1
MPU locations 308, 505
MPU planar assembly removal/replacement
\;t»t,f
"
504
m
negative totals 9-19
notes, service 8-17
num shift, program 13-1
nut and spring, leadscrew 11-8
m
operating sequence, disk unit 11-11
operation, display to cursor 8-3
operator display 9-2
oscillator card, variable frequency 11-6
packing instructions 16-2
part numbers and cause codes
cards and planars 501
CRT 301
disk drive 201
keyboard 401
power supply 601
PC board, power supply 15-1
phototransistor assembly adjustment 243
physical sequence of records in a track 8-5
pin definitions, keyboard cable 13-6
power on and read index 9-3
power on check 16-1
power on switch 15-1
power requirements, machine 16-1
power supply
cable 15-1
field replaceable units 15-1
locations 604,419
PC board 15-1
pre-power check 1 6-1
preload spring 11-8
primary fuse holder 15-1
probe, CE logic 8-14
problems, locate disk 8-6
procedure, field totals 9-20
production statistics 9-14, 14-5
program
chaining 9-32, 14-5
code chart 9-32
how to make 9-32
load 9-33
num shift 13-1
program (continued)
record length 9-32
sample 9-32
selecting a diagnostic 8-1
storage area 14-5
terminating a diagnostic 8-1
programs, display disk speed diagnostic
8-2
til
raster display, CE pins for 8-13
read from disk unit to buffer data flow
read index mode 9-3
read index, power on 9-3
read, repetitious 8-3
REC AOV, AUTO 13-1
receiving, disk shipping 11-20
record length 14-5
program 9-32
record order, disk track 8-5
record sequences, disk 9-37
records in a track, physical sequence of
register operation, sense 8-6
registers, display 8-9
removal
key module 407
space bar 407
removal and replacement
collet assembly 222
disk drive cover 221
disk drive pulley and belt 213
drive motor 214
hub and shaft assembly 217
idler assembly 215
key module 407
LED assembly 223
MPU planar assembly 504
space bar 407
stepper motor 229
repeat function character 13-4
repeat key test 8-12
repetitious read 8-3
replacement, flyplate 414
ri pple measurement 15-10
ripple voltage 15-6
14-3
8-5
safety, CRT 16-1
sample program 9-32
search address 9-12
search content 9-16, 14-5
search data address 14-5
3742 ML
18-3
18-4
search EOD 14-3, 9-13
search masks 9-16
search sequential content 9-16, 14-6
selecting a diagnostic program 8-1
selecting CE display mode 8-1
self check 9-22, 14-6
sense bit definitions 8-6
sense register operation 8-6
sequence, disk unit operation 11-11
sequence, functional 12-2
sequences, disk record 9-37
sequential content, search 9-16, 14-6
service applications 8-2, 8-5
service check
clicker (audio feedback device) 410
head adjustment 208
head load actuator 207
leadscrew 242
tracks head alignment 8-15
service notes 8-17
service position, disk drive 206
shift functions, alpha and numeric 13-4
shift key test 8-12
shift, program num 13-1
shipping and receiving disk 11-20
socket locations 509
space bar removal 407
special· keys 13-11
specifications 16-1
specified address, copy to a 9-26
speed diagnostic programs, display disk 8-2
speed, disk 8-3
spring, preload 11-8
statements, mask 9-20
statistics, production 9-14, 14-5
stepper motor
adjustment 230
assembly 11-8
removal and replacement 229
stops, limit 11-5
storage area, program 14-5
storage control character 13-6
storage, disk long term 11-20
switch, power on 15-1
switch test, keyboard 8-9
switches, toggle 13-1
system error indication test 8-12
D
terminal assembly probe 8-20
terminating a diagnostic program 8-1
terminating CE display mode 8-1
test
keyboard key 8-10
keyboard switch 8-9
patterns 508
repeat key 8-12
shift key 8-12
system error indication 8-12
test points, disk 11-14
test points, keyboard 13-12
timings (chart 245
toggle switches 13-1
tools, CE 8-20
totals
field 9-18, 14-6
negative 9-19
track
accessing check 8-7
addresses 706
record order, disk 8-5
tracks, faulty 8-5
transfer control keyboard character
transformer 15-1
13-6
m
unit, microprocessing 14-2
units
disk unit field replaceable 11-6
power supply field replaceable 15-1
update 9-8, 14-3
upper limit stop adjustment 234
m
variable frequency oscillator card
verify 9-10, 14-3
VFO 11-6
VFO card location 212
voltage distribution, dc 610
11-6
II
weight, machine 16-1
write from buffer to disk, data flow
writing field totals 9-20
II
yoke adjustment
305
14-3
RPQ (SPECIAL FEATURE)
There are no RPOs installed on this machine. Return
to page 1·1 and check the N box.
3742 ML
31-1
------- ------....
---------_.-
Technical Newsletter
-.
This Newsletter No.
SN31-6233
9 May 1978
Date
Base Publication No.
SY31-0502-0
File No.
Previous Newsletters
None
IBM 3742
Dual Display Station
Theory-Maintenance
~IBMCorp.
1973,1974, 1975, 1977
This technical newsletter provides replacement pages for the subject publication. Pages to be inserted
and/or removed are:
2-2.3, 2-2.4
2-3.1, 2-3.2
2-4.1, 2-4.2
2-6.1, 2-6.2
2-8.1, 2-8.2
2-9.1, 2-9.2
2-9.5, 2-9.6
2-10.1, 2-10.2
201, 204-1
Olanges to textand illustrations are indicated by a vertical line at the left of the change.
Summary of Amendments
Probing point TPB14 is changed to TPB7.
Note: Please file this cover letter at the back of the manual to provide a record of changes.
IBM Corporation, Publications, Department 245, Rochester, Minn~ta 55901
©IBM Corp. 1978
201
Part Numbers and Cause Codes
Part Name
AC Distribution Cables:
100-115 Vac 01
200-235 Vac 01
100-123.5 Vac 02
200-235 Vac 02
AC Line Filter
Blade, Fan
CE Test Disk
Collet-Disk Clamp
Assembly
Disk Cover Latch
Disk Drive Cover
Disk Drive Hub and
Shaft
Disk Drive Pulley
Disk Drive Shaft Bearing
Disk File Cable and
Connectors
Disk Idler Assembly
Drive Belt
Drive Motor
(50 Hz 115 Vac)
Drive Motor
(50 Hz 200/235 Vac)
Drive Motor
(60 Hz 115 Vac)
Drive Motor
(60 Hz 208/230 Vac)
Drive Motor Pulley
(50 Hz)
Drive Motor Pulley
(60 Hz)
Fan 50 Hz
(100-115)
(200-235)
File Control Card (FC)
Head and Carriage
Assembly (with pressure
pad arm and lead screw)
Head Load Actuator
Assembly
I nterlock Assembly
Spring
Switch
Wire Jumper
Leadscrew Bearing
Upper
Lower
201·203
Number
IR Code
2456362
2456387
2456480
2456386
2192519
2455814
2455026
See Parts
Catalog
2305650
2305648
100-01
100-01
100-01
100-01
600-07
820-25
820-05
820-06
820-06
2305619
2305621
5344991
820-13
820-13
820-13
2305599
See Parts
Catalog
2305616
820-03
820-15
820-02
2305706
820-11
2305707
820-11
2305672
820-11
2305633
820-11
2305451
820-11
2305597
820-11
2455819
2455820
See Parts
Catalog
820-25
820-25
2305670
820-07
2305609
820-08
2305532
2305534
2305533
820-24
820-24
820-24
233355
155749
820-09
820-09
Part Name
Number
IR Code
Leadscrew Wheel
LED Assembly
limit Stop
Upper
Lower
Phototransistor Assembly
Signal Cables
Disk 1
Disk 2
Display
Spring Washer
Stepper Motor with
Stand and Wheel
VFO Card
2305544
2305656
820-12
820-10
2305618
2305528
2305604
820-09
820-09
820-10
2456370
2456371
2456372
2305663
100-04
100-04
100-04
820-09
2305545
(See 501)
820-12
300-07
820-04
Cause Codes
Adjustment
Bent
Damaged
Defective
01 Dirty
07 Grounded
20 Loose
21 Open
22 Short
46
28 Worn
70
34
42
202 (not used)
203 (not used)
3742 ML
201
. TNL: SN31-6233 to SY31-0502-0 (9 May 1978)
204-1
204
File Control Card
Disk FC Card Y
o
m
",
, .,
- OQ
I~ ~I " ~B. 0,2~, /
, ,.
),
.i'
File Cable
Card Test Points Signal
Cable
Type X Type Y toMPU
Power!
Voltage
+24 volts
+5 volts
-5 volts
Ground
TPl
TP23
TP5
TP17
TPA11
TPB7
TPA12
TPA3
TPA10
Bl0
B03
Bl1
BOB
+Access 0
+Access 1
+Access 2
+Access 3
-Me phase
-Me phase
-Me phase
-Me phase
TP15
TP7
TP4
TP6
TP18
TP21
TP20
TP19
TPB8
. TPB9
TPB10
TPB11
TPB2
TPAl
TPB3
TPBl
002
003
004
DOS
-Head load
+Head engage
TP22
TP10
TPB4
TPB13
LED
+LEO voltage
TP16
TPA2
PTX '
PTX (output)
+Index
TP8
TP2
TPB5
TP814
None
Stepper
Motor
BRow
A Row
1 TPA1
~--------'
, ,Or
"
Test Pin Name
TPB'
.og~oog.~o~, •• ?O~OO~ooo.?~o •• o.~
oo •• oo.o.o •• lQ:Q)eo.oo.oooo •• ooo~."
,,
Function
Disk FC Card X
•
lO::O!!Ol
O
Test Pin
I
"
.'
I
I'
"
I
"
II
Head
Load
Magnet
0
f TP23
o 0,
,
liD'
I
,
I
13- - : : ,
7....~
TP22: :
:
TP11 ~_~~12 l : i 0 of: :
1c::J
-"4'
,"
TP1
Location
Path
TP~4
~
I
c::J
I
1c::J
TP2
~
\
[J
TP10 I
L 10
TP9 I
I T19
Dq
:IT]
\
TP8)
,
,TP21
J TP20
I ......
TP18
I
~
Read/
Write
I
Erase
:Oi bc:i 00
:[]DTP6-4;'P7
I
0'
TP141.
I
I
I
I
\
~ TP3
I'
I
fTP5
,
:
TP17
\.. _ ..4 T P 1 5 J_ - - - - 4
-
TP4
0
1
2
3
Head A
Head B
. Preamp
Preamp
+File data
-Write data
+Write gate
+Low current
TP13
TP14
TP3
TP9
TP12
TPll
None
None
TPA5
TPA4
TPB12
TPA6
TPAB
TPA9
+Erase gate
Erase current
None
TP24
TPA7
None
~~one
804,B05
B06, BOB
B09,009
003
B02
004
002
DOS
010
B07
OOB
013
012 Black
013 White
007
802
B05
806
804
010
Phototransistor
TP16
c-;o
~,
____________~~
b
•
I
•
1
--,
-l
I
I
I
I
I
I
--1---,
1
13
------- - - ---- - - - -
I
002
-----~ 802
To ac Distribution
II Signal cable
"
Fi Ie cable
I I
~~~~
I
I
I
~U4
File Control Card (Continued)
Two types of disk FC cards are used.
See page 204·1 for details.
002
003
TP15
TP7
+ Access 0
+ Access 1
+ Access 2
TP4
+ Access 3
TP6
004
005
Bl0
010
Bll
2803
MPU
Disk
Drive
Cable
Disk FC Card X 1
013
_ TP18
Phase 0
A
~
~
~
003
White
(White)
_ TP21
Phase 1
B02
Red
(Red)
Phase 2
TP20
TP19
1
TP1
Head Load
Magnet
Driver
+ Head Engage TP10
•
-5V
•
TP5
TP23
+ Index Pul se TP2
+5 Vdc 1\""_
I
-
-
I
~
0
B05
Blue
B04
Yellow
Head Loa
- --
TP22
005 Black
TP16
YellowB07
LED
BlackSOn - - -
TP17
t1
Index
Ampl ifier-J
"'8"
Black
TP8
Phototr
B09
- -
008
Yellow
Lr
Interlock Switch
B04
B02
806
B05
+ Erase Gate
Erase
Driver
TP24
D12Black
Read/Write
Head
I
TP9
- Write Data
+ Low Current _ TP 11
010 Red
I
.
007
+ File Data TP3
Limit.
Amplifier
~Differentiator!··
D13Whit(,
r--L.
Read/ I
j preampJ::
TP13 1
TP14
I
I
-
----cvJ
r-J
~
~
0000 ~ 009
Write
Driver
TP12
+ Write Gate
-
----\)
002 Black
(Black)
+24 Vdc
Stepper Motor
~ ~OOO
004
Yellow
(Yellow)
Phase 3
9g
Write
Select
013 White
q~~.
gJ
-
1
I
I
012 Black
~
I
Line 1
21
31
41
51 61
004 002 003 812 013 010
I
I
I
I
I
I
+ Std Data _.J
I I I
I I
+ Std Clock- - ..J
I I I I
+ 4F Clock- - __ ...J
I I I
+4F Phase2------ J
I I
I
+ V F0 Data Sync - - - - - - .J
+ Ignore Window High Gain - - - - J
Planar 8
VFO Card Socket 8
CE Test Points TP13 and TP14
20-400 mV (all O's)
10-300 mV (alil's)
1 See page 204·3 for a diagram of disk FC card Y.
2 This diagram shows how +5 Vdc is supplied to
disk 2 only. Disk 1 gets +5 Vdc via a direct
wire from power supply terminal TP4 to disk
FC card 803.
204
3742 ML
204-2
204-3
·204 File Control Card (Continued)
Two types of disk FC cards are used.
See page 204-1 for details.
Disk FC Card V 1
Cable
+
002
TPB8
TPB9
Access 0
+ Access 1
003
004
005
Access 3
Phase 1
Phase 2
Phase 3
+
010
Bll
Head Engage
Head Load
Magnet
Driver
TPB13
7' TPA12
-5V
(
I
f
+
TPB7
+5 Vdc
A
v
B02
B06
B05
B08
007
004
Yellow
TPBl
002
Black
B05
Blue
B04
Yellow
Index Pulse
• Elase Gdte
I
Amplifier]
TPB 14
TPA7
TPA6
TPA9
TPA8
- Write Data
+ Low Current
+ Write Gate
Erase
Driver
'~V'
·;>.-4-9.3K
,~Jumper
I
Planar B
11 21 31 41 51 61
004 002 003 B12 013 010
I
I
I
I
I
I
+ Std Data _-1
I I
I I
+ Std Clock- _..J
I I I
+ 4 F Clock - - - - .-J
I I
+ 4F Phase 2 - - - - - - J
+ VFO Data Sync - - - - __ .J
+ Ignore Window High Gain - - - -
I
I
I
I
I
VFO Card·Socket B
I
J
BO~Photot
Yellow
DOW--
U:J
-r-J
Interlock Switch
r
I
012Black
ReadIWrlte
~
Head
~
I
.
L Illllt
Odferentlatorrt
Amplifll?f
TPA5,
-
t
JPrearnp
TPA4
c::
c
~
013 Whitt:-
~
013 White
1
Read
Wille
Select
'----
Line
-- -
cooon
~_
~
--
Head Loa
Black
010 Red
TPA3
...
TPB12
g
Yellow B07
LEO
Black B O n - - -
Write
Driver
II·
~
TPA2
'>~
CE Test Points TPA4 and TPA5
20-400 mV (all O's)
10-300 mV (all 1'5)
1
See page 204-2 for a diagram of disk FC card X.
2
This diagram shows how +5 Vdc is supplied to
disk 2 only. Disk 1 gets +5 Vdc via a direct
wire from power supply terminal TP4 to disk
FC card B03.
----\)
~~ ~OOO
005 Black
l
}-- \55K "-,
Steppel Motor
TPB4
250K TPB5
Index
--
l
+ F lie Data
1
TPA10-c:!:-
/~4
B04
TPB3
TPA11
2 B03
013
B02
Red
(Black)
+24 Vdc
~
g
TPAl
(Yellow)
~
Bl0
003
White
(Redl
'---'
MPU
TPB2
(White)
TPBlO~
TPB11~
+ Access 2
+
Phase 0
A
012 Black
-
-
----~
205 Index Amplifier Adjustment
This adjustment decreases the sensitivity of the index ampl ifier
to the LED light passing through the diskette. The LED light
passing through a diskette can cause multiple index pulses or no
index pulse per revolution.
Adjustment
The index amplifier input level can be changed by moving
jumper
on disk Fe card Y only. The senSitivity level
(jumper position) should not be decreased more than necessary
to ensure correct operation.
II
Disk
Fe Card Y
o-
II
D
Jumper
(PIN 1794401)
Normal Position
I
I
DgE~
Position 1
Position 2 _-!J~--------
12
11 10 9 -8
1
G
'-'
4 3
.OO.O~O.OO • • • • OO.OO.OOO.OOO • •
12 11 10
9
8 1
6
~
4
3 2
00 • • 0 0 . 0 . O • • '001. 0 . - 0 0 . 0 000 • • 0
'2
TPBl
1
O ••
1
uoICJc5).
BRow
A Row
TPAl
-
----------------------
Disconnect the jumper from the normal position and connect it to
position 1 or 2. Position 1 decreases the sensitivity of the index
amplifier to 115 of the original amount. Position 2 decreases the
sensitivity of the index amplifier to 1/25 of the original amount.
204·205
3742 ML
205
206
206
Disk Drive Service Position
207
Head Load Actuator (2240)
Service Check
Turn power off.
Open door.
Loosen (turn one revolution) two screws
holding door to disk drive cover.
Remove screw holding disk drive frame to
machine base.
Tip disk unit (bottom first) out of base and
hang on brackets.
Check for a visual clearance here
at all track positions.
,Diskette
Make sure diskette clears pressure pad when coil
is not energized. (Power down.)
Adjustment
Energize by jumpering TP22 to TP17 on
the FC card with a disk in the unit.
Adjust for visual clearance here
for tracks 0 through 77
and contact here
on all tracks.
Adjustment Screw,
Insert Tool Through
Hole in Cover.
When coil is not energized,
the pressure pad should.be
completely away from the disk.
CAUTION
Before closing
208
209
Head Adjustment Service Check
Place disk drive in service position (206),
Perform head load actuator service check (207).
Remove disk drive cover (221).
Use stepper motor wheelm to access head
carriage
down until stopped by lo~er
limit stop
Rotate disk drive hub so white sticker on outside diameter of hub is up. If white sticker is
not present, rotate hub so indented mark is up.
Loosen the phototransistor assembly
Install CE tool
it should contact carriage
su rface
Do not force.
Rotate stepper motor wheelmabout 900 into
phase 0 alignment with leadscrew wheel
'as shown:
CAUTION
Use only the materials listed below to clean
head and pressure pad.
Ii1
II.
II.
II ;
Head and Pressure Pad Cleaning
Procedure
With cover open, manually rotate stepper
motor wheel until carriage assembly is at
the upper limit stop.
a.
CAUTION
Do not allow pressure pad arm to snap against
head.
D
II
D
D
Top
View
Front
Pivot pressure pad arm away from head and
check pad for contamination. If contaminated,
use dry brush (PIN 2200106) to remove caked
deposits and to fluff pad.
:'itl5
111
1
I
CAUTION
Fluid treated cloth should not contact pressure
pad.
- While holding pressure pad arm out, clean
polished head surface with isopropyl alcohol
(PIN 2200200) applied to a clean cloth
(PIN 2108930).
Perform head load actuator service check (207).
II '
Check clearance
for GO with feeler gage
of thickness in thousandths shown on carriage
Check NO GO for nu mber shown at
+0.001" (0.0254 mm).
Do Head Adjustment (231) if anyone of the
above steps gives trouble.
If head adjustment was OK, position and
fasten phototransistor holder with mounting
screw so the raised edge is contacting but not
pressing against the CE tool.
Remove the CE tool.
Reinstall the disk drive cover (221) and test
the disk drive by' using the disk alignment
tracks on the CE test diskette (PIN 2455026).
Use MAP 2-11.
m.
m'
Legend
D
II
Phototransistor
II
Clearance number
CE tool
II
Lower limit stop
m
Upper limit stop
13
Bearing holding screws
m
Leadscrew
•
'"
Leadscrew wheel
II
II
Clearance (head-to-CE tool)
II
&1
Head carriage assembly
. . Clearance (stepper-to-Ieadscrew wheels)
Carriage Surface
Stepper motor wheel
Stepper motor bracket screws
210 (not used)
211 (not used)
3742 ML
208
212
212
213
VFO Card Location
1
80 RECORD LENGTH
J
K
(shown with
feature A)
Disk 1
Disk 2
L
a
A
M
N
P
Q
II
E
H
128 RECORD LENGTH
Disk 1
Disk 2
K
214
L
A
M
N
p
Q
R
II
3
128 RECORD LENGTH
J
Field installed ROS
Feature 128 (shown
with feature A)
K
II
L
A
M
N
p
Field UPdate
ROS for 128
Record Length
Align setscrew with flat surface of shaft and
tighten.
Replace belt.
Check belt tracking (215).
Replace fan belt and guard (note blade curvature).
G
11
a
Idler Assembly
Removal
- Remove belt. (216K)
- Remove idler assembly. (216E)
To replace, reverse procedure and check belt
tracking.
Belt Tracking
Belt must ride in the center of the drive and hub
pulleys when the drive pulley is rotated counterclockwise (as viewed from the pulley side).
Replacement
2
ROS feature
128 on pi anar
(shown with
feature A)
Removal
Power down.
Unplug motor cable. (216F)
Remove fan guard assembly (216M) by loosening screws at opposite corners (top screw must
be loosened through grillwork of fan guard
assembly).
Loosen screw, mark, and remove fan blade
(216L) (note blade curvature).
Remove drive belt. (216K)
Loosen setscrew and remove pulley. (216G)
215
R
F
B
Disk Drive Pulley and Belt
Q
R
Note:
This configuration will change
to look like configuration 2
if the MPU planar assembly
is changed as a FRU.
Disk 1
Disk 2
Drive Motor
Removal and Replacement
Power down.
Unplug motor cable. (216F)
Remove fan guard assembly (216M) by
loosening screws at opposite corners (top screw
must be loosened through grillwork of fan
guard assembly).
Loosen screw, mark, and remove fan blade (216L)
(note blade curvature).
Remove drive belt. (216K)
Loosen screws and remove guard plate. (216J)
Remove motor clips by loosening screws. (216H)
Remove motor through bottom of frame.
Loosen setscrew and remove drive pulley. (216G)
To replace, reverse procedure and check for belt
tracking.
ROS
Feature A
128
Adjustment
CAUTION:
Make sure the drive pulley setscrew is on the flat surface of the
motor shaft.
Adjust the drive pulley and idler positions so that
the belt is centered on the drive and hub pulleys.
You may have to form the idler pulley arm.
Note: Some disk drives have an idler pulley with
a narrower groove. To adjust belt tracking on this
type, loosen the screw and slide the idler so the
belt is centered on the drive and hub pulleys.
Removal and Replacement
Remove cover.
Remove drive belt. (216K)
Remove screw and pulley. (2160)
Remove shatt assembly. (216A)
Remove bearing retaining screws and bearing.
(216B)
Remove bearing and spacer. (216C)
CAUTION:
The front bearing must be flush
with front surface of baseplate.
To do this, tighten front bearing
retaining screws first. Seal on
bearing should face outside.
- To replace, reverse procedure and check belt
tracking.
216
Disk Drive Locations
On WT machines a fan (muffin) listed
in service aid (201), replaces the fan
blade (216L ) and guard (216M).
/
Legend
I
•
II
I
B-----------+~~~~~
at'-------------+;H--~~~+-~~~
I----------~~~~~~~~~~~--~
II---"-:!~
m----~~~~~~
GI-----------~+-~
•..••
.
II
II
Shaft assembly
Bearing retaining screw
Spacer
Pulley
Idler assembly
Motor cable
Drive pulley
Motor clip
Guard plate
Drive belt
Fan blade
Fan guard
Drive motor
Interlock
.---------~~~
a-------------~~~---~~
.----------------------II------~------------------------,
212-219
218 (not used)
219 (not used)
3742 ML
216
220
220
Disk Cover Interlock (216P)
Adjustment
Close the disk cover until it latches.
Loosen spring mounting screws.
Adjust the spring (upward) to activate the
switch. The switch may be overadjusted up
to .050".
Tighten spring mounting screws.
B09 n---er------1
808
Phototransistor
221
Disk Drive Cover
Removal and Replacement
CAUTION:
Avoid damage to the two
twisted pairs of wires.
Remove the two pivot pins. (224E)
Remove cover carefully.
Remove wires from head load actuator ,(2240)
and LED assembly. (224C)
Release cable clamp holding wires to cover.
To replace, reverse procedure.
The yellow wire goes to LED terminal
marked Y.
CAUTION
Before closing
CAUTION:
222
Make sure that correct wires
are connected to the LED.
Collet Assembly
Removal and Replacement
Power down.
- Remove disk drive cover.
- Remove collet assembly mounting screw. '(224B)
- To replace, reverse procedure.
223
LED Assembly
Removal and Replacement
Power down.
Remove disk drive cover.
Remove LED assembly mounting screws. (224A)
To replace, reverse procedure.
224
Disk Cover Locations
Legend
..,
II
a
m-----
I
LED assembly mounting screws
Collet assembly mounting screws
LED assembly
Head lead actuator
Cover pivot
11---
m----'-~
220-224
3742 ML
224
225
225
Leadscrew and Head Carriage Assembly Removal and Replacement
Removal
- Center head carriage assembly (226G) on leadscrew by moving stepper motor wheel (226M).
Loosen limit stop clamping screws (226C and J).
Remove stepper motor and bracket assembly by
removing screws (226N) holding stepper motor
bracket to baseplate.
Loosen clamping screw in leadscrew wheel
(226L) and remove wheel.
Remove bearing holding screws (226K).
- Note location of wires to head before removi ng
cable. Press down with small screwdriver to release terminals.
1t1..!::::...-_~~-Green
Red
Black
White
_ Slide leadscrew down until top is free; tip and
remove upward.
Remove the following from the leadscrew.
SPRING WASHER RETAINER
(2260)
SPRING WASHER
(226R)
(226S)
UPPER BEARING
(226C)
UPPER STOP
LOWER STOP
(226J)
Replacement
- Check for 0.020 ± 0.015" clearance at (226T).
Rethread if necessary.
- Center head carriage assembly (226G) on leadscrew.
Install limit stops (226C and J) on each end of
leadscrew with limit stop projections pointing
toward head assembly as shown in (226),
- Install top bearing on leadscrew (226S).
Install spring washer, concave side up (226R).
Install retainer (2260).
Install total assembly. Put bottom of leadscrew
in place first.
Install lower bearing (226J) with holding screws.
(226K) Check for about 0.030" up and down
movement of leadscrew against spring washer
force.
- Slip leadscrew wheel (226L) on leadscrew.
Install head wires into connector.
Install stepper motor and bracket with screws
(226N).
Do the stepper motor adjustment (230).
II
I
I
11--------:
11---------------a--------------,~~
II------'--r--r-'
.r-------..:...--~~
m----------~--·~
I
I•
It)
II
II
·DI----+--~_I___+_4rn1l
B-----
•
Phototransistor
CE tool
Upper limit stop
Leadscrew
Carriage surface
Clearance (head-to-CE tool)
Head carriage assembly
Clearance number
Lower limit stop
Bearing holding screws
Leadscrew wheel
Stepper motor wheel
Stepper motor bracket screws
Clearance (stepper-to-Ieadscrew wheels)
Spring washer retainer
Spring washer
Upper bearing
Clearance
IJ------~~
11--
.--------------~
225-228
227 (not used)
228 (not used)
3742ML
226
229
229
230
Stepper Motor
Removal and Replacement
- Power down.
- Remove wires by pressing down with small
screwdriver to release terminals.
Stepper Motor Adjustment
(Perform with disk drive unit in upright position)
II
- Loosen the two screws
holding stepper
motor bracket to baseplate.
- Move stepper motor away from the leadscrew
II
=I>.l_ _-Black
Loosen screw in leadscrew wheel. and
slide wheel up on leadscrew so wheels can
rotate without touching.
Rotate wheels to obtain this relationship.
Puilleadscrew wheel down until pins on stepper
motor wheel fit into notches on leadscrew
wheel. -----,.
Yellow
Remove stepper motor and bracket assembly
by removing screws (230N) holding stepper
motor bracket to baseplate.
To replace, reverse procedure and do stepper
motor adjustment. Use the 'Stepper Motor
Adjustment' procedure (230).
Top View, Front
SI ide stepper motor bracket toward leadscrew
unti I pins contact notches.
Tighten two screws that mount stepper motor
bracket to baseplate.
Push leadscrew wheel up until wheels rotate
without touching.
- Engage drive pins with wheels in this position.
Stepper
motor
Top View, Front
Rotate stepper motor wheel by hand four revolutions. If any binding of the wheels is felt,
reinstall the CE tool
repeat, the stepper
motor adjustment while maintaining correct
clearance . . .
Do the head adjustment (231).
II '
Head Locations
231
Head Adjustment (for track 00)
CAUTION
Test diskette before adjusting.
Note: If leadscrew wheel has been replaced,
the slot should be 25-40% full with IBM #23
grease.
Position the stepper motor and leadscrew
wheels to Phase 0 relationship by rotating the
stepper motor wheel.
Place disk drive in service position (206).
Remove disk drive cover (221).
Loosen clamping screw in lower limit stop
(230J).
Using stepper motor wheel (230M), access head
carriage assembly (23OG) down by hand until
the lower limit stop (23OJ) is pressed against
the frame and the head carriage is against the
lower limit stop.
Loosen mounting screw and move phototransistor holder (230A) to the left so it will
not interfere with CE tool.
Loosen clamp on leadscrew wheel (230L).
Note: Arrow molded into bottom of the
stepper wheel.
Phase 0
Top View, Front
fnstall CE tool (230B).
Rotate tool until it contacts surface (230E).
Rotate disk drive hub so white sticker on outside diameter of hub is up. If white sticker is
not present, rotate hub so indented mark is up.
Using upper limit stop (230C), rotate leadscrew
(230D) to obtain correct clearance (230F),
between head and CE tool.
To properly make the head adjustment, you must
obtain three simultaneous conditions:
Correct head-to-CE tool clearance.
2.
Correct relationship between the stepper
motor and leadscrew wheels.
3.
Correct clearance between the stepper motor
and leadscrew wheels.
Determine type of stepper assembly (below)
and check/adjust for the specified clearance
(236P) between the stepper motor and leadscrew wheels for the type used.
II
J. _ , Leadscrew wheel
White~ U n U_. .025"± .005"
~-
'--___-1"""'Black --4-
.
_
l
U.[l U -
Steel. PI:=;:--:~
White
-
(0.635±0.127mm)
Stepper motor
wheel
.020" + 005"
(0.508-+' 0.127mm)
-
Position and fasten phototransistor holder with
mounting screw so raised edge is contacting
but not pressing against CE tool.
Remove CE tool.
Rotate stepper wheel four revolutions and check
for binding. If binding occurs and clearance
(230P) is correct, replace leadscrew wheel and
stepper motor assembly.
Do the lower limit stop and upper limit stop
adjustments, (232 and 234).
Reinstall disk drive cover (221) and test disk
drive by using the disk alignment tracks on the
CE test diskette PN 2455026. See Display Data
Head Alignment Service Check (page 8-1).
III
CAUTION
Avoid any contact of CE tool with face (highly
polished front surface) of head.
1.
If all three conditions are correct, securely tighten
the leadscrew clamping wheel. (Use the short end
of an allen wrench in the screw). If all three conditions are not correct, repeat this procedure
(231 ) starting after 'I nstall CE tool'.
Note: This clearance is marked on the front
of the head assembly (230H). The number
represents the clearance in thousandths of an
inch. On late level heads, this number is molded
into the plastic carriage and is always 3. Make
adjustment for a slight drag using a clean, undamaged feeler gauge.
Make sure CE tool is touching surface (230E)
of head carriage (2300) while obtaining
clearance (230F).
You should now have the following simultaneous
conditions:
1.
Correct head-to-CE tool clearance.
2.
Phase 0 relationship between the stepper
motor and leadscrew wheels.
3.
Specified clearance between stepper motor
and leadscrew wheels.
3742 ML
231
232
232
Lower Limit Stop Adjustment
Be sure that head is adjusted for track 00 and
that readscrew and stepper motor wheels
and.are in this position for track 00.
D
Stepper
Top View, Front
Make sure lower limit stop clamping screw is
loose.
Move the head carriage assembly down by rotating stepper motor wheel about 90 0 until the
wheels are in this position.
Top View, Front
(Two corner projections and the arrow on the
. stepper motor wheel. should point toward
the front of the disk drive.)
Position lower limit stop so that its projection
is in front of and contacts the head carriage
assembly stop projection as shown below.
- Tighten lower limit stop clamping screw while
maintaining 0.012" ± 0.003" between lower
limit stop projection and bottom of head carriage assembly. - - - - - - - - - -
- There must
be clearance
between the
stop and
-
Remove CE tool.
Front View
;l~
Upper Limit Stop Adjustment
Start this procedure from rear of disk drive.
Loosen clamping screw in upper limit stop (232C).
Move head carriage assembly (232G) up by turning
stepper motor wheel (232M); continue until upper
limit stop body is pressed against disk drive
frame by head carriage assembly. (Make sure
limit stop projection is clear of top surface of
head carriage assembly.)
Move head carriage assembly down by turning
stepper motor wheel to first phase 0 . - - - - - ' 7
Top View, Front
Position upper limit stop so its projection is
behind the head carriage assembly, and clamping screw faces directly back as shown below.
Tighten clamping screw while maintaining
0.030" ± 0.005" between stop body and top
of head carriage assembly.---.....
Rear View
Install cover.
Install disk drive.
232-236
233 (not used)
235 (not used)
236 (not used)
3742 ML
234
237
237
Disk Top Cover Vertical Alignment Checks
iii :
If the machine has eccentric bolts
Loosen the eccentric-bolt locking nuts.
Loosen the clamping screw
Make required adjustment by turning the
eccentric bolts.
Tighten the clamping screw
Tighten the eccentric-bolt locking nuts.
Perform 238 if necessary
...
Door
..... __ .-
_
a.
>- -}
a .
~----
I
Top Cover
-----j-
____________
m
If the machine has a bar-type bracket
instead
of the eccentric bolts
- Loosen two screws in the ba~m .
- Loosen the clamping screw
Make the required adjustment by moving the
drive u nit about. When it is in position,
tighten the clamping screw.
Raise the bar to seat against the base of the
drive unit and tighten the two screws in the
bar.
Perform 238 if necessary.
D:
II .:
238
.......<:..~-_. Door
.
-~-J
Top C o v e ' l Good
~--------------------~~~~.DOO'
Topcove,-=C L- - - , ]
Bad
Top Cover ~JJ
.
Bad
Disk Door Lateral Adjustment
II
Loosen the four bracket mounting screws
Move the lower bracket right or left to center
the door
Tighten the four bracket mounting screws.
Perform 237 if necessary.
D
~rn
dl
=:==-==5]~or
239
uata:set LaDel .-ormat
(Fields in heavy lines are required by the 3740
system.)
Any operation may be selected from read in·
dex mode.
Record advance or record backspace to read
and display any label on the index track (00).
Data set labels are 08 through 26 on the index
track.
To select a data set, record advance, or record
backspace to the label (00 08 through 00 26)
containing the desired data set, then select a
machine mode.
All operations must be performed within the
boundaries of the selected data set.
4
1
I I I
II I I I I I
HDR1
1411421431
1451
I I
27
23
I I I I I I 1I
29
I I 1-1
Data Set Name
I I I
J
13
6
Record
Length
33
35
39
.I I I I
I I I I
Beginning'
of Extent
1731
-1
End
of Extent
t75
79
I I
I
End of Data
Multivolume Inaicator
File Protect
. ..
AccesSibility
L--_ _ _ _ Bypass Data Set
L-
' - - Verify Mark
Error
Code
B
Type
Mode
Causes
Note: You must press FUNCT SEL lower, M and REC
Incorrect Data
Set Label
AOV after making correction to the label.
X
BOE is greater than EOE or EOO.
Reset and correct the BOE, EOE, and/or EOO.
X
BOE is less than track 01, sector 01.
Reset and correct the BOE.
X
EOE is greater than track 74, sector 26.
Reset and correct the EOE.
X
EOO is greater than EOE + 1.
Reset and correct the EOD and/or the EOE.
X
EOD is greater than track 75, sector 01.
Reset and correct the EOO.
X
Record length is 00 or greater than 128.
Reset and enter the correct record length.
X
BOE, EOE, or EOO sector number is 00 or is
greater than 26.
Reset and enter the correct sector number.
X
The third position in the BOE, EOE; or EOO is
not a zero.
Reset and insert a zero in the third position.
X
Data is entered in positions 23 and/or 24.
Delete data entered in these positions.
X
One of the following conditions existetl when
you tried to select a mode from the Index track:
The current sector address displayed in the
status Iine is either: 01, 02, 03, 04, 05, 06, or 07.
Position 4 in the label doesn't contain a 1.
The data set label has been deleted.
R
240 not used
241 not used
What You Do
A card read function was selected in a data set
that had a label containing a B in position 41
(bypass indicator).
Reset and press REC ADV to locate the desired label.
Reset, enter a 1 in position 4 of the label.
Change to another label or enter an undeleted label.
Advance to a data set with a valid label and reinitiate the
card read function.
Remove the bypass indicator. If a card read was initiated
while in the enter or update modes, the EOD was not updated to reflect the new records. To recover the data,
change the EOD to equal the EOE. Search the data set
for the last record written, press R EC ADV, note the current disk address from the status line, return to the index
track, and change the EOD to the correct address.
3742 Ml
237-241
239
242
242
Leadscrew Service Check
leadscrew Bind
Service Checks:
244
Machine Locations
l
Leadscrew nut
service check
.020" ± .01 5"
::::;::::t==-;.ft;J
I
_I
Leadscrew wheel
~0.025" ± 0.005
White~ (0.635 mm ± 0.127 mm)
Black
Steel
Pin~wheel
0.020" ± 0.015" --....t
White
Spring washer service
check. Check for about
.030" up and down move·
ment of leadscrew against
spring washer.
243
Stepper motor
.
(0.508 mm ± 0.381 mm)
Leadscrew wheel and stepper motor service
check.
Determine type of stepper assembly and
check for the specified clearance for type used.
Phototransistor Assembly
.Adjustment
Access to track O.
Remove cover. if necessary.
Loosen mounting screw. and move phototransistor assembly to left.
Install CE tool as shown at right.
Adjust phototransistor assembly so that raised
edge is in contact with. not pressing against.
tool.----------------I
Tighten mounting screw.
Remove CE tool.
Replace cover.
Removal and Replacement
Remove cover. if necessary.
Remove two mounti ng screws (234A).
Remove leads. (Yellow wire goes to
terminal marked Y.)
To replace, reverse procedure.
Install CE tool by
-+---i-- screwi ng thu mbscrew
into drive hub.
rl.-.....;-.--t~'"--w-,.-0=1:.---1
Rotate CE tool
so it contacts
this surface.
Legend
I
Power supply ac cables
Terminal board (TB1)
211"5
"mings
The following chart provides appoximate timing information for search, copy I and initial ization operations on the
3742. Timings are shown for the normal sector sequence
(1, 2, 3, ..... 25, 26) and for the alternate sector sequence (1, 3, 5, ..... 25, 2,4, ... 24, 26). The timings
provided in the chart should serve as a useful guide when
relative job timing must be considered.
The timings are based on 80 character records. Timing
can be affected by such things as disk speed, length and
location of search masks, and the location of data sets on
the disk.
TIMING CHART
Operation
Normal Sector
Sequence (01)
Disk 1
Disk 2
Alternate Sector
Sequence (02)
Disk 1
Disk 2
7 sec
7 sec
7 sec
7 sec
949 (assume
EOO is 37014)
4 sec
4 sec
4 sec
4 sec
400 (assume
EOO is 16001)
2 sec
2 sec
2 sec
2 sec
1898
9 sec
9 sec
9 sec
9 sec
949
7 sec
7 sec
7 sec
7 sec
400
4 sec
4 sec
4 sec
4 sec
1898
4 min
6 min
5min
6min
949
2min
3min
3min
3min
400
1 min
1 min
30 sec
1 min
1 min
30 sec
------ ..
2min
............
2min
........-
Image copy
1898 plus
index track
4 min
_._...
10 min
---
Data set
copy
949
11 min
_.---
9min
......
Data set
copy
400
4min
----_.
4min
--_...
Search end
of data
Search on
sequential
content
Search on
content
Disk
Initialization
Number of
Records
1898 (Assume
EOO is 74001)
242-245
3742 ML
245-1
245-2
This page intentionally left blank_
301
Part Numbers and Cause Codes
Part Name
Number
IR Code
Ac Line Filter
Brightness control
Chassis and CRT
assembly
Converter
CRT socket
assembly
Display PC board
2192519
2455605
600-07
200-04
2455625
2455603
200-02
200-03
2455699
200-06
200-05
Display signal
cable
Power Supply
dc cable
Power Supply
PC board
Yoke assembly
See Parts
Catalog
2456372
100-05
2456361
100-08
See Parts
Catalog
2455601
600-04
200-07
Cause Codes
301-303
Adjustment
Bent
Damaged
Defective
01 Dirty
07 Grounded
20 Loose
21
Open
22 Short
28 Worn
34
42
46
70
302 (not used)
303 (not used)
3742 ML
301
304
304
CRT Locations
legend
I
I
•
II
•
II
II
I
C~T, hig~
vol,tage anode
Display signal cable
Display PC board
Yoke cable "connector
Chassis and CRT assembly
Yoke assembly
Converter
CRT socket assembly
Brightness control
Centering rings
DANGER:
1'2,000 Vdc
Power down.
Ground both the CRT high voltage anode and
the anode wire to the frame
Display unit is safely grounded only if the
mounting screws are tight.
If the anode wire is disconnected from the
CRT, touch the shorting tool against the
anode wire connector to ground it again.
Do not apply power to the display unit
while it is out of its mounting brackets.
11
Blu
Plant---
I
Date---
!BtlilR
BlU
GRAY
PN--------
:
EC~-
(Back side)
W/Or
-W/Or
W/Or
j
BLK
YOW
1
2
3
4
~--A_"-
Character Yoke
Brightness Control
Converter
Save the clamping ring, it is
not part of the yoke assembly
CRT Socket
Pin
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Wire
Color
Brown
Black
Red
Orange
Unused
Unused
Yellow
Brown
PC Board
Terminal
16 or 18
14
8
15
17
18 or 16
~.
~."
,.
\
Wires~'"
ote: Disconnect
9, 10, 11 before removing
display unit.
No"
'
':"~~T-__
''I.-/
//
.,UO Yoke Adjustment
The objective is to align and center the display in
the viewing mirror.
I
Due to high voltage (12,000 Vdc
and 400 Vdc) in the display unit,
use cauti on.
DANGER:
Alternate adjustment methods (power on and
power off) are described below. (The power on
method is recommended.):
Power Off Method
Power On Method
1.
2.
3.
Power down.
Ground CRT anode.
Loosen the clamping screw and slide the
yoke into contact with the fat part of the
CRT.
Orient the yoke with the wires away from
the PC board . •
Using just your fingertips on the screwdriver handle, tighten the clamping screw.
Then tighten the screw 1/8 of a turn more.
The yoke can now be rotated about the
CRT neck, but stays in any desired position.
Power up. After warming up, the display
status line should show XN.
Adjust the brightness control II to get a raster
which is clearly visible but is not too bright
and is not enlarged.
Rotate the yoke to make the display
straight on the viewing mirror.
II
I
1.
2.
3.
II
4.
5.
4.
5.
I
CRT
6.
7.
Anode and anode wire
12,000 Vdc
8.
Note: The voltage on the yoke is 12 Vdc.
9.
II
fJ
II
6.
7.
8.
9.
II
Rotate the centering rings
on the end of
the yoke to center the display on the viewing mirror.
Power down.
Ground CRT anode.
Loosen the clamping screw
and slide the
yoke into contact with the fat part of the
CRT. •
Orient the yoke with the wires away from
the PC board . •
Using just your fingertips on the screwdriver handle, tighten the clamping screw.
Then tighten the screw 1/8 of a turn more.
The yoke can now be rotated about the
CRT neck, but stays in any desired position.
Power up. After warming up, the display
status line should show XN.
to get a raster
Adjust the brightness control
which is dearly visible but is not too bright
and is not enlarged.
If adjustment is needed, power down and
ground the CRT high voltage anode to discharge the high voltage power supply . •
Rotate the yoke and/or the centering ringsEt
(on the end of the yoke) to correct the
position of the raster on the viewing mirror.
Power up. After warming up, the display
line status should show XN .•
Repeat steps 7 through 9 until the adjustment is satisfactory.
10.
11.
II
Note: Sit in the operator's chair to observe
the display. The center of the viewing
mirror can be judged only when viewed
from the operator's viewpoint.
ClamPin g
screw
u
' - - - - 400 Vdc
304,305
3742 ML
305
306
306
308
Circuit Diagram
Circuit Board
MPU
High
Voltage
Oscillator
Converter
Pins
High Voltage Anode Lead
1
~>- - - , - -1 t-T - ~~
1.
,+,
2
(")( t'>
~--<
~
J
<:4 ~1
3
'-" ">--, ...L.
I------ --
4
~ - -,
5
B08
B09
~ Feed
1
1
1
I
~ '- - -,
Back -
I
-
.~
-!- -.
13
400 volts de
-I-- •
'- - - -
h
~
7
~
006
007
008
2
_I_::r
~ - -' (oscillator)
'------ 6
012
013
(12.000 volts)
___
~-,:-: ~-
High Voltage
Ground
Brightness
Control
8
400 volts de
9
Horizontal
Brightness
Control
Potentiometer
10
11
Master
II
J/I
Character Yoke
\
character 12
+12 volts de
(wiggle
~~----'C":"h":'a::'r":'ae'::t:":e::"r:::Y;;.o,-ke-------+---I\r--..,
Wiggle Control
B05-
MPU Locations
sweep)
13
~'l!.r21- -
14
~
Wiggle Sweep Pulses
~
I
:
Slave
r- !'"
!? ";
:
Horizonta
CRT
~--~:~:----------~~~I~ ~
-±- CRT
Yoke
V;d~oo;i - ~_17_ _V_i_d_eo_ _ _-_-_F_r_8_m_e_-+-,
~m21!.!!e~_
Cross Connectors
307
E
+12 volts de
F
+12 volts de
Cable Extender
legend
II
B
•
13
Loosen the cable clamp to permit connecting
the cable to the extender without strain.
309
Power supply PC board
AC line filter
Power supply dc cable
Machine locations
401
Part Numbers and Cause Codes
Part Name
Number
IR Code
ac line filter
Audio feedback
device
Cover, bottom
Cover, top
219519
600-07
1611403
2455127
See Parts
Catalog
See Parts
Catalog
See Parts
Catalog
040-02
040-00
040-04
Key module
KBD PC board
KBD signal cable
No.1
No.2
Space Bar module
2455729
2456360
See Parts
Catalog
1620065
Toggle switch
Toggle switch cable
3sw
2455148
4sw
2456292
040-08
040-07
100·01
100-01
040-09
040-03
040-01
040-01
Cause Codes
306-309
401-403
Adjustment
Bent
Damaged
Defective
Dirty
22 Short
46
07 Grounded
20 Loose
21 Open
28 Worn
70
01
34
42
402 (not used)
403 (not used)
3742 ML
401
407
407
Keyboard Disassembly!Assembly
and Locations
Important! Work cleanly. The keyboard assem·
bly MUST be kept free of dirt.
Lay the keyboard down on its key tops and reo
move 6 screws from the bottom.
CAUTION
Do not disassemble the unit yet. If a key
happens to be pressed, the flyplate will jump
out of the key module.
Hold the keyboard in away to keep all components in place, and turn it over so that the
key tops are up.
CAUTION
Be sure no keys are pressed. Lift the all keys
unit and lay it on a smooth, clean surface. I!
the all keys unit is lifted and a key has been
pressed, the flyplate of the pressed key will
jump out of its module.
Space Bar Removal
Hold the ends of the space bar and pull up to
slide the bar off the key stems.
If pivots need to be removed, insert a screwdriver tip in the slot in the side of the frame an~
twist the screwdriver slightly until the pivot
is removed.
Space Bar Installation
Press the pivots into place in the frame.
Place the space bar in position over its key
modules.
Guide the stabilizer into the slots in the pivots.
Press the space bar down onto the key stems.
Ei)
rC"'lh r,~
Chassis
III ' "
Lift the all keys unit, leaving the loosened
modules.
Key Module Installation
1----- Frame
~1------
Space Bar
- - - - - - Stabilizer
1----- Pivot
To reassemble the keyboard, follow the above
instructions in reverse order.
Key Module Removal
CAUTION
The keyboard baseplate (407N) has a projection
that should fit through holes in insulation (407M)
and contact the PC board (407G). Be sure the
base plate is assembled correct side up. Incorrect
assembly might result in a ground circuit failure
that intermittently causes extra characters.
Lift one edge of the all keys unit about 0.5
in (12.7 mm) and push and wiggle the failing
key modules down until they snap free. If
the keyboard has a contamination sh ield, note
that the module retaining ears must clear the
chassis as shown, but they are not visible.
Disassemble the keyboard.
Use the key top pulling tool to lift the key top
buttons from the key positions to be removed.
CAUTION
Be sure that no keys are pressed.
Set the key module upright and place the all
keys unit in position over it. Align the slot in
the module with the orientation lug in the
mounting hole.
Press down on the ends of the atl keys unit to
snap the module into place.
Position the contamination shield if required.
Reassemble the· keyboard.
407
Legend
All-keys assembly
Key top
Key module
Flyplate
Toggle switch
Toggle switch cable
Keyboard PC board
Keyboard signal cable
Audio feedback device
Pad area
Probe points
Insulator
Base plate
Keyboard DisassemblylAssembly and Locations (Continued)
II
----II
Projections on
these plates provide continuity
_ _ _ _ _ _ Part Number
and EC Level
•
I
CAUTION
Square pins misaligned
may damage connector.
r
- - --PN5
----55
- -- GND
- - -KSW
I
',-- CV
::..--CD
II:
II.
'I,
'1.
:: I
(;~D,.
55
C"
•
c~
III
SA CLOSED
THRSHLD
I
•
'
lO INPUl
c::: : .: : : : ::J
.--0-.-SAClOSED
Keyboard Cable Chart
2
13
404 not used
405 not used
406 not used
0
B
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
.0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
B02
B03
B04
B05
B06
B07
B08
B09
Bl0
Bl1
B12
B13
SPEED SELECT Switch
PROG NUM SHI FT switch
AUTO DUP/5KIP switch
AUTO REC ADV switch
- Bit 2
- Bit4
- Bit 6
+ 5V Power
+ 5V 7 - J,lS Osc
- Power on Reset
+ 10.8 Hz 5V Osc
- Error
D02
D03
D04
005
D06
D07
D08
D09
Dl0
Dll
- BitO
+ 8.5V Power
- Bit 1
- Bit3
- 5V Power
- Bit 7
Ground
- R Time
+ Busy Tone
+ Keyboard Data
Gate Out
D 12 Katakana Shift Bitl
013 - Bit5
1 Present only on Katakana machines.
3742ML
404-407
407-1
410
41 0
CI icker Service Check
See 407J for location.
0
0.005" + 0 .001 "
(0.127 + o. 025 mm)
,
ic
t'--..
,1/
~I
~
Old Style
New Style
Service check; not for adjustment.
0.010" +0.000"
-0.010"
(0.25 - 0.25 mm)
411
Keyboard Switch Circuits
PC board B & 0
test points
toggle switch
cable
Signal
cable
~
~
OFF
AUTO REC ADV
AUTO OUP/SKI P
PROG NUM SHIFT
KATAKANA SHIFT r -.......-f-~~>--....-..t
(Katakana machines OFF'
only)
012
~:>-+-+-----J~-Kata shift
Keyboard PC Board
Note: The up position is open circuit on the
KATAKANA SHIFT switch only, all others
are shown in the down position.
bit
MPU
414
Flyplate Replacement
- Tape the keystem in the down position.
Replacing a dislodged flyplate in a key module
is not recommended. However, if replacement
is necessary because a new key module is not
available, inspect the flyplate to make sure the
joint between the spring and flyplate is not loose
or the flyplate is not cracked or damaged.
Form the spring on the flyplate so that there
is 0.5 inch between the ends of the spring.
I". ,·,,1,101,
L,
j
Jd
0101
Remove the key button from the key module
and remove the module from the keyboard.
Holding the key module and flyplate as
shown, line up the ends of the flyplate
spring 1 with the tips of the flat spring
2 attached to the keystem.
I nsert a small stylus or straightened paper
clip through one of the access holes in the
key modu Ie 3 .
Push the tip of the flat spring up on the inside
of the flyplate spring.
Ease the flat spring down until the tab drops
into the slot of the flyplate spring.
Attach the other end of the spring in the same
way.
Carefully remove the tape holding the keystem.
Check the keystem ears for taper in the center
slot and form the ears if necessary.
;..;..:...--3
Right
Wrong
~
~
A
A
- Install the key modu Ie in the keyboard.
408
409
412
413
408-414
(not used)
(not used)
(not used)
(not used)
3742 ML
414
415
CE Mode
Key Codes
D'~K
D'SIC 2
REe
copy
02
01
2E
38
ENTER
UPDATE
VfJHf"
03
OE
05
Example: For the 7/M key,
27 is the character code for
no shift key pressed. The
fi rst character of the CE
mode code is a 2. The second character is a 7. Bit
lines B07, 002, 004, and 005
should be up (+), and bit lines
B06, BOB, 007, and 013
shou Id be down (-) _ •
First Character of
CE Mode Code
o
--
1
2
3
4
5
6
9
A
SlARCH
o
07
08
----:=~
20
PRQG
LOAD
DELETE
RfC
20
OA
DISPLAY
DISPLAY DISPLAY
PROO
PIIOG
DATA
STAT
2C
OC
layout for
Proof Keyboard
GO
ooloo{oo 01 01
00 00 00
66 00 00 27 00 07 00 00 00 00
i
00 00 04 02 00 00 00 00 02 00
Bit Line Levels
Up (+) and Down
(-) Bit Lines
Second Character of
CE Mode Code
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
(-) Bit Lines
o
1
2
3
4
5
6
.7
467
5
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
8
9
A
B
C
o
E
+
-
Up (+) and Down
B07 BOB 007 013
B06 002 004 005
2
0
1
3
-
-
-
Reset Key
+
+
- - - --.Note: A bit line off is up (+).
A bit line on is down (-).
I-- -
09
08 50
E
F
COUPOTE DIsPLAY
FdHO
FIELD
TOTALS TOTALS
SEAFICH
REluR..
~E.AACH
SEARCH
SEa
TO
ADDRESS
fOO
DNn ...
I..OEII
06
B
C
D,SI( ]
RET TO
'NO[x
Key Test Code Location
7
8
2
'1E(
AOY
8IC5o'
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
F
- - - - - _ ...... +-
+
+
--_.-
20
416Katakana CE Mode
Key Codes
02
01
DlSKZ
REC
MV
DISK 2
REC
IKSI'
cory
COMM
ENTEIII
uPDATE
03
OE
DISK 2
RET TO
INDElI
PRINT
REC
~ARCH SEAIICH SEARCH RETURN
SEQ
VERIFY SEARCH
TO
P.TEN ~lEN ADDRESS EOD
INDElI
05
07
01
01
20
011
PRINT
TO
EOD
COMPUTE DISPLAY DISPLAY DISPLAY
FIELD
TOTALS
FIELD
TOTALS
PROG
LOM
DELETE
REC
DISPLAY DISPLAY
PROD
PROG
STAT
20
0'"
2C
FIELD
PROG
FIELD
NAME
DISPLAY
DATA
DC
If
Example: For a failing M
key, 27 is the character code
for no shift key pressed. The
first character of the CE mode
code is a 2. The second character is a 7. Bit lines B07,
002,004, and 005 should
be up (+), and bit lines BOO,
B08, 007, and 013 should be
down (-).
First Character of
CE Mode Code
Key Test Code Location --.......,
08 50
oo,oo{oo 0101
66 00 00 ~7 00 07 00 00 00 00
00 00 04 02 00 00 00 00 02 00
Bit line levels
Up (+) and Down
(-) Bit Lines
Second Character of
CE Mode Code
B06 002 004 005
1
3
0
2
.
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
0
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
E
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
Up (+) and Down
(-) Bit Lines
B07 B08 007 013
7
5
6
4
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
A
B
+
c
+
0
E
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
9
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
F
F
+
Reset Key
Note: A bitiTneoff is up (+). A bit line on is down (-).
415-417
00 00 00
+
--
-----
+
+
-+- -
417 (not used)
3742 ML
416
418
418
Machine Locations
Viewer
IBM 3742
Dual Data Station
420
419
Disk Fe Card
Power Supply Locations
File Control Card
Disk
~~PU
+5Vdc to Disk 1(Yellow TP4. Black TP31
01
+5Vdc to Keyboard 1 (Black TP41
_
KBO
...
Kl
Test pin
location
path
Power Supply PC Board
F4
80
+
~
~24Vdc
.:
02
: :
13
:: I
6 Vdc Meter
Test
TP12
o
-5
o
F3
~8.5VdC
TP13
+6.3
Part Number and EC level
P/N---- EC--
421
EBCDIC Collating Sequence
Order
in the
Sequence
Group A - '
1
(lowest)
2
3
4
5
6
1
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
11
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
Disk 2 se arch
sequenti al
content will
work wit h
either Group
Aor Group
B but no t
both groups
before
ECA022
After EC A
022, disk 2
search is
like disk 1.
Group B
418·421
-
Character
Blank
CZ
<
(
+
I
€
!
.
$
)
;
-,
- (minus)
I
%
(Underscore)
Corresponding
Hexadecimal
Number
40
4A
4B
4C
40
4E
4F
50
5A
5B
5C
50
5E
5F
60
61
6B
6C
60
>
?
6E
6F
:
1A
1B
1C
10
#
@
(apostrophe)
-
..
1E
7F
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
31
38
39
40
41
42
43
A
B
·C
0
E
F
44
a
C1
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
C7
CB
C9
01
02
03
04
05
06
01
DB
09
EO
E2
E3
E4
E5
E6
E1
E8
E9
FO
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
26
21
45
46
41
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
51
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
(highest)
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
0
p
R
\
S
T
U
V
w
x
Y
Z
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
8
9
I
Disk 1 search
sequential con cent
- - - will work with
this group of
characters.
I
3742 ML
421·1
421·2
This page intentionally left blank.
501
Part Numbers and Cause Codes
Part Name
Number
IR Code
AC Line Filter
2192519
600.07
Cross Connector
2731026
300-02
Memory Socket Card
2455860
300-09
For card and planar part numbers, refer to the
following pair of facing pages (501 continued).
Cause Codes
501
Adjustment
Bent
Damaged
Defective
01
07
20
21
Dirty
Grounded
Loose
Open
22 Short
28 Worn
46
70
34
42
3742ML
501·1
501-2
501
(Continued)
Cards
VFO
Basic Memory
ROS Feature A (80 character)
ROS Feature A (128 character)
Proof Keyboard
Proof Keyboard and Feature
Group A (80 character)
Proof Keyboard and Feature
Group A (128 character)
Record Insert (80 character)
Record Insert (128 character)
IR Code
US, Canada, Italy, France (QWERTY)
and Germany (OWERTY)
Denmark
Finland/Sweden
Germany (OWERTZ)
Norway
United Kingdom
Spain
Japan
Portugal
Belgiom/France (AZERTY)
Latin America
Katakana
ASCII
Brazil
PN
300-07
300-05
300-06
300-06
8523120
8230516
2455108
2455545
300-06
1620159
300-06
1620161
300-06
300-06
300-06
1620162
2455492
2455493
Full Planar Assemblies (80 character)
Country
PN
PN
IR Code
PN
PN
8527646
85~4222
8238725
2456039
PN
2456218
2456219
300-03
PN
PN
PN
PN
2455313
2455320
2455319
2455321
2455317
2456209
2455639
2455640
2455677
2455831
1610601
5565798
5565799
1610635
1610636
2469523
2469532
2469533
2469524
2469525
2455315
2455326
2455322
2455323
2455324
2455832
2455833
2455834
2455835
2456211
1610637
1610638
1610639
1610640
1610641
2469526
2469527
2469528
2469529
2469530
2455325
1610669
1611358
2456214
2455670
1610642
2469531
2469307
2469534
PN
PN
PN
Full Planar Assemblies
Full Planar Assemblies (128 character)
IR Code
300-03
PN
PN
PN
PN
US
Canadai Italy, France (QWERTY), and
Germany (QWERTY)
Denmark
Fi nland/Sweden
Germany (QWERTZ)
Norway
2455807
2456125
1610650
2469:535
2455807
2455395
2455396
2455393
2455394
2456125
2456042
2456063
2456009
2456038
1610650
1610646
1610647
1610644
1610645
2469535
2469544
2469545
2469536
2469537
2469862
2469871
2469872
2469863
2469864
United Kingdom
Spain
Japan
Portugal
Belgium/France(AZE RTY)
2456019
2455397
2456020
2455541
2455392
2456149
2456064
2456185
2456122
2455957
1610651
1610648
1610652
1610649
1610643
2469538
2469539
2469540
2469541
2469542
2469865
2469866
2469867
2469868
2469869
Latin America
Katakana
ASCII
Brazil
2456021
1610667
1611363
2456187
2455669
1610653
2469543
2469870
2469546
2469873
Country
PN
PN
PN
Note: Part numbers are in ascending order, the
latest level is shown on the right. When replacing
a planar, check the part number of the removed
planar. Use that part number or a later level one.
The part number is on the connector shroud of the
a, D, F, or H connector on the module side of the
planar (504). The part number and EC number
may have been scratched out at one location and
an update part number and EC number etched on
the next location.
501-503
502 (not used)
503 (not used)
3742 ML
501-3
504
504
MPU Planar Assembly Removal/
Replacement Procedure
Cable connector
~/fl/
A ROS feature 128 card (or a ROS EC card)
field installed, is a part of the MPU planar
assembly FRU. The proper replacement MPU
planar will not require the use of the ROS
card (feature 128 or ROS EC).
J
/U
EC Number
See (501) for part numbers.
Part
Number_~~_A
Disconnect the cables.
Remove the cross connectors.
Remove the studs holding the VFO, memory, and
feature cards (use long-nosed pliers).
n
Planar Assembly
Remove the screws holding the planar assembly
(planar board, interposer cards, and stiffener)
to the gate.
Remove the planar assembly from the gate.
ROS Feature
Reverse the above procedure to reinstall and
restore to the original condition.
128
ROS feature card should be reinstalled on the
new planar assembly with cross connectors C
and D.
For WTC only, if memory jumpers are present,
check them for proper plugging:
For 128 character machines with one card
For 128 character machines with two cards
Featu re Card
~
~oss
connector
~mory Jumpers
~
These two jumpers must be installed for 128 character machines.
0
0
~ --trIDr
2
:
_
"
~
~
~
Some planar boards
have memory jumpers.
•1
10
3
10
5
10
7
10
13
:
13
F
9
........
........
-'"'--
n
•11
1
0
13
•2
0
4
0
6
0
8
o 1
10
•12
o 1
14
10
0
•3
•5
•1
•9
•4
•6
•8
•10
13
14
1
10
11
10
2
0 I
12
0 I
505
MPU Locations
MPU Cables
1
80 RECORD LENGTH
(shown with
feature A)
J
K
L
a
II
A
M
B
N
c
o
P
mE
II
K Disk 2
grnd B08 -----~~"
o
00
0
o
o0
" 0
" 0
"S" "g0
go
Q
R
F
N Display
grnd 008-----,.£;:91
~fD1'6
B 13
13
G
H
.. 2
2
R Keyboard 2
grnd 008 - -_ _ _-1::'
128 RECORD LENGTH
ROS feature
128 on planar
(shown with
feature A)
J Disk 1
grnd B08 -----.:J.~§l1
" :p
K
L
a
A
M
B
N
P
Q
. . Cross can nectars
R
3
128 RECORD LENGTH
J
Field installed ROS
Feature 128 (shown
with feature A)
K
II
L
A
M
ROS
-~---- Feature A
N
128
P
Field Update
ROS for 128
Record Length
Q
R
Note:
This configuration will change
to look like configuration 2
if the MPU planar assembly
is changed as a FRU,
504-507
506 (not used)
507 (not used)
3742 ML
505
508
508
Test Patterns
Planar
Test
Point
Ratio
H/Blank
Characters
The First Data Line*
no
jumpers
HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH
G-B13
H H H H H H H H H H H H H H H H H H H H
1/1
H-Bll
HH
2/2
G-B02
HHHH
G-B1O
HHHHHHHH
H-B06
HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH
H-D13
HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH
32/32
G-D12
HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH
64/64
HH
HH
HH
HHHH
HH
HH
HHHH
HH
HH
HHHH
HHHHHHHH
HH
HH
No blanks
HHHH
4/4
HHHHHHHH
8/8
HHHHHHHH
16/16
* In some cases the data line may start with blank character(s) rather than with
H character(s).
509
Socket Locations
51 0
Machine Locations
Keyboard 2 Viewer
IBM 3742
Dual Data Station
POWER
Switch
601
Part Numbers and Cause Codes
Part Name
Number
IR Code
Part Name
Ac capacitor
5252695*
5252840*
2192519
600-02
600-02
600-07
2455033
100-07
2455030
100-07
2455031
100-07
2455035
100-07
Power Supply
dc cable
Power Supply PC
board
Transformer
(115V)
Transformer
(208/230V)
WT Transformers
100V 50 Hz
110V 50 Hz
100V 60 Hz
2455034
100-07
2455578
100-07
Original Power Supply = No. 1
Revised Power Supply = No.2
2455579
100-07
Primary Fuses
2455580
100-07
Fuse
Power Supply No.1
Current
.Type
Part No.
Power Supply No.2
Current
Type
Part No.
115 Volts
208/230 Volts
3.0A
3.0A
3.0A
3.0A
Ac line filter
Attachment cord
(6 ft. 115V)
Attachment cord
(8 ft. 115V)
Attachment cord
(6 ft. 220V)
Attachment cord
(8 ft. 220V)
Attachment cord
(World Trade)
Attachment cord
(6 ft. 115V
lock Plug)
Attachment cord
(8 ft. 115V
Lock Plug)
Attachment cord
(6 ft. 220V
Lock Plug)
Attachment cord
(8 ft. 220V
Lock Plug)
Disk 1 signal cable
Disk 2 signal cable
Disk drive motor
(50 Hz 115V)
Disk drive motor
(50 Hz 200/
235V)
Disk drive motor
(60 Hz 115V)
Disk drive motor
(60 Hz 200/
235V)
Disk FC card
2455581
2456370
2456371
100-07
100-04
100-04
2305706
820-12
2305707
820-12
2305672
820-12
2305633
See Parts
820-12
820-04
Catalog
Display PC board
Display signal
cable
Keyboard 1
signal cable
Keyboard 2
signal cable
Keyboard PC
board
508-510
2455604
200-05
2456372
100-06
2455729
100-06
2456360
See Parts
100-06
Catalog
040-07
Number
IR Code
2456461
100-08
See Parts
Catalog
600-04
2455737
600-06
2455755
600-06
4119371
4119367
4119369
600-06
600-06
600-06
I R Code 600-03
F6SB
MDA
338165
2456618
Secondary Fuses
F1
F2
F3
F4
(+12 Vdc)
(-12 Vdc)
(+8.5 Vdc)
(+24 Vdc)
F6SB
MDA
338165
2456618
I R Code 600-03
Power Supply No. 1
Current
Type
Part No.
Power Supply No.2
Type
Current
Part No.
2.5A
1.5A
4.0A
2.5A
3.0A
1.5A
4.0A
3.0A
MOL
MOL
BA3
MOL
361755
505077
1143492
361755
MDA
AGE
MTH
MDA
855252
111256
111257
855252
* Part 5252695 is being replaced with part 5252840.
If you replace 5252695 with 5252840, alslI order
clamp 5404092.
Cause Codes
Adjustment
Bent
Damaged
Defective
01 Dirty
07 Grounded
22 Short
28 Worn
20 Loose
21 Open
42
34
46
70
602 (not used)
603 (not used)
601-603
3742 ML
601
604
Power Supply Locations (with
diode board)
These locations are for original power supply having a diode board • . See graphic 604 on the
following pages for locations in the revised power
supply.
legend
II
II
&I
II
II
.
II
II
IJ
II
..I
•
rtI
II
11*
Disk drive motor 2
Disk unit 2 ac cable
Power switch
Primary fuses
Secondary fuses
Power supply dc cable
AC line filter
Power supply PC board
AC capacitor
Transformer
Power supply ac'cable
Disk unit 1 ac cable
Disk drive motor 1
Power cord
Disk dc cable
Keyboard dc cable
CB1, 5V circuit ~reaker
*
.
~~------------------------
.~~~~~---------------------------.
~--~~~----------------------.
II
*Not installed on all machines
See notes 1 and 2
II POWER
•
Attachment
Cord
Switch
I
-=-
Disk 1
Drive
Motor
•
Notes:
1. Numbers in parentheses apply to WTC 60 Hz
machines only.
2. Various transformers are used; check part
numbers (601) before changing taps.
a
•
-4
2
3
r WrCOnly-
15
T81·2 (100) 115/208
TB1·3 (115) 230
T81'4 (200)
T81·5 (2081
T81·6 (2301
16
AC
-=
B Capacitor
TB1·8-
-50"-'
T81·10
1
-6
..; , . . - - - - - -....
TB1·ll
- 52
.63
_5
-=
AC Line Filter
v ---.
T81·1 Common
TB1·l0
_4 1
Disk 2
Drive
Motor
'--
TB 1·1 Common
T81·11
T81·21.10
TB1·8
- -- -
---I
T81·3123.5
TB1·9 I
~~~~e r~:
Fanl
T81·4220
~21
T81·5235
I
Disk
Drive
~TB1'9:
TB1·13100
.-~~------~
T81·7 I
Fan2
}
JAPAN
TB1-14200
.T81.,2:
______ ~ _____ J
Disk
01
Ground to Disk 1 (Black TP3)
+5 Vdc to Disk 1 (Yellow TP4)
Power Supply PC Board
rr-""'T"I'<-----."o__--, - -
Ground
Ground--++-+'"
(S.o to 9.4) tS.5 Vdc--++-...
(4.7 to 5.51 +5 Vdc
POR--++-...
(5.7 W9.4) +6.3 Vdc--44-.....
(4.6 to 5.4) -5 Vdc --++-...
(11.0 to 13.2) -12 Vdc--++-'"
_
--++-
--- ---
+24 Vdc (22.0 to 26.5)
+S.5 Vdc (8.0 to 9.4)
~-++-+5
Vdc (4.7 to 5.5)
IL--L-______- ' - -
n..-;----~~~
Y9
II
-----+---...
----
Ground
(11.0 to 13.2) +12 Vdc
+
+6 Vdc Meter
Test
II
I
[
2
III
TP12
0
••
13
.~~
---
[
I(
IL:
TP13
+6.3
F4
) ] 24 Vdc
F3
) ] 8.5 Vdc
~ Fl
]] +12 Vdc
F2
:;] ·12 Vdc
EC P/N DATE PLANT
*Not installed on all machines
604-606'
3742 ML
604-2
604-3
604
Power Supply locations (without
diode board)
The following locations are for revised power supply
having no diode board. See graphic 604 on the preceding pages for locations in the original power supply.
Legend
a
II
II
II
II
II
•
••
I•
III
D
&I
II
m*
Disk drive motor 2
Disk unit 2 ac cable
Power switch
Primary fuses
Secondary fuses
Power supply dc cable
AC line filter
Power supply PC board
AC capacitor
Transformer
Power supply ac cable
Disk unit 1 ac cable
Disk drive motor 1
Power cord
Disk dc cable
Keyboard dc cable
CB1, 5V circuit breaker
*
11
~~----------------------.
~~~~~------------------~-------.
~--~77~--------------------
____1I
•
*Not installed on all machines
See notes 1 and 2
II
/,-------,
lIpOWER
Attachment
Cord
SWitch
TB1·1 Common
15
I
AC Line F,lte,
TB 1·10
TB1.ll
..
Ta 1·8
a
Disk '2
Oil'"
Motol
fB 1·10
- 4
1
.5
-6 J
r---:------I WTe Only
I
Disk
I
Of IVP
F"n 1
I
Notes:
·50rv
__ ~
TBI 1 Common
Hll.11
. .
TB12ll0
TB 1·8
(
--I
TB 1 7 I
TBI 4220
I
TB ITll
O"k CtiliiBI'l:
TB1·5235
o
TB1·13100
g~
1
L
Transformer
T B I.') I
I
1. Numbers in parentheses are for WTC 60 Hz
machines only.
2. Various transformers are used; check part
numbers (601) before changing taps.
•
TB13123.5
Olive
TB1·}
F ,In '2
TB 1. 12:
____________
I
_ _ _ _ _~--_...J
T81·14200
}
JAPAN
I
......J
C:=::O~PU
Disk
01
Ground to Disk 1 (Black TP3)
+5 Vdc to Disk 1 (Yellow TP4)
+5Vdc to Keyboard 1 (Blacl< TP4)
KBD
K1
t::=:U~PU
• Test
Points
~---------------H----~--------~------~~~~
Power Supply PC board
H--t-------:-......
a.
.
rr-'T'I"I----..-----. - - - __ ..:-. _
Ground--+++"
(8.0 to 9.4) +S.5 Vdc--++-...
(4.7 to 5.5) +5 Vdc
POR . - - H (5.7 to 9.4) +6.3 Vdc--++-...
(4.6 to 5.4) -5 Vdc --++-...
(11.0 to 13.2) -12 Vdc--++-'"
(11.0 to 13.2) +12 Vdc
--+++--Ground
6Vdc
Meter Test
TP13
- - - - - - -(:L:-c--t----
- --11_
_++--+24 Vdc (22.0 to 26.5)
--++-+8.5 Vdc (8.0 to 9.4)
TP12
• -5 Vdc
B D
I
.
--+++--+5 Vdc (4.7 to 5.5)
13
Ground
IL-..L-_~_...J_ -
-- ---
j
• +6.3 Vdi TP21
02
-- ----- ---
p
I!::.
TP6
TP3/11
TP4/i] TP5
[
I TP91
F4
II
"'i124Vdc
m
2.1
c=t=J
1~+12Vdc
rc
TP10
r-.
m
IT]
[QJ
TPS Fl
F3
II w
(/f
J] +S.5 Vdc
IG"
~
DO
[L]
F2
rvI
~
]-12 Vdc
CD
*Not installed on all machines.
604-606
605 (not used)
606 (not used)
3742 ML
607
607
609
CRT. Locations
Keyboard Locations
Part number and EC level
located here on back side
of PC board.
Part Number
608
Disk Drive Locations
\-..£=::;::==;:=-1
File Control Card
•
I
/
I
0: ::
/
/
/ Test pin
/
location
/
path
I.
I
I
I
I
I
.- - -
I
II
TP 1 3 '
iTP 12 :
•
I
I
.. I
I r-:---1
• L-..-J
TP
2
\
[J
0
(!.)'
I
I
I
TP 10
.
•
.,
•
I
I
I
I
I
I
TP~2::
00'
I
I
II
,
TP 21
.TP20
TP19£.
I
: LhJ
rTI
I
1
I
,
I
0
TP9
1
I
0
IDI
I
1
--"P 18
,no
::~1' '8 d
:u
l¥5,1 R.1P
\
\
\\
I
~6
\
TP23
r
0
•
TP 1
I
\
::
c=J
TP11~
I c=J
-...... -
/
TP?40
:000':
/
I
\
\
\
\....
__ - - TP 4
\
TP3
\
Signal cable
I
0
TP14
'---'---'TP 16
TP 15
-
PIN
.. .. . . .
AAA
Loosen the cable clamp to permit connecting
the cable to the extender without strain.
II
EC
PHS
ADS
GHO
..
CD
CV
610
DC Voltage Distribution
Voltage
Power PC Board
Voltage
MPU Planar
Disk Signal Cable
Unit
FC
Card
Disk 1
Yellow Wire T P 4 - - - - - 4 - +5 - - - - - - - - - - - - - + 5 - - - B 0 3 - - T P 2 3
Black Wire TP3
G r o u n d - - - - - - - - - - - Ground-BOS--TP17
F1
de Power Cable
+12
2-M·B12
--0-1"\ ~B12
~
L - B13
+12---I2·M-B13
2-J-Bl1
2-J-Bl0
-5---B11--TP5
+24
B10-TPl
o
o
F2
~~-""'[5~--Bll
TP12
F3
Bl0
~~n~o--...t=-~~~
T
TP13
B09
'------BOS
~~~----------005
T~P4/7 B06
B07
007
DOS
009
~T~P3~/~1~1~_______ B02
1
-12---I2-M·B11
-5---I2-M·B10
+S.5
+8.~---I
2·M·B05
2-M·006
+6.3
2·M·B09
POR
2-M·BOS
+24---I2-M·005
+5----I2-M-B06
+5
2-M-B07
2-M-007
+5
+5
2-M-00S
+5
2-M-009
Ground
------B03
~----003
__- - - - 0 0 4
'------010
--------011
......------012
'------013
Black Wire
TP4
Ground
Ground
2-M-B02
2-M-B03
2-M-B04
2-M-002
2-M-003
2-M-004
2-M-Ol0
2-M-Oll
2-M-012
2-M-013
FC
Disk Signal
2-K-Bll
2-K·B10
2-K-B03
2-K-BOS
Cable
, Card
-5---Bl1--TP5
+24
Bl0--:rPl
+5
B03--TP23
Ground-BOS--:rP17
Display Signal Cable
PC Board
+12--B08
2-N-B08
2-N-B09
+12
B09
009
2-N-D09
+12
2-N-Dl0
+12
010
2-N·D02
-12
002
2·N-B12
+6.3--B12
2·N-B13
+6.3--B13
2-N-D06
Ground-006
2-N-D07
Ground-007
2-N-DOB
Ground-DOS
2-N-D12
Ground-012
2-N-D13
Ground-013
Disk 2
o
o
Display
o
---------I
Keyboard Signal Cable
PC Board
2-R-D06
-5
006- 006
2-R-003
+S.5--003-D03
2-R-B09
+5
B09-B09
2-R-DOB
Ground-DOS-DOS
Keyboard Signal Cable
PC Board
2-P- D06
-5
006 D06
2-P-003
+S.5--003-003
2-P-008
Ground-DOB-OOS
L -_ _ _ _ _ _ _
__
Keyboard 2
Keyboard 1
~
' - - - - - - - - - - - +5 - - - - - - - - - - - - +5
B09-B09
607-610
3742 ML
610-1
610-2
This page intentionally left blank.
701
Display Format
Codes Displayed
Operator Display
Program
Number
12
Cursor
Position
1-3*
Program
Shift
Code 20
r------------
t
Disk 2 I Machine
Address I Status \
31-35 I 40
\
I
Disk 1
Address
25-29
Machine
Mode
38-39
I
Codes Displayed
C
E
F
\\\
I
M
\
S
\ \
U
\
v
\
\
X
\
CE
\
\
001
K
0
A A
01008 02005 E-R
\
N
1-____________ DATA LlNE ____________ 40
3
41-__________ DATA LlNE ____________ 80
Field Cor teet
Enter
Field Totals (Offline Only)
Initialize
Modify
Seareh
Update
Verify
Read Index
Customer Engineer
Record Insert
\
\
2
Mode of Operation
\
Code Displayed
N
R
W
LThe Display Unit displays three lines of
information.
Status
Not Ready (disk not loaded)
Ready
Wait
* Cursor Position
Positions 2 and 3 only on 80·record·length
machines.
A dash (-), between mode and
status, indicates the alternative
method of record advance was
selected.
~:
702
Machine Locations
.j "
Keyboard 2
IBM 3742
Dual Data Station
701·703
703 (not used)
3742 ML
701
Is the machine in VR mode-status? Y N
Use MPU MAP 5-1.
-
VR mode-status should be displayed.
-
Field correction mode.
I-
Press FIELD COR
Is the machine in CR mode-status?
Y N
I-
Use MPU MAP 5-1.
Enter RRBCD
Press REC ADV
RESET
FUNCT SEL lower
DISPLAY PROD STAT
Completes the verify procedure.
Display information RBCD, the first R keyed
set up status.
- An E error is displayed.
An error may indicate the wrong key pressed
or the feature not installed.
Are the error code positions blank? Y N
Use Error Code Description under Symptom
Index, page 1-2.
Does the display show the production statistics? Y N
Use MPU MAP 5-1.
I-
Press RESET
-
Production statistics appear on the display as
the output of three accumulators.
Cursor position
001 for 128
feature.
BASIC CHECKOUT COMPLETE.
01
0
_OOOOOr 00002
f
A A 00008
000001
L -_ _---L._ _ _
x
R
~
- Could be any value.
3742 ML
IJ
7-2.9
7-2.10
This page intentionally left blank.
~3FEATUREGROUPACHECKOUT
PROCEDURE -
Feature group A contains production statistics,
verify, self check, field totals, and disk
initialization.
Do not attempt this procedure until you have successfully completed MAPs 7-1 and 7-2.
Power down.
Wait 5 seconds.
Power up, wait 30 seconds.
- Set all keyboard switches down.
Set PROG NUM SH 1FT to ALL CHAR.
Load a diskette (a diskette with no known
history of errors).
Be sure to use a data set with a record length
005 or greater (positions 025-027) and extent
of at least 33 records (BOE, positions 029033 to EOE, positions 035-039) in the data
set label.
Press H---E
FUNCT SE L lower
PROG LOAD
1
SEL PROG
- A program to check the self-check feature.
"Load the program in program area 1.
Select program 1.
FUNCT SEL lower
ENTER
2 key four times
Is a C error code displayed? Y N
Use MPU MAP 5-3.
I-
Press RESET
Hold NUM SHIFT and enter 0
Press REC ADV
FUNCT SEL lower
RETURN TO INDEX
Set the AUTO REC ADV up.
- The wrong self-check digit was entered. If
an error does not occur, the feature is failing.
- The correct self-check digit is O.
A
3742 ML
fJ
7-3.1
7-3.2
Press FUNCT SEL lower
DELETE REC
N
NUM SHIFT and 1
E
-
Program (N 1E) for field total data.
-
Load the program in program area 1.
-
A program for accumulating field totals «1.).
-
Load the program in program area 2.
-
Select program 1.
FUNCT SEL lower
PROG LOAD
1
<
NUM SHIFT and 1
. (period-bottom row)
FUNCT SEL ~ower
PROG LOAD
2
SEL PROG
FUNCT SEL lower
ENTER
Hold REP and press 1 to enter 32 records. Press FUNCT SEL lower
RETURN TO INDEX
FUNCT SE L upper
COMPUTE FIE LD TOT A LS
- This, under program 1 control, enters the
amount 11 in each record. Create exactly
32 records.
Checks offline field totals.
Are the error code positions blank?
Y N
Use Error Code Description under Symptom
Index, page 1-2.
Does the display show the record advancing?
Y N
I-
Use MPU MAP 5-3.
Press FUNCT SE L upper
Press DISPLAY FIELD TOTALS
Does 352 appear on the display? Y N
I-
01
a
A A
00008
352+
+
Use MPU MAP 5-3.
Press R
FUNCT SEL upper
DISPLAY FIELD TOTALS
8
Cursor po~ition
001 for 128
feature.
Resets all accumulators.
X R
+
Are the accumulators blank?
I-
YN
Use MPU MAP 5-3.
Press RESET
FUNCTSEllower
SEARCH SEQ CONTENT
HoldNUM SHIFT and press 1
RECADV
Are the error code positions blank?-
YN
- This is the argument for the search function.
An error may indicate the wrong key pressed
or the feature may not be installed.
Use Error Code Description under Symptom
Index, page 1-2.
Does 11 appear in pos;tions 001 and 0027 -
I-
YN
- The record address should be the same as
the first record in the data set.
Use MPU MAP 5-3.
- Press FUNCT SE L lower
RETURN TO INDEX
FUNCT SEllower
SEARCH CONTENT
Hold NUM SHIFT and press 1 key two
times RECADV
Are the error code positions blank? -
YN
- This is the mask for the search function.
- An error may indicate the wrong key pressed
or the feature not installed.
- Use Error Code Description under Symptom
Index" page 1-2.
Does 11 appear in positions 001 and 002? -
I-
YN
.
- The record address should be the same as the
first record in the data set.
Use MPU MAP 5-3.
Press FUNCT SEllower
RETURN TO INDEX
Load a diskette in station 1. -
Press FUNCT SE llower
DELETE REC
FUNCT SEllower
I (letter)
- The purpose of this checkout is to find if the
diskette check circuits on feature A card work
correctly. Use a known good diskette so that
any problems are caused by the circuits and not
the diskette. If you have diskette problems,
see MAP 2-1.
C
3742 ML
7-3.3
7-3.4
Are the error code positions blank except for
disk check error codes? Y N
I-
An error can indicate the incorrect key pressed
or the feature is not installed.
Use Symptom Index, page 1-2.
Does the machine complete disk check
successfu II y (9-34)? Y N
I :e~::~t:: :;~~~te.
The display below shows a successful disk
check and no bad tracks on a disk that had at
least one deleted header:
Error Code Position
I
00008
I
w
DOS
The display below shows a successful disk
check on a disk that had no deleted headers
and no defective tracks:
Error Code Position
~Ol!OAA
Load a diskette in station 2 (a diskette with no
known history of errors).
Press Station 2 FUNCT SEL lower
liDRl DATA
)
00008
X R
01001 73026
01001
A
Load a diskette in station 1 (a diskette with no
80 or 128
known history of errors). - - - - - - - - .,
Press Station 1 FUNCT SEL upper
'- - - Prepares the machine for checking the disk
DISK 2 RECADV
copy function.
Are the station 1 error code positions blank? Y N
Use Error Code Description under Symptom
Index, page 1-2.
Is the disk 2 record displayed at station 1? Y N
I-
Use MPU MAP 5-3.
An error may indicate the wrong key pressed
or the feature may not be installed.
- The data set label on disk 2 should be displayed. The record address should be displayed on the status line.
Press Station 1 FUNCT SE L lower
A
Remove the diskettes.
Removes the disk 2 address from the display
and releases station 2 for normal use.
FEATURE GROUP A CHECKOUT PROCEDURE IS COMPLETE
7-4128 RECORD LENGTH FEATURE
CHECKOUT PROCEDURE
This procedure is based on the assumption the
basic checkout procedure has been successfully
completed (MAPs 7-1. 7-2, and if the machine
has feature group A, 7-3).
- Set all keyboard switches down.
- Set PROG NUM SHI FT switch up.
Load a diskette (a diskette with no known
history of errors).
Are the error code positions blank?
YN
- Use Error Code Description under Symptom
Index, page 1-2.
Look at record length in the index track data
set label 08. -
- Positions 025, 026 and 027 in the status line.
Is the record length 128?
YN
-
If this is a customer diskette, write down
the record length. Use CHAR ADV to move the cursor to
position 025.
Press NUM SHIFT 128
FUNCT SEL lower
This is only necessary if the original data
set label must be preserved.
M
RECADV
To modify the data set label to 128-recordlength.
Are the error code positions blank?
YN
-
Use Error Code Description under
Symptom Index, page 1-2.
If this is a customer diskette, restore the
record length to what you previously wrote
down_ -
This is only necessary if the original must be
preserved.
A
3742 ML
IJ
7-4.1
7-4.2
Press REC BKSP .
FUNCT SEL lower
DELETE REC
Enter DUSK
Hold the REP key and the period key to enter
per iods through position 036.
Starting in position 037, enter
SUNSSUNS
Hold the REP key and the dash key to enter
. dashes through position 076.
- Starting in position 077, enter DUS
- Watch the display and enter K
Did the display scroll and does it now appear as
shown? Y N
I-
Use MPU MAP 5-1.
-
Index track record 07 will be used.
- To clear data portion of the display.
)
i
081
a AA
00007
X R
suNs------------------~--------DUSK
- Hold the REP key and the period key to enter
periods through position 117.
Starting in position 118, press the period key
three more times.
Did the display scroll and does it now appear as
shown? Y N
I-
Use MPU MAP 5-1.
-
)
(
121
••
I
a A A
••••••••••• I. I
I
00007
••
1'1"
I
I"
X R
I
I
I
I' I
I
I
I"
- Starting in position 121, enter SUNDUSK
- Watch the display and enter Y
Does the display appear as shown? Y N
I-
Use MPU MAP 5-1.
Press any data key.
B
a E
SUNDUSKY_
00007
X R
, Does a T error show on a flashing display?
Y N
Use MPU MAP 5-1.
I-
Press RESET.
Press CHAR BKSP eight times to make the cursor
location counter show 121.
Watch the display and press CHAR B KSP.
Did the display scroll and does it now appear as
shown? Y N
Use MPU MAP 5- 1.
I-
1
o A A
120
00007
X R
SUNS--------------------------------DUSK
••
,.
I."
I
I
••••
'"
""",",
I
••••
'"
I
I . IJ...
Hold the REP key and CHAR BKSP to move the
cursor to position 081.
- Watch the display and press CHAR B KSP.
Did the display scroll and does it now appear as
shown? Y N
Use MPU MAPS-I.
I-
i080
1
o AA
DUSK •• , .
I
I
,
••
I
I
•
,
00007
•
,
,
I
•••
I
,
•
X R
I
,
•
,
•
,
•
,
,SUNS
SUNS--------------------------------DUSK
Press R EC B KSP to move the cursor to
position 001.
Watch the display and press SCR l FWD.
Did the display scroll and does it now appear as
shown? Y N
Use MPU MAP 5-1.
I-
),
f-
o
081
00007
A A
X R
SUNS--------------------------------DUSK
I
1'1', I
I
I
I
I.,.
I
I
I
I
I
'"
"
I
I
",.,"
I
"
""
Watch the display and press SCRl FWD.
Did the display scroll and does it now appear as
shown? Y N
Use MPU MAP 5-1.
I-
£.
o
- 121
I
I
,.,
I"
I
I
I
AA
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
00007
I
I
I
I
I
I
'"
'"
X R
I
I"
I
I
I
I
I
"
SUNDUSKY
- Watch the display and press SCR l FWD.
C
3742 ML
7-4.3
7-4.4
1
Did the display change and does it now appear as
shown? -
1-
a
- 000
YN
•
Use MPU MAP 5-1.
••• ,
•• I-I. I.
I
E
•••
I
I
00007
I.
I
I
I
X R
1'1"
I
I
I
I
I
••••
I
"
SUNDUSKY_
- Press SCR L FWD.
Does a T error show on a flashing display? -
1-
- SCR L FWD should not cause a record advance
while the AUTO REC ADV switch is off.
YN
Use MPU MAP 5-1.
- Press RESET.
- Watch the display and press SCRL BKWD.
Did the display scroll and does it now appear as
shown? - - - - _ - - - - - - - - -
YN
1-
)
a AA
r
081
:
SUNS--------------------------------DUSK
00007
X R
..J
•••••••••••
I
I
I
I'
I
I
••
1', I
I
t
I
1'1"
Did the display scroll and does it now appear as
shown? -
YN
Use MPU MAP 5-1.
001
a AA
DUSK •••••
I
•
".
tit' I
00007
I
••
I
•
I
,
••
,
,
I
•
X R
I
I
I
I
I
Did the record number stay the same? -
YN
- SCR L BKWD should never cause a record
backspace.
Use MPU MAP 5-1.
- Press FUNCT SE L lower
PROG LOAD
.A
SELPROG
A
I
,
I
,SUNS
SUNS--------------------------------DUSK
.
.
o
I
[
- Watch the display record number and press
SCRLBKWD.
I,-
t
"
Use MPU MAP 5-1.
- Watch the display and press SCRL BKWD.
1-
L
,,---
- Check that feature program area lOis
usable.
~
,L
001
A
D N
00007
X R
A
D N
00007
X R
Does the display status line appear as shown? Y N
I-
Use MPU MAP 5-l.
Press FUNCT SEL lower
DISPLAY PROG
1
001
Does the display now appear as shown? -
DUSK
Y N
I Set the AUTO DUP/SKIP switch up.
-
Did the display scroll and does it appear as
shown? Y N
I-
Use MPU MAP 5-1.
I
I
••
,
I
I
I
•
,
•
I
I
I
••
,
•
,
•
I
•
I
I
I
•
I
•
SUNS
i
~
\
)
i
039
DUSK
00007
ANN
I
I
,
I
I
I
I
,
I
I
I
~
X R
I
,
I
•
I
I
,
•
,
I
,
I
,
I
••
I
,
,
I
I
SUNS
SUNS--------------------------------DUSK
Use MPU MAP 5-1.
Watch the display and press CHAR BKSP.
,
-I:::~~~~~~. .~ . ~. . . ~~~~~. . . . .~··1
Did the display scroll and does it appear as
shown? Y N
-
I
Cursor should jump to position 039.
Cursor should jump to position 043.
Watch the display and press CHAR B KSP twice.
I-
•
SUNS--------------------------------DUSK
Use MPU MAP 5-1.
Press U.
Watch the display and press U.
I
-
The DUP and SKIP fields should make the
cursor appear to remain in position 039.
Did the display stay the same?
Y N
I-
Use MPU MAP 5-1.
Watch the display and press SCR L FWD.
Did the display scroll and does it now appear as
shown? Y N
I-
-
Use MPU MAP 5-1.
123
"'"
ft.
I
I
I
"'"
i~
00007
N
I
I
I
I
I.,
I
I.,
I.,.
X R
I
I.
I
'"
""
I
SUNDUSKY
Watch the display and press SCRL BKWD.
E
3742 ML
7-4.5
7-4.6
~
Did the display scroll and does it now appear
1.
asshown1 -
039
1-
DUSK. ,
Y N
Use MPU MAP 5·1.
- Watch the display record number and press
SeRl BKWD.
ANN
I
.....
I
••••••
X R
00007
I
I
•
,
•••
I
••
I
I
I
I
I
••
- The DUP and SKIP fields should make the
cursor appear to remain in position 039.
I-
- The cursor should jump to position 123.
Did the record number change to 00008 with the
cursor in position 0391
Y N
1-
Use MPU MAP 5·1.
- Set the AUTO DUP/SKIP switch down.
- Press SEL PROG
o (number)
- Use R EC ADV or R EC BKSP to find an unprotected index label that is OK to modify; and
also OK to write in its related data set.
- Be sure the data set has an extent of at least
two records (BOE, positions 29-33 to BOE,
positions 35-39 in the data set label).
- Use CHAR ADV to move the cursor to position
025.
Hold NUM SHIFT and enter 003
Press FUNCT SEL lower
M .
REC ADV
I
SUNS
SUNS--------------------------------DUSK
Did the record number stay the same?
YN
Use MPU MAP 5·1.
- Set the AUTO REC ADV switch up.
- Press SCR L FWD.
- Watch the display record number and press
SCRl FWD.
I
- Modify the index label to a record length of
three (003).
Are the error code positions blank?
Y N
Use Error Code Description under Symptom
Index, page 1-2.
Press FUNCT SEl lower
ENTER
Watch the display record counter and eAter
ASD
-
Ready to write records for verification.
- Check for enter control of short records.
Did an automatic record advance occur as the D
key was pressed?
Y N
- Use Disk MAP 2-4.
Enter FGH
Press REC BKSP twice
FUNCT SEl lower
VERIFY
Enter AS
To verify the first two characters of record
01.
Are the error code positions blank?
Y N
Use Error Code Description under Symptom
Index, page 1-2.
Press SC R l FWD
Does an l error show on a flashing display?
Y N
SCR l FWD should not be functional while
in a verify field.
- Use MPU MAP 5-1.
Press RESET
SCRl BKWD
Are the display data lines blank except for the
cursor in position 001?
Y N
SCR l BKWD should function while in a
verify field. The field must be reverified.
- Use MPU MAP 5-1.
G
.\!
····.:1
3742 ML
IJ
7-4.7
7-4.8
Enter ASD
Press FUNCT SE l lower
RETURN TO INDEX
R EC B KSP to index label 00007.
Set the AUTO REC ADV switch down.
Press FUNCT SEl lower
DELETE REC
Enter R---NC---E
Press FUNCT SEl lower
PROG lOAD
-
7
SELPROG
-
7
~o~
I-
the display appear as shown? -
-
A program for right-adjust and self-check
fields (self check programmed modulus 11).
Check that feature program area 7 is usable.
Select program area 7.
Ii_DOl
7
R N
00007
Use MPU MAP 5-1.
- !~e: ~~R-;: F;O----- - ---- - -1
L -
l"'_________________J
Enter 2 digits in a right-adjust field (3, 6).
Does a 0 error show on a flashing display? -1
I-
L ____ SCRl FWD should not be functional while
Y N
Use MPU MAP 5-1.
in a right·adjust field.
Press RESET
SCRl BKWD
Does a 0 error show ona flashing display? Y N
1-
-
Use MPU MAP 5-1.
Press RESET
RIGHT ADJ
Is the cursor now in position 005?
Y N-
I-
X RJ.]
Use MPU MAP 5-1.
SCR l BKWD should not be functional while
in a right-adjust field.
Does this 3742 have feature group A installed? YN
- Press FUNCT SE llower
RETURN TO INDEX
End of checkout; the diskette can be removed.
Press 222
SCRlFWD
Does a 0 error show on a flashing display?YN
1-
Feature group A includes self check, offline
field totals, disk copy, disk initialization,
and search content plus search sequential
content.
Enter two digits (the last two 25) in a selfcheck field.
SCR l FWD should not be functional while
in a self- check field.
UseMPU MAP5-t.
Press RESET
SCRlBKWD
Does a 0 error show on a flashing display? YN
1-
SCR L BKWD should not be functional while
in a self-check field.
Use MPU MAP 5-t.
Press RESET
Enter 24
Enter the last two self-check field digits
(2,4).
Are the error code positions blank?
YN
I-
Use MPU MAP 5-3.
-
Press FUNCT SE llower
RETURN TO INDEX
End of checkout; the diskette can be removed.
-
3742 ML
7-4.9
7-4.10
This page intentionally left blank.
704
704 Katakana Keyboard Codes
03
-f
No Shift/Kana Shift....02~Ol
FUNCl
FUNCT
ilL
SEL
REC
IKIP
No Shift/Kana Shift'-'~
KANA
$VMI
NEW
LINE
., .¥
p
30
~
J
2.
•
10
I
•
FIELD
IKIP
•
RESET
o "
;
J
f
3.
>
s
• f
HUM
,
Z ,
o x
?
<
E ..,
30
3f
:
,.
t-
O
3C
-.-
1
.
X ,
C
~
•
I
Y:I
H ,
-
y t
.-
31
I
I
u1
I
I
-.-
atR~
REC
FLO
ilL
/IrtIJ'II.,
ADV..
ADV"
PGII
23
07
-.-
1C
4
5
K.I
•
SKIP
27
-1-
N :
7
II f
-i
'
~
•- •
l'
r
..
11:
"
.
:A
leMA
8FT
•
31
I
,
.,
-i
31
31
-i
-I~
. .
21
-
.
21
L !.I
I~
-f
2S
-i
~
00
10
•, t
3
=
DC
14
I
-.
24
-j
C
:l
No Shift/Kana S h i f t - - - - - - - -.......·~lF
W
2
J
"
•:I
-.-
1
t
,.-.
0
I
22
-I
i
2C
I
I-
-.-
17
etA
20
21
.-
.
G ,
F ,\
I
13
-.
;
~
- 1
,.
-i
l'
-1
l'
12
Til
~
R
- ")UP"
t
.-
~
20
-I-
-.-
~~.
I
11
I
1
...
No Shift/Kana Shift--........·-,·
I
SHIFT
I
15
-.-
!»
01
-.-
I
3E
I
r
+
De
07
-f
•
~
•
;t
De
01
I
HEX
No Shift/Kana Shift~En]2E
31
TAB
DE
~J
Ia
..
OIR
Ida
ALPHA
8ftFT
1-5 RECORD INSERT FEATURE (3142)
CHECKOUT PROCEDURE (EITHER STATION)
Record insert function is on feature ROS card
in positions E and F (505D).
This checkout procedure is based on the assumption that MAPs 7-1 and 7-2 have been successfully
completed for both stations_
- Set all keyboard switches down_
Load a diskette that has a usable data set of at
least 25 records. (EOE is greater than BOE
by at least 24 records.) REC ADV or REC BKSP to the data set label
for the usable data set.
Press FUNCT SEL lower
ENTER
Create 10 records in the following manner:
• Use REPEAT key with the A key to put
several A's in the first record (record 01 ).
• RECADV
• Use R EPEAT key with the B key to put
several B's in the second record (record 02).
• RECADV
• Continue· the above procedure for 8 more
records using the C, 0, E, F, G, H, I and J
keys in turn. REC BKSP to display the third record (03, the
C's record).
r
Hold NUM SH IFT and press digit key 0
then5.- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1
Press FUNCT SEL lower
RIGHT ADJ
Does the display flash with a 6 error code and
show the third record (03) with a 0 in column
1? Y N
Use MPU MAP 5-1_
I
For ease of operation, the record number
part of the BOE should equal 01.
Record advance after each record is written.
Ten records total, each record containing
only one letter of the alphabet repeated.
Set up for record insertion of 5 records in
update mode, starting at a selected record
address.
The machine mode and status should be N
W while record insertion is taking place.
- The D in column 1 indicates a deleted
record. The third record (03) is no longer
the C's record. It should have been moved
to record position eight (OS).
Hold NUM SHIFT and press RESET
Press REC BKSP
A
3142 ML
1-5.1
7-5.2
Does the second record (02) have the several
B's7 Y N
I-
-
The B's record should not have been moved.
Use MPU MAP 5-1.
Press FUNCT SEL lower
RETURN TO INDEX
FUNCT SEL lower
SEARCH EOD
Is the record of severalJ's displayed and is it the
fifthteenth record (record 15)7 Y N
I-
Starting with the C's record, all records to
EOD should have been moved 5 record positions. Five deleted (blank) records should
have been inserted between the B's record
and the C's record. The J's record should
have moved from position 10 to position 15.
Use MPU MAP 5-1.
Press FUNCT SEL lower
RETURN TO INDEX
Hold NUM SHIFT and PRESS digit key 0,
then 5. Press FUNCT SE L lower
RIGHT ADJ
-,
L -
Set up for record insertion of 5 records in
read index mode. The insertion will start at
the first record address of the data set.
The machine mode and status should be N W
while record insertion is taking place.
Does the display flash with a 6 error code and
show the first record (01) with a D in column 17- - i
Y N
1 - - The D in column 1 indicates a deleted record.
The first record (Ol) is no longer the A's
Use MPU MAP 5-1.
record. It should have been moved to record
position
six (06).
Hold NUM SH I FT and PR ESS RESET
I-
Press FUNCT SE L lower
RETURN TO INDEX
FUNCT SEL lower
VERIFY
Is the record of several A's the sixth record
(record 06) 7
I-
YN
Use MPU MAP 5-1.
Press FUNCT SEL tower
RETURN TO INDEX
FUNCT SE L lower
SEARCH EOD
B
Is the record of several J's displayed and is it the
twentieth record (record 20)? Y N
I-
Starting with the first record of the data set
(the A's record in this case), all records to
EOO, including the 5 deleted records between
the B's and C's records, should have been
moved 5 positions. Five deleted (blank)
records should have been inserted at the be·
ginning of the data set. The J's record
should have moved from position 15 to posi·
tion 20.
The number of records specified to be moved
is 00. Digits 01 thru 99 are the only valid
characters that can be specified. Note that
only the first two character positions of the
displayed record will be scanned for the
move specification. EXAMPLE: The first
five character positions of the displayed
record are 12345; the move specification will
be 12 positions. EXAMPLE: the first four
character positions of the displayed record
are 0015; the move specification will be read
as an invalid 00 positions and an I error will
be posted.
Use MPU MAP 5-1.
Press FUNCT SE L lower
RETURN TO INDEX
I Hold NUM SHIFT and PRESS DIGIT KEY 0
two times. - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - --,
Press FUNCT SE L lower
L
RIGHT ADJ
Does the display flash with an I error code?
Y N
I - Use MPU MAP 5-1.
Press RESET
Press FUNCT SEL lower - - - - - - - - ENTER
REC ADV
FUNCT SEL lower
RET TO INDEX
Unload diskette.
This completes the record insertion checkout
for either station.
Second station lock out procedure.
Load a diskette that has'a usable data set of at
least 21 tracks (EOE is greater than BOE by at
least 20 tracks).
Make the EOD 20 tracks greater than the BOE.
Make the EOE 5 records greater than the EOO.
Press FUNCT SE L lower
RETURN TO INDEX
--1
II
:
I
1_ -
-
Changes data set label so the disk can be
used again.
EXAMPLE: (BOE 04001)
(EOE 24006)
(EOO 24001)
Refer to 239 for data set format and 9-4 to
modify data set label.
Is EOD 20 tracks greater than BOE and the BOE
5 records greater than the EOD?
Y N
I Correct data set label.
Press NUM SHIFT
Keys 0,5
FUNCT SEL lower
Hold ALPHA SHIFT
Press RIGHT ADJ
c
3742 ML
7·5.3
7-5.4
Is N W posted?
Y N
1-
-
Use MPU MAP 5-1.
Load a diskette in the other station and try to
enter data.
Is that keyboard·locked out?
Y N
I-
Use MPU MAP 5-1.
When operation is complete on first station is the
display flashing with a 6 error and a D in
column 1?
Y N
1-
Use MPU MAP 5-1.
Press NUM SH I FT
RESET
FUNCT SELlower
RETURN TO INDEX
Press FUNCTSELlower
ENTER
RECADV
FUNCT SE Llower
RETURN TO INDEX
Unload diskette.
THIS COMPLETES THE RECORD INSERT
CHECKOUT PROCEDURE.
705
Keyboard Codes
11---'" 02
01
2E
38
DISK 2
RETTO
INDEX
DISK 2
REC
ADV
copy
DISK 2
REC
BKSP
ENTER
UPDATE
VERIFY
03
OE
06
COMPUTE DISPLAY
FIELD
FIELD
TOTALS TOTALS
SEARCH
SEARCH SEARCH
SEARCH
SEa
EOD
FONTENT CONTENI ADDRESS
06
07
RETURN
TO
INDEX
PROG
LOAD
DELETE
REC
20
20
OA
09
08
DISPLAY
DISPLAY
PROD
PROG
STAT
2C
DISPLAY
DATA
DC
00
~~:::::!::::;!
2A
30
10
11
3E
13
12
22
21
23
14
10
35
36
m
20
~
~
18
19
1A
3C
38
18
IF
I
27
d:O:b
24
25
26
rdItttJJ
27
28
29
Note: For alpha and numeric interface decode, see page 13·10.
IF
J
706
Track Addresses
Example
1
Starting record address -
XXOOl
+32
33
-26
Next track-ending record address-XX007
(Do not enter a record at this address)
Example
2
Example
3
XX014
+32
46
- 26
XX020
XX020
+32
52
-26
XX026
-
Layout for Proof
Keyboard
Aid: if you stop short of the next
track ending address when using
the repeat key, additional
records may be entered by
pressing the U key twice for
each record.
704-706
3742 ML
705
MAP 7-6 PROOF KEYBOARD CHECKOUT
PROCEDURE
This procedure is based on the assumption that
MAPs 7-1 and 7-2 were successfully completed.
- Power down.
- Wait 5 seconds.
- Power up.
- Set all keyboard switches down.
Load a diskette.
Press FUNCT SEL lower
ENTER
Press numeric keys 1 through 9 and SP several
times.
Do the correct ALPHA SHI FT characters appear
on the display?
Y N
I-
Use MAP 4-2_
Press REC BKSP
space bar (not SP) 5 times
REC ADV
REC BKSP
Are the first 5 character positions of the previously entered record blanked?
YN
I-
Use MAP 4-2_
Press NUM SHI FT and each numeric key (0
through 9) several times.
Do the correct NUM SHIFT characters appear
on the display?
Y N
I-
Use MAP 4-2_
Press REC BKSP
Hold down NUM SHIFT and press SP 5 times.
Press REC ADV
REC BKSP
Are the first 5 character positions of the previously entered record blanked?
Y N
I-
Use MAP 4-2_
PROOF KEYBOARD FEATURE CHECKOUT
PROCEDURE IS COMPLETE FOR ONE
STATION. -
-
For second station, repeat proof keyboard
checkout procedure.
3742 ML
7-6.1
7-6.2
This page intentionally left blank.
READER'S COMMENT FORM
Please use this form only to identify publication errors or request changes to publications. Technical questio.ns about IBM systems, changes in I BM programming
support, requests for additional publications, etc, should be directed to your IBM representative or to the IBM branch office nearest your location.
Error in publication (typographical, illustration, and so on). No reply.
Page Number
Error
Inaccurate or misleading information in this publication. Please tell us
about it by using this postage·paid form. We will correct or clarify the
publication, or tell you why a change is not being made, provided you
include your name and address.
----I
~ro
It>
~
.....
(.oJ
0
~
I\,)
5'
....
0
::I
C
~
::I
0
It>
Q)
(")
Page Number
Comment
'-I
s:~
Q)
It>
~
Q)
~
....
o·
::I
CIl
en
-<
~
D
Note: All comments and suggestions become the property of IBM.
6
0'1
o
6
Check if reply is requested.
I\,)
Name
Address
• No postage necessary if mailed in the U.S.A.
READER'S COMMENT FORM
Please use this form only to identify publication errors or request changes to publications. Technical questions about IBM systems, changes in I BM programming
support, requests for additional publications, etc, should be directed to your IBM representative or to the IBM branch office ,nearest your location.
Error in publication (typographical, illustration, and so on). No reply.
Page Number
Error
Inaccurate or misleading information in this publication. Please tell us
about it by using this postage-paid form.' We will correct or clarify the
publication, or tell you why a change is not being made, provided you
include your name and address.
----Iro
~s:
~ w
-<, -...J
~.
~I\,)
~. 0
C
::I
S
~
::I
Q)
::I
(")
Page Number
Comment
It>
0
CIl
....
CIl
en
....
....
o·
CIl
::I
en
-<
W
.-
o
Note: All comments and suggestions become the property of IBM.
60'1
Check if reply is requested.
Name
Address
• No postage necessary if mailed in the U.S.A.
o
I\,)
6
SY31-0502-0
SY31-0502-0
Fold
Fold
Fold
Fold
FIRST CLASS
PERMIT NO. 40
ARMONK, N_Y.
BUSINESS
REPLY
FIRST CLASS
PERMIT NO. 40
ARMONK, N.Y.
BUSINESS
MAIL
REPLY
MAIL
NO POSTAGE STAM-> NECESSARY IF MAILED IN THE UNITED STATES
NO PCETAGE STAMP NECESSARY IF MAILED IN THE UNITED STATES
POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY •.•
POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY •.•
I BM Corporation
General Systems Division
Development Laboratory
Publications, Dept. 245
Rochester, Minnesota 55901
I BM Corporation
General Systems Division
Development Laboratory
Publications, ,Dept. 245
Rochester, Minnesota 55901
Fold
Fold
Fold
Fold
===
==--=-- -=-- ------_.----®
!::F~~
International Business Machines Corporation
International Business Machines Corporation
General Systems Division
57750 Glenridge Drive N. E.
P.O. Box 2150
Atlanta, Georgia 30301
(U.S.A. only)
General Systems Division
57750 Glenridge Drive N. E.
P.O. Box 2150
Atlanta, Georgia 30301
(U.S.A. only)
General Business Group/International
44 South Broadway
White Plains, New York 10601
U.S.A.
(International)
General Business Group/International
44 South Broadway
White Plains, New York 10601
U.S.A.
(I nternational)
®
System
Maintenance
library
IBM 3742 Dual Data Station Theory-Maintenance
~
System
.:.
-
cut here -
.J
I~Al
I nternational Business Machines Corporation
General Systems Division
57750 Glenridge Drive N.E.
Atlanta, Georgia 30301
(USA Only)
General Business Group/International
44 South Broadway
White Plains, New York 10601
U.S.A.
(I nternational)
Printed in Canada
SY31-0502-~
Source Exif Data:
File Type : PDF File Type Extension : pdf MIME Type : application/pdf PDF Version : 1.3 Linearized : No XMP Toolkit : Adobe XMP Core 4.2.1-c043 52.372728, 2009/01/18-15:56:37 Create Date : 2011:10:06 18:27:31-08:00 Modify Date : 2011:10:06 19:09:04-07:00 Metadata Date : 2011:10:06 19:09:04-07:00 Producer : Adobe Acrobat 9.46 Paper Capture Plug-in Format : application/pdf Document ID : uuid:091dc52e-2c51-47d6-9241-4c8492d908db Instance ID : uuid:25aa79f4-425a-4a93-a0e9-a1422ef6edea Page Layout : SinglePage Page Mode : UseOutlines Page Count : 461EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools